Fundamentals of English Grammar 4th Betty Azar (Student)

SIMPLE
FORM
'"'""
SIMPLE
PAST
--� �!� ·�:1-�·��!�
(illUHHll1��111ffil\ffl.•., �" .• _, ,,�.,,.!,l ..'
PAST
PARTICIPLE
I
SIMPLE
FORM
�)
SIMPLE
PAST
- ·-
lll�_!,�('i:.11\11\iH-.'1 ''.:··"
....
PAST
PARTICIPLE
awake awoke awoken fall fell fallen

be was, were been feed fed fed
beat beat beaten feel felt felt
become became become fight fought fought
begin began begun find found found
bend bent bent fit fit fit
bite bit bitten fly flew flown
blow blew blown forget forgot forgotten
break broke broken forgive forgave forgiven
bring brought brought freeze froze frozen
broadcast broadcast broadcast get got got/gotten
build built built give gave given
burn burned/burnt burned/burnt go went gone
buy bought bought grow grew grown
catch caught caught hang hung hung
choose chose chosen have had had
come came come hear heard heard
cost cost cost hide hid hidden
cut cut cut hit hit hit
dig dug dug hold held held
dive dived/dove dived hurt hurt hurt
do did done keep kept kept
draw drew drawn know knew known
dream dreamed/dreamt dreamed/dreamt lay laid laid
drink drank drunk lead led led
drive drove driven leave left left
eat ate eaten lend lent lent
(continued on the inside back cover)

FUNDAMENTALS OF
•
FOURTH EDITION
;..� �
\�
wifh1ANSWER KEY
� 1�t1r·�>
[R
irLanguage.com
u�1.H.1 u�j !!:?jll u�9,I � b.J:94?D U:!1

. ...:.....w I ��J 4 � J..ob .9 .b;..>:' # ..:.,J,9JO �
-� �Ip �JS..:.,! Jo� .9 ...:.....wl "u.:;.1 .9 c� •u9,'.,lli '-9u.:;. uT jl uJl�.J:' �
..
�
•••
111
Betty S. Azar
Stacy A. Hagen
To my sister, Jo
B.S.A.
For D. P. and H. B.
with appreciation
S.H.
irLanguage.com
Preface to the Fourth Edition ................................................. x
Acknowledgments ........................................................ xm
Chapter l PRESENT TIME ................................................... l

1-1 Simple present and present progressive .............................3
1-2 Forms of the simple present and the present progressive ................4
1-3 Frequency adverbs ...........................................10
1-4 Singular/plural ..............................................13
1-5 Spelling of final -sf-es ........................................14
1-6 Non-action verbs ............................................17
1-7 Present verbs: short answers to yes/no questions .....................20
Chapter 2 PAST TIME ..................................................... 26

2-1 Expressing past time: the simple past .............................26
2-2 Spelling of-ing and -ed forms ..................................29
2-3 The principal parts of a verb ....................................31
2-4 Common irregular verbs: a reference list ...........................32
2-5 Regular verbs: pronunciation of -ed endings ........................39
2-6 Simple past and past progressive .................................42
2-7 Expressing past time: using time clauses ...........................48
2-8 Expressing past habit: used to ..................................52
Chapter 3 FUTURE TIME ................................................... 55

3-1 Expressing future time: be going to and will .......................55
3-2 Forms with be going to .......................................56
3-3 Forms with will .............................................60
3-4 Certainty about the future .....................................62
3-5 Be going to vs.will ..........................................65
3-6 Expressing the future in time clauses and if-clauses ..................68
3-7 Using the present progressive to express future time ..................72
3-8 Using the simple present to express future time .....................74
3-9 Immediate future: using be about to .............................75
3-10 Parallel verbs ...............................................77
Chapter 4 PRESENT PERFECT AND PAST PERFECT ........................ , ...... 81

4-1 Past participle ...............................................81
4-2 Present perfect with since and/or ...............................83
CONTENTS V
4-3 Negative, question, and short-answer forms ........................87
4-4 Present perfect with unspecified time .............................90
4-5 Simple past vs.present perfect ..................................94
4-6 Present perfect progressive .....................................98
4-7 Present perfect progressive vs.present perfect ......................101
4-8 Past perfect ................................................108
Chapter 5 ASKING QUESTIONS ............................................111

5-1 Yes/no questions and short answers ..............................111
5-2 Yes/no and information questions ...............................114
5-3 Where, why, when, what time, how come, what ...for ...........117
5-4 Questions with who, who(m), and what .........................119
5-5 Using what+ a form of do ...................................121
5-6 Using which and what kind of ................................123
5-7 Using whose ..............................................125
5-8 Using how ................................................127
5-9 Using how often ...........................................129
5-10 Using how far .............................................131
5-11 Length of time: it+ take and how long .........................132
5-12 Spoken and written contractions with question words ................134
5-13 More questions with how .....................................13 7
5-14 Using how about and what about .............................138
5-15 Tag questions ..............................................140
Chapter 6 NOUNS AND PRONOUNS .......................................146

6-1 Plural forms of nouns ........................................147
6-2 Pronunciation of final -sl-es . ..................................149
6-3 Subjects, verbs, and objects ....................................151
6-4 Objects of prepositions .......................................153
6-5 Prepositions oftime .........................................156
6-6 Word order: place and time ....................................157
6-7 Subject-verb agreement ......................................158
6-8 Using adjectives to describe nouns ..............................160
6-9 Using nouns as adjectives .....................................162
6-10 Personal pronouns: subjects and objects ..........................164
6-11 Possessive nouns ............................................166
6-12 Possessive pronouns and adjectives ..............................168
6-13 Reflexive pronouns ..........................................169
6-14 Singular forms of other: another vs. the other ....................171
6-15 Plural forms of other: other(s) vs.the other(s) ....................173
6-16 Summary of forms of other ................. : .................176
Chapter 7 MODAL AUXILIARIES ............................................ 178

7-1 The form of modal auxiliaries ..................................178
7-2 Expressing ability: can and could . ..............................180
7-3 Expressing possibility: may, might, and maybe;
Expressing permission: may and can ............................182
7-4 Using could to express possibility ...............................184
7-5 Polite questions: may I, could I, can I ..........................187
vi CONTENTS
7-6 Polite questions: would you, could you, will you, can you ..........189
7-7 Expressing advice: should and ought to .........................190
7-8 Expressing advice: had better .................................191
7-9 Expressing necessity: have to, have got to, must ..................193
7-10 Expressing lack of necessity: do not have to;
Expressing prohibition: must not ...............................195
7-11 Making logical conclusions: must ..............................197
7-12 Tag questions with modal auxiliaries .............................199
7-13 Giving instructions: imperative sentences .........................200
7-14 Making suggestions: let's and why don't .........................203
7-15 Stating preferences: prefer, like ... better, would rather ............204
Chapter 8 CONNECTING IDEAS ........................................... 208

8-1 Connecting ideas with and ....................................208
8-2 Connecting ideas with but and or ..............................210
8-3 Connecting ideas with so .....................................212
8-4 Using auxiliary verbs after but .................................214
8-5 Using and+ too, so, either, neither ...........................216
8-6 Connecting ideas with because ................................221
8-7 Connecting ideas with even though/although ....................223
Chapter 9 COMPARISONS ............................................... 229

9-1 Making comparisons with as ... as .............................229
9-2 Comparative and superlative ...................................233
9-3 Comparative and superlative forms of adjectives and adverbs ..........235
9-4 Completing a comparative ....................................239
9-5 Modifying comparatives ......................................240
9-6 Comparisons with less ... than and not as ... as ..................241
9-7 Using more with nouns ......................................242
9-8 Repeating a comparative ......................................244
9-9 Using double comparatives ....................................245
9-10 Using superlatives ...........................................246
9-11 Using the same, similar, different, like, alike ...................252
Chapter l O THE PASSIVE ..................................................... 258

10-1 Active sentences and passive sentences ...........................258
10-2 Form of the passive .........................................259
10-3 Transitive and intransitive verbs ................................263
10-4 Using the by-phrase .........................................265
10-5 Passive modal auxiliaries ......................................269
10-6 Using past participles as adjectives (non-progressive passive) ..........271
10-7 Participial adjectives: -ed vs. -ing ...............................27 6
10-8 Get + adjective; get + past participle ............................278
10-9 Using be used/accustomed to and
get used/accustomed to .....................................282
10-10 Used to vs. be used to .......................................284
10-11 Using be supposed to .......................................285
CONTENTS vii
irLanguage.com
Chapter 11 COUNT/NONCOUNT NOUNS AND ARTICLES ........................ 290

11-1 Avs.an .................................................. 290
11-2 Count and noncount nouns ................................... 292
11-3 Noncount nouns ........................................... 293
11-4 More noncount nouns ....................................... 295
11-5 Using several, a lot of, many/much, and a few/a little ............. 297
11-6 Nouns that can be count or noncount ............................ 300
11-7 Using units ofmeasure with noncount nouns ...................... 302
11-8 Guidelines for article usage ....................................306
11-9 Using the or 0 with names .................................... 315
11-10 Capitalization .............................................. 317
Chapter 12 ADJECTIVE CLAUSES ........................................... 321

12-1 Adjective clauses: introduction ................................. 321
12-2 Using who and that in adjective clauses to describe people ........... 322
12-3 Using object pronouns in adjective clauses to describe people .......... 324
12-4 Using pronouns in adjective clauses to describe things ............... 327
12-5 Singular and plural verbs in adjective clauses ...................... 331
12-6 Using prepositions in adjective clauses ........................... 332
12-7 Using whose in adjective clauses ............................... 336
Chapter 13 GERUNDS AND INFINITIVES ...................................... 342

13-1 Verb + gerund ............................................. 342
13-2 Go+ -ing ............................................... , 344
13-3 Verb + infinitive ............................................ 346
13-4 Verb + gerund or infinitive ....................................347
13-5 Preposition + gerund ........................................ 352
13-6 Using by and with to express how something is done ................ 355
13-7 Using gerunds as subjects; using it + infinitive ..................... 357
13-8 It + infinitive: using/or (someone) ............................. 358
13-9 Expressing purpose with in order to and/or ...................... 361
13-10 Using infinitives with too and enough ........................... 364
Chapter 14 NOUN CLAUSES ............................................... 370

14-1 Noun clauses: introduction .................................... 370
14-2 Noun clauses that begin with a question word ...................... 371
14-3 Noun clauses that begin with ifor whether .......................376
14-4 Noun clauses that begin with that ..............................379
14-5 Other uses of that-clauses .................................... 380
14-6 Substituting so for a that-clause in conversational responses ..........382
14-7 Quoted speech .....................................·........ 384
14-8 Quoted speech vs.reported speech .............................. 387
14-9 Verb forms in reported speech ................................. 388
14-10 Common reporting verbs: tell, ask, answer/reply .................. 389
Viii CONTENTS
Appendix SUPPLEMENTARY GRAMMAR CHARTS ............................. 395
Unit A: A-1 The present perfect vs.the past perfect ............................ 395
A-2 The past progressive vs.the past perfect .......................... 396
A-3 Still vs. anymore ........................................... 396
A-4 Additional verbs followed by that-clauses ......................... 397
A-5 Additional expressions with be + that-clauses .................. ... 397
Unit B: B-1 Phrasal verbs ................................................ 398
B-2 Phrasal verbs: a reference list .................................. 399
Unit C: C-1 Preposition combinations: introduction ........................... 402
C-2 Preposition combinations: a reference list ......................... 402
Listening Script ....................................................... 405

Trivia Answers ........................................................
' 421
Answer Key .......................................................... 423
Index ............................................................... 463
Audio CD Tracking List ................................................. 474
CONTENTS: ix
Fundamentals of English Grammar is a developmental skills text for lower-intermediate and
intermediate English language learners. It uses a grammar-based approach integrated with
communicative methodologies to promote the development of all language skills in a variety of
ways. Starting from a foundation of understanding form and meaning, students engage in
meaningful communication about real actions, real things, and their real lives in the classroom
context. Fundamentals of English Grammar functions principally as a classroom teaching text
but also serves as a comprehensive reference text for students and teachers.
The eclectic approach and abundant variety of exercise material remain the same as in the
earlier editions, but this fourth edition incorporates new ways and means. In particular:
• WARM-UP EXERCISES FOR THE GRAMMAR CHARTS

Newly created for the fourth edition, these innovative exercises precede the grammar charts
and introduce the point(s) to be taught. They have been carefully crafted to help students
discover the target grammar as they progress through each warm-up exercise.
• LISTENING PRACTICE
Numerous listening exercises help students interact with the spoken language in a variety
of settings that range from the relaxed, casual speech of everyday conversation to more
academic content. An audio CD accompanies the student text, and a full listening script
can be found in the back of the book.
• READINGS
Students can read and respond to a wide selection of readings that focus on the target
grammar structure(s).
• WRITING TASKS
New writing activities that practice target structures have been created for every chapter. A
writing sample precedes each task so students have a model to follow.
• EXPANDED SPEAKING ACTMTIES

Students have even more opportunities to share their experiences, express their opinions,
and relate the target grammar to their personal lives. The text often uses the students' own
life experiences as context and regularly introduces topics of interest to stimulate the free
expression of ideas in structured as well as open discussions.
• CORPUS-INFORMED CONTENT
Based on our corpus research, grammar content has been added, deleted, or modified to
reflect the discourse patterns of spoken and written English.
x
TIPS FOR USINGTHE NEW FEATURES INTHISTEXT
• WARM-UPS
The Warm-Up exercises are a brief pre-teaching tool for the charts. They highlight the key
point(s) that will be introduced in the chart that follows the Warm-Up exercise. Before
beginning the task, teachers will want to familiarize themselves with the material in the
chart. Then, with the teacher's guidance, students can discover many or sometimes all of
the new patterns as they complete the Warm-Up activity. After students finish the exercise,
teachers may find that no further explanation is necessary, and the charts can serve as a
useful reference.
• LISTENING
The Listening exercises have been designed to help students understand American English
as it is actually spoken. As such, it includes reductions and other phenomena that are part
of the natural, relaxed speech of everyday English. Because the audio uses English that
may be spoken at a rate faster than what students are used to, they may need to hear
sentences two or three times while completing a task.
The Listening exercises do not encourage immediate pronunciation (unless they are
linked to a specific pronunciation task). Reteptive skills precede productive ones, and it is
essential that students be able to hear the speech patterns before they begin using them in
their own speech.
Students are encouraged to listen to longer passages the first time through without
looking at their text. Teachers can then explain any vocabulary that has not already been
clarified. During the second listening, students complete the assigned task. Teachers will
want to pause the audio appropriately. Depending on the level of the class, pauses may be
needed after every sentence, or even within a sentence.
It is inevitable that sound representations in the text will at times differ from the
instructor's speech, whether it be due to register or regional variation. As a general rule, if
the instructor expects that students will hear a variation, or if students themselves raise the
questions, alternate representations can be presented.
A listening script with all the listening exercises can be found at the back of the book.
• READINGS
The Readings give students an opportunity to work with the grammar structures in extended
contexts. One approach is to have students read the passage alone the first time through.
Then they work in small groups or as a class to clarify vocabulary questions. A second reading
may be necessary. Varied reading tasks then allow students to check their comprehension, to
use the target structures, and to expand upon the topic in speaking or writing.
• WRITING TASKS
As students gain confidence in using the target structures, they are encouraged to express
their ideas in complete paragraphs. A model paragraph accompanies each assignment and
question-prompts help students develop their ideas.
Peer editing can be used for correction. A useful technique is to pair students, have
them exchange papers, and then have the partner read the paragraph aloud. The writer can
hear if the content is what he or she intended. This also keeps the writer from
automatically self-correcting while reading aloud. (Self-correcting can be a problem if
writers are unaware that they are making corrections as they read.)
For classes that have not had much experience with writing, the teacher may want to
assign students to small groups. Each group composes a paragraph together. The teacher
collects the paragraph and adds comments, and then makes a copy for each group
member. Students correct the paragraph individually.
PREFACE Xi
irLanguage.com
W hen correcting student writing, teachers may want to focus primarily on the structures
taught in the chapter.
• LET'STALK
Each Let's Talk activity is set up as one of the following: pairwork, small group, class
activity, interview, or game. Successful language learning requires social interaction,
and these tasks encourage students to speak with others about their ideas, their everyday
lives, and the world around them. Students tend to speak more easily and freely when they
can connect language to their own knowledge and experiences.
• CHECK YOUR KNOWLEDGE

Toward the end of the chapter, students can practice sentence-level editing skills by
correcting errors common to this level. The sentences can be done as homework or in
small groups.
This task can easily be set up as a game. The teacher calls out an item number at
random. Students work in teams to correct the sentence, and the first team to edit it
correctly wins a point.
See the Fundamentals of English Grammar Teacher's Guide for detailed information about
teaching from this book, including expansion activities and step-by-step instructions.
Fundamentals of English Grammar is accompanied by

• A comprehensive Workbook, consisting of self-study exercises for independent work.
• An all-new Teacher's Guide, with step-by-step teaching suggestions for each chart, notes
to the teacher on key grammar structures, vocabulary lists, and expansion activities and
PowerPoint presentations for key chapters.
• An expanded Test Bank, with additional quizzes, chapter tests, and mid-term and final
exams.
• Test-Generator software that allows teachers to customize their own tests using quizzes
and tests from the Test Bank.
• Azar Interactive, a computer-based program keyed to the text, provides easily understood
content, all-new exercises, readings, listening and speaking activities, and comprehensive
tests.
• PowerPoint presentations for key chapters. Based on real-world readings, these lessons
are designed for use in the classroom as "beyond-the-book" activities. They can be found
in the new Teacher's Guide or downloaded from AzarGrammar. com.
• A Chartbook, a reference book consisting only of the grammar charts.
• AzarGrammar.com, a website that provides a variety of supplementary classroom
materials and a place where teachers can support each other by sharing their knowledge
and experience.
• Fun with Grammar, a teacher resource text by Suzanne Woodward with communicative
activities correlated with the Azar-Hagen Grammar Series. It is available as a text or as a
download on AzarGrammar. com.
The Azar-Hagen Grammar Series consists of

• Understanding and Using English Grammar (blue cover), for upper-level students.
• Fundamentals of English Grammar (black), for mid-level students.
• Basic English Grammar (red), for lower or beginning levels.
xii PREFACE
We couldn't have done this fourth edition without the many talented professionals who assisted
us. We began our revision with the insights and suggestions from these reviewers: Michael
Berman, Montgomery College; Jeff Bette, Westchester Community College; Mary Goodman,
Everest University; Linda Gossard, DPT Business School, Denver; Roberta Hodges, Sonoma
State American Language Institute; Suzanne Kelso, Boise State University; Steven Lasswell,
Santa Barbara City College; Diane Mahin, University of Miami; Maria Mitchell, DPT Business
School, Philadelphia; Monica Oliva, Miami Sunset Adult Center; Amy Parker, University of
Michigan; Casey Peltier, Northern Virginia Community College.
We are fortunate to have an outstanding editorial staff who oversaw this book from planning
to production. We'd like to thank Shelley Hartle,- managing editor extraordinaire, whose
meticulous and perceptive editing shaped every page; Amy McCormick, editorial director,
whose vision, attentiveness, and care for the series guided our writing; Ruth Voetmann,
development editor, for her keen eye, valuable advice, and unfailing patience; Janice Baillie, our
outstanding copy-editor who scrutinized and honed every page; Sue Van Etten, our
accomplished and very talented business and web-site manager; Robert Ruvo, our skilled and
responsive production manager at Pearson Education.
We'd also like to express our appreciation to the writers of the supplementary texts: Rachel
Spack Koch, Workbook; Kelly Roberts Weibel, Test Bank; and Martha Hall, Teacher's Guide. They
have greatly enriched the series with their innovative ideas and creativity.
Finally, we'd like to thank the dedicated leadership team at Pearson Education that guided
this project: Pietro Alongi, Rhea Banker, and Paula Van Ells.
The colorful artwork is due to the inspired talents of Don Martinetti and Chris Pavely.
Finally, we would like to thank our families, who supported and encouraged us every step of
the way. They are a continual source of inspiration.
Betty S. Azar
Stacy A. Hagen
xiii
o Exercise 1. Listening and reading.
rfJ Part I. Listen to the conversation between Sam and Lisa. They are college students in
� California. They are beginning a weeklong training to be resident assistants* for their dorm.
CD!
Track 2 They are interviewing each other. Later they will introduce each other to the group.
SAM: Hi. My name is Sam.

LISA: Hi. I'm Lisa. It's nice to meet you.
SAM: Nice to meet you too. Where are you from?
LISA: I'm from Boston. How about you?
SAM: I'm from Quebec. So, how long have you been here?
LisA: Just one day. I still have a little jet lag.
SAM: Me too. I got in yesterday morning. So - we need to ask each other about a hobby.
What do you like to do in your free time?
LISA: I spend a lot of time outdoors. I love to hike. When I'm indoors, I like to surf the
Internet.
SAM: Me too. I'm studying Italian right now. There are a lot of good websites for learning
languages on the Internet.
LisA: I know. I found a good one for Japanese. I'm trying to learn a little.
Now, when I introduce you to the group, I have to write your full name on the board.
What's your last name, and how do you spell it?
SAM: It's Sanchez. S-A-N-C-H-E-Z.
LISA: My last name is Paterson - with one "t": P-A-T-E-R-S-0-N.
SAM: It looks like our time is up. Thanks. It's been nice talking to you.
LisA: I enjoyed it too.
*resident assistant = a student who lives in a dormitory and helps other students with everyday life in the dorm; also called an "RA."
1
Part II. Read the conversation in Part I. Use the information in the conversation to complete
Sam's introduction of Lisa to the class.
SAM: I would like to introduce Lisa Paterson. Lisa is from Boston . She has been here
-----------· In her free time, she ---------------
Part Ill. Now it is Lisa's turn to introduce Sam to the class. What is she going to say? Create
an introduction. Begin with I would like to introduce Sam.
o Exercise 2. Let's talk: interview.

Interview a partner. Then introduce your partner to the class. As your classmates are
introduced to the class, write their names on a sheet of paper.
Find out your partner's:
name
native country or hometown
free-time activities or hobbies
favorite food
reason for being here
length of time here
o Exercise 3. Lers write.

Write answers to the questions. Then, with your teacher, decide what to do with your writing.
See the list of suggestions at the end of the exercise.
1. What is your name?
2. Where are you from?
3. Where are you living?
4. Why are you here (in this city)?
a. Are you a student? If so, what are you studying?
b. Do you work? If so, what is your job?
c. Do you have another reason for being here?
5. What do you like to do in your free time?
6. What is your favorite season of the year? Why?
7. What are your three favorite TV programs or movies? Why do you like them?
8. Describe your first day in this class.
Suggestions for your writing:
a. Give it to a classmate to read. Your classmate can then summarize the information in a
spoken report to a small group.
b. Work with a partner and correct errors in each other's writing.
c. Read your composition aloud in a small group and answer any questions about it.
d. Hand it in to your teacher, who will correct the errors and return it to you.
e. Hand it in to your teacher, who will return it at the end of the term when your English has
progressed, so you can correct your own errors.
2 CHAPTER 1
o Exercise 4. Warm-up. (Charts 1-1 and 1-2)
Read the statements and circle yes or no. Choose responses that are true for you. Share your
answers with a partner (e.g., I use a computer every day. OR I don't use a computer every day.).
Your partner will report your information to the class (e.g., Eric doesn't use a computer every day.).
1. I use a computer every day. yes no
2. I am sitting in front of a computer right now. yes no
3. I check emails every day. yes no
4. I send text messages several times a day. yes no
5. I am sending a text message now. yes no
.---,. �-.-·, ·1 �� :- -v-..-�- •, �,.. ·-·· ---1 -:.•t.:' ·- , � ---:-.·1�=-,.."'7";-� ...

'.:"·-�v�� ... �-.,,."'1-....-.--· .-. �-;,:.;·i� �- 0;.....-AY
1� 1 Simplel>re.sent-and-Rresenf Prog�--ress1��-;_ :::� .}';_-�;d1:)/-. �---:"-�/:!''.f�-�};1

�· •• •• i...,. .� �·.. -· �,!��, :,-_ � .1 • • .....,,,_ _ 1-,�-�;; -.�;. � · _ ...f,.,.
_-.-.i:;:.� ...
,;·· .:·"C,�;---;- :t:�t�:::_.r;....,_·" � .:....:-�:i,-.; -t_;;t}�;..-;: �..
�
Simple Present ( a) Ann takes a shower every day. The SIMPLE PRESENT expresses daily
habits or usual activities, as in ( a)
(b) I usually read the newspaper in
...v the morning. and (b).
"' �0 ...::s
(U
0. c: ,E The simple present expresses general
(c) Babies cry. Birds fly.
statements of fact, as in (c) .
(d) NEGATIVE:
In general, the simple present is used
It doesn't snow in Bangkok. for events or situations that exist
(e ) QUESTION: always, usually, or habitually in the
Does the teacher speak slowly? past, present, and future.
Present Progressive (f) Ann can't come to the phone The PRESENT PROGRESSIVE expresses an
right now because she is taking activity that is in progress (is occurring,
a shower. is happening) right now.
"·..c::
...... ( g) I am reading my grammar book The event is in progress at the time the
..."'
(U
�0
c:
·a
!+:: right now. speaker is saying the sentence. The
s· I
I
(h ) Jimmy and Susie are babies.
event began in the past, is in progress
They are crying. I can hear now, and will probably continue into the
� future.
�SS them right now. Maybe they are
hungry. FORM: am, is, are + -ing
(i) NEGATIVE:
It isn't snowing right now.
(j) QUESTION:
Is the teacher speaking right
now?
Present Time 3
1·2 Forms of the Simple Pr��ent and �� .. p_��se�tiltoi" f�$il��--�-��l�:
, --- - _._.::,_ - • � ,..._- ...__.._, :.��
. �• - · -- � w --.-r..:td-'. •• """-"-�---�--
•.....:....,�':'-.,-, <
Simple Present Present Progressive

STATEMENT I work. I am working.
You work. You are working.
He, She, It works. He, She, It is working.
We work. We are working.
They work. They are working.
NEGATIVE I do not work. I am not working.

You do not work. You are not working.
He, She, It does not work. He, She, It is not working.
We do not work. We are not working.
They do not work. They are not working.
QUESTION Do I work? Am I working?

Do you work? Are you working?
Does he, she, it work? Is he, she, it working?
Do we work? Are we working?
Do they work? Are they working?
Contractions
pronoun+ be I + am = I'm working.
you, we, they + are = You're, We're, They're working.
he. she, it + is = He's, She's, It's working.
do+ not does + not = doesn't She doesn't work.

do + not = don't I don't work.
be+ not is + not = isn't He isn't working.

are + not = aren't They aren't working.
(am + not =· am not* I am not working.)
*NOTE: am and not are not contracted.
D Exercise 5. Listening and· grammar. (Charts 1- 1 and 1-2)

(J
CD I
Listen to the passage on the next page. Discuss the verbs in italics. Is the activity of the verb a
usual actiyity or happening right now (an activity in progress)?
Track 3
m
irLanguage.com
4 CHAPTER 1
Lunch at the Fire Station
It's 12:30, and the firefighters are waiti.ng for their next call. They are taking their lunch
1 2
break. Ben, Rita, and Jada are sitting at a table in the fire station. Their co-worker Bruno
3
is making lunch for them. He is an excellent cook. He often makes lunch. He is fixing spicy
4 5 6
chicken and rice. Their captain isn't eati.ng. He is doing paperwork. He skips lunch on busy
7 8 9
days. He works in his office and finishes his paperwork.
10 11
o Exercise 6. Listening. (Charts 1-1 and 1-2)

rt, Listen to the statements about Irene and her job. Decide if the activity of each verb is a usual
('51 activity or happening right now. Choose the correct answer.
CD!
Trad4
Example: You will hear: Irene works for a video game company.
You will choose: � happening right now
1. usual activity happening right now
o Exercise 7. Looking at grammar. (Charts 1-1 and 1-2)

Complete the sentences. Use the simple present or the present progressive form of the verbs
in parentheses.
1. Shhh. The baby (sleep) �i�s =sl=
ee"-f'p=in,..,..
@___ • The baby (sleep) ____,s"""le=e+-
p�s __ for ten
hours every night.
2. Right now I'm in class. I (sit) ___________ at my desk. I usually (sit)

----------- at the same desk in class every day.
3. Ali (speak) ----------- Arabic. Arabic is his native language, but right
now he (speak) English.
4. A: (it, rain) ___________ a lot in southern Spain?

B: No. The weather (be) usually warm and sunny.
5. A: Look out the window. (it, rain) ___________ ?

B: It (start) ___________ to sprinkle.
Present Time 5
6. A: Look. It's Yumiko.
B: Where?
A: Over there. She (walk) ----------- out of the cafe.
7. A: Oscar usually (walk) ___________ to work.

(you) walk) ___________ to work every day too?
B: Yes.
A: (Oscar) walk) ___________ with you?
B: Sometimes.
o Exercise 8. Let's talk. (Charts 1-1 and 1-2)

Your teacher will ask one student to perform an action and another student to describe it using
the present progressive.
Example: stand next to your desk
To STUDENT A: Would you please stand next to your desk? (Student A stands up.)
To STUDENT B: Who is standing next to his/her desk? OR What is (Student A) doing?
STUDENT B: (Student A) is standing next to his/her desk.
1. stand up 7. erase the board
2. smile 8. hold your pen in your left hand
3. whistle 9. kno.ck on the door
4. open or close the door 10. scratch your head
5. read your grammar book 11. count aloud the number of people in the classroom
6. shake your head "no" 12. look at the ceiling
o Exercise 9. Ustening. (Charts 1-1 and 1-2)

{J
Listen to the questions. Write the words you hear.
co I
Track 5
A problem with the printer
Example: You will hear: Is the printer working?
You will write: Is the printer working?
1. _________ need more paper?
2. _________ have enough ink?

3. _________ fixing it yourself?
4. _________ know how to fix it?
5. _________ have another printer in the office?
6. Hmmm. Is it my imagination or _________ making a strange noise?
6 CHAPTER 1
0 Exercise 10. Game: trivia. (Charts 1- 1 and 1-2)
Work in small groups. Complete each sentence with the correct form of the verb in
parentheses. Then circle "T" for true or "F" for false. The group with the most correct
answers wins.*
1. In one soccer game, a player (run) seven miles on T F
average.
2. In one soccer game, players (run) seven miles on T F
average.
3. Right-handed people (live) 10 years longer than T F
left-handed people.
4. Mountains (cover) 3% of Africa and 25% of Europe. T F
5. The Eiffel Tower (have) 3,000 steps. T F
6. Honey (spoil) after one year. T F
7. The letter "e" (be) the most common letter in English. T F
8. It (take) about seven seconds for food to get from T F
our mouths to our stomachs.
9. A man's heart (beat) faster than a woman's heart. T F
10. About 145,000 people in die world (die) every 24 hours. T F
O Exercise 11. Let's talk. (Charts 1- 1 and 1-2)

Work with a partner. Take turns describing your pictures to each other and finding the
differences. Use the present progressive. Partner A: Cover Partner B's pictures in your book.
Partner B: Cover Partner A's pictures in your book.
Example:
Partner A Partner B
PARTNER A: In my picture, the airplane is taking off.

PARTNER B: In my picture, the airplane is landing.
*See Trivia Answers, p. 421.
Present Time 7
2
Partner A
I ;
3
m
irLanguage.com
4 s 6
PartnerB
2 3
4 s 6
8 CHAPTER 1
o Exercise 12. Let's read and write. (Charts 1-1 and 1-2)
Part I. Read the paragraph and answer the questions.
Hair Facts
Here are some interesting facts about our hair. Human hair grows about one-half inch
per month or 15 centimeters a year. The hair on our scalp is dead. That's why it doesn't hurt
when we get a haircut. The average person has about 100,000 strands of hair.* Every day we
lose 75 to 150 strands of hair. One strand of hair grows for two to seven years. After it stops
growing, it rests for a while and then falls out. Hair grows faster in warmer weather, and
women's hair grows faster than men's hair.
Questions:
1. How fast does hair grow?
2. Why don't haircuts hurt?
3. About how many strands of hair are on your head right now?
4. Where is a good place to live if you want your hair to grow faster?
Part II. Choose one part of the body, for example: fingernails, skin, eyebrows, eyes, heart,
lungs, etc. Make a list of interesting facts about this part of the body. Organize the facts into a
paragraph. Begin with the given topic sentence. Note: If you are researching information on
the Internet, search this topic: "interesting __ facts" (e.g., interesting hair facts).
Topic sentence: Here are some-interesting facts about our __ .
o Exercise 13. Warm-up. (Chart 1-3)

How often do you do each activity? Give the percentage (0% � 100%). Your teacher will ask
which ones you always do, sometimes do, or never do.
1. I take the bus to school.
2. I go to bed late.
3. I skip breakfast.
4. I eat vegetables at lunch time.
5. I cook my own dinner.
6. I am an early riser.**
*strands ofhair = pieces of hair

**early riser = a person who gets up early in the morning
Present Time 9
100% always Frequency adverbs usually occur in the middle of a
j. almost always sentence and have special positions, as shown in
usually examples (a) through (e) below.
.:::
II)
often The adverbs in boldface may l3lso occur at the

·;;;
frequently beginning or the end of a sentence.
generally
50% sometimes I sometimes get up at 6:30.
occasionally Sometimes I get up at 6:30.
I get up at 6:30 sometimes.
seldom
.:::
II)
rarely
as • hardly ever The other adverbs in the list (not in boldface) rarely
c: almost never occur at the beginning or the end of a sentence. Their
II)
'it
0% not ever, never usual position is in the middle of a sentence.
s + FREOArN + v Frequency adverbs usually come between the subject

(a) Karen always tells the truth. and the simple present verb except main verb be.
INCORRECT: Always Karen tells the truth.
S + BE + FREQ AIN Frequency adverbs follow be in the simple present

(b) Karen is always on time. (am, is, are) and simple past (was, were).
(c) Do you always eat breakfast? In a question, frequency adverbs come directly after
the subject.
(d) Ann usually doesn't eat breakfast. In a negative sentence, most frequency adverbs come
in front of a negative verb (except always and ever).
(e) Sue doesn't always eat breakfast. A/ways follows a negative helping verb, as in (e), or a
negative form of be.
(f) CORRECT: Anna never eats meat. Negative adverbs (seldom, rarely, hardly ever, never)
INCORRECT: Anna doesn't never eat meat. are NOT used with a negative verb.
(g) - Do you ever take the bus to work? Ever is used in questions about frequency, as in (g). It
-Yes, I do. I often take the bus. means "at any time."
(h) I don't ever walk to work. Ever is also used with not, as in (h).
INCORRECT: I ever walk to work.
Ever is NOT used in statements.
o Exercise 14. Grammar and speaking. (Chart 1-3)

Part I. Look at your answers in Exercise 13. Make complete sentences using the appropriate
frequency word from Chart 1-3.
Example: 1. 0% = I never take the bus to school. OR

50% = I sometimes take the bus to school.
10 CHAPTER 1
Part II. Walk around the room and find people who do the activities with the same frequency
as.you.
Example:
SPEAKER A: I always take the bus to school. Do you always take the bus to school?
SPEAKER B: No, I don't. I sometimes take the bus to school. Do you usually go to bed late?
SPEAKER A: Yes, I do. I usually go to bed late.
o Exercise 15. Let's talk. (Chart 1-3)

Answer the questions. Discuss the meaning of the frequency adverbs.
What is something that . . .
1. you seldom do?
2. a polite person often does?
3. a polite person never does?
4. our teacher frequently does in class?
5. you never do in class?
6. you rarely eat?
7. you occasionally do after class?
8. drivers generally do?
9. people in your country always or usually do to celebrate the New Year?
o Exercise 16. looking at grammar. (Chart 1-3)

Add the given adverbs to each sentence. Put the adverbs in their usual midsentence position.
Make any necessary changes to the sentence.
Example: Emily doesn't get to work on time.
a. usually - Emily usually doesn't get to work on time.
b. often - Emily often doesn't get to work on time.
1. Kazu doesn't shave in the morning.

a. frequently d. always g. hardly ever
b. occasionally e. ever h. rarely
c. sometimes f. never 1. seldom
2. I don't eat breakfast.

a. usually c. seldom
b. always d. ever
3. My roommate isn't home in the evening.

a. generally c. always
b. sometimes d. hardly ever
Present Time 11
o Exercise 17. Looking at grammar. (Chart 1-3)
Complete the sentences using the information in the chart. Use a frequency adverb in each
sentence to describe Mia's weekly activities.
Mia's Week s M Tu w Th F s
1. wake up early x
2. make breakfast x x x
3. go to the gym x x x x x
4. be late for the bus x x x x
5. cook dinner x x x x x x x
6. read a book x x x x x x
7. do homework x x
8. go to bed early
1. Mia seldom I rarely wakes up early.
2. She breakfast.
3. She to the gym.
4. She late for the bus.
5. She dinner.
6. She a book.
7. She her homework.
8. She to bed early.
o Exercise 18. Let's talk: pairwork. (Charts 1-1 -+ 1-3)

Work with a partner. Use frequency adverbs to talk about yourself and to ask your partner
questions.
Example: walk to school
PARTNER A (book open): I usually walk to school. How about you? Do you usually walk to
school?
PARTNER B (book closed): I usually walk to school too. OR
I seldom walk to school. I usually take the bus.
Change roles.
1. wear a suit to class 6. wear a hat to class
2. go to sleep before 11:00 P.M. 7. believe the things I hear in the news
3. get at least one email a day 8. get up before nine o'clock in the morning
4. read in bed before I go to sleep 9. call my family or a friend if I feel homesick
5. speak to people who sit next or lonely
to me on an airplane 10. have chocolate ice cream for dessert
12 CHAPTER l
Combine the given words into sentences. Add -s where necessary. Do not add any other words.
1. A dolphin \ swim
2. Dolphin \ swim
1·4 Singular/Plural o�1J:!1 o�j e:?.JD

(a) SINGULAR: one bird SINGULAR = one, not two or more
(b) PLURAL: two birds, three birds, many birds, all birds, etc. PLURAL = two, three, or more
(c) Birds sing. A plural noun ends in -s, as in (c).

(d) A bird sings. A singular verb ends in -s, as in (d).
(e) A bird sings outside my window. A singular verb follows a singular subject.
It sings loudly. Add -s to the simple present verb if the subject is
Ann sings beautifully. (1) a singular noun (e.g., a bird, Ann, Tom) or
She sings songs to her children. (2) he, she, or it.*
Tom sings very well.
He sings professionally.
*He,she, and il are third person singular personal pronouns. See Chan 6-10, p. 164, for more information about personal pronouns.
o Exercise 20. Looking at grammar. (Chart 1-4>

Look at each word that ends in -s. Is it a noun or verb? Is it singular or plural?
l Sentence
�- -- . -
-=
c
c",
::-- Noun" -Verb Sing.

'" .
Plural ,,
. . -
1. Plants grow quickly in warm weather. x x
2. Ali lives in an apartment. x x
3. Bettina listens to the radio every morning.
4. The students at this school work hard.
5. An ambulance takes sick people to the hospital.
6. Ambulances take sick people to the hospital.
7. Cell phones offer text-messaging.
8. The earth revolves around the sun.
Present Time 13
o Exercise 21. Listening. (Chart 1-4)
{J Listen to the statements. Add -s where necessary. Write 0 if no -s is needed.
co 1 Natural disasters: a flood
Track 6
1. The weather ---12._ cause_s__ some natural disaster_s__ .
2. Heavy rains sometimes create __ flood __ .
3. A big flood __ cause__ a lot of damage.
4. In town __ , flood __ can damage building __ , home__·_, and road __ .
5. After a flood __ , a town __ need __ a lot of financial help for repair __ .

Write the third person form for each verb under the correct heading. Can you figure out the
rules for when to add -s, -es, and -ies?
mix speak stay study take try . wish
Add-s only. Add-es. Add-ies.
- - . '"
1·5 Spelling of::Final �sl-es .;...
( a) visit ---t visits Final -s, not -es, is added to most verbs.
speak ---t speaks INCORRECT: visites, Speakes
(b ) ride ---t rides Many verbs end in -e. Final -sis simply added.
write ---t writes
(c) catch ---t catches Final -es is added to words that end in -ch, -sh, -s, -x, and -z.
wash ---t washes
PRONUNCIATION NOTE:
miss ---t misses
fix ---t fixes Final -es is pronounced fazJ and adds a syllable.*
buzz ---t buzzes
(d) fly ---t flies If a word ends in a consonant+ -y, change the -yto -i and add -es, as in (d).
INCORRECT: flys
( e) pay ---t pays If a word ends in a vowel+ -y, simply add -s,** as in ( e).
INCORRECT: paies or payes
( f ) go ---t goes The singular forms of the verbs go, do, and have are irregular.
do ---t does
have ---t has
*See Chart 6-1, p. 147, for more information about the pronunciation of final -s/-es.
**Vowels = a, e, i, o, u. Consonants = all other leners in the alphabet.
14 CHAPTER 1
irLanguage.com

Underline the verb(s) in each sentence. Add final -sf-es if necessary. Do not change any
other words.
1. A frog j um pt\.
2. Frogs j ump. · � (no change)
3. A boat float on water.
4. Rivers flow toward the sea.
5. My mother worry about me.
6. A student buy a lot of books at the beginning of each term.
7. Airplanes fly all around the world.
8. T he teacher ask us a lot of questions in class every day.
9. Mr. Cook watch game shows on TV every evening.
10. Water freeze at 32°F (0° C) and boil at 212 °F ( 100° C).
11. Mrs. Taylor never cross the street in the middle of a block. She always walk to the corner
and use the crosswalk.
0 Exercise 24. Grammar and listening. (Chart 1-5)

Add -s!-esl-ies to the verbs. Check your answers wit.ha partner. Listen to the pronunciation
of the verbs.
CD I
Track 7
1. talk_S __ 6. kiss __ 11. study __
2. fish� 7. push __ 12. buy __
3. hope __ 8. wait __ 13. enJoy __
4. teach __ 9. mlX 14. try __
5. move __ 10. bow __ 15. carry __
o Exercise 25. Let's talk: pairwork. (Chart 1-5)

Work with a partner. Look at the pictures and make conversations. Take turns being Partner A
and Partner B. Follow this model. Use he, she, or they as appropriate.
PARTNER A: What is he doing?
PARTNER B: He
PARTNER A: Does he often?
PARTNER B: No, he doesn't. He rarely __ .
Present Time 15
o Exercise 26. Game. (Charts 1-4 and 1-5)
Your teacher will assign each student an item number. (If there are fewer than 24 students,
some students will have two numbers. If there are more than 24 students, some students will
have the same number.) Find your number in the list and write the words that appear beside
it on a slip of paper. Then close your book.
Walk around the classroom and say your words to other classmates. You are looking for
the other half of your sentence. When you find the person with the other half, combine the
information on both of your slips of paper into a sentence.
Write the sentence on the board or on a piece of paper. Make changes to the verb if
necessary.
Example: 1. A star
2. shine in the sky at night
- A star shines in the sky at night.
1. A car 11. An elephant
2. causes air pollution. 12. A hurricane
3. stretch when you pull on it. 13. produce one-fourth of the world's coffee.
4. A hotel 14. Oceans
5. support a huge variety of marine life. 15. use its long trunk like a hand to pick
6. A bee things up.
7. Does exercise 16. Brazil
8. cause great destruction when it 17. supply its guests with clean towels.
reaches land. 18. A rubber band
9. A river 19. collects nectar* from flowers.
10. improves your health? 20. flows downhill.

Circle the correct completions.
CHARLIE: Shhh! I __ something on our roof.

a. hear b. am hearing
I __ there is a person up there.
a. think b. am thinking
DAD: I
a. don't know b. am not knowing
It __ more like a small animal, maybe a cat or squirrel.
a. sounds b. is sounding
*nectar == a sugary liquid inside flowers
16 CHAPTER 1
1·6 Non-Action Verbs o�'Y-1 oltj ef>Y'
(a) I know Ms. Chen. Some verbs are generally not used in progressive tenses.
INCORRECT: I am knowing Ms. Chen. These verbs are called "non-action verbs."* They express
(b) I'm hungry. I want a sandwich. a situation that exists, not an action in progress.
INCORRECT: I am wanting a sandwich.
(c) This book belongs to Mikhail.

INORRECT: This book is belonging to Mikhail.
Non-action Verbs
hear believe be own need like forget
see think exist have want love remember
sound understand possess prefer hate
know seem belong agree
mean look like disagree
COMPARE: Think and have can be used in the progressive.

(d) I think that grammar is easy. In (d): When think means "believe," it is non-progressive.
(e) I am thinking about grammar right now, In (e): When think expresses thoughts that are going
through a person's mind, it can be progressive.
(f) Tom has a car. In (f ): When have means "own" or expresses possession,
it is not used in the progressive.
(g) I'm having a good time. In (g): In expressions where have does not mean "own"
(e.g., have a good time, have a bad time, have trouble,
have a problem, have lunch, have a snack, have company,
have an operation}, have can be used in the progressive.
*Non-action verbs are also called "non-progressive" or "stative" verbs.

Choose the correct responses.
1. A: What do you like better: coffee or tea?
B: I tea.
a. am preferring @ prefer
2. A: Can you help me set the table for dinner?
B: In a minute. I __ my report.
a. am finishing b. finish
3. A: Are you busy?
B: I a few minutes.
a. have b. am having
4. A: __ a good time?
a. Are you having b. Do you have
B: Yes, I __ myself.
a. am enJoymg b. I enjoy
Present Time 17
5. A: There's goes Salma on her new racing bike.
B: Yeah, she really __ bikes.
a. is loving b. loves
A: That's for sure! She several.
. .
a. 1s ownmg b. owns

Complete the sentences with the simple present or present progressive form of think and
have.
1. A: How is your new job going?
B: Pretty good. I (think) _t�h=in=k___ I am doing okay.
2. A: You look upset. What's on your mind?
B: I'm worried about my daughter. I (think) ___________ she's in
trouble.
3. A: You look far away.* What's on your mind?
B: I (think) about my vacation next week. I can't wait!
4. A: Hey, there! How's the party going?
B: Great! We (have) a lot of fun.
5. A: Could I borrow some money?
B: Sorry, I only (have) ----------- a little change** on me.

Complete the sentences. Use the simple present or present progressive form of the verbs in
parentheses.
1. Right now I (look) am lookin@ out the window. I (see) -=se=e'---- a window
washer on a ladder.
2. A: ( you, need) ___________ some help, Mrs. Bernini?
(you, want) me to carry that box for you?
B: Yes, thank you. That's very nice of you.
3. A: Who is that man? I (think) __________ that I (know)
___________ him, but I (forget) -----------
his name.
B: That's Mr. Martinez.
A: That's right! I (remember) ----------- him now.
* look far away = look like you are thinking about other things; daydream
**change= coins
18 CHAPTER 1
4. A: (you, believe) _____________ in ·ghosts?
B: No. In my opinion, ghosts (exist) _ _______ only in people's
imaginations.
5. Right now the children (be) _______ at the beach. They (have)
___________ a good time. They (have) ___________
shovels, and they (build) ___________ a sandcastle. They (like)
___________ to build big sandcastles. Their parents (lie)
___________ on the beach and (listen) ___________
to music. They (listen, not) ______________ to their children's
conversations, but they (hear) them anyway.
D Exercise 31. Warm· up. (Chart 1-7)

Choose the correct response for each question.
1. Does Janet eat fish?
a. Yes, she does. b. Yes, she is. c. Yes, she eats.
2. Do you eat fish?
a. No, I don't. b. No, I am not. c. No, I don't eat.
3. Are you vegetarian?
a. Yes, I do. b. Yes, I am. c. Yes, I like.
Present Time 19
.1·7 Present Verbs: Short Answers to Yes/No Questions
Question Short Answer Long Answer
QUESTIONS WITH oo/oOES Does Bob like tea? Yes, he does. Yes, he likes tea.
No, he doesn't. No, he doesn't like tea.
Do you like tea? Yes, I do. Yes, I like tea.

No, I don't. No, I don't like tea.
QUESTIONS WITH BE Are you studying? Yes, I am.* Yes, I am (I'm) studying.
No, I'm not. No, I'm not studying.
Is Yoko a student? Yes, she is.* Yes, she is (she's) a student.

No, she 's not. OR No, she's not a student. OR
No, she isn't. No, she isn't a student.
Are they studying? Yes, they are.* Yes, they are (they're) studying.
No, they 're not. OR No, they're not studying. OR
No, they aren't. No, they aren't studying.
*Am, is, and are are NOT contracted with pronouns in short answers.
INCORRECT SHORT ANSWERS: }es, I'm. Wis, she's. Wis, they 're.

Complete the conversations. Use the simple present or present progressive form of the verbs
in parentheses. Give short answers to the questions as necessary.
1. A: ( Tanya) have) -�D=

oe�s�I=a =n""'
ya�-- have a bike?
B: Yes, she does . She (have) _h_a_s___ a racing bike.
2. A: (it) rain) -----�------ right now?

B: No, At least, I (think) not) __________ so.
3. A: ( your friends, write) ----------------- a lot of emails?

B: Yes, _______ . I (get) _______ lots of emails all the time.
4. A: (the weather, affect*) ________________ your mood?

B: Yes, _______ . I (get) ________ grumpy when it's rainy.
*The word affect is a verb: The weather affects my mood.

The word effect is a noun: W&rm, sunny weather has a good effect on nry mood.
20 CHAPTER 1
5. A: (Jean, study) --------------- at the library this evening?
B: No, She (be) _______ at the gym. She
(play) _________ table tennis with her friend.
A: (Jean, play) _________ _
_ table tennis every evening?
B: No, She usually (study) _________ at the library.
A: (she, be) _______ a good player?
B: Yes, She (play) _________ table tennis a lot.
A: ( you, play) ___________ table tennis?
B: Yes, _______ . But I (be, not) _______ very good.
o Exercise 33. Listening. (Chart 1- 7)

{J Part I. Listen to these examples. Notice the reduced pronunciation of the phrases in italics.
CDI
Track 8
At the doctor's office
1. Do you � Dyou Do you have an appointment?
2. Does he � Dze Does he have an appointment?
3. Does she � Duh-she Does she have an appointment?
4. Do we � Duh-we Do we have an appointment?
5. Do they � Duh-they Do they have an appointment?
6. Ami � Mi Am I late for my appointment?
7. Is it � Zit Is it time for my appointment?*
8. Does it � Zit Does it hurt?
Part II. Complete each question with the unreduced form of the words you hear.
Example: You will hear: Do you want to tell me what the problem is?
You will write: Do you want to tell me what the problem is?
1. have pain anywhere?

2. hurt anywhere else?
3. have a cough or sore throat?
4. have a fever?
5. need lab tests?
6. very sick?
7. serious?
8. need to make another appointment?
9. want to wait in the waiting room?
10. pay now or later?
*See Chapter 5 for more examples of questions with be in spoken English.
Present Time 21
o Exercise 34. Let's talk: interview. (Chart 1- 7)
Make questions with the given words. T hen walk around the room and ask and answer
questions. Your answers should have both a short and a long response.
Example: be\ Texas\ in South America?
SPEAKER A: Is Texas in South America?
SPEAKER B: No, it isn't. Texas is in North America.
1. the earth\ revolve\ around the sun \ right now?
2. the moon\ revolve\ around the earth\ every 28 days?
3. be\ the sun and moon planets?
4. be\ Toronto in western Canada?
5. whales\ lay\ eggs?
6. your country\ have\ gorillas in the wild?
7. be\ gorillas\ intelligent?
8. mosquitoes\ carry\ malaria?
9. you\ like\ vegetarian food?
10. be\ our teacher\ from Australia?
11. it\ rain\ outside\ right now?
12. be\ you\ tired of this interview?
o Exercise 35. Ustening. (Chart 1-7)

{J
Choose the correct responses.
co I Example: You will hear: You look hot and tired. Are you thirsty?
Track 9
You will choose: 8Yes,lam.
b. Yes, I do.
1. a. Yes, I want. 4. a. Yes, we do.
b. Yes, I do. b. Yes, we need.
2. a. Yes, I am. 5. a. Yes, he does.
b. Yes, I do. b. Yes, he is.
3. a. Yes, it is. 6. a. Yes, they are.
b. Yes, it does. b. Yes, they do.
o Exercise 36. Looking at grammar. (Chapter 1 >

Complete the sentences. Use the simple present or the present progressive form of the verbs
in parentheses.
1. A: My sister (have) has a new car. She bought it last month.
B: (you, have) _D�o�yo�u�h�a��e__ a car?
A: No, I don't . Do you?
B: No, but I have a motorcycle.
22 CHAPTER 1
2. A: What are the children doing? (they, watch) TV?
B: No, they . They (play) outside.
3. A: Jacob, (you, listen) to me?

B: Of course I am, Mom. You (want) me to take out the
garbage. Right?
A: Yes, and I mean now!
4. A: Hey, Becky, where (be) _______ you?

B: I (be) _______ in the bedroom.
A: What (you,do) ___________ ?
B: I (try) ________ _ to sleep!
5. A: What (you, think) ___________ about at night before you fall asleep?
B: I (think) about my day. But I (think, not) ________
about anything negative. What (think) _______________ about?
A: I (think, not) ___________ about anything. I (count)
_______ sheep.*
6. A: A penny for your thoughts.

B: Huh?
A: That means: What (you, think) _____________ about right now?
B: I (think) about my homework. I (think, not) _____
_______ about anything else right now.
A: I (believe, not) ___________ you. You (think) ________
about your wedding plans!
7. A: (you, know) ___________ any tongue-twisters?

B: Yes, I Here's one: She sells seashells down by the seashore.
A: That (be) hard to say! Can you say this: Sharon wears Sue's shoes to
zoos to look at cheap sheep?
B: That (make, not) _________ any sense.
A: I (know) , but it's fun to say.
*count sheep = fall asleep naturally by closing your eyes and counting imaginary sheep
Present Time 23
o Exercise 37. Reading, grammar, and listening,. (Chapter 1 >
Part I. Read the passage and choose the correct completions.
Aerobic Exercise
Jeremy and Nancy believe exercise is important. They go to an exercise class three times a
week. They like aerobic exercise.
Aerobic exercise is a special type of exercise. It increases a person's heart rate. Fast
walking, running, and dancing are examples of aerobic exercise. During aerobic exercise, a
person's heart beats fast. This brings more oxygen to the muscles. Muscles work longer when
they have more oxygen.
Right now Jeremy and Nancy are listening to some lively music. They are doing special
dance steps. They are exercising different parts of their body.
How about you? Do you like to exercise? Do your muscles get exercise every week? Do
you do some type of aerobic exercise?
1. Jeremy and Nancy E) are thinking exercise is good for them.
2. They prefer, are preferring aerobic exercise.
3. Aerobic exercise makes, is making a person's heart beat fast.
4. Muscles need, are needing oxygen.
5. With more oxygen, muscles work, are working longer.
6. Right now Jeremy and Nancy do, are doing a special kind of dance.
7. Do you exercise, Are you exercising every week?
8. Do you exercise, Are you exercising right now?
IJ Part I withListen
CD I
Part II. to the passage and complete the sentences with the words you hear. Cover
a piece of paper.
Track 10
Aerobic Exercise
Jeremy and Nancy ________ exercise is important. They ______ to
an exercise class three times a week. They ______ aerobic exercise.
Aerobic exercise ______ a special type of exercise. It ________ a

4
person's heart rate. Fast walking, running, and dancing ______ examples of aerobic
6
exercise. During aerobic exercise, a person's heart ______ fast. This
________ more oxygen to the muscles. Muscles ______ longer when they
9
______ more oxygen.
10
Right now Jeremy and Nancy ____________ to some lively music. They
11
--------- special dance steps. They ___________ different
12 13
parts of their body.
24 CHAPTER 1
How about you? ______ you ______ to exercise? ______ your
14 15 16
muscles ______ exercise every week? ______ you ______ some type
17 18 19
of aerobic exercise?
o Exercise 38. Check your knowledge. (Chapter 1 >

Edit the passage to correct errors in verb tense usage.
Omar's Visit
owns
(1) My friend Omar is owning his own car now. It's brand new.* Today he driving to a
small town north of the city to visit his aunt. He love to listen to music, so the CD player is
play one of his favorite CDs - loudly. Omar is very happy: he is drive his own car and listen
to loud music. He's look forward to his visit with his aunt.
(2) Omar is visiting his aunt once a week. She's elderly and live alone. She is thinking
Omar a wonderful nephew. She love his visits. He try to be helpful and considerate in every
way. His aunt don't hearing well, so Omar is speaks loudly and clearly when he's with her.
(3) When he's there, he fix things for her around her apartment and help her with her
shopping. He isn't staying with her overnight. He usually is staying for a few hours and then is
heading back to the city. He kiss his aunt good-bye and give her a hug before he is leaving.
Omar is a very good nephew.
*brand new = completely new
Present Time 25
Check (,/) the statements that are true for you. Share your answers with a partner.
1. __ I stayed up late last night.
2. __ I slept well last night.
3. __ I was tired this morning.
�...."l::.�·.:.·t.::;rff .;;:,, .... , . "

...
�;.;:>'4J'r,�j,"':;,!:v·-� ·. -��"';
.. �-..':'-�::-'.l�-;:_;�: . - ;-/ '", �;':r:::_,,,;,'.. ',:_",";.,.,:�· ..... .. ,?"4i-·..--:...
- -;-- � �-··• ••• "':":,/" '. :�" ': ;
J2;1�XExpre��.iijg�fa�(llfue'if:fh�·S�i#ple.Pa�t-.....>/:"�· ·: ·.. i ·_ .. ·..· .·

�,;.,.v:,, ....._ - • � - F
� • _
..
..., .,,
,,,.'
� __ .. -.l:!.'-�---
_,......__.........
..... --- : • "" • .J. ---- L -l --- ' �
(a) Mary walked downtown yesterday. The simple past is used to talk about activities or situations that began
(b) I slept for eight hours last night. and ended in the past (e.g., yesterday, last night, two days ago, in 2010).
(c) Bob stayed home yesterday morning. Most simple past verbs are formed by adding -edto a verb, as in (a),
(d) Our plane landed on time last night. (c), and (d).
(e) I ate breakfast this morning. Some verbs have irregular past forms, as in (b), (e), and (f). See Chart
( f ) Sue took a taxi to the airport yesterday. 2-4.
(g) I was busy yesterday. The simple past forms of be are was and were.
(h) They were at home last night.
Forms of the Simple Past: Regular Verbs

STATEMENT I, You, She, He, It, We, They worked yesterday.
NEGATIVE I, You, She, He, It, We, They did not (didn't) work yesterday.
QUESTION Did I, you, she, he, it, we, they work yesterday?
SHORT ANSWER Yes, I, you, she, he, it, we, they did. OR No, I, you, she, he, it, we, they didn't.
Forms of the Simple Past: Be

STATEMENT I, She, He, It was in class yesterday.
We, You, They were in class yesterday.
NEGATIVE I, She, He, It was not (wasn't) in class yesterday.

We, You, They were not ( weren't) in class yesterday.
QUE STION Was I, she, he, it in class yesterday?

Were we, you, they in class yesterday?
SHORT ANSWER Yes, I, she, he, it was. Yes, we, you, they were.
No, I, she, he, it wasn't. No, we, you, they weren't.
26
o Exercise 2. Looking at grammar. (Chart 2-1 >
Create your own chart by writing the negative and question forms of the words in italics. Omit
the rest of each sentence.
Negative Question
1. He needed water. He didn't need Did he need
2. She drank tea.
3. They played baseball.
4. I left early.
5. They wore boots.
6. � had time.
7. It was fun.
8. lou were late.
o Exercise 3. Let's talk. (Chart 2-1 >

All of the sentences contain inaccurate information. Make true statements by
( 1) making a negative statement and
(2) making an affirmative statement using accurate information.
1. Thomas Edison invented the telephone.
� Thomas Edison didn't invent the telephone.
� Alexander Graham Bell invented the tel.ephone.
2. I came to school by hot-air balloon today.
3. The students in this class swam into the classroom today.
4. (Teacher's name) is a movie director.
5. I slept in a tree last night.
6. The Internet became popular in the 1970s.
o Exercise 4. Listening. (Chapter 1 and Chart 2-1)
IJ
CD I
Listen to each sentence. Choose the correct completion(s). More than one completion may
be possible.
Track 11
Example: You will hear: It snows ...
You will choose: � every day. now.
1. French. together. last week.
2. right now. yesterday. last summer.
3. in the evening. last night. behind the mountains.
4. at this moment. our class. yesterday.
5. two weeks ago. right now. at this moment.
Pasf Time 27
o Exercise 5. Listening. (Chart 2- 1 >
!'» The differences between was/wasn't and were/weren't can be hard to hear in spoken
&I English. The "t" in the negative contraction is often dropped, and you may only hear an /n/
CD I
Track 12 SOUnd.
Part I. Listen to these examples.
1. I was in a hurry. I wasn't in a hurry.

2. They were on time. They weren't on time.
3. He was at the doctor's. He wasn't at the doctor's.
4. We were early. We weren't early.
Part II. Circle the words you hear. Before you begin, you may want to check your
understanding of these words: wedding, nervous, excited, ceremony, reception.
At a wedding
1. was wasn't 6. was wasn't
2. was wasn't 7. was wasn't
3. were weren't 8. was wasn't
4. were weren't 9. were weren't
5. was wasn't 10. were weren't

Do you know the spelling rules for these verbs?
Part I. Write the -ing form of each verb under the correct heading.
die give hit try
Drop final -e. Double final consonant. Change -ie to -y. Just add -ing.
Add-ing. Add-ing. Add-ing.
Part II. W rite the -ed form of each verb under the correct heading.
enjoy tie stop study
Double final consonant. Change -y to-i. Just add -ed. Just add -d.
Add-ed. Add -ed.
28 CHAPTER 2
2-2 Spelli�g
_ of -ing and -ed Forms - --
End of Double the Simple
Verb Consonant? Form -ing -ed
-e NO (a) smile smiling smiled -ing form: Drop the -e, add -ing.
hope hoping hoped -ed form: Just add -d.
Two NO (b) help helping helped If the verb ends in two consonants, just
Consonants learn learning learned add -ing or -ed.
Two Vowels NO (c) rain raining rained If the verb ends in two vowels + a
+ One heat heating heated consonant, just add -ing or -ed.
Consonant
One Vowel YES ONE-SYLLABLE VERBS If the verb has one syllable and ends in
+ One one vowel + one consonant, double the
(d) stop stopping stopped
Consonant consonant to make the -ing or -ed form.*
plan planning planned
NO TWO-SYLLABLE VERBS If the first syllable of a two-syllable verb is
I . stressed, do not double the consonant.
(e) v1s1t visiting visited
I
offer offering offered
·------------ ·------------------------ ------··------ -- -------·-··---------------------------------------
I
YES ( f ) prefer preferring preferred If the second syllable of a two-syllable
I
admit admitting admitted verb is stressed, double the consonant.
-y NO (g) play playing played If the verb ends in a vowel + -y, keep the
enjoy enjoying enjoyed -y. Do not change the -y to -i.
(h) worry worrying worried If the verb ends in a consonant + -y, keep
study studying studied the -y for the -ing form, but change the -y
to -ito make the -edform.
-ie ( i ) die dying died -ing form: Change the -ie to -y and
tie tying tied add -ing.
-edform: Just add -d.
*EXCEPTIONS: Do not double "w" or "x": snow, snowing, snowed,fix,fixing,fixed.
o Exercise 7. Looking at spelling. (Chart 2-2)

Write the -ing and -ed forms of these verbs.
-ing -ed
1. wait
2. clean
3. plant
4. plan
5. hope
6. hop
PastTime 29
7. play
8. study
9. try
10. die
11. sleep slevt
I (no -ed)
'
12. run ran (no -ed,)
(J
co 1
Complete the sentences with the verbs you hear. Pay special attention to spelling.
1. Shhh. The movie is _______
Track 13
2. Oh, no. The elevator door is stuck. It isn't _______
3. Here's a letter for you. I it accidentally.
4. I'm to the phone message that you already _______ to.
5. Are you to me or telling me the truth?
6. We the party.
7. I'm the nice weather today.
8. You look upset. W hat ?

There are four main parts to a verb. Can you complete the chart?
Simple Simple Past Present
Form Past Participle Participle
1. help helved
j
helved he/pin@
2. stay
3. take took taken takin@
4. give
5. be
30 CHAPTER 2
2-3 The Principal Parts of a Verb
Regular Verbs
SIMPLE FORM SIMPLE PAST PAST PARTICIPLE PRESENT PARTICIPLE
finish finished finished finishing

stop stopped stopped stopping
hope hoped hoped hoping
wait waited waited waiting
play played played playing
try tried tried trying
Irregular Verbs
see saw seen seeing
make made made making
sing sang sung singing
eat ate eaten eating
put put put putting
go went gone going
Principal Parts of a Verb

(1) THE SIMPLE FORM English verbs have four principal forms, or "parts." The simple form is the
form that is found in a dictionary. It is the base form with no endings on it
(no final -s, -ed, or -ing).
(2) THE SIMPLE PAST The simple past ends in -ed for regular verbs. Most verbs are regular, but
many common verbs have irregular past forms. See the reference list of
irregular verbs that follows in Chart 2-4.
(3) THE PAST PARTICIPLE The past participle also ends in -ed for regular verbs. Some verbs are
irregular. It is used in perfect tenses (Chapter 4) and the passive
(Chapter 10).
(4) THE PRESENT PARTICIPLE The present participle ends in -ing (for both regular and irregular verbs). It
is used in progressive tenses (e.g., the present progressive and the past
progressive).
Past Time 31
2-4 Common Irregular Verbs: A Reference List
SIMPLE SIMPLE PAST SIMPLE SIMPLE PAST
FORM PAST PARTICIPLE FORM PAST PARTICIPLE
be was, were been lend lent lent

beat beat beaten let let let
become became become lie lay lain
begin began begun light lit/lighted lit/lighted
bend bent bent lose lost lost
bite bit bitten make made made
blow blew blown mean meant meant
break broke broken meet met met
bring brought brought pay paid paid
build built built put put put
burn burned/burnt burned/burnt quit quit quit
buy bought bought read read read
catch caught caught ride rode ridden
choose chose chosen ring rang rung
come came come rise rose risen
cost cost cost run ran run
cut cut cut say said said
dig dug dug see saw seen
do did done sell sold sold
draw drew drawn send sent sent
dream dreamed/dreamt dreamed/dreamt set set set
drink drank drunk shake shook shaken
drive drove driven shoot shot shot
eat ate eaten shut shut shut
fall fell fallen sing sang sung
feed fed fed sink sank sunk
feel felt felt sit sat sat
fight fought fought sleep slept slept
find found found slide slid slid
fit fit fit speak spoke spoken
fly flew flown spend spent spent
forget forgot forgotten spread spread spread
forgive forgave forgiven stand stood stood
freeze froze frozen steal stole stolen
get got got/gotten stick stuck stuck
give gave given swim swam swum
go went gone take took taken
grow grew grown teach taught taught
hang hung hung tear tore torn
have had had tell told told
hear heard heard think thought thought
hide hid hidden throw threw thrown
hit hit hit understand understood understood
hold held held upset upset upset
hurt hurt hurt wake woke/waked woken/waked
keep kept kept wear wore worn
know knew known win won won
leave left left write wrote written
32 CHAPTER 2
Complete the sentences. Use the simple past of any irregular verb that makes sense.
More than one answer may be possible.
1. Alima walked to the office today. Rebecca -=dr�o��e _____ her car. Olga
________ her bike. Yoko the bus.
2. It got so cold last night that the water in the pond _______
3. Katya had a choice between a blue raincoat and a brown one. She finally
_______ the blue one.
4. My husband gave me a painting for my birthday. I ________ it on a wall in

my office.
5. Last night around midnight, when I was sound asleep, the telephone ________
It _______ me up.
6. The sun _______ at 6:04 this morning and _______ at 6:59 last
night.
7. I _______ an email to my cousin after I finished studying last night.
8. Ms. Morita _______ chemistry at the local high school last year.
9. Oh, my gosh! Call the police! Someone ________ my car!
10. The police _______ the car thieves quickly and ________ them
to jail.
11. The earthquake was strong, and the ground ________ for two minutes.
12. A bird _______ into the grocery store through an open door.
13. My dog _______ a hole in the yard and buried his bone.
14. I don't have any money in my wallet. I _______ it all

yesterday. I'm flat broke.*
15. Ann does funny things. She _______ a tuxedo to her

brother's wedding last week.
*flat broke = completely out of money
PastTime 33
o Exercise 11. Looking at grammar. (Charts 2-1- 2-4)
Create your own chart by writing the simple past, negative, and question forms of the words in
italics. Omit the rest of each sentence.
Simple Past Negative Question
1. He skips lunch. He skivped

N He didn't skip Did he skip
2. They leave early.

3. She does a lot.
4. He is sick.
5. We drive to work.
6. Thu are right.
7. I plan my day.
o Exercise 12. Let's talk: pairwork. (Charts 2-1- 2-4)

Work with a partner. Answer the questions with Yes and a complete sentence.
A broken arm
Imagine that you came to class today with a big cast on your arm. You slipped on some ice
yesterday and fell down.
1. Did you have a bad day yesterday? ---+ �s, I had a bad day yesterday.
2. Did you fall down?
3. Did you hurt yourself when you fell down?
4. Did you break your arm?
5. Did you go to the emergency room?
Change roles.
6. Did you see a doctor?
7. Did you sit in the waiting room for a long time?
8. Did the doctor put a cast on your arm?
9. Did you pay a lot of money?
10. Did you come home exhausted?

Complete the conversations with the correct form of the words in parentheses.
1. A: ( you, sleep) Did y_ou sleep
• well last night?
B: Yes, /did . I (sleep) slevt
I very well.
2. A: (Ella's plan e, arrive) on time yesterday?

B: Yes, . It (get) in at exactly 6:05.
34 CHAPTER 2
3. A: (you, go) _________ away last weekend?
B: No, _______ . I (stay) _______ home because I (feel, not)
_________ good.
4. A: (you,eat) _________ breakfast this morning?

B: No, . I (have, not) _________ enough time. I
was late for class because my alarm clock (ring, not) _________
5. A: (DaVinci,paint) _______________ theMonaLisa?

B: Yes, _______ . He also (paint) _________ other famous
pictures.

Read the facts about each person. Complete the sentences with the correct form of the given
verbs.
SITUATION 1: Whirlwind Wendy is energetic and does everything very quickly. Here is her
typical morning.
Activities:
wake up at 4:00 A.M.
clean her apartment
ride her bike five miles
get vegetables from her garden
watch a cooking show on TV
make soup for dinner
bring her elderly mother a meal
read the day's paper
fix herself lunch
Yesterday, �ndy ...

-��------ up at 4:00 A.M.
-=��---- her car.
_________ her bike ten miles.
--------- vegetables from her garden.
_________ a comedy show on TV.
_________ soup for dinner.
_________ her elderly mother a meal.
_________ a book.
_________ herself a snack.
PastTime 35
SITUATION 2: Sluggish Sam is lazy and slow. He doesn't get much done in a day. Here is his
typical day.
Activities:
sleep for 12 hours come home
wake up at noon lie on the couch
take two hours to eat breakfast think about his busy life
go fishing begin dinner at 8:00
fall asleep on his boat finish dinner at 11 :00
Yesterday, Sam . . .
�==-,�------ for 12 hours.
�=��- - -
- up at 5:00 A.M.
_ _______ two hours to eat breakfast.
_________ hiking.
_________ asleep on his boat.
_________ home.
_________ on his bed.
_________ about his busy life.
________ _
dinner at 5:00.
_________ dinner at 11:00.
o Exercise 15. let's talk: pairwork. (Charts 2- 1 -+ 2-4)

Work with a partner. Partner A tells Partner B to perform an action. After Partner B does
this, A will ask B a question in the past tense.
Example: Open your book.
PARTNER A: Open your book.
PARTNER B: (opens his/her book)
PARTNER A: What did you do?
PARTNER B: I opened my book.
Change roles.
1. Shut your book. 9. Write your name on the board.
2. Stand up. 10. Draw a triangle under your name.
3. Hide your pen. 11. Shake your head "no."
4. Turn to page 10 in your book. 12. Invite our teacher to have lunch with us.
5. Put your book in your lap. 13. Read a sentence from your grammar book.
6. Nod your head "yes." 14. Wave "good-bye."
7. Tear a piece of paper. 15. Ask me for a pencil.
8. Spell the past tense of "speak." 16. Repeat this question: "Which came first:
the chicken or the egg?"
36 CHAPTER 2
0 Exercise 16. Listening. (Charts 2-1- 2-4)
Part I. Did is often reduced at the beginning of questions. The pronoun that follows did may
(J
CD!
also change. Listen to the reduced pronunciations with did.
Track 14
1. Did you ---+ Did-ja Did you forget something?
Did-ya Did you forget something?
2. Didi Dih-di Did I forget something?
Di Did I forget something?
3. Did he Dih-de Did he forget something?
Did he forget something?
-
De
4. Did she ---+ Dih-she Did she forget something?
5. Did we Dih-we Did we forget something?
6. Did they ---+ Dih-they Did they forget something?
Part II. You will hear questions. Complete each answer with the non-reduced form of the verb
you hear.
1. Yes, he did . He cut it with a knife.
2. Yes, she She it all yesterday.
3. Yes, I I them yesterday.
4. Yes, they . They it.
5. Yes, you . You it.
6. Yes, she . She them.
7. Yes, he . He it to him .
8. Yes, I . I them yesterday.
9. Yes, he . He it.
10. Yes, you . You her.
o Exercise 17. Listening. (Charts 2-1--+ 2-4)

Listen to the questions. Complete each answer with the correct form of the verb you hear.
(J
cD 1 Luka wasn't home last night.
Track 15
went ---- to a party last night.

1. Yes, he -='-"----
2. Yes, he _______ a good time.
3. Yes, he _______ a lot of food.
4. Yes, he _____ __ a lot of soda.
5. Yes, he _ ______ some new people.
6. Yes, he _______ hands with them when he met them.
7. Yes, he _______ with friends.
8. Yes, he _______ with his friends and _______
Past Time 37
o Exercise 18. Looking at grammar. (Charts 2-1-+ 2-4)
Rewrite the paragraph. Use the past tense. Begin your new paragraph with �sterday morning.
The Daily News
Every morning, Jake reads the newspaper online. He wants to know the latest news. He
enjoys the business section most. His wife, Eva, doesn't read any newspapers on her computer.
She downloads them on her ebook* reader. She looks at the front pages first. She doesn't have
a lot of time. She finishes the articles later in the day. Both Jake and Eva are very
knowledgeable about the day's events.
D Exercise 19. Ustening. (Charts 2-1-+ 2-4)

IJ
CD l
Part I. Answer the questions. Then listen to the passage with your book closed.
Did you get the flu** last year?

Track 16
Were you very sick?
W hat symptoms did you have?
www.irLanguage.com
Part II. Open your book and read the statements. Circle "T" for true and "F" for false.
1. The flu kills a lot of people worldwide every year. T F

2. The flu virus from 1918 to 1920 was a usual flu virus. T F
3. Most of the people who died were very young or very old. T F
Part Ill. Listen to the passage again. Complete the sentences with the words you hear.
A Deadly Flu
Every year, the flu -----'------- 200,000 to 300,000 people around the world. But in
1918, a very strong flu virus ______ millions of people. This flu ______ m
3
1918 and ______ until 1920. It ______ around the world, and between
4 5
20 million and 100 million people _____ Unlike other flu viruses that usually
______ the very young and the very old, many of the victims ______ healthy
8
young adults. This ______ unusual and ______ people especially afraid.
9 IO
*ebook = electronic book

**the flu = the influenza virus; symptoms usually include fever, aches, tiredness, cough, and runny nose.
38 CHAPTER 2
0 Exercise 20. Warm-up: listening. (Chart 2-5)
(J
Part I. Listen to each pair of verbs. Decide if the verb endings have the same sound or a
different sound.
CD I
Track 17
Example: You will hear: plays played
You will choose: same
�
1. same different 3. same different
Part II. Listen to the sentences. They contain past tense verbs. What sound does the -ed
ending have: /ti, /di, or /;,d/?
Example: You will hear: Jack played a game of tennis.
You will choose: /ti
(@) /;,d/
1. /ti /di fad/ 3. /ti /di /;,di
2. /ti /di /;,di 4. /ti /di fad/
2-5 Regular Verbs: Pronunciation of -ed Endings

(a) talked = talk/ti final -ed is pronounced /ti after voiceless sounds.
stopped = stop/ti You make a voiceless sound by pushing air through your mouth.
hissed = hiss/ti No sound comes from your throat.
watched = watch/ti Examples of voiceless sounds: /kl, /p/, /s/, /ch/, /sh/.
washed = wash/ti
(b) called = call/di Final -ed is pronounced /d/ after voiced sounds.
rained = rain/di You make a voiced sound from your throat. Your voice box vibrates.
lived = live/di Examples of voiced sounds: /1/, /n/, /v/, lb/, and all vowel sounds.
robbed = rob/di
stayed = stay/di
(c) waited = waitldd/ Final -ed is pronounced /,;,d/ after "t" and "d" sounds.
needed = need/dd/ Adding fad/ adds a syllable to a word.
o Exercise 21. Ustening. (Chapter 1 and Chart 2-5)

{J Listen to each sentence and choose the verb form you hear.
co 1 Example: You will hear: I needed more help.
8
Track 18
You will choose: need needs

1. agree agrees agreed 5. end ends ended
2. agree agrees agreed 6. stop stops stopped
3. arrive arrives arrived 7. touch touches touched
4. explain explains explained
PastTime 39
o Exercise 22. Listening. (Chapter 1 and Chart 2-5)
{} Listen to each sentence and choose the correct completion.
cD 1 Example: You will hear: We worked in small groups ...
Track 19
You will choose: right now.

�
1. every day. yesterday.
2. right now. last week.
3. six days a week. yesterday.
4. now. last weekend.
0 Exercise 23. Listening and pronunciation. (Chart 2-5)

Listen to the past tense pronunciation of each word. Write the -ed ending you hear: It!, Id!, or
{}
CD!
fad/. Practice pronouncing the verbs.
Track20
1. cooked It I 5. started I I 9. added I I
2. served I I 6. dropped I I 10. passed I I
3. wanted I I 7. pulled I I 11. returned I I
4. asked I I 8. pushed I I 12. pointed I I
0 Exercise 24. Let's listen and talk. (Charts 2-1 -> 2-5)
{}
CD!
Part I. Listen to the conversation between two friends about their weekends and answer the
questions.
Track 21
1. One person had a good weekend. Why?

2. His friend didn't have a good weekend. Why not?
40 CHAPTER 2 [R
irLanguage.com
Part II. Complete the conversation with your partner. Use past tense verbs. Practice saying it
until you can do it without looking at your book. Then change roles and create a new
conversation. Perform one of the conversations for the class.
A: Did you have a good weekend?
B: Yeah, I ----------------------------�
A: Really? That sounds like fun!
B: It ______ great! I ----------------------
How about you? How was your weekend?
B: Did you have a good time?

A: Yes. I No. I Not really.
o Exercise 25. Warm- up. (Chart 2-6)

Match the sentences in Column A with the descriptions in Column B.
Column A ColumnB
1. I looked at the limousine. a. First I looked at the limousine.
The movie star was waving Then the movie star waved.
out the window. b. First the movie star began waving.
2. I looked at the limousine. Then I looked at the limousine.
The movie star waved at me.
PostTime 41
2-6 Simple Past and Past Progressive
I
Simple Past (a) Mary walked downtown yesterday. The SIMPLE PAST is used to talk about
(b) I slept for eight hours last night. an activity or situation that began and
*
ended at a particular time in the past
(e.g., yesterday, last night, two days
ago, in 2007), as in (a) and (b).
I
Past Progressive (c) I sat down at the dinner table at The PAST PROGRESSIVE expresses an
6:00 P.M. yesterday. Tom came to activity that was in progress ( was
my house at 6:10 P.M. occurring, was happening) at a point
\.f
I was eating dinner when Tom of time in the past (e.g., at 6:10) or at
j
.. came. the time of another action (e.g., when
(d) I went to bed at 10:00. The phone Tom came).
rang at 11:00. In (c): eating was in progress at 6:10;
I was sleeping when the phone eating was in progress when Tom
rang. came.
FORM: was/were + -ing
(e) When the phone rang, I was sleeping. when = at that time
(f) The phone rang while I was sleeping. while = during that time
Examples (e) and (f) have the same meaning.
Forms of the Past Progressive
STATEMENT I, She, He, It was working.

You, We, They were worlcing.
NEGATIVE I, She, He, It was not(wasn't) working.

You, We, They were not (weren't) working.
QUESTION Was I, she, he, it working?

Were you, we, they working?
SHORT ANSWER Yes, I, she, he, it was. Yes, you, we, they were.
No, I, she, he, it wasn't. No, you, we, they weren't.
42 CHAPIER2
Complete each sentence with the simple past or past progressive form of the verb(s) in
parentheses.
irLanguage.com
1. At 6:00 P.M. Robert sat down at the table and began to eat. At 6:05, Robert (eat)
was eatin@ dinner.
2. While Robert (eat) dinner, Ann (come) _______

through the door.
3. In other words, when Ann (come) ___ ____ through the door, Robert (eat)
_________ dinner.
4. Robert went to bed at 10:30. At 11:00, Robert (sleep) _________
5. While Robert (sleep) _____ ____ , his cell phone (ring) _______
6. In other words, when his cell phone (ring) _______ , Robert (sleep)
7. Robert left his house at 8:00 A.M. and (begin) to walk to class.
8. While he (walk) to class, he (see)

Mr. Ito.
9. When Robert (see) Mr. Ito, he (stand) in his

driveway. He (hold) a broom.
10. Mr. Ito (wave) to Robert when he (see) him.
PastTime 43
Complete the sentences, orally or in writing, using the information in the chart. Use the
simple past for one clause and the past progressive for the other.
Activity in Progress Beth David Lily

sit in a cafe order a salad pay a few bills spill coffee on her lap
stand in an elevator send a text message run into an old friend drop her glasses
swim in the ocean avoid a shark saw a dolphin find a shipwreck
1. While Beth was sittin@ in a cafe, she ordered a salad.
2. David •Qaid a few bills while he was sittin@ in a cafe.
3. Lily coffee on her lap while she in a cafe.
4. While Beth in an elevator, she a text

message on her cell phone.
5. David an old friend while he man

elevator.
6. Lily her glasses while she man

elevator.
7. Beth a shark while she in the ocean.
8. While David in the ocean, he a dolphin.
9. While Lily in the ocean, she a shipwreck.
44 CHAPTER 2
Your teacher will tell two students to perform a task. After they do, two other students will
describe it. Only the teacher's book is open.
Example: To A: Write on the board. ToB: Open the door.
To STUDENT A: Please write your name on the board. (Student A writes on the board.)
What are you doing?
STUDENT A: I'm writing on the board.
TEACHER: Good. Keep writing.
To STUDENTB: Open the door. (Student B opens the door.) What did you just do?
STUDENTB: I opened the door.
To STUDENT A: Please stop writing.
To STUDENT C: Describe the two actions that just occurred, using when.
STUDENT C: When ( __ ) opened the door, ( __ ) was writing on the board.
To STUDENT D: Now describe the actions, using while.

STUDENT D: While ( __ ) was writing on the board, ( __ ) opened the door.
1. To A: Write a note to ( __ ) . ToB: Knock on the door.

2. To A: Read your book. ToB: Take ( __ ) 's grammar book.
3. To A: Look at me. ToB: Leave the room.
4. To A: Put your head on your desk. ToB: Drop your pencil.
5. To A: Look under your desk. ToB: Begin doing your homework.

Read each pair of sentences and answer the question.
1. a. Julia was eating breakfast. She heard the breaking news* report.
b. Sara heard the breaking news report. She ate breakfast.
QUESTION: Who heard the news report during breakfast?
2. a. Carlo was fishing at the lake. A fish was jumping out of the water.
b. James was fishing at the lake. A fish jumped out of the water.
QUESTION: Who saw a fish jump just one time?
3. a. When the sun came out, Paul walked home.

b. When the sun came out, Vicky was walking home.
QUESTION: Who walked home after the sun came out?
*breaking news = a special news report on the TV or radio
Pastnme 45
o Exercise 30. Reading. (Chart 2-6)
Read the passage and then read the statements. Circle "T" for true and "F" for false.
The First Cell Phone
The first cell phone call took place* in 1973. A man named Martin Cooper made the first
call. He was working for the Motorola communications company. When Cooper placed the
call, he was walking down a street in New York. People stared at him and wondered about his
behavior. This was before cordless phones,** so it looked very strange.
It took another ten years before Motorola had a phone to sell to the public. That phone
weighed about a pound (.45 kilogram), and it was very expensive. Now, as you know, cell
phones are small enough to put in a pocket, and millions of people around the world have them.
1. A customer for Motorola made the first cell phone call. T F

2. Many people looked at Cooper when he was talking on the phone. T F
3. In the 1970s, cordless phones were very popular. T F
4. A few years after the first call, Motorola sold phones to the public. T F
5. The first cell phone was very small. T F

{J listen to each conversation. Then listen again and complete the sentences with the words you hear.
co I At a checkout stand in a grocery store
Track 22
1. A: Hi. what you needed?

B: Almost everything. I _________ for sticky rice, but I
--------- it.
A: ______ on aisle 10, in the Asian food section.
2. A: This is the express lane. Ten items only. It ______ like you have more than
ten. _______ count them?
B: I _______ I ______ ten. Oh, I ________ I have more.
Sorry.
A: The checkout stand next to me is open.
3. A: ___________ any coupons you wanted to use?

B: I ______ a couple in my purse, but I can't find them now.
A: What they for? I might have some extras here.
B: One ______ for eggs, and the other ______ for ice cream.
A: I think I have those.
*take place = occur, happen
**cordless phones = phones without cords to the receiver
46 CHAPTER 2
Underline the present progressive and past progressive verbs in the following conversations.
Discuss the way they are used. What are the similarities between the two tenses?
1. A: Where are Jan and Mark? Are they on vacation?
B: Yes, they're traveling in Kenya for a few weeks.
2. A: I invited Jan and Mark to my birthday party, but they didn't come.
B: Why not?
A: T hey were on vacation. T hey were traveling in Kenya.
3. A: What was I talking about when the phone interrupted me? I forget!
B: You were describing the Web site you found on the Internet yesterday.
4. A: I missed the beginning of the news report. What's the announcer talking about?
B: She's describing damage from the earthquake in Pakistan.
o Exercise 33. Looking at grammar. (Chapter 1 and Charts 2-1 -• 2-6)

Complete the sentences. Use the simple present, present progressive, simple past, or past
progressive form of the verbs in parentheses.
Part I.
Right nowToshi and Oscar (sit) are sittin@ in the library. Toshi (do)
_______ his homework, but Oscar (study, not) . He

3
(stare) _________ out the window. Toshi (want) _______ to know
5
what Oscar (look) _________ at.
Tosm: Oscar, what (you, look) ___________ at?

7
OSCAR: I (watch) _________ the skateboarder. Look at that
guy in the orange shirt. He (turn) _________ around

9
in circles on his back wheels. He's amazing!
TosHI: It (be) _______ easier than it (look) _______

10 11
I can teach you some skateboarding basics if you'd like.
OscAR: Great! T hanks!
Part II.
YesterdayToshi and Oscar (sit) were sitting in the library. Toshi (do)
12
_______ his homework, but Oscar (study, not) . He
13 14
(stare) _________ out the window. Toshi (want) _______ to know
15 16
what Oscar (look) _________ at. Oscar (point) _______ to the
17 18
skateboarder. He (say) _______ that he was amazing. Toshi (offer)
19
_______ to teach him some skateboarding basics.
20
PastTime 47
Check (I') the sentences that have this meaning:
First action: We gathered our bags.
Second action: The train arrived at the station.
1. __ We gathered our bags before the train arrived at the station.
2. __ Before the train arrived at the station, we gathered our bags.
3. __ After we gathered our bags, the train arrived at the station.
4. __ As soon as the train arrived at the station, we gathered our bags.
5. __ We didn't &ather our bags until the train arrived at the station.
2·7 Expressing Past Time: Using Time Clauses

time clause main clause After I finished my work= a time clause*
(a) After I finished my work, I went to bed. I went to bed = a main clause
Examples (a) and (b) have the same meaning.
main clause time clause
(b) '/ went to bed' 'after I finished my work.' A time clause can
(1) come in front of a main clause, as in (a).
(2) follow a main clause, as in (b).
(c) I went to bed after I finished my work. These words introduce time clauses:
after
(d) Before I went to bed, I finished my work.
before
(e) I stayed up until I finished my work. until
+ subject and verb = a time clause
as soon as
(f) As soon as I finished my work, I went to bed. while
when
(g) The phone rang while I was watching TV.
(h) When the phone rang, I was watching TV. In (e): until= to that time and then no longer**
In (f): as soon as = immediately after
PUNCTUATION: Put a comma at the end of a time clause

when the time clause comes first in a sentence (comes in
front of the main clause):
time clause + comma + main clause
main clause + no comma + time clause
( i ) When the phone rang, I answered it. In a sentence with a time clause introduced by when, both
the time clause verb and the main verb can be simple
past. In this case, the action in the when-clause
happened first.
In (i): First: The phone rang.
Then: I answered it.
(j) While I was doing my homework, my In (j): When two actions are in progress at the same time,
roommate was watching TV. the past progressive can be used in both parts of the
sentence.
*A clause is a structure that has a subject and a verb.
**Until can also be used to say that something does NOT happen before a particular time: I didn't go to bed until Ifinished n-ry work.
48 CHAPTER 2
Check (,/) all the clauses. Remember: a clause must have a subject and a complete verb.
1. __ applying for a visa
2. __ while the woman was applying for a visa
3. __ the man took passport photos
4. __ when the man took passport photos
5. as soon as he finished
6. he needed to finish
7. __ after she sent her application
8. __ sending her application

Underline the clauses. Then decide what happened first (1) and what happened second (2).
2
1. a. After the taxi dropped me off, I remembered my coat in the backseat.
b. I remembered my coat in the backseat after the taxi dropped me off.
2. a. Before I got out of the taxi, I double-checked the address.

b. Before I double-checked the address, I got out of the taxi.
3. a. As soon as I tipped the driver, he helped me with my luggage.

b. As soon as the driver helped me with my luggage, I tipped him.

Combine each set of sentences into one sentence by using a time clause. Discuss correct
punctuation.
1. First: I got home.
Then: I ate dinner.
After I @Qt home, I ate dinner.

-�/ a=t=e�d=in=n=e�r __ after l@ot home.
2. First: I unplugged the coffee pot.

Then: I left my apartment this morning.
Before----------------------------�
______________ before -------------�
3. First: I lived on a farm.
Then: I was seven years old.
Until -----------------------------
--------------- until---------------
Past Time 49
4. First: I heard the doorbell.
Then: I opened the door.
5. First: It begari to rain.

Then: I stood under my umbrella.
6. At the same time: I was lying in bed with the flu.

My friends were swimming at the beach.
While - ---------------------------
--------------- while _______________
o Exercise 38. Looking at grammar. (Charts 2- 1 - 2-7)

Complete the sentences. Use the simple past or the past progressive form of the verbs in
parentheses. Use brackets to identify the time clauses.
1. My mom called me around 5:00. My husband came home a little after that. [When he
(get) got home,] I (talk) was talking to my mom on the phone.
2. I (buy) _______ a small gift before I (go) _______ to the hospital

yesterday to visit my friend.
3. Yesterday afternoon I (go) _______ to visit the Lopez family. When I (get)
_______ there, Mrs. Lopez (be) in the yard. She (plant)
_________ flowers. Mr. Lopez (be) _______ in the garage.
He (change) _________ the oil on his car. The kids (play)
_______ in the front yard. In other words, while Mr. Lopez (change)
_________ the oil in the car, the kids (throw) _________
a ball in the yard.
4. I (hit) _______ my thumb while I (use) _______ the hammer.

Ouch! That (hurt) _______
5. As soon as we (hear) _______ about the hurricane, we (begin)

_______ to get ready for the storm.
6. It was a long walk home. Mr. Chu (get) _______ tired and (stop)
_______ after an hour. He (rest) until he (feel )
_______ strong enough to continue.
50 CHAPTER 2
D· Exercise 39. Ustening. (Chapter 1 and Charts 2� 1- 2-7)
"1 Listen to the passage with your book closed. Then listen again and complete the sentences
t:!I with the words you hear.
CDI
Tn,ck 23
Jennifer's Problem
Jennifer ______ for an insurance company. When people ______ help

2
with their car insurance, they ______ her. Right now it is 9:05 A.M., and Jennifer
3
_________ at her desk.
She _____ to work on time this morning. Yesterday Jennifer _____ late
5
to work because she _____ _ a minor auto accident. While she _________
8
to work, her cell phone ______ . She _______ for it.
9 10
While she _________ for her phone, Jennifer ______ control of the
11 12
car. Her car ______ into a row of mailboxes beside the road and _______
13 14
Fortunately no one was hurt in the accident.
Jennifer ______ okay, but her car ______ . It ______ repairs.
15 16 17
Jennifer very embarrassed now. She ______ a bad decision, especially
18 19
since it is illegal to talk on a cell phone and drive at the same time where she lives.

Part I. Think about your experiences when you were a beginning learner of English.
Check (./) the statements that are true for you.
When I was a beginning learner of English, . . .
1. __ I remained quiet when someone asked me a question.
2. __ I checked my dictionary frequently.
3. __ I asked people to speak very, very slowly.
4. __ I translated sentences into my language a lot.
Part II. Look at the sentences you checked. Are these statements no longer true? If the
answer is "yes," another way to express your idea is with used to. Which of these sentence(s)
are true for you?
1. I used to remain quiet when someone asked me a question.
2. I used to check my dictionary frequently.
3. I used to ask people to speak very, very slowly.
4. I used to translate sentences into my language a lot.
PestTime 51
2·8 Expressing Past Habit: Used To
(a) I used to /ivewith my parents. Now I live in Used to expresses a past situation or habit that no longer
my own apartment. exists at present.
(b) Ann used to beafraid of dogs, but now she FORM: used to + the simple form of a verb
likes dogs.
(c) Al used to smoke, but he doesn't anymore.
(d ) Didyou used to /ivein Paris? QUESTION FORM: did +·subject + used to

(oR Didyou use to livein Paris?) (oR did+ subject+ use to)*
(e) I didn't used to drinkcoffee at breakfast, but NEGATIVE FORM: didn't used to
now I always have coffee in the morning. (OR didn't use to)*
(OR I didn't use to drinkcoffee.)
Didn't use(d) to occurs infrequently. More commonly,
( f ) I never used to drink coffee at breakfast, but people use never to express a negative idea with used to,
now I always have coffee in the morning. as in (f ).
*Both forms (used to and use to) are possible in questions and negatives. English language authorities do not agree on which is
preferable. This book uses both forms.

Make sentences with a similar meaning by using used to. Some of the sentences are negative,
and some of them are questions.
1. When I was a child, I was shy. Now I'm not shy.
I used to be shy, but now I'm not.
2. When I was young, I thought that people over 40 were old.

I ___________ that people over 40 were old.
3. Now you live in this city. Where did you live before you came here?
Where ______________ ?
4. Did you work for the phone company at some time in the past?
______________ for the phone company?
5. When I was younger, I slept through the night. I never woke up in the middle of the night.
I ______ _ _ _ _ _ _
_ in the middle of the night, but now I do.
I through the night, but now I don't.
6. When I was a child, I watched cartoons on TV. I don't watch cartoons anymore. Now I watch
news programs.
I ____________ cartoons on TV, but I don't anymore.
I news programs, but now I do.
7. How about you?

What --------------- on TV when you were little?
52 CHAPTER 2
o Exercise 42. Interview: find someone who .•... (Chart 2-8)
Walk around the classroom. Make a question with used to for each item. When you find a
person who says ''yes," write down his/her name and go on to the next question. Share a few
of your answers with the class.
Find someone who used to . . .
1. play in the mud. ---+ Did you use to play in the mud?
2. play with dolls or toy soldiers.
3. roller skate.
4. swing on a rope swing.
5. catch frogs or snakes.
6. get into trouble at school.
7. dress up in your mother's or father's clothes.
0 Exercise 43. Listening. (Chart 2-8>

.. 0
CD!
Used to is often pronounced "usta." Listen to the examples. T hen complete the sentences
with the non-reduced words you hear.
Tr.,ck 24
Examples: I used to (usta) ride my bike to work, but now I take the bus.
I didn't used to (usta) be late when I rode my bike to work.
Did you use to (usta) ride your bike to work?
1. I used to stay up past midnight, but now I often go to bed at 10:00 because I
have an 8:00 class.
2. What time _____________ to bed when you were a child?
3. Tom _________ tennis after work every day, but now he doesn't.
4. I _________ breakfast, but now I always have something to eat in the

morning because I read that students who eat breakfast do better in school.
5. I ---------------- grammar, but now I do.
o Exercise 44. Check your knowledge. (Chart 2-8>

Edit the sentences. Correct the errors in verb tense usage.
live
1. Alex used to � in Cairo.
2. Junko used to worked for an investment company.
3. Margo was used to teach English, but now she works at a publishing company.
4. Where you used to live?
5. I didn't was used to get up early, but now I do.
6. Were you used to live in Singapore?
7. My family used to going to the beach every weekend, but now we don't.
Past Time 53
o Exercise 45. Let's read and write. (Chapter 2)
Part I. Read the passage about a famous author. Then read the statements. Circle "T" for
true and "F" for false.
J. K. Rowling
Did you know that J. K. Rowling used to be an English language teacher before she
became successful as the author of the Harry Potter series? She taught English to students in
Portugal. She lived there from 1991 to 1994. During that time, she also worked on her first
Harry Potter book.
After she taught in Portugal, she went back to Scotland. By then she was a single mother
with a young daughter. She didn't have much money, but she didn't want to return to teaching
until she completed her book. Rowling enjoyed drinking coffee, so she did much of her writing
in a cafe while her daughter took naps. She wrote quickly, and when her daughter was three,
Rowling finished Harry Potter and the Philosopher's Stone.*
Many publishers were not interested in her book. She doesn't remember how many
rejection letters she got, maybe twelve. Finally a small publishing company, Bloomsbury,
accepted it. Shortly after its publication, the book began to sell quickly, and Rowling soon
became famous. Now there are seven Harry Potter books, and Rowling is one of the wealthiest
and most successful women in the world.
1. Rowling finished the first Harry Potter book in 1993. T F
2. Rowling did a lot of writing in a cafe. T F
3. At first, publishers loved her work. T F
4. Soon after her book came out, many people bought it. T F
5. Rowling still works as a teacher. T F
Part II. Choose a writer or a singer you are interested in. Find information about this person's
life. Make a list of important or interesting events. Put the information into a paragraph. Edit
your verbs carefully.
*In the United States and India, this title was changed to Harry Potter and the Sorcerer's Stone.
54 CHAPTER 2
Which sentences express future meaning? Do the future sentences have the same meaning or a
different meaning?
1. The train is going to leave a few minutes late today.
2. The train left a few minutes late today.
3. The train will leave a few minutes late today.
3-1 Expressing Future Time: Be Going To and Wi'll

Future (a) I am going to leave at nine Be going to and will are used to
tomorrow morning. express future time.
-------11------,X-- . (b) I will leave at nine tomorrow Examples (a) and (b) have the same
morning. meaning.
Sometimes will and be going to
express different meanings. The
differences are discussed in Chart 3-5.
(c) Sam is in his office this morning. Today, tonight, and this +
morning, afternoon, evening,·
(d) Ann was in her office this morning at eight, but now she's at a week, etc., can express present,
meeting. past, or future time, as in
(e) Bob is going to be in his office this morning after h;s dentist (c) through (e).
appointment.
NOTE: The use of shall (with I or we) to express future time is possible but is infrequent and quite formal; for example: I shall leave
at nine tomorrow morning. We shall leave at ten tomorrow morning.
55
/J
il lbercise 2. listening. (Cnalit 3-0
Listen to each sentence. If it expresses future time, circle yes. If it does not, circle no.
en 1 Example: You will hear: The airport will be busy.
:§
Trad:. 2S
�ou will choose: no
At the airport'
1. yes no 5. yes no
2. yes no 6. yes no
3. yes no 7. yes no
4. yes no 8. yes no

Complete these future sentences (be going to) with the correct form of be (+ not). Make
true statements.
l. I _____ going to sleep in* tomorrow morning.
2. Our teacher _____ going to retire next month.
3. We _____ going to have a class party next week.
4. To a student next to you: You _____ going to speak English tomorrow.
3·2 Forms with Be Going To ----- - - -� - -- - -

-- - �- - -
(a) We are going to belate. Be going to is followed by the simple form of the verb,
as in (a) and (b).
(b) She '.s going to cometomorrow.
INCORRECT: She's going to comes tomorrow.
(c) Am I QUESTION FORM: be + subject + going to

Is he, she, it } going to belate?
Are they, we, you
(d) I am not NEGATIVE FORM: be + not + going to

He, She, It is not } going to belate.
They, We, You are not
(e) "Hurry up! We're gonnabe late!" Be going to is more common in speaking and informal
writing than in formal writing. In informal speaking, it is
sometimes pronounced "gonna" /g�m�/. "Gonna" is not
usually a written form.
*sleep in = sleep late; not wake up early in the morning
56 CM�PTER ,3
Complete the sentences with a form of be going to and the words in parentheses.
1. A: What (you) do) are you @Oin@ to do
B: I ( pick) ------------- up a prescription at the pharmacy.
2. A: Where (Alex) go) _________ after work?

B: He (stop) ----------- -- ---- at the post office and run
some other errands.*
3. A: (you) finish) ----------------- the project soon?

B: Yes, (finish) - -- ------------ it by noon today.
4. A: What (Dr. Ahmad) talk) ---- ------------- about in her

lecture tonight?
B: She (discuss) ------------- how to reduce health-care costs.
5. A: When (you) call) --------------- your sister?

B: I (call) not) --------------- her. I (text) _______
her.
o Exercise 5. Let's talk: pairwork. (Charts 3-1 and 3-2)

Work with a partner. Take turns asking and answering questions with be going to.
Example: what\ you\ do \ after class?
SPEAKER A: What are you going to do after class?
SPEAKER B: I'm going to get a bite to eat** after class.
Example: you\ watch TV\ tonight?
SPEAKER A: Are you going to watch TV tonight?
SPEAKER B: Yes, I'm going to watch TV tonight. OR No, I'm not going to watch TV tonight.
1. where\ you\ go\ after your last class\ today?
2. what time\ you\ wake up \ tomorrow?
3. what\ you\ have\ for breakfast\ tomorrow?
4. you\ be\ home\ this evening?
5. where\ you\ be\ next year?
6. you\ become\ famous\ some day?
7. you\ take\ a trip\ sometime next year?
8. you\ do\ something unusual\ in the near future?
*run errands = go somewhere to pick up or deliver something
**get a bite to eat = get something to eat
Future Time 57
o Exercise 6. Ustening. (Charts 3-1 and 3-2) -. ·
{J Part I. Listen to the pronunciation of the reduced forms of going to in the conversation.
co• Looking for an apartment

Tndt26
A: We're going to look for an apartment to rent this weekend.

B: Are you going to look in this area?
A: No, we're going to search in an area closer to our jobs.
B: Is the rent going to be cheaper in that area?
A: Yes, apartment rents are definitely going to be cheaper.
B: Are you going to need to pay a deposit?
A: I'm sure we're going to need to pay the first and last month's rent.
Part II. Listen to the conversation and write the non-reduced form of the words you hear.
A: Where are y,ou <4.Qina. to move to?

1
B: We look for something outside the city. We
spend the weekend apartment-hunting.*
A: What fees need to pay?
B: I think we need to pay the first and last month's rent.
A: there be other fees?

7
B: There probably be an application fee and a
8 9
cleaning fee. Also, the landlord _____ probably _______ run a
10 11
credit check,** so we _________ need to pay for that.
12
o Exercise 7. Lers talk: interview.

(Chapters 1 and 2; Charts 3-1 and 3-2)
Walk around the room. Ask and answer questions using what + do + the given time
expression. Share some of your classmates' answers with the class.
Example: this evening
SPEAKER A: What are you going to do this evening?
SPEAKER B: I'm going to get on the Internet for a while.
1. yesterday 6. the day before yesterday

2. tomorrow 7. the day after tomorrow
3. right now 8. last week
4. every day 9. every week
5. a week from now 10. this weekend
*apanmen c-lnauing = looking for an aparunent
**nm a credil check = get information about a person's financial history including the employer's name, one's income, the
amount of money in the bank, and a history of late or unpaid bills
58 CHAPTER 3
o Exercise 8. Let's talk: pairwork. (Chapters 1 and 2; Charts 3-1 and 3-2)
Work with a partner. Complete the conversation with your own words. Be creative! The
conversation reviews the forms (statement, negative, question, short answer) of the simple
present, simple past, and be going to.
Example:
SPEAKER A: I rode a skateboard to school yesterday.
SPEAKER B: Really? Wow! Do you ride a skateboard to school often?
SPEAKER A: Yes, I do. I ride a skateboard to school almost every day.
Did you ride a skateboard to school yesterday?
SPEAKER B: No, I didn't. I came by helicopter.
SPEAKER A: Are you going to come to school by helicopter tomorrow?
SPEAKER B: No,I'm not. I'm going to ride a motorcycle to school tomorrow.
A: I yesterday.
B: Really? Wow! you often?
A: Yes,I .I almost every day.
you yesterday?
B: No,I .I
A: Are you tomorrow?
B: No,I . I tomorrow.

Complete the sentences with will or won't.
1. It _____ rain tomorrow.
2. We _____ study Chart 3-3 next.

3. I _____ teach the class next week.
4. To your teacher: You _____ need to assign homework for tonight.
Future Time 59
3.3 Forms with Will
STATEMENT I, You, She, He, It, We, They will come tomorrow.
NEGATIVE I, You, She, He, It, We, They will not (won't) come tomorrow.
QUESTION Will I, you, she, he, it, we, they come tomorrow?
SHORT Yes, will.*

} I, you, she, he, it, we, they {
ANSWER No, won't.
CON TRACTIONS I'// she'// we'll Will is usually contracted with pronouns in both
you'// he'// they'// speech and informal writing.
it'//
Bob + will = ''Bob'//" Will is often contracted with nouns in speech, but
the teacher + will = "the teacher'//" usually not in writing.
*Pronouns are NOT contracted with helping verbs in short answers.
CORRECT: }fa, I will.
INCORRECT: res, I'll.
D Exercise 10. Ustening. (Chart 3-3)

Part I. Listen to the pronunciation of contractions with will in these sentences.
(J
CD! 1. I'll be ready to leave soon.
Track 27
2. You'll need to come.
3. He'll drive us.
4. She'll come later.
5. We'll get there a little late.
6. They'll wait for us.
Part II. Listen to the sentences and write the contractions you hear.
1. Don't wait up for me tonight. �'�/' __

/ be home late.
2. I paid the bill this morning. ________ get my check in the next day or two.
3. We have the better team. _______ probably win the game.
4. Henry twisted his ankle while running down a hill. _______ probably take a
break from running this week.
5. We can go to the beach tomorrow, but ------- probably be too cold to go

swimming.
6. I invited some guests for dinner. ________ probably get here around seven.
7. Karen is doing volunteer work for a community health-care clinic this week.
_______ be gone a lot in the evenings.
60 CHAPTER 3
CR
ir Language.com
{J Part I. Listen to the sentences. Notice the pronunciation of contractions with nouns + will.
co • At the doctor's office

Track 28
1. The doctor'll be with you in a few minutes.

2. Your appointment'll take about an hour.
3. Your fever'll be gone in a few days.
4. Your stitches'll disappear over the next two weeks.
5. The nurse'll schedule your tests.
6. The lab'll have the results next week.
7. The receptionist at the front desk'll set up* your next appointment.
Part II.Listen to the sentences and write the words you hear. Write the full form of the
contractions.
At the pharmacy
1. Your prescription will be
-'-'--=-"-"'--- ready in ten minutes.
2. The medicine _________ you feel a little tired.
3. The pharmacist __________ your doctor's office.
4. This cough syrup ---------- your cough.
5. Two aspirin __________ enough.
6. The generic** drug __________ less.
7. This information __________ all the side effects*** for this medicine.
o Exercise 12. Warm· up. (Chart 3-4)

How certain is the speaker in each sentence? Write the percentage next to each sentence:
100%, 90%, or 50%.
W'hat is going to happen to gasoline prices?
1. Gas prices may rise.
2. Maybe gas prices will rise.
3. Gas prices will rise.
4. Gas prices will probably rise.
5. Gas prices are going to rise.
6. Gas prices won't rise.
*set up= schedule
**generic = medicine with no brand name

***side effects = reactions, often negative, that a patient can have from a medicine
Future Time 61
3.4 Certainty About the Future www.irLanguage.com
100% sure (a) I will be in class tomorrow. In (a): The speaker uses will or be going to
OR because he feels sure about his future activity.
I am going to be in class tomorrow. He is stating a fact about the future.
90% sure (b) Po will probably be in class tomorrow. In (b): The speaker uses probably to say that
OR he expects Po to be in class tomorrow, but he is
Po is probably going to be in class not 100% sure. He's almost sure, but not
tomorrow. completely sure.
(c) Anna probably won't be in class tomorrow. Word order with probably:*
OR (1) in a statement, as in (b):
Anna probably isn't going to be in class helping verb + probably
tomorrow. (2) with a negative verb, as in (c):
probably + helping verb
50% sure (d) Ali may come to class tomorrow. May expresses a future possibility: maybe
OR something will happen, and maybe it won't
Ali may not come to class tomorrow. happen.**
I don't know what he's going to do. In (d): The speaker is saying that maybe Ali will
come to class, or maybe he won't come to class.
The speaker is guessing.
(e) Maybe Ali will come to class, and maybe Maybe + will/be going to gives the same
he won't. meaning as may.
OR Examples (d) and (e) have the same meaning.
Maybe Ali is going to come to class, and
maybe he isn't. Maybe comes at the beginning of a sentence.
*Probably is a midsemence adverb. See Chart 1-3, p. 10, for more information about the placement of midsemence adverbs.
**See Chart 7-3, p. 182, for more information about may.

{J Listen to the sentences. Decide how certain the speaker is in each one: 100%, 90%, or 50%.
co I Example: You will hear: The bank will be open tomorrow.
Track 29
You will write: 100%
My day tomorrow
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
62 CHAPTER 3
o Exercise 14. Looking at grammar. (Chart 3-4) "-!
For each situation, predict what probably will happen and what probably won't happen. Use
either will or be going to. Include probably in your prediction.
1. Antonio is late to class almost every day.
(be on time tomorrow? be late again?)
-+Antonio probably won't be on time tomorrow. He'll probably be late again.
2. Rosa has a terrible cold. She feels miserable.
(go to work tomorrow? stay home and rest?)
3. Sarni didn't sleep at all last night.
(go to bed early tonight? stay up all night again tonight?)
4. Gina loves to run, but right now she has sore knees and a sore ankle.
(run in the mara.thon race this week? skip the race?)

Rewrite the sentences using the words in parentheses.
1. I may be late. (maybe)
Maybe I will be late.
2. Lisa may not get here. (maybe)
3. Maybe you will win the contest. (may)
4. The plane may land early. (maybe)
5. Maybe Sergio won't pass the class. (may)
o Exercise 16. Let's talk: interview. (Chart 3-4)

Walk around the room. Ask and answer questions. Ask two classmates each question. Answer
the questions using will, be going to, or may. Include probably or maybe as appropriate.
Share some of your classmates' answers with the class.
Example: What will you do after class tomorrow?
--+ I'll probably go back to my apartment. OR I'm not sure. I may go to the bookstore.
1. What will the weather be like tomorrow?

2. Where will you be tomorrow afternoon?
3. What are you going to do on your next vacation?
4. Who will be the most famous celebrity next year?
5. What will a phone look like ten years from now?
6. Think about forms of communication (like email, social websites, phone, texting, etc.).
What do you think will be the most common form ten years from now?
7. When do you think scientists will discover a cure for cancer?
Future Time 63
IJ agree
Think about life 100 years from now. What will it be like? Listen to each sentence. Do you
or disagree? Circle yes or no. Discuss your answers.
CD I
Track 30
Predictions about the future
1. yes no 6. yes no
2. yes no 7. yes no
3. yes no 8. yes no
4. yes no 9. yes no
5. yes no 10. yes no
o Exercise 18. Reading, grammar, and speaking. (Chart 3-4)

Part I. Read the passage.
An Old Apartment
Ted and Amy live in an old, run-down apartment and want to move. The building is old
and has a lot of problems. The ceiling leaks when it rains. The faucets drip. The toilet doesn't
always flush properly. The windows don't close tightly, and heat escapes from the rooms in the
winter. In the summer, it is very hot because there is no air conditioner.
Their apartment is in a dangerous part of town. Ted and Amy both take the bus to work
and have to walk a long distance to the bus stop. Their apartment building doesn't have
laundry facilities, so they also have to walk to a laundromat to wash their clothes. They are
planning to have children in the near future, so they want a park or play area nearby for their
children. A safe neighborhood is very important.
Part II. Ted and Amy are thinking about their next apartment and are making a list of what
they want and don't want. Complete the sentences with will or won't.
Our next apartment
1. It won't have leaky faucets.
2. The toilet _____ flush properly.
64 CHAPTER 3
3. It have windows that close tightly.
4. There be air-conditioning for hot days.
5. It be in a dangerous part of town.
6. It be near a bus stop.
7. There be laundry facilities in the building.
8. We need to walk to a laundromat.
9. A play area be nearby.
Part Ill. Imagine you are moving to a new home. Decide the six most important things you
want your home to have (It will have . .. ). You can brainstorm ideas in small groups and then
discuss your ideas with the class.

In which conversation does Speaker B have a prior plan (a plan made before the moment of
speaking)?
1. A: Oh, are you leaving?
B: Yes. I'm going to pick up my children at school. They have dentist appointments.
2. A: Excuse me, Mrs.Jones. The nurse from your son's school is on the phone. He's got a
fever and needs to go home.
B: Okay. Please let them know I'll be there in 20 minutes.
3.5 Be Going To vs. Will

(a) She is going to succeedbecause she works Be going to and will mean the same when they are
hard. used to make predictions about the future.
(b) She will succeed because she works hard. Examples (a) and (b) have the same meaning.
(c) I bought some wood because I am going to build Be going to (but not will) is used to express a prior
a bookcase for my apartment. plan (i.e., a plan made before the moment of
speaking).
In (c): The speaker plans to build a bookcase.
(d) This chair is too heavy for you to carry alone. Will (but not be going to) is used to express a
I 'II hefpyou. decision the speaker makes at the moment of
speaking.
In (d): The speaker decides or volunteers to help at
the immediate present moment; he did not have a prior
plan or intention to help.
Future Time 65
0 Exercise 20. Looking at grammar. (Charts 3-1 - 3-5)
Discuss the italicized verb(s). Is the speaker expressing plans made before the moment of
speaking (prior plans)? If so, circle yes. If not, circle no.
PRIOR Pl.AN?
1. A: Did you return Carmen's phone call?
B: No, I forgot. Thanks for reminding me. I'll call her right away. yes no
2. A: I'm going to call Martha later this evening. Do you want to talk to
her too? yes no
B: No, I don't think so.
3. A: Jakob is in town for a few days.
B: Really? Great! I'll give him a call. Is he staying at his Aunt Lara's? yes no
4. A: Alex is in town for a few days.
B: I know. He called me yesterday. We're going to get together for dinner
after I get off work tonight. yes no
5. A: I need some fresh air. I'm going for a short walk.
B: I'll come with you. yes no
6. A: I'm going to take Hamid to the airport tomorrow morning.
Do you want to come along? yes no
B: Sure.
7. A: We're going to go to Uncle Scott's over the break. yes no
Are you interested in coming with us?
B: Gee, I don't know. I'll think about it. W hen do you need to know? yes no
o -Exercise 21 .. Looking at grammar. (Charts 3-1- 3-5)

Restate the sentences orally or in writing. Use be going to.
My trip to Thailand
1. I'm planning to be away for three weeks.
2. My husband and I are planning to stay in small towns and camp on the beach.
3. We're planning to bring a tent.
4. We're planning to celebrate our wedding anniversary there.
5. My father, who was born in Thailand, is planning to join us, but he's planning to stay
in a hotel.
o Exercise 22. Looking at grammar. (Charts 3-1 - 3-5)

Complete the sentences with be going to or will. Use be going to to express a prior plan.
1. A: Are you going by the post office today? I need to mail this letter.
B: Yeah, I 'I/ mail it for you.
A: Thanks.
66 CHAPTER,3
2. A: Why are you carrying that package?
B: It's for my sister. I 'm @Oin@ to mail it to her.
3. A: Why did you buy so many eggs?

B: I _________ make a special dessert.
4. A: I have a book for Joe from Rachel. I'm not going to see him today.
B: Let me have it. I ________ _ give it to him. He's in my algebra class.
5. A: Did you apply for the job you told me about?
B: No, I _ ________ take a few more classes and get more experience.
6. A: Did you know that I found an apartment on 45th Street? I'm planning to move soon.
B: That's a nice area. I help you move if you like.
A: Great! I'd really appreciate that.
7. A: Why can't you come to the party?

B: We be with my husband's family that weekend.
8. A: I have to leave. I don't have time to finish the dishes.

B: No problem. I _________ do them for you.
9. A: Do you want to go to the meeting together?

B: Sure. I meet you by the elevator in ten minutes.
D Exercise 23. Ustening. (Chart 3-1 � 3-5)
IJ
CD I
Listen to each question and circle the expected response (a. or b.).
1. a. Sure, I'll do it.
Track 31
b. Sure, I'm going to do it.
2. a. Yes. I'll look at laptop computers.
b. Yes. I'm going to look at laptop computers.
3. a. Yeah, but I'll sell it. I don't need it now that I live in the city.
b. Yeah, but I'm going to sell it. I don't need it now that I live in the city.
4. a. Uh, I'll get your coat and we can go.
b. Uh, I'm going to get your coat and we can go.

Complete the sentences with your own words. What do you notice about the verb tenses and
the words in boldface?
1. After I leave school today, I'm going to __________________
2. Before I come to school tomorrow, I will _________ ____ ____
3. Ifl have time this weekend, I will --------------------
Future Time 6 7
3·6 Expressing the Future in Time Clauses and If-Clauses
time clause In (a) and (b): before I go to class tomorrow is a future
(a) Before I go to class tomorrow, I'm going to eat time clause.
breakfast. before
time clause after
(b) I'm going to eat breakfast before I go to class when + subject and verb = a time clause
as soon as
tomorrow.
until
while
(c) Before I go home tonight, I'm going to stop at the The simple present is used in a future time clause.
market. Will and be going to are NOT used in a future time
(d) I'm going to eat dinner at 6:00 tonight. After I eat clause.
dinner, I'm going to study in my room. INCORRECT: Before I will go to class, I'm going to eat
(e) I'll give Rita your message when I see her breakfast.
(f) It's raining right now. As soon as the rain stops, INCORRECT: Before I am going to go to class tomorrow,
I'm going to walk downtown. I'm going to eat breakfast.
(g) I'll stay home until the rain stops All of the example sentences (c) through (h) contain
(h) While you're at school tomorrow, I'll be at work. future time clauses.
( i ) Maybe it will rain tomorrow. If it rains tomorrow, In (i): If it rains tomorrow is an if-clause.
I'm going to stay home. if + subject and verb = an if-clause
When the meaning is future, the simple present (not
will or be going to) is used in an if-clause.
o bercise 25.. Looking at grammar. (Chart 3--6)

Choose the- correct verbs.
1. Before I'm going to return, (3
to my country next year, I'm going to finish my
graduate degree in computer science.
2. The boss will review your work after she will return, returns from vacation next wee),(.
3. I'll give you a call on my cell phone as soon as my plane will land, lands.
4. I don't especially like my current job, but I'm going to stay with this company until I
find, will find something better.
5. When you will be, are in Australia next month, are you going to go snorkeling at the
Great Barrier Reef?
6. I need to know what time the meeting starts. Please be

sure to call me as soon as you find out, will find out
anything about it.
7. If it won't be, isn't cold tomorrow, we'll go to the beach.

If it is, will be cold tomorrow, we'll go to a movie.
68 CHAPJE'R 3
Use the given verbs to complete the sentences. Use be going to for the future .
1. take, read
I to
'm i;aoini;a read
��"-'-'-'-',.__,_.,�=- the textbook before I take the final exam next month.
2. return, call
Mr. Lee ____________ his wife as soon as he ________
to the hotel tonight.
3. make,go
Before I ________ to my job interview tomorrow, I __________
a list of questions I want to ask about the company.
4. visit, take
We ------------- Sabrina to our favorite seafood restaurant when she
__________ us this weekend.
5. keep, call
I ____________ my cell* on until Lena ________ **
6. miss, understand not

If Adam ________ the meeting, he __________ the next project.
7. get, eat
If Eva ________ home early, we __________ dinner at 6:30.

Work with a parmer. Read each sentence and make a follow-up sentence using if Pay special
attention to the verb in the if-clause. Share some of your parmer's answers with the class.
Example: Maybe you'll go downtown tomorrow.
PARTNER A: Ifl go downtown tomorrow, I'm going to buy some new clothes.
PARTNER B: Ifl go downtown tomorrow, I'm going to look at laptop computers.
1. Maybe you'll have some free time tomorrow.
2. Maybe it'll rain tomorrow.
3. Maybe it won't rain tomorrow.
4. Maybe the teacher will be absent next week.
*cell = cell phone

**Time clauses beginning with until usually follow the main clause.
Usual: I'm going to keep my cell on until Lena calls.
Possible but less usual: Until Lena calls, I'm going to keep my cell on.
Future Time 69
Change roles.
5. Maybe you'll be tired tonight.
6. Maybe you won't be tired tonight.
7. Maybe it'll be nice tomorrow.
8. Maybe we won't have class on Monday.

Look at Sue's day planner. She has a busy morning. Make sentences using the word in
parentheses and the given information. Use be going to for the future.
1. (after) go to the dentist\pick up grnceries

- After Sue goes to the dentist" she is going to pick up groceries.
2. (before) go to the dentist\pick up groceries
3. (before) have lunch with Hiro\pick up groceries
4. (after) have lunch with Hiro\pick up groceries
5. (before) have lunch with Hiro\take her father to his doctor's appointment
o Exercise 29. Reading, grammar, and writing. (Chart 3-6 )

The Home of the Future
What will the home of the future look like? Imagine life 50 years from now. What kinds of
homes will people have? Here are some interesting possibilities.
The living room walls will have big plasma screens. Instead of pictures on the wall, the
screens will show changing scenery. If walls have different scenes, people may not even want
many windows. As you know, fewer windows will make it easier to heat a house.
The house will have special electronic features, and people will control them with a remote
control. For example, a person can lie in bed at night and lock all the doors in his or her house
with one push of a button. Before someone arrives home from work, the remote will turn on
the lights, preheat the oven, and even turn on favorite music. The bathroom faucets will have a
memory. They will remember the temperature a person likes, and when he or she turns on the
water in the tub or shower, it will be at the correct temperature. Maybe bedroom closets will
have racks that move automatically at the touch of a button. When the weather is cold, the
racks will deliver clothes that keep a person warm, and on warm days, the racks will deliver
clothes that keep a person cool.
Finally, homes will be more energy-efficient. Most of the heat will probably come from
the sun. Of course, solar heat will be popular because it will be inexpensive.
Which ideas do you like? Which ones do you think you may see in your lifetime?
70 CHAPTER 3
Part II. Complete the sentences with information from the passage. More than one answer
may be possible.
1. When people look at the living room walls, they _______________
2. When a person is coming home from work, the remote ____________
3. As soon as a person gets home, ---------------------
4. If the bathroom faucets have a memory, they ________________
5. Before a person goes to sleep, ----------------------
6. When a person pushes a button, the closet racks _______________
7. When the weather is cold, the closet racks _________________
8. If a home has solar heat, the cost of heating the home _____________
Part III. Imagine you can build your dream house - 50 years from now. It can be any type of
house you want. Think about the style, size, kinds of rooms, location, etc. Write a paragraph
about this house. Begin with this topic sentence: My dream house will have ....
o Exercise 30. Looking at grammar. (Chapters 1, 2 and Charts 3- 1 � 3-6)

Complete each sentence with a form of the words in parentheses. Read carefully for time
expressions.
1. BeforeTim (go) @Oes
----;;,..=...=.�-- to bed, he always (brush) brushes his teeth.
2. BeforeTim (go) ______ to bed later tonight, he (email) _________

his girlfriend.
3. Before Tim (go) _____ to bed last night, he (take) _____ a shower.
4. WhileTim (take) _________ a shower last night, the phone (ring)
5. As soon as the phone (ring) ______ last night,Tim (jump) _______

out of the shower to answer it.
6. As soon as Tim (get) ______ up tomorrow morning, he (brush)

_______ his teeth.
7. Tim always (brush) _____ his teeth as soon as he (get) _____ up.

Which sentences express future time?
1. I'm catching a train tonight.
2. I'm going to take the express train.
3. The trip will only take an hour.
Future Time 71
3· 7 Using the Present Progressive to Express Future Time __ _
(a) Tim is going to come to the party tomorrow. The present progressive can be used to express future
(b) Tim is coming to the party tomorrow. time. Each pair of example sentences has the same
(c) We 're going to go to a movie tonight. meaning.
(d) We 're goirig to a movie tonight. The present progressive describes definite plans for
home this evening. the future, plans that were made before the moment of
(e) I'm going to stay
(f) I'm staying home this evening. speaking.
A future meaning for the present progressive is
(g) Ann is going to fly to Chicago next week. indicated either by future time words (e.g., tomorrow)
(h) Ann is flying to Chicago next week. or by the situation.*
( i) You 're going to laugh when you hear this joke. The present progressive is NOT used for predictions
(j) INCORRECT: You're laughing when you hear this about the future.
joke. In (i): The speaker is predicting a future event.
In (j): The present progressive is not possible;
laughing is a prediction, not a planned future event.
*COMPARE: Present situation: Look! Mary's coming. Do you see her?
Future situation: Are you planning to come to the parry? Mary's coming. So is Alex.
o Exercise 32. looking ·at grammar. (Chart 3- 7)

Complete the conversations with the correct form of the given verbs. Use the present
progressive if possible. Discuss whether the present progressive expresses present or future
time.
1. A: What (you, do) are you doin@ tomorrow afternoon? ·
B: I (go) am @Oin@ to the mall. How about you? What (you, do)
___________ tomorrow afternoon?
A: I (go) _________ to a movie with Dan. After the movie, we (go)
_________ out to dinner. Would you like to meet us for dinner?
B: No, thanks. I can't. I (meet) ___________ my son for dinner.
2. A: What (you, major) _____________ in?

B: I (major) ------------- in engineering.
A: What courses (you, take) next semester?
B: I (take) __________ English, math, and physics.
3. A: Stop! Paula! What (you, do) _________ ?

B: I (cut) _________ my hair, Mom.
A: Oh dear!
72 OHl\1PTER 3
{J Listen to the conversation and write the words you hear.
en I Going on vacation
Track 32
A: I _________ on vacation tomorrow.

B: Where _____ you _____ ?
A: To San Francisco.
B: How are you getting there? _____ you _____ or _____
your car?
A: I _________ . I have to be at the airJ?ort by seven tomorrow morning.
B: Do you need a ride to the airport?
A: No, thanks. I _________ a taxi.
What about you? Are you planning to go somewhere over vacation?
B: No. I _________ here.

Work with a partner. Tell each other your plans. Use the present progressive.
Example: What are your plans for this evening?
SPEAKER A: I'm staying home. How about you?
SPEAKER B: I'm going to a coffee shop to work on my paper for a while. T hen I'm meeting
some friends for a movie.
W'hat are your plans . . .
1. for the rest of today? 3. for this coming weekend?
2. for tomorrow? 4. for next month?
o Exercise 35. Let's write. (Chart 3-7)

Imagine you have a week's vacation. You can go anywhere you want. T hink of a place you
would like to visit. Write a paragraph in which you describe your trip. Use the present
progressive where appropriate.
Example: My friend Sara and I are taking a trip to Nashville, Tennessee. Nashville is the
home of country music, and Sara loves country music. She wants to go to lots of shows.
I don't know anything about country music, but I'm looking forward to going to Nashville.
We're leaving Friday afternoon as soon as Sara gets off work. (Etc.)
Possible questions to answer in your paragraph:
1. Where are you going?
2. When are you leaving?
3. Who are you going with, or are you traveli:µg alone?
4. How are you getting there?
5. Where are you staying?
6. Are you visiting anyone? Who?
7. How long are you staying there?
8. When are you getting back?
Future, Time 73
0 Exercise 36. Warm-up. (Chart 3-8)
Circle all the possible completions.
1. Soccer season begins __ .
a. today b. next week c. yesterday
2. The mall opens __ .
a. next Monday b. tomorrow c. today
3. There is a party __ .
a. last week b. tonight c. next weekend
4. The baby cries __ .
a. every night b. tomorrow night c. in the evenings
3·8 Using the. Simple Present to Express Future Time

(a) My plane arrives at 7:35 tomorrow evening. The simple present can express future time when
(b) Tim's new job starts next week. events are on a definite schedule or timetable.
(c) The semester ends in two more weeks. Only a few verbs are used in the simple present to
(d) There is a meeting at ten tomorrow morning. express future time. The most common are arrive,
leave, start, begin, end, finish, open, close, be.
(e) INCORRECT: I wear my new suit to the wedding next Most verbs CANNOT be used in the simple present to
week. express future time. For example, in (e): The verb
CORRECT: I am wearing/am going to wear my new wear does not express an event on a schedule or
suit to the wedding next week. timetable. It cannot be used in the simple present to
express future time.
www.irLanguage.com
Circle all the possible completions.
1. The concert __ at eight tonight.
a. begins b. is beginning c. is going to begin
2. I __ seafood pasta for dinner tonight.
a. make b. am making c. am going to make
3. I __ to school tomorrow morning. I need the exercise.
a. walk b. am walking c. am going to walk
4. The bus __ at 8: 15 tomorrow morning.
a. leaves b. is leaving c. is going to leave
5. I __ the championship game on TV at Jonah's house tomorrow.
a. watch b. am watching c. am going to watch
6. The game __ at 1:00 tomorrow afternoon.
a. starts b. is starting c. is going to start
74 CHAPTER 3
7. Alexa's plane __ at 10: 14 tomorrow morning.
a. arrives b. is arriving c. is going to arrive
8. I can't pick her up tomorrow, so she __ the airport bus into the city.
a. takes b. is taking c. is going to take
9. Jonas __ to several companies. He hopes to get a full-time job soon.
a. applies b. is applying c. is going to apply
10. School __ next Wednesday. I'm excited for vacation to begin.
a. ends b. is ending c. is going to end

Choose the picture that best describes this sentence: Joanne is about to leave for work.
Picture A Picture B
3·9 Immediate Future: Using Be About To

(a) Ann's bags are packed, and she is wearing her The idiom be about to do something expresses an
coat. She is about to leave for the airport. activity that will happen in the immediate future,
(b) Shhh. The movie is about to begin. usually within minutes or seconds.
In (a): Ann is going to leave sometime in the next few
minutes.
In (b): The movie is going to start in the next few
minutes.
Future TIme 75
Describe the action that is about to happen in each picture. Use be about to. Work in pairs,
in small groups, or as a class.
2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
76
o Exercise 40. Game. (Chart 3-9)
Think of an action to perform. Don't tell what it is. Get ready to do it, but just before you
perform the action, ask the class to describe what you are about to do. Perform with a partner
if you wish. Use your own ideas or suggestions from the list.
Example: (Students A and B hold out their hands to each other.)
Possible gu.ess: They are about to shake hands.
Suggestions:
stand up sneeze pick up a pen erase a word
open the door fall down close your book look up a word
close the window cry write on the board get out your wallet
o Exercise 41. Warm-up. (Chart 3-1 O)

Circle all the possible completions for each sentence.
1. Fifteen years from now, my wife and I will retire and __ all over the world.
a. will travel d. going to travel
b. travel e. are traveling
c. traveling f. traveled
2. I opened the door and __ my friend to come in.
a. will invite d. am going to invite
b. invite e. am inviting
c. inviting f. invited
3 · 10 Parallel Verbs �- . �-- -�- - -
V and V Often a subject has two verbs that are connected by

(a) Jim makes his bed 'and cleans up his room and. We say that the two verbs are parallel:
every morning. V + and+ V
(b) Anita called and told me about her new job. makes and cleans = parallel verbs
(c) Ann is cooking dinner and (is) talking on the It is not necessary to repeat a helping verb (an
phone at the same time. auxiliary verb) when two verbs are the same tense and
(d) I will stay home and (will) study tonight. are connected by and.
(e) I am going to stay home and (am going to) study
tonight.
o Exercise 42. Looking at grammar. (Chart 3-1 O)

Complete each sentence with the correct form of the verbs in parentheses.
1. When I (walk) walked into the living room yesterday, Grandpa (read)
_________ a newspaper and (listen) _________ to music.
2. Helen will graduate soon. She (move) _________ to New York and (look)
_________ for a job after she (graduate) _________
Future Time 77
3. Every day my neighbor (call) _____ me on the phone and (complain)
_______ about the weather.
4. Look at Erin. She (cry) _______ and (laugh) _______ at the

same time! I wonder if she is happy or sad?
5. I'm beat.* I can't wait to get home. After I (get) _____ home, I (take)
__________ a hot bath and (go) to bed.
6. While Paul (carry) _________ brushes and paint and (climb)

_______ a ladder, a bee (land) _____________ on his
arm and (sting) _____ him. Paul (drop) _______ the paint and
(spill ) it all over the ground.
o Exercise 43. Looking at grammar. (Chapters 1 � 3)

Complete each sentence with the correct form of the words in parentheses.
1. I usually (ride) ride my bike to work in the morning, but it (rain)
_________ when I left my house early this morning, so I (take)
_____ the bus. After I (get) _____ to work, I (find) _____
out** that I had left my briefcase on the bus.
2. A: Are you going to take the kids to the amusement park tomorrow morning?
B: Yes. It (open) _____ at 10:00. If we (leave) _____ here at 9:30,
we'll get there at 9:55. The kids can be the first ones in the park.
3. A: Ouch! I (cu t) my finger. It (bleed)

B: Put pressure on it. I ( get) some antibiotics and a bandage.
A: Thanks.
4. A: Your phone (ring)

B: I (know)
A: (you, want) me to get it?
B: No.
A: Why don't you want to answer your phone?
B: I (answer, not) _________ during dinner.
*be beat= be very, very tired; be exhausted
**find out= discover; learn
78 CHAPTER 3
5. A: Look! There (be) _____ a police car behind us. Its lights (flash)
B: I (know) I (know) . I (see) _____ it.

A: What (go) _______ on? (you, speed) ___________ ?
B: No, I'm not. I (drive) _________ the speed limit.
A: Oh, look. The police car ( pass) _________ us.
B: W hew!
0 Exercise 44. Listening. (Chapters l - 3)

(J
Part I. Complete the sentences with the words you hear.
co I At a Chinese restaurant
Track 33
A: Okay, let's all open our fortune cookies.
B: What ______ yours ______ ?
A: Mine says, "You _________ an unexpected gift." Great! Are you

planning to give me a gift soon?
B: Not that I know of. Mine says, "Your life _________ long and happy."
Good. I _ _ _ __ a long life.
C: Mine says, "A smile _________ all communication problems." Well,

that's good! After this, when I ___________ someone,
_____ just ______ at them.
D: My fortune is this: "If you ______ hard, you _______ successful."
A: Well, it _____ like all of us _________ good luck in the future!
Part II. Work in small groups. Together, write a fortune for each person in your group.
o Exercise 45. Check your knowledge. (Chapters 1- 3)

Edit the paragraph. Correct errors in verb tense usage.
My Cousin Pablo
is
I want to tell you about Pablo. He /\ my cousin. He comes here four years ago. Before he
came here, he study statistics in Chile. He leaves Chile and move here. He went to New York
and stay there for three years. He graduated from New York University. Now he study at this
school. After he finish his master's degree, he return to Chile.
Future Time 79
D Exercise 46. Let's write. (Chapter 3)
Pretend that you have the ability to see into the future. Choose a person you know (classmate,
teacher, family member, friend) and tell this person in writing about his/her future life. Give
some interesting or unusual details.
Example:
My Son's Future
My son is 15 years old now. In the future, he will have a happy and successful life.
After he finishes high school, he will go to college. He really loves to study math. He
also loves to build bridges out of toothpicks. He will study engineering, and he will
specialize in bridge building. He likes to travel, so he will get a job with an international
company and build bridges around the world. He will also work in poor villages, and his
bridges will connect rural areas. This will make people's lives better. I will be very proud
of him.
at
ir Language.com
80 OHAPTER 3
o Exercise 1. Warm· up. (Chart 4- 1 >
Do you know the past participle form of these verbs? Complete the chart. What is the
difference between the past participle forms in items 1-4 and 5-8?
Simple Simple Past
Form Past Participle
1. stay stayed stayed

2. work worked worked
3. help helped
4. visit visited
5. go went @one
6. begin began
7. write wrote
8. see saw
4-1 Past Participle

Simple Simple Past The past participle is one of the principal parts of a
Form Past Participle verb. (See Chart 2-3, p. 31.)
finish The past participle is used in the PRESENT PERFECT

REGULAR finished finished
tense and the PAST PERFECT tense.*
VERBS stop stopped stopped
wait waited waited The past participle of regular verbs is the same as
the simple past form: both end in -ed.
IRREGULAR see saw seen
make See Chart 2-4, p. 32, or the inside front and back
VERBS made made
put put covers for a list of irregular verbs.
put
*The past participle is also used in the passive. See Chapter 10.
81
D Exercise 2. Ustening . (Charts 2-3, 2-4, and 4-1)
Write the words you hear.
co I Example: You will hear: go went gone
Track 34
You will write: go went @One
Simple Simple Past Simple Simple Past

Form Past Participle Form Past Participle
1. call called 6. come came

2. speak spoke 7. eat ate
3. do did 8. cut cut
4. know knew 9. read read
5. meet met 10. be was/were
D Exercise 3. Looking at grammar. (Charts 2-3, 2-4, and 4-1)

Make your own chart. Write the past participles.
Simple Simple Past Simple Simple Past

Form Past Participle Form Past Participle
1. finish finished finished 6. hear heard

2. have had 7. study studied
3. think thought 8. die died
4. teach taught 9. buy bought
5. live lived 10. start started

Decide which sentence (a. orb.) is correct for each situation.
1. It's 10:00 A.M. Layla hasbeen at thebus stop since 9:50.
a. She is still there.
b. Thebus picked her up.
2. Toshi has lived in the same apartment for 30 years.

a. After 30 years, he moved somewhere else.
b. He still lives there.
82 CHAPTER 4
4· 2 Present Perfect with Since and For
(a) I've been in class since ten o'clock The present perfect tense is used in
this morning. sentences with since and for to express
� situations that began in the past and
(b) We have known Ben for ten years.
We met him ten years ago. We still continue to the present.
know him today. We are friends. In (a): Class started at ten. I am still in
/ 'I/
class now, at the moment of speaking.
INCORRECT: I am in class since ten o'clock
this morning.
(c) I have FORM: have/has + past participle

You have CONTRACTED FORMS: I've, You've, He's,
She, He, It has > been here for one hour. She's, It's, We've, They've.
We have
They have
Since
since eight o'clock. Since is followed by the mention of a

since Tuesday. specific point in time: an hour, a day, a
(d) I have been here < since 2009 month, a year, etc.
since yesterday. Since expresses the idea that something
since last month. began at a specific time in the past and
continues to the present.
(e) CORRECT: I have lived here since May.* Notice the incorrect sentences:
CORRECT: I have been here since May. In (f): The present progressive is NOT
(f) INCORRECT: I am living here since May used.
(g) INCORRECT: / live here since May In (g): The simple present is NOT used.
(h) INCORRECT: I lived here since May
(i) INCORRECT: I was here since May In (h) and (i): The simple past is NOT
used.
MAIN CLAUSE SINCE-CLAUSE Since may also introduce a time clause

(present perfect) (simple past) (i.e., a subject and verb may follow since).
( j ) I have lived here since I was a child. Notice in the examples: The present
(k) Al has met many people since he came here. perfect is used in the main clause; the
simple past is used in the since-clause.
For
for ten minutes. For is followed by the mention of a length

for two hours. of time: two minutes, three hours, four
for five days. days, five weeks, etc.).
(I ) I have been here for about three weeks. NOTE: If the noun ends in -s (hours, days,
for almost six months. weeks, etc.), use for in the time
for many years. expression, not since.
for a long time.
*Also correct: I have been living here since May. See Chart 4-6 for a discussion of the present perfect progressive.
Present Perfect and Past Perfect 83

Complete the sentences with since or for.
Amy has been here ... Ms. Ellis has worked as a substitute teacher . . .
for
1. -�---- two months. 11. school began.
2. -"'-'-'-'-"'-"'-----
since September. 12. last year.
3. _ _____ yesterday. 13. 2008.
4. ______ the term started. 14. about a year.
5. ______ a couple of hours. 15. September.
6. _ _
____ fifteen minutes. 16. a long time.
The Smiths have been married . . . I've known about Sonia's engagement . . .
7. two years. 17. ______ almost four months.

8. last May. 18. ______ the beginning of the year.
9. five days. 19. ______ the first of January.
10. a long time. 20. ______ yesterday.

Complete the sentences with information about yourself.
since nine o'clock this mornin@

1. I've been in this building .......... {
for 27 minutes
since
2. We've been in class {
for
since
3. I've been in this city ... .. .. .... .. {
for
since
4. I've had an ID* card ............. {
for
smce
5. I've had this book ............... {
for
*ID = identification
84 CHAPTER 4
Complete each sentence with the present perfect form of the given verb.
Since 1995, Theresa, a talk-show host, ...
1. work has worked for a TV station in London.
2. interview hundreds of guests.
3. meet many famous people.
4. find out about their lives.
5. make friends with celebrities.
6. became a celebrity herself.
7. sign lots of autographs.
8. shake hands with thousands of people.
9. write two books about how to interview people.
10. think a lot about the best ways to help people feel
comfortable on her show.
o Exercise 8. let's talk. (Chart 4-2)

Your teacher will ask a question. Two students will answer. Speaker A will answer with
since. Speaker B will use Speaker A's information and answer with/or. Only the teacher's
book is open.
Example:
To SPEAKER A: How long have you been in this room?
SPEAKER A: I've been in this room since (10:00).
To SPEAKER B: How long has (Student A) been in this room?
SPEAKER B: She/He has been in this room for (15 minutes).
1. How long have you known me?

2. How long have you been up* today?
3. Where do you live? How Jong have you lived there?
4. Who has a cell phone? How long have you had your phone?
5. Who has a bike? How long have you had it?
6. How long have you been in this building today?
7. Who is wearing something new? What is new? How long have you had it/them?
8. Who is married? How long have you been married?
*be up= be awake and out of bed

Complete the sentences with the correct form of the words in parentheses. Put brackets
around the since-clauses.
1. I (know) �h=a�\1<�e��k no�w�n�-- Mark Miller [ever since* we (be) were in college.]
2. Pedro (change) _________ his major three times since he (start)

_______ school.
3. Ever since I (be) ______ a child, I (be) _______ afraid of snakes.
4. I can't wait to get home to my own bed. I (sleep, not) _________ well since
I (leave) _______ home three days ago.
5. Ever since Pete (meet) ________ Nicole, he (thin k, not) _________

about anything or anyone else. He's in love.
6. Otto (have) _______ a lot of problems with his car ever since he (buy)
________ it. It's a lemon.**
7. A: W hat ( you, eat) ___________ since you (get) ________

up this morning?
B: So far, I (eat) ____________ a banana and some yogurt.***
o Exercise 10. Warm-up: pairwork. (Chart 4-3)

Work with a partner. Partner A makes a true statement with a phrase from the list and then
changes it to a question. Partner B gives a true answer.
climbed a tree heard bedtime stories ridden a tricycle

flown a kite played in the dirt slept with a stuffed animal
PARTNER A: Since my childhood, I haven't _______________ ___

Since your childhood, have you __________ ___ ___ __ ?
PARTNER B: Yes, I have. OR No, I haven't.
*Ever since has the same meaning as since.
**a lemon = a car with a lot of problems

***So far + present perfect expresses situations that began in the past and continue to the present.
86 CHAPTER 4
irLanguage.com
4.3 Negat�ve, Question, and ·short-Answer Forms

Negative
( a) I have not (haven't) seen Tom since lunch. NEGATIVE: have/has + not + past participle
( b) Ann has not (hasn't) eaten for several NEGATIVE CONTRACTIONS: have + not = haven't
hours. has + not = hasn't
Question
(c) Have you seen Tom? QUESTION: have/has + subject + past participle
(d) Has Ann eaten?
(e) How long have you lived here?
( f ) - Have you ever met a famous person? In (f): ever= in your lifetime; from the time you were born to
- No, I've never met a famous person. the present moment. Questions with ever frequently use the
present perfect.
When answering questions with ever, speakers often use
never. Never is frequently used with the present perfect.
In the answer to (f), the speaker is saying: "No, I haven't met
a famous person from the time I was born to the present
moment."
Short Answer
( g) - Have you seen Tom? SHORT ANSWER: have/haven't or has/hasn't
- Yes, I have. OR No, I haven't. NOTE: The helping verb in the short answer is not contracted
(h) - Has Ann eaten lunch? with the pronoun.
- Yes, she has. OR No, she hasn't. INCORRECT: Yes, I've. OR Yes, he's.

Complete the conversations. Use the present perfect form of the verbs in parentheses.
1. A: ( you, eat, ever) -'-' r_,,e=a=t=en'-'-------- an insect?
ve�yo""'u"--"-e�,.__,,eC'---
H=a"'""
B: No, I haven't
-'-'=�-"----· I (eat, never) have never eaten an insect.
2. A: (you, stay, ever) __________________ in a room on the top

floor of a hotel?
B: Yes, I ________ . I (stay) ____________ in a room on the
top floor of a hotel a few times.
3. A: (you, meet, ever) ------------------ a movie star?

B: No, I ________ . I (meet, never) ____________ a movie star.
4. A: (Ted, travel, ever) __________________ overseas?

B: Yes, he ________ . He (travel) ____________ to several
countries on business.

5. A: (Lara, be� ever) _________________ in Mexico?
B: No, she ________ . She (be, never) ___________ many
Spanish-speaking countries.
o Exercise 12. Listening. (Charts 2-3, 2-4, and 4-3)

� Listen to each sentence and then the beginning of a question. Complete the question with the
(kl past participle of the verb you heard in the first sentence. Have you ever done these things?
Track 35 c·IrC1 eyes Or no.
CD!
Example: You will hear: I saw a two-headed frog once. Have you ever ... ?
You will write: Have you ever seen a two-headed frog? yes
(§)
1. Have you ever a two-headed snake? yes no
2. Have you ever in a small plane? yes no
3. Have you ever in a limousine? yes no
4. Have you ever volunteer work? yes no
5. Have you ever a shirt? yes no
6. Have you ever a scary experience on an airplane? yes no
7. Have you ever out of a boat? yes no
8. Have you ever so embarrassed that your face got hot? yes no
9. Have you ever to a famous person? yes no
10. Have you ever to be famous? yes no
o Exercise 13. Let's talk: interview. (Charts 2-4 and 4-3)

Interview your classmates. Make questions using the present perfect form of the given verbs.
1. you\ ever\ cut\ your own hair
2. you\ ever\ catch\ a big fish
3. you\ ever\ take care of\ an injured animal
4. you\ ever\ lose\ something very important
5. you\ ever\ sit\ on a bee
6. you\ ever\ fly\ in a private plane
7. you\ ever \ break\ your arm or your leg
8. you\ ever\ find\ something very valuable
9. you\ ever\ swim\ near a shark
10. you\ ever\ throw\ a ball\ and\ break\ a window
88 CHAPTER 4
o Exercise 14. Let's talk and write: interview. (Charts 2-3, 2-4, 4-2, and 4-3)
Part I. Work with a partner. Take turns asking and answering questions. Begin your questions
with How long have you and the present perfect. Answer questions with since, for, or
never and the present perfect.
Example: have a pet

PARTNER A: How long have you had a pet?
'PARTNER B: I've had (a cat, a dog, a bird, etc.) for two years. OR
I've had (a cat, a dog, a bird, etc.) since my 18th birthday. OR
I've never had a pet.
1. live in (this area) 6. wear glasses I contact lenses
2. study English 7. have a roommate I a pet
3. be in this class I at this school 8. be interested in (a particular subject)
4. have long hair I short hair 9. be married
5. have a beard I a mustache
Part II. Use the information from your interview to write a paragraph about your partner. You
can add some information to make it more interesting. Use the following paragraph as an
example. Notice the present perfect phrases in green.
Example:
Ellie
I'd like to.tell you a little about Ellie. She has lived in Vancouver, Canada, for six
months . She has studied English for five years. She has been at this school since
September. She likes it here.
She has short hair. She has worn short hairfor a few years. Of course, she
doesn't have a mustache! She has never worn glasses, except sunglasses.
Ellie doesn't have a roommate, but she has a pet bird. She has had her bird for
one month. Its name is Howie, and he likes to sing.
She is interested in biology. She has been interested in biology since she was a
child. She has never been married. She wants to be a doctor. She wants to become a
doctor before she has a family.

Circle the correct completion (a. or b.) for each sentence.
I. Tyler has rented a house __ .
a. last week. b. already.
2. I have seen it
a. recently. b. two days ago.
3. His parents haven't seen it __ .
a. yesterday. b. yet.
4. I have been there
a. two times. b. yesterday.

4·4 Present P,erfect
. with Unspecified Time -
Toshi has already eaten lunch. Eva hasn't eaten lunch yet.
(a) Toshi has just eaten lunch. The PRESENT PERFECT expresses an activity or
(b) Jim has recently changed situation that occurred (or did not occur) before
jobs. now, at some unspecified or unknown time in
before now the past.
Common time words that express this idea are
C"-• just, recently, already, yet, ever, never.
-� In (a): Toshi's lunch occurred before the

present time. The exact time is not mentioned;
it is unimportant or unknown.
:!:
0 (c) Pete has eaten at that An activity may be repeated two, several, or
c:
restaurant many times. more times before now, at unspecified times in
(d) I have eaten there twice. the past, as in (c) and (d).
before now
(e) Pete has already ten OR In (e): Already is used in affirmative

Pete has left already. statements. It can come after the helping verb
or at the end of the sentence.
Idea of already: Something happened before
now, before this time.
(f) Min hasn't left yet In (f): Yet is used in negative statements and
comes at the end of the sentence.
Idea of yet: Something did not happen before
now (up to this time), but it may happen in the
future.
(g) Have you already left? In (g): Both yet and already can be used in
Have you left already? questions.
Have you left yet?
90 CHAPTER 4
Circle all the possible answers for each question. Work in small groups and then discuss your
answers as a class.
SITUATION 1:
Sara is at home. At 12:00 P.M., the phone rang. It was Sara's friend from high school.
They had a long conversation, and Sara hung up the phone at 12:59. It is now 1 :00.
Which sentences describe the situation?
a. Sara has just hung up the phone.
b. She has hung up the phone already.
c. The phone has just rung.
d. Sara hasn't finished her conversation yet.
e. Sara has been on the phone since 12:00 P.M.
SITUATION 2:
Mr. Peters is in bed. He became sick with the flu eight days ago. Mr. Peters isn't sick very
often. The last time he had the flu was one year ago. Which sentences describe the situation?
a. Mr. Peters has been sick for a year.
b. He hasn't gotten well yet.
c. He has just gotten sick.
d. He has already had the flu.
e. He hasn't had the flu before.
SITUATION 3:
Rob is at work. His boss, Rosa, needs a report. She sees Rob working on it at his desk.
She's in a hurry, and she's asking Rob questions. What questions is she going to ask him?
a. Have you finished?
b. Have you finished yet?
c. Have you finished already?

t, Richard and Lori are new parents. Their baby was born a week ago. Listen to each sentence
<'51 and complete the question with the past participle of the verb you hear.
CD I
Track 36
1. Has Richard held the baby a lot yet?
2. Has Lori the baby a bath yet?
3. Has Richard a diaper yet?
4. Has Lori some pictures of the baby yet?
5. Has Richard up when the baby cries yet?
6. Has Lori some of the household chores yet?
7. Has Richard tired during the day yet?

Look at Andy's day planner. Write answers to the questions. Make complete sentences with
yet and already.
It is 11:55 A.M. right now.

1. Has Andy had his dentist appointment yet? Yes, he has had his dentist
appointment already.
2. Has Andy picked up his kids at school yet? _________________
3. Has Andy taken his car for an oil change already? _______________
4. Has Andy finished his errands yet? ____________________
5. Has Andy shopped for groceries already? ------------------
6. Has Andy had lunch with Michael yet? __________________
o Exercise 19. Listening. (Charts 4-2 --.. 4-4)

IJ
CDI
Both is and has can be contracted to 's. Listen to each sentence. Decide if the contracted
verb is is or has. Before you begin, you may want to check your understanding of these
.
Track37 WOrd S: Order, Waiter.
Examples: You will hear: I have to leave. My order's taking too long.
You will choose: @ has
You will hear: I have to leave. My order's taken too long.
You will choose: 1s �
At a restaurant
1. 1$ has 3. lS has 5. lS has
2. IS has 4. IS has 6. lS has
92 CHAPTER 4
o Exercise 20. Listening. (Charts 4-2 ---+ 4-4)
IJ Answer the questions and then listen to the job interview. Listen again and complete the
sentences with the words you hear. Before you begin, you may want to check your
T�� s understanding of these words: clinic, prison, volunteer, low-income, patient, challenge.
What types of jobs can nurses have?

Which ones could be very exciting?
A job interview
Mika is a nurse. She is interviewing for a job with the manager of a hospital emergency room.
He is looking at her resume and asking her some general questions.
INTERVIEWER: It looks like __________ a lot of things since you became a
nurse.
MIKA: Yes, __________ for a medical clinic.

3
. .
ma pnson. __________ in several area hospitals. And ·
__________ volunteer work at a community health center for

5
low-income patients.
INTERVIEWER: Very good. But, let me ask you, why --------------
jobs so often?
MIKA: Well, I like having new challenges and different experiences.
INTERVIEWER: Why ------------- for this job?
MIKA: Well, I'm looking for something more fast-paced,* and ________
interested in working in an E.R. ** for a long time. __________
that this hospital provides great training for its staff, and it offers excellent
patient care.
INTERVIEWER: Thank you for coming in. I'll call you next week with our decision.
MIKA: It was good to meet you. Thank you for your time.
*more fast-paced= at a faster speed

**E.R. = emergency room

Read the short conversation. Who is more likely to say the last sentence, Pamela or Jenna?
PAMELA: I've traveled around the world several times.
JENNA: I traveled around the world once.
I'm looking forward to my next trip.
4·5 Simple Past vs. Present Perfect www.irLanguage.com

SIMPLE PAST In (a): I finished my work at a specific time in the past
(a) I finished my work two hours ago. (two hours ago).
PRESENT PERFECT In (b): I finished my work at an unspecified time in the

(b) I have already finished my work. past (sometime before now).
SIMPLE PAST The SIMPLE PAST expresses an activity that occurred at

(c) I was in Europe last year I three years ago I in 2006 I a specific time (or times) in the past, as in (a) and (c).
in 2008 and 201 O I when I was ten years old. The PRESENT PERFECT expresses an activity that
PRESENT PERFECT occurred at an unspecified time (or times) in the past,
(d) I have been in Europe many times I several times I as in (b) and (d).
a couple of times I once I (no mention of time).
SIMPLE PAST In (e): In sentences where for is used in a time

(e) Ann was in Miami for two weeks. expression, the simple past expresses an activity that
began and ended in the past.
PRESENT PERFECT
( f ) Bob has been in Miami for two weeks I since In (f): In sentences with for or since, the present
May 1st. perfect expresses an activity that began in the past
and continues to the present.

Answer each question and discuss the meanings of the verb tenses in italics.
1. All of these verbs talk about past time, but the verb in (a) is different from the other three
verbs. What is the difference?
(a) I have had several bicycles in my lifetime.
(b) I had a red bicycle when I was in elementary school.
(c) I had a blue bicycle when I was a teenager.
(d) I had a green bicycle when I lived and worked in Hong Kong.
2. What are the differences in the ideas the verb tenses express?
(e) I had a wonderful bicycle last year.
(f) I've had many wonderful bicycles.
3. What are the differences in the ideas the verb tenses express?
(g) Ann had a red bike for two years.
(h) Sue has had a red bike for two years.
4. Who is still alive, and who is dead?
(i) In his lifetime, Uncle Alex had several red bicycles.
(j) In his lifetime, Grandpa has had several red bicycles.
94 CHAPTER 4
Look at each verb in italics. Is it simple past or present perfect? Check (./) the box that
describes whether the verb expresses something that happened at a specified or unspecified
time in the past.
SPECIFIED UNSPECIFIED
TIME IN TIME IN
THE PAST THE PAST
1. Ms. Parker has been in Tokyo many times. D f2I

--+ present perfect
2. Ms. Parker was in Tokyo last week. D
--+ simple past
3. I've met Kaye's husband. He's a nice guy. D D
4. I met Kaye's husband at a party last week. D D
5. Mr. White was in the hospital three times last month. D D
6. Mr. White has been in the hospital many times. D D
7. I like to travel. I've been to more than 30 foreign countries. D D
8. I was in Morocco in 2008. D D
9. Venita has never been to Morocco. D D
10. Venita wasn't in Morocco when I was there in 2008. D D

Complete the sentences. Use the present perfect or the simple past form of the verbs in
parentheses.
1. A: Have you ever been to Singapore?
B: Yes, I (be) have . I (be) have been to Singapore several times. In fact,
I (be) was in Singapore last year.
2. A: Are you going to finish your work before you go to bed?

B: I (finish, already*) have already finished it. I (finish) finished my work
two hours ago.
3. A: Have you ever eaten at the Sunset Beach Cafe?

B: Yes, I _______ . I (eat) _________ there many times. In
fact, my wife and I (eat) lunch there yesterday.
*In informal spoken English, the simple past is sometimes used with already. Practice using the present perfect with already
in this exercise.

4. A: Do you and Erica want to go to the movie at the Galaxy Theater with us tonight?
B: No thanks. We (see) already) _______________ it. We (see)
------- it last week.
5. A: When are you going to write your report for Mr.Berg?

B: I (write) already) it. I (write)
it two days ago and gave it to him.
6. A: (Antonio) have) ever) a job?

B: Yes, he . He (have) lots of part-time
jobs. Last summer he (have) a a job at his uncle's auto shop.
7. A: This is a good book. Would you like to read it when I'm finished?
B: Thanks, but I (read) already) -------------- it. I (read)
_______ it a couple of months ago.
8. A: What African countries (you) visit) _______________ ?

B: I (visit) ___________ Kenya and Ethiopia. I (visit)
_________ _ Kenya in 2002. I (be) _______ m
Ethiopia last year.

Work with a partner. Take turns asking and answering the questions. Use the present perfect
and the simple past. Share a few of your partner's answers with the class.
Example:
PARTNER A: What countries have you been to?
PARTNER B: I've been to Norway and Finland.
PARTNER A: When were you in Norway?
PARTNER B: I was in Norway three years ago. How about you? What countries have you been to?
PARTNER A: I've never been to Norway or Finland, but I've been to ....
1. What countries have you been to?
When were you in ...?
2. Where are some interesting places you have lived?
When did you live in ...?
3. What are some interesting I unusual I scary things you have done in your lifetime?
When did you ...?
4. What are some helpful things (for a friend I your family I your community) you have done
in your lifetime?
When did you ...?
96 CHAPTER 4
at
ir Language.com
r»
t:51
For each item, you will hear two complete sentences and then the beginning of a third
sentence. Complete the third sentence with the past participle of the verb you heard in the
CD I
Track 39 first tWO Sentences.
Example: You will hear: I eat vegetables every day. I ate vegetables for dinner last night.
I have ...
You will write: I have eaten vegetables every day for a long time.
1. Since Friday, I have a lot of money.
2. All week, I have big breakfasts.
3. Today, I have already several emails.
4. I just finished dinner, and I have a nice tip.
5. Since I was a teenager, I have in late on weekends.
6. All my life, I have very carefully.
7. Since I was little, I have in the shower.
O Exercise 27. Game. (Charts 2-4 and 4-5)

Work in groups.
(1) On a piece of paper, write down two statements about yourself, one in the simple past
tense and one in the present perfect tense.
(2) Make one statement true and one statement false.
(3) T he other members of your group will try to guess which one is true.
(4) Tell the group the correct answers when everyone has finished guessing.
T he person with the most correct guesses at the end of the game is the winner.
Example:
STUDENT A: I've never cooked dinner.
I saw a famous person last year.
STUDENT B: rou've never cooked dinner is true.
rou saw a famous person last year is false.

Complete the sentences with time information.
1. I am sitting at my desk right now. I have been sitting at my desk since _______
2. I am looking at my book. I have been looking at my book for __________

4·6 Present Perfect Progressive www.irLanguage.com
Al and Ann are in their car right now. They are The PRESENT PERFECT PROGRESSIVE talks about how
driving home. It is now four o'clock. long an activity has been in progress before now.
(a) They have been driving since two o'clock. NOTE: Time expressions with since, as in (a), and for,
(b) They have been driving for two hours. as in (b), are frequently used with this tense.
They will be home soon. STATEMENT:
have/has + been + -ing
(c) How long have they been driving? QUESTION:

have/has + subject + been + -ing
Present Progressive vs. Present Perfect Progressive

Present Progressive (d) Po is sitting i.n class right now. The PRESENT PROGRESSIVE describes an
� activity that is in progress right now, as
,:
in (d). It does not discuss duration
(length of time).
INCORRECT: Po has been sitting in class
/
right now.
/
Present Perfect Progressive Po is sitting at his desk in class. He The PRESENT PERFECT PROGRESSIVE
� sat down at nine o'clock. It is now expresses the duration (length of time)
,:
nine-thirty. of an activity that began in the past and
(e) Po has been sitting in class is in progress right now.
since nine o'clock. INCORRECT: Po is sitting in class since
/
( f ) Po has been sitting in class nine o'clock.
for thirty minutes.
/
(g) CORRECT: I knowYoko. NOTE: Non-action verbs (e.g., know, like, own, belong)
(h) INCORRECT: I am knowing Yoko. are generally not used in the progressive tenses.*
(i ) CORRECT: I have known Yoko fortwo years. In (i): With non-action verbs, the present perfect is
(j) INCORRECT: I have been knowing Yoko for two years. used with since or for to express the duration of a
situation that began in the past and continues to the
present.
*See Chart 1-6, Non-Action Verbs, p. 17.
98 CHAPTER 4 ·
irLanguage.com

Complete the sentences. Use the present progressive or the present perfect progressive form of
the verbs in parentheses.
1. I (sit) am sittin@ in the cafeteria right now. I (sit) have been sittin@
here since twelve o'clock.
2. Kate is standing at the corner. She (wait) for the bus. She
(wait) for the bus for twenty minutes.
3. Scott and Rebecca (talk) on the phone right now. They

_____________ (talk) on the phone for over an hour.
4. Right now we're in class. We (do) ___________ an exercise. We (do)

_____________ this exercise for a couple of minutes.
5. A: You look busy right now. What (you, do) ?

B: I (work) on my physics experiment. It's a difficult
experiment.
A: How long (you, work) on it?
B: I started planning it last January. I (work)
on it since then.

Answer the questions your teacher asks. Your book is closed.
Example:
TEACHER: Where are you living?
STUDENT A: I'm living in an apartment on Fourth Avenue.
TEACHER: How long have you been living there?
STUDENT A: I've been living there since last September.
1. Right now you are sitting in class. How long have you been sitting here?
2. When did you first begin to study English? How long have you been studying English?
3. I began to teach English in (year). How long have I been teaching English?
4. I began to work at this school in (month or year). How long have I been working here?
5. What are we doing right now? How long have we been doing it?
6. (Student's name), I see that you wear glasses. How long have you been wearing glasses?
7. Who drives? When did you first drive a car? How long have you been driving?
8. Who drinks coffee? How old were you when you started to drink coffee? How long have
you been drinking coffee?

D Exercise 31. Listening. (Charts 4-2 ----. 4-6)
J
{
Part I. When speakers use the present perfect in everyday speech, they often contract have
and has with nouns. Listen to the sentences and notice the contractions.
CD I
Track <10
1. Jane has been out of town for two days.
2. My parents have been active in politics for 40 years.
3. My friends have moved into a new apartment.
4. I'm sorry. Your credit card has expired.
5. Bob has been traveling in Montreal since lastTuesday.
6. You're the first one here. No one else* has come yet.
Part II. Listen to the sentences. Complete them with the words you hear: noun + have/has.
weather has
1. The --'--'-=��---- been warm since the beginning of April.
2. This __________ been unusually warm.
3. My __________ been living in the same house for 25 years.
4. My _ ________ lived in the same town all their lives.
5. You slept late. Your __________ already gotten up and made breakfast.
6. My _ ________ planned a going-away party for me. I'm moving back to my

hometown.
7. I'm afraid your __________ been getting a little sloppy.**
8. My __________ traveled a lot. She's visited many different countries.

Read the situations and answer the questions.
SITUATION 1:
Roger is having trouble with math. I am helping him with his homework tonight. I have been
helping him since 6:00.
SITUATION 2:
Roger is moving to a new apartment. I have helped him move furniture several times this
week.
SITUATION 3:
I sure was busy last week. I helped Roger with his homework, and I helped him move to a new
apartment.
a. In which situation does the speaker emphasize the duration or the time that something
continues?
b. In whi_ch situation(s) is the speaker finished with the activity?
c. Do you think the activity in situation 1 or 2 is more recent? Why?
*else is an adverb and is frequently contracted with have and has in phrases such as no one else, someone else, anyone else, elc.
**sloppy = careless or messy
100 CHAPTER 4
4· 7 Present Perfect Progressive vs. Present Perfect u� 1.H 1 oltj {!::?.JD
Present Perfect Progressive

(a) Gina and Tarik are talking on the phone. The PRESENT PERFECT PROGRESSIVE expresses the
They have been talking on the phone for duration of present activities, using action verbs,
20 minutes. as in (a). The activity began in the past and is still in
progress.
Present Perfect
(b) Gina has talked to Tarik on the phone many times The PRESENT PERFECT expresses
(before now). (1) repeated activities that occur at unspecified
(c) INCORRECT: Gina has been talking to Tarik on the times in the past, as in (b), OR
phone many times.
(2) the duration of present situations, as in (d),
(d) Gina has known Tarik for two years. using non-action verbs.
(e) INCORRECT: Gina has been knowing Tarik for two
years.
Present Perfect Progressive and Present Perfect
(f ) I have been living here for six months. OR For some (not all) verbs, duration can be expressed
(g) I have lived here for six months. by either the present perfect or the present perfect
(h) Ed has been wearing glasses since he was ten. OR
progressive.
Ed has worn glasses since he was ten. Examples (f) and (g) have essentially the same
( i ) I've been going to school ever since I was five meaning, and both are correct.
years old. OR Often either tense can be used with verbs that
I've gone to school ever since I was five years old. express the duration of usual or habitual
activities/situations (things that happen daily or
regularly), e.g., live, work, teach, smoke, wear
glasses, play chess, go to school, read the same
newspaper every morning, etc.
Present Perfect and Past Perfect 1 01

Complete the sentences. Use the present perfect or the present perfect progressive form of the
verbs in parentheses. In some sentences, either form is possible.
have been hikin@ __ for more than an hour.
1. A: I'm tired. We (hike) -��,,...__
B: Well, let's stop and rest for a while.
2. A: Is the hike to Glacier Lake difficult?

have hiked
B: No, not at all. I (hike) --'-'='-=-'=""---- it many times with my kids.
3. A: Do you like it here?

B: I (live) have been livin@ I have lived here for only a short while. I don't know yet.
4. A: My eyes are getting tired. I (read ) ________ _____ for two hours.
I think I'll take a break.
B: Good idea.
5. A: I (read) this same page in my chemistry book three times,
and I still don't understand it.
B: Maybe I can help.
6. A: Do you like the Edgewater Inn?
B: Very much. I (stay) ___________ there at least a dozen times. It's
my favorite hotel.
7. A: The baby's crying. Shouldn't we do something? He (cry)

for several minutes.
B: I'll go check.
8. A: Who's your daughter's teacher for next year?.

B: I think her name is Mrs. Jackson.
A: She's one of the best teachers at the elementary school. She (teach)
_________ kindergarten for twenty years.
9. A: Ed (play) ___________ tennis for ten years, but he still doesn't have
a good serve.
B: Neither do I, and I (play) _____________ tennis for twenty years.
10. A: Where does Mrs. Alvarez work?
B: At the power company. She (work) ___________ there for fifteen
years. She likes her job.
A: What about her husband?
B: He's currently unemployed, but he'll find a new job soon.
A: What kind of experience does he have?
B: He (work) ___________ for two different accounting firms and at
one of the bigger software companies. With his work experience, he won't have any
trouble finding another job.
102 CHAPTER 4
irLanguage. com

Listen to the weather report. T hen listen again and complete the sentences with the words you
'-'<I
;.f» hear. Before you begin, you may want to check your understanding of these words: hail,
CD I
Track 41 weather system, rough.
Today's Weather
The weather ________ certainly ____________ today. Boy,
what a day! ________ already ______ rain, wind, hail, and sun. So, what's
4
in store* for tonight? As you ________ probably ________ , dark clouds
6
_____________ . We have a weather system moving in that is going to
bring colder temperatures and high winds. _____________ all week that
this system is coming, and it looks like tonight is it! ________ even
________ snow down south of us, and we could get some snow here too. So hang
10
onto your hats! We may have a rough night ahead of us.
o Exercise 35. Looking at grammar. (Chapters 1, 2, and 4)

Look at each pair of sentences. Compare the meanings of the verb tenses in italics. Check (.I)
the sentences that express duration.
1. a. __ Rachel is taking English classes.
b. __ Nadia has been taking English classes for two months.
2. a. __ Ayako has been living in Jerusalem for two years. She likes it there.
b. __ Beatriz has lived in Jerusalem. She's also lived in Paris. She's lived in New York
and Tokyo. She's lived in lots of cities.
3. a. __ Jack has visited his aunt and uncle many times.

b. __ Matt has been visiting his aunt and uncle for the last three days.
4. a. __ Cyril is talking on the phone.

b. __ Cyril talks on the phone a lot.
c. __ Cyril has been talking to his boss on the phone for half an hour.
d. __ Cyril has talked to his boss on the phone lots of times.
5. a. __ Mr. Woods walks his dog in Forest Park every day.

b. __ Mr. Woods has walked his dog in Forest Park many times.
c. __ Mr. Woods walked his dog in Forest Park five times last week.
d. __ Mr. Woods is walking his dog in Forest Park right now.
e. __ Mr.Woods has been walking his dog in Forest Park since two o'clock.
*whar's in s1ore = what to expect or what is coming in the future

D Exercise 36. Listening. (Charts 4-1 __.. A-7>
{J Listen to each conversation and choose the sentence (a. or b.) that best describes it.
cD I Example: You will hear: A: This movie is silly.
Track 42
B: I agree. It's really dumb.
You will choose: � The couple has been watching a movie.
b. The couple finished watching a movie.
1. a. The speakers listened to the radio already.

b. The speakers have been listening to the radio.
2. a. The man lived in Dubai a year ago.

b. The man still lives in Dubai.
3. a. The man has called the children several times.

b. The man called the children once.
4. a. The speakers went to a party and are still there.

b. The speakers went to a party and have already left.
o Exercise 37. Listening and speaking. (Chapters 1 --. 4)

{J Part I. Listen to the phone conversation between a mother and her daughter, Lara.
CD I
Track 43 A common illness
LARA: Hi, Mom. I was just calling to tell you that I can't come to your birthday party this
weekend. I'm afraid I'm sick.
MOM: Oh, I'm sorry to hear that.
LARA: Yeah, I got sick Wednesday night, and it's just been getting worse.
MOM: Are you going to see a doctor?
LARA: I don't know. I don't want to go to a doctor if it's not serious.
MOM: Well, what symptoms have you been having?
LARA: I've had a cough, and now I have a fever.
MoM: Have you been taking any medicine?
LARA: Just over-the-counter* stuff.
MOM: If your fever doesn't go away, I think you need to call a doctor.
LARA: Yeah, I probably will.
MOM: Well, call me tomorrow and let me know how you're doing.
LARA: Okay. I'll call you in the morning.
*over-the-counter = medicine you can buy without a prescription from a doctor
104 CHAPTER 4
Part II. Work with a partner. Take turns being the parent and the sick person. Complete the
conversation. Practice the new conversation with your partner.
Possible symptoms:
a fever chills a sore throat
a runny nose achiness a stomachache
a cough a headache sneezmg
nausea
A: Hi, Mom/Dad. I was just calling to tell you that I can't come to __ . I'm afraid
I'm sick.
B: Oh, I'm sorry to hear that.
A: Yeah, I got sick Wednesday night, and it's just been getting worse.
B: Are you going to see a doctor?
A: I don't know. I don't want to go to a doctor if it's not serious.
B: Well, what symptoms have you been having?
A: I've had __ , and now I have __ .
B: Have you been taking any medicine?
A: Just over-the-counter stuff.
B: If your __ doesn't go away, I think you need to call a doctor.
A: Yeah, I probably will.
B: Well, call me tomorrow and let me know how you're doing.
A: Okay. I'll call you in the morning.
D Exercise 38. looking at grammar. (Chapter 1 and Charts 4- 1 -+ 4-7)

Choose the correct verb. In some sentences, more than one answer may be possible.
Discuss your answers.
1. I __ the windows twice, and they still don't look clean.
a. am washing b. have washed c. have been washing
2. Please tell Mira to get off the phone. She __ for over an hour.
a. is talking b. has talked c. has been talking
3. W here are you? I at the mall for you to pick me up.

a. wait b. am waiting c. have been waiting
4. We __ at the Lakes Resort once. We want to go back again.

a. stay b. have stayed c. have been staying
5. W here have you been? T he baby __ , and I can't comfort her.

a. cnes b. is crying c. has been crying

o Exercise 39. Reading. (Charts 4-1- 4-7)
Answer the questions. Then read the passage and the statements that follow. Circle "T" for
true and "F" for false.
www.irLanguage.com
Have you heard about the problem of disappearing honeybees?
Why are honeybees important to fruit and many other crops?
Where Have the Honeybees Gone?
Honeybees have been disappearing around the world for several years now. In the United
States, billions of bees have already died. Europe, Australia, and Brazil have also reported losses
of honeybees. This is a serious problem because bees pollinate* crops. Without pollination,
apple, orange, and other fruit trees cannot produce fruit. Other crops like nuts also need
pollination. In the United States, one-third of the food supply depends on honeybees.
Scientists have a name for this problem: colony collapse disorder (CCD). Bees live in
colonies or hives, and thousands of beekeepers have been finding their hives empty. A hive that
once held 50,000 bees may just have a few dead or dying ones left.
There have been many theories about why this has happened; for example, disease, pests,**
unnatural growing conditions, and damaged DNA.*** Scientists now think that the cause may be
a combination of a virus and a fungus, but they need to do more research to find a solution to this
very serious problem.
1. Honeybees have stopped disappearing. T F

2. Scientists expect that more bees will die. T F
3. Apples and other fruits depend on honeybees. T F
4. Bee hives have been disappearing. T F
5. There are only four reasons why honeybees have died. T F
*pollinate (verb) = fertilize; pollination (noun) = the process that causes a plant to make a new plant
**pest = an insect or animal that damages crops

***DNA = deoxyribonucleic acid, a carrier of genetic information
1 06 CHAPTER 4
o Exercise 40. Grammar and writing. (Chapters 1, 2, and 4)
Part I. Complete the sentences with the correct form of the words in parentheses.
·s_ _ Surasuk Jutukanyaprateep. I .(be) _____ from

My name (be) _,=
l 2
Thailand. Right now I (s tudy) __________ English at this school. I (be)
_________ at this school since the beginning of January. I (arrive)
_________ here January 2nd, and my classes (begin) _______

5
January 6th.
Since I (come) _________ here, I (do) _________ many

7
things, and I (meet) _________ many people. Last week, I ( go)
9
_______ to a party at my friend's house. I (meet) _______ some of the
10 11
other students from Thailand at the party. Of course, we (speak) _______ Thai, so
12
I (practice, not) ___________ my English that night. There (be)
13
_______ only people from Thailand at the party.
14
However, since I (come) ___________ here, I (meet)
15
_________ a lot of other people too, including people from Latin America,
16
Africa, the Middle East, and Asia. I enjoy meeting people from other countries. Now I (know)
_______ people from all these places, and they (become) _________
17 18
my friends.
Part II. Write three paragraphs about yourself. Use the passage in Part I as a model. Answer
these questions:
PARAGRAPH I.
1. What is your name?
2. Where are you from?
3. How long have you been here?
PARAGRAPH II.
4. What have you done since you came here? OR
5. What have you learned since you began studying English?
PARAGRAPH III.
6. Who have you met in this class? OR
7. Who have you met recently?
8. Give a little information about these people.

Read Karen's statement. Which sequence of events (a. orb.) is correct?
m
irLanguage.com
KAR.EN: Jane met me for lunch. She was so happy. She had passed her driver's test.
a. Jane talked to Karen. Then she passed her test.
b. Jane passed her test. Then she talked to Karen.
4· 8 Past Perfect
Situation: The PAST PERFECT is used when the speaker is talking
Jack left his apartment at 2:00. Sue arrived at his about two different events at two different times in the
apartment at 2:15 and knocked on the door. past; one event ends before the second event happens.
(a) When Sue arrived, Jack wasn't there. He had left. In (a): There are two events, and both happened in the
past: Jack left his apartment. Sue arrived at his
apartment.
To show the time relationship between the two events,
we use the past perfect (had left) to say that the first
event (Jack leaving his apartment) was completed
before the second event (Sue arriving at his
apartment) occurred.
(b) Jack had left his apartment when Sue arrived. FORM: had = past participle
(c) He'd left. I'd left. They'd left. Etc. CONTRACTION: I I you I she I he I it I we I they + 'd
(d) Jack had left before Sue arrived. When before and after are used in a sentence, the
(e) Jack left before Sue arrived. time relationship is already clear so the past perfect is
( f) Sue arrived after Jack had left. often not necessary. The simple past may be used, as
(g) Sue arrived after Jack left. in (e) and (g).
Examples (d) and (e) have the same meaning.
Examples (f) and (g) have the same meaning.
(h) Stella was alone in a strange city. She walked The past perfect is more common in formal writing
down the avenue slowly, looking in shop windows. such as fiction, as in (h).
Suddenly, she turned her head and looked behind
her. Someone had called her name.
1 08 CHAPTER 4
Identify which action in the past took place first (1st) and which action took place second
(2nd).
1. The tennis player jumped in the air for joy. She had won the match.
a. _1=s�t __ The tennis player won the match.
b. �2
=n=d"---_ The tennis player jumped in the air.
2. Before I went to bed, I checked the front door. My roommate had already locked it.
a. ____,2=n-=d"---- I checked the door.
b. _1=s.....t__ My roommate locked the door.
3. I looked for Diego, but he had left the building.

a. ____ Diego left the building.
b. ____ I looked for Diego.
4. I laughed when I saw my son. He had poured a bowl of noodles on top of his head.
a. ___ I laughed.
b. ____ My son poured a bowl of noodles on his head.
5. Oliver arrived at the theater on time, but he couldn't get in. He had left his ticket at
home.
a. ____ Oliver left his ticket at home.
b. ____ Oliver arrived at the theater.
6. I handed Betsy the newspaper, but she didn't want it. She had read it during her lunch
hour.
a. ____ I handed Betsy the newspaper.
b. ____ Betsy read the newspaper.
7. After Carl arrived in New York, he called his mother. He had promised to call her as
soon as he got in.
a. ____ Carl _made a promise to his mother.
b. ____ Carl called his mother.

Listen to the short conversations and choose the verbs you hear.
{J
co I Examples: You will hear: A: I'll introduce you to Professor Newton at the meeting tonight.
Track 44
B: You don't need to. I have already met him.
You will choose: has � had
You will hear: A: Did Jack introduce you to Professor Newton?

B: No, it wasn't necessary. I had already met him.
You will choose: has have S
l. has have had 3. has have had
2. has have had 4. has have had
o Exercise 44. Check your knowledge. (Chapter 4)

Edit the sentences. Correct the errors in verb tense usage.
My experience with English
studying
1. I have been studied English for eight years, but I still have a lot to learn.
2. I started English classes at this school four weeks ago, and I am learning a lot of English
since then.
3. I want to learn English since I am a child.
4. I have been thinking about how to improve my English skills quickly since I came here, but
I hadn't found a good way.
5. Our teacher likes to give tests. We has have six tests since the beginning of the term.
6. I like learning English. W hen I was young, my father found an Australian girl to teach my
brothers and me English, but when I move to another city, my father didn't find anyone to
teach us.
7. I meet many friends in this class. I meet Abdul in the cafeteria on the first day. He was
friendly and kind. We are friends since that day.
8. Abdul have been study English for three months. His English is better than mine.
110 CHAPTER 4
Choose the correct completion.
A: __ you need help?
a. Are c. Have
b. Do d. Were
B: Yes, __.
a. I need c. I have
b. I'm d. I do
Yes/No Question Short Answer ( + Long Answer)

(a) Do you like tea? Yes, I do. (I like tea.) A yes/no question is a question that can be
No, I don't. (I don't like tea.) answered by yes or no.
1--��-
(b) Did Sue call? Yes, she did. (Sue called.) In an affirmative short answer (yes), a helping
No, she didn't. (Sue didn't call.) verb is NOT contracted with the subject.
In (c): INCORRECT.' Yes, I've.
(c) Have you met Al? Yes, I have. {I have met Al.)
In (d): INCORRECT: Yes, it's.
No, I haven't. (I haven't met Al.)
In (e): INCORRECT: Yes, he'll.
(d) Is it raining? Yes, it is. (It's raining.) The spoken emphasis in a short answer is on
No, it isn't. (It isn't raining.) the verb.
(e) Will Rob be here? Yes, he will. (Rob will be. here.)
No, he won't. (Rob won't be here.)

Choose the correct verbs.
A new cell phone
1. Is, Does that your new cell phone? Yes, it is, does.
2. Are, Do you like it? Yes, I am, do.
3. Were, Did you buy it online? Yes, I was, did.
111
4. 1%s, Did it expensive? No, it wasn't, didn't.
5. Is, Does it ringing? Yes, it is, does.
6. Are, Do you going to answer it? Yes, I am, do.
7. Was, Did the call important? Yes, it was, did.
8. Have, i%re you turned·your phone off? No, I haven't, wasn't.
9. Will, Are you call me later? Yes, I will, are.
0 Exercise 3. Looking at grammar. (Chart s-1 >

Use the information in parentheses to make yes/no questions. Complete each conversation
with an appropriate short answer. Do not use a negative verb in the question.
1. A: Do you know my brother?

B: No, I don't. (I don't know your brother.)
2. A:
B: No, (Snakes don't have legs.)
3. A:
B: Yes, (Mexico is in North America.)
4. A:
B: No, (I won't b"e at home tonight.)
5. A:
B: Yes, (I have a bike.)*
6. A:
B: Yes, (Simon has left.)
7. A:
B: Yes, (Simon left with Kate.)
8. A:
B: Yes, (Acupuncture relieves pain.)
*In American English, a form of do is usually used when have is the main verb: Do you have a car?
In British English, a form of do with the main verb have is not necessary: Have you a car?
112 CHAPTER 5
o Exercise 4. Listening. (Chart 5-1 >
Q
Listen to each question and choose the correct response.
co I
Example: You will hear: Are you almost ready?
Track 45
You will choose: a. Yes, I was. b. Yes, I do. @Yes, I am.
Leaving for the ai,rport
1. a. Yes, I am. b. Yes, I do. c. Yes, it does.
2. a. Yes, I did. b. Yes, I was. c. Yes, I am.
3. a. Yes, I will. b. Yes, it will. c. Yes, it did.
4. a. Yes, they are. b. Yes, it did. c. Yes, it is.
5. a. Yes, I am. b. Yes, I will. c. Yes, I do.
o Exercise 5. Let's talk: interview. (Chart 5-1 >

Interview seven students in your class. Make questions with the given words. Ask each
student a different question.
1. you\ like\ animals? 5. you\ sleep\ well last night?
2. you\ ever \ had\ a pet snake? 6. you\ be\ tired right now?
3. it\ be\ cold\ in this room? 7. you\ be\ here next year?
4. it\ rain\ right now?
0 Exercise 6. Listening. (Chart 5-1 >

(J
CD I
In spoken English, it may be hard to hear the beginning of a yes/no question because the words
are often reduced.*
Track 46
Part I. Listen to these common reductions.
1. Is he absent? --+ lh-ze absent? OR Ze absent?
2. Is she absent? --+ lh-she absent?
3. Does it work? --+ Zit work?
4. Did it break? --+ Dih-dit break? OR Dit break?
5. Has he been sick? --+ Ze been sick? OR A-ze been sick?
6. Is there enough? --+ Zere enough?
7. Is that okay? --+ Zat okay?
Part II. Complete the sentences with the words you hear. Write the non-reduced forms.
At the grocery store
1. I need to see the manager. _______ available?
2. I need to see the manager. _______ in the store today?
3. Here is one bag of apples. _______ enough?
4. I need a drink of water. _______ a drinking fountain?
5. My credit card isn't working. Hmmm. _______ expire?
*See also Chapter I, Exercise 33, p. 21, and Chapter 2, Exercise 20, p. 39.
Asking Questions 113

6. Where's Simon? _______ left?
7. T he price seems high. _______ include the tax?

Circle the correct answers. T here may be more than one correct answer for each question.
1. Where did you go?
a. To the hospital. b. Yes, I did. c. Outside. d. Yesterday.
2. When is James leaving?
a. I'm not sure. b. Yes, he is. c. Yes, he does. d. Around noon.
3. Who did you meet?
a. Tariq did. b. Sasha. c. Well, I met Sam and Mia. d. Yes, I did.
, .�r · . •• ... •
,- ,,
< �: ,.. ,.. ,
,.. • ' -..... ' ""
]:5.:2 ,,:Yes/No and ittformadon Questions

:
�::. , .... ,t ,.._,:.. .. ' ...,�·=-� <.·..,__...--·''·- -

-� _,:___..;:..�: ,. . '. . ;. . - ...';.. - � ,'..!,. �
A yes/no question = a question that can be answered by "yes" or "no"

A: Does Ann live in Montreal?
B: Yes, she does. OR No, she doesn't.
An information question = a question that asks for information by using a question word:
where, when, why, who, whom, what, which, whose, how
A: Where does Ann live?
B: In Montreal.
(Question Helping Subject Main Verb (Rest of

Word) Verb Sentence)
(a) Does Ann live in Montreal? The same subject-verb word order is
(b) Where does Ann live? used in both yes/no and information
questions:
(c) Is Sara studying at the library?
(d) Where is Sara studying? Helping Verb + Subject + Main Verb
(e) Will you graduate next year? Example (a) is a yes/no question.
( f ) When will you graduate? Example (b) is an information question.
(g) Did they see Jack?

(h) Who(m)* did they see? In (i) and G): Main verb be in simple
present and simple past (am, is, are,
(i) Is Heidi at home?
was, were) precedes the subject. It has
(j) Where is Heidi?
the same position as a helping verb.
(k) Who came to dinner? When the question word (e.g., who or
(I) What happened yesterday? what) is the subject of the question,
usual question word order is not used.
Notice in (k) and (I) that no form of do
is used.
*See Chart 5-4 for a discussion of who(m).
114 CHAPTER 5
Read the information about Irina and Paul. Then make complete questions with the given
words and choose the correct short answers.
The Simple Life
Irina and Paul live a simple life. They have a one-room cabin on a lake in the
mountains. They fish for some of their food. They also raise chickens. They pick fruit
from trees and berries from bushes. They don't have electricity or TV, but they enjoy their
life. They don't need a lot to be happy.
1. QUESTION: where \ Irina and Paul\ live?

Where do Irina and Paul live?
ANSWER: a. Yes, they do. @on a lake.
2. QUESTION: they\ live\ a simple life?
ANSWER: a. Yes, they live. b. Yes, they do.
3. QUESTION: what\ they\ pick\ from the trees?
ANSWER: a. Fruit. b. Yes, they pick.
4. QUESTION: they\ have\ electricity?
ANSWER: a. No, they don't. b. No, they don't have.
5. QUESTION: they\ enjoy\ their life?
ANSWER: a. Yes, they do. b. Yes, they enjoy.
6. QUESTION: they\ be\ happy?
fu"!SWER: a. Yes, they do. b. Yes, they are.

Exercise 9. Listening. (Chart 5-2)
Listen to the conversation. Then listen again and complete the sentences with the words you
(J
CD!
hear.
Track 47
Where are Roberto and Isabel?
A: ___________ Roberto and Isabel?
B: Yes, _______ . They live around the corner from me.
A: _____________ them lately?
B: No, _________ . They're out of town.
A: _ ___________ _ to their parents? I heard Roberto's parents are ill.
B: Yes, ___ _ _ _ _ _ . They went to help them.
A: _______________ them soon?
B: Yes, In fact, I'm going to pick them up at the airport.
A: _____________ back this weekend? I'm having a party, and I'd like
to invite them.
B: No, _________ . They won't be back until Monday.

10

Complete the sentences with the most appropriate question word from the list. One sentence
has two possible answers. Match the answers to the questions.
Why What time Where When
QUESTIONS
1. ___ ________ do you live? __

2. ___________ are you laughing? __
3. ___________ will you get here? __
ANSWERS
a. At noon.
b. On Fifth Street.
c. Because the joke was funny.
116 CHAPTER 5
Question Answer
(a) Where did he go? Home. Where asks about place.
Last night. A question with when can be answered by
Two days ago. any time expression, as in the sample
(b) When did he leave? {
Monday morning. answers in (b).
Seven-thirty.
{
Seven-thirty. A question with what time asks about
(c) What time did he leave? Around five o'clock. time on a clock.
A quarter past ten.
(d) Why did he leave? Because he didn't feel well.* Why asks about reason.
(e) What did he leave for ? Why can also be expressed with the phrases What ... for and How come, as
( f ) How come he left? in (e) and (f).
Notice that with How come, usual question order is not used. The subject
precedes the verb and no form of do is used.
*See Chart 8-6, p. 221, for the use of because. Because I didn't feel well is an adverb clause. It is not a complete sentence. In this
example, it is the short answer to a question.
0 Exercise 11. Looking at grammar. (Chart 5-3)

Complete each conversation. Make questions using the information from Speaker A.
1. A: I'm going downtown in a few minutes.
B: I didn't catch that. When are y_ou @oin@ downtown ? OR
B: I didn't catch that. Where are y_ou @Oin@ in a few minutes ?
2. A: My kids are transferring to Lakeview Elementary School because it's a better school.
B: What was that? Where ? OR
B: What was that? Why ?
3. A: I will meetTaka at 10:00 at the mall.

B: I couldn't hear you. Tell me again. What time ? OR
B: I couldn't hear you. Tell me again. Where ?
4. A: Class begins at 8:15.

B: Are you sure? When ? OR
B: Are you sure? What time ?
5. A: I stayed home from work because I wanted to watch the World Cup final onTV.
B: Huh?! Why ? OR
B: Huh?! What for?

o Exercise 12. Looking at grammar. (Chart 5-3}
Restate the sentences. Use How come and What/or.
1. Why are you going? 3. Why does he need more money?
2. Why did they come? 4. Why are they going to leave?
o Exercise 13. Reading and grammar. (Charts 5-2 and 5-3}

Read the passage about Nina's birthday. Make questions with the given words. Answer the
questions in small groups or as a class.
The Birthday Present

Tom got home late last night, around midnight. His wife, Nina, was sitting on the couch
waiting for him. She was quite worried because Tom is never late.
Tomorrow is Nina's birthday. Unfortunately, Tom doesn't think she will be happy with her
birthday present. Yesterday, Tom bought her a bike and he decided to ride it home from the
bike shop. While he was riding down a hill, a driver came too close to him, and he landed in a
ditch. Tom was okay, but the bike was ruined. Tom found a bus stop nearby and finally got
home.
Tom told Nina the story, but Nina didn't care about the bike. She said she had a better
present: her husband.
1. When\ Tom\ get home 4. Why\ be\ Tom\ late
2. Where\ be\ his wife 5. What present\ Nina\ get
3. What\ Tom\ buy
0 Exercise 14. Listening. (Charts 5-2 and 5-3}

Listen to each question and choose the.best answer.
co 1 Example: You will hear: When are you leaving?
Track 48
You will choose: a. Yes, I am. �Tomorrow. c. In the city.
1. a. I am too. b. Yesterday. c. Sure.
2. a. For dinner. b. At 6:00. c. At the restaurant.
3. a. Outside the mall. b. After lunch. c. Because I need a ride.
4. a. At work. b. Because traffic was heavy. c. A few hours ago.
5. a. A pair of jeans. b. At the store. c. Tomorrow.
o Exercise 15. Warm-up. (Chart 5-4}

Match each question in Column A with the correct answer in Column B.
Column A ColumnB
1. Who flew to Rome? a. A small plane flew to Rome.
2. Who did you fly to Rome? __ b. Pablo flew to Rome.
3. What did you fly to Rome? __ c. I flew a smc.111 plane to Rome.
4. What flew to Rome? d. I flew Pablo to Rome.
118 CHAPTER 5
Question Answer
s s In (a): Who is used as the subject (S) of a question.

(�) Who came? Someone came.
In (b): Who(m) is used as the object (0) in a question.
0 S O Whom is used in very formal English. In everyday
(b) Who(m) did you see? I saw someone. spoken English, who is usually used instead of
whom:
UNCOMMON: Whom did you see?
COMMON: Who did you see?
s s What can be used as either the subject or the object in

(c) What happened? Something happened. a question.
0 S O Notice in (a) and (c): When who or what is used as

(d) What did you see? I saw something. the subject of a question, usual question word order is
not used; no form of do is used:
CORRECT: Who came?
INCORRECT: Who did come?

Make questions with who, who(m), and what. Write "S" if the question word is the subject.
Write "O" if the question word is the object.
Question Answer
s s
1. Who knows? Someone knows.
0 0
2. Who(m) did you ask? I asked someone.
3. Someone knocked on the door.
4. Talya met someone.
5. Mike learned something.
6. Something changed Gina's mind.
7. Gina is talking about someone.*
8. Gina is talking about something.
* A preposition may come at the beginning of a question in very formal English:

About whom (NOT who) is Tina talking?
In everyday English, a preposition usually does not come at the beginning of a question.

o Exercise 17. Looking at grammar.
Complete the sentences with who or what.
(Chart 5-4) [R
ir Language.com
1. A: just called? 4. A: is going on?

B: That was Antonia. B: Ben's having a party.
2. A: do you need? 5. A: did you call?
B: A pair of scissors. I'm cutting my hair. B: Tracy.
3. A: is Jae? 6. A: do you need?
B: My stepmom. B: Dr. Smith or her nurse.

Walk around the room and ask your classmates questions with who or what.
Example: __ are you currently reading?
SPEAKER A: What are you currently reading?
SPEAKER B: A book about a cowboy.
1. __ do you like to do in your free time?
2. __ is your idea of the perfect vacation?
3. __ is your best friend?
4. __ was the most memorable event of your childhood?
5. __ stresses you out?
6. __· do you need that you don't have?
7. __ would you most like to invite to dinner? Why? ( The person can be living or dead.)

{J Listen to the conversation. Listen again and complete the sentences with the words you hear.
co I
Track 49
A secret
A: John told me something.
B: ___________ tell you?
A: It's confidential. I can't tell you.
B: ___________ anyone else?
A: He told a few other people.
B: ___________ tell?
3
A: Some friends.
B: Then it's not a secret. ___________ say?
A: I can't tell you.
B: ___________ can't ___________ me?
5 6
A: Because it's about you. But don't worry. It's nothing bad.
B: Gee. Thanks a lot. That sure makes me feel better.
120 CHAPTER 5
o Exercise 20. Let's read and talk. (Chart 5-4)
Work in small groups. Ask your classmates for the meaning of the italicized words in the
passage. Refer io a dictionary as necessary.
Example: type
STUDENT A: What does type mean?
STUDENT B: Iype means kind or category.
Types of Books
There are several different types of books. You may be familiar with the categories of fiction
and nonfiction. These are the two main types. Fiction includes mysteries, romance, thrillers, science
fiction, and horror. Nonfiction includes biographies, autobiographies, history, and travel. There are
other types, but these are some of the more common ones. Which type do you like best?

Answer the questions with information about yourself.
1. What do you do on weekends? I ...
2. What did you do last weekend? I .. .
3. What are you going to do this weekend? I'm going to ...
4. What will you do the following weekend? I will ...
Question Answer
(a) What does Bob do every morning? He goes to class. What + a form of do is used to ask
(b) What did you do yesterday? I went downtown. questions about activities.
(c) What is Anna doing (right now)? She's studying. Examples of forms of do: am doing,
(d) What are you going to do tomorrow? I'm going to go to the beach. will do, are going to do, did, etc.
(e) What do you want to do tonight? I want to go to a movie.
(f ) What would you like to do tomorrow? I would like to visit Jim.
0 Exercise 22. Looking at grammar. (Chart 5-5)

Make questions beginning with What + a form of do.
1. A: What are y_ou doin� right now?
B: I'm working on my monthly report.
2. A: last night?
B: I worked on my monthly report.
3. A: tomorrow?
B: I'm going to visit my relatives.

4. A:
B: I want to go to the beach.
5. A: ---------------- this evening?
B: I would like to go to a movie.
6. A: ________________ tomorrow?
B: I'm staying home and relaxing most of the day.
7. A: ________________ in your history class every day?

B: We listen to the teacher talk.
8. A: _______________ (for a living)?*

B: I'm a teacher.
A: ________________ your wife ____ ?
B: She designs websites. She works for an Internet company.

Interview your classmates. Make questions with the given words and what + a form of do.
More than one verb tense may be possible. Share a few of your classmates' answers with the
class.
Example: tomorrow
SPEAKER A: What are you going to do tomorrow? /What do you want to do tomorrow? /What
would you like to do tomorrow? I Etc.
SPEAKER B: I'm going to buy a new video game. I I want to buy a new video game. I I'd like to
buy a new video game. I Etc.
1. last night 6. last weekend
2. right now 7. after class yesterday
3. next Saturday 8. every morning
4. this afternoon 9. since you arrived in this city
5. tonight 10. on weekends
o Exercise 24. Warm-a,p. (Chart 5-6)

Answer the questions about ice-cream flavors.
blackberry chocolate coffee lemon strawberry

caramel coconut green tea mint vanilla
1. Which ice-cream flavors are popular in your country?

2. What kind of ice cream do you like?
* What do you do? has a special meaning. It means: What is your occupation,yourjob? Another way of asking the same
question: What do you do for a living?
122 CHAPTER 5'

5-6 Using Which and What Kind Of
.'
Which
(a) TOM: May I borrow a pen from you? In (a): Ann uses which (not what) because she
ANN: Sure. I have two pens. This pen has black ink. wants Tom to choose.
That pen has red ink. Which is used when the speaker wants someone to
Which pen do you want? OR make a choice, when the speaker is offering
Which one do you want? OR alternatives: this one or that one; these or those.
Which do you want?
(b) I like these earrings, and I like those too. Which can be used with either singular or plural
SUE:
BOB: Which (earrings Jones) are you going to buy? nouns.
SUE: I think I'll get these.
(c) JIM: Here's a photo of my daughter's class. Which can be used to ask about people as well as
KIM: Very nice. Which one is your daughter? things.
(d) SUE: My aunt gave me some money for my birthday. In (d): The question doesn't involve choosing from a
I'm going to take it with me to the mall. particular group of items, so Bob uses what, not
BOB: What are you going to buy with it? which.
SUE: I haven't decided yet.
What kind of
QUESTION
I ANSWER
Boots.
What kind of asks for information about a specific
type (a specific kind) in a general category.
Sandals. In (e): general category = shoes

Tennis shoes. specific kinds = boots
(e) What kind of shoes did you buy? Loafers. sandals
Running shoes. tennis shoes
High heels. etc.
Etc.
Apples. In (f): general category = fruit

Bananas. specific kinds = apples
Oranges. bananas
( f ) What kind of fruit do you like best?
Grapefruit. oranges
Strawberries. etc.
Etc.

Make questions beginning with Which or What.
1. A: I have two books. Which book I Which one I Which do you want?
B: That one. (I want that book.)
2: A: What did you buy when you went shog12in<3?
B: A book. (I bought a book when I went shopping.)

3. A: Could I borrow your pen for a minute?
B: Sure. I have two.
A: T hat one. (I would like that one.)
4. A:
B: A pen. (Hassan borrowed a pen from me.)
5. A:
B: Two pieces of hard candy. (I have two pieces of hard candy in my hand.) Would you
like one?
A: Yes. Thanks.
B:
A: The yellow one. (I'd like the yellow one.)
6. A: Tony and I went shopping. I got some new shoes.
B:
A: A tie. (Tony got a tie.)
7. A: Did you enjoy your trip to South America?
B: Yes, I did. Very much.
A:�-------------------------------
B: Peru, Brazil, and Venezuela. (I visited Peru, Brazil, and Venezuela.)*
A:�-------------------------------
B: Peru. (I enjoyed Peru the most. I have family there.)

Make questions. Ask one of your classmates each question and write the answer. Share some
of their answers with the class.
1. A: What kind of shoes are you wearing?
B: Boots. Classmate's answer: ----------------------
2. A: What kind of meat do you eat most often?

B: Beef. Classmate's answer:
3. A: What kind of _________ do you like best?

B: Rock 'n roll. Classmate's answer:
4. A: What kind of _________ do you like to watch?

B: Comedy. Classmate's answer:
5. A: What kind of _________ do you like best?
B: Classmate's answer:
*The difference between what country and which country is often very small.
124 CHAPTER 5
Answer the questions.
I. This is Ted's daughter. Whose daughter is that?
a. That's Terry. b. That's Terry's.
2. This is Ted. Who's next to him?

a. That's Terry. b. That's Terry's.
(a) Whose (book) is this? It's John's (book). . Whose asks about possession.*
(b) Whose (books) are those? They're mine (OR my books). Notice in (a): The speaker of the question
(c) Whose car did you borrow? I borrowed Karen's (car). may omit the noun (book) if the meaning is
clear to the listener.
COMPARE:
Who's and whose have the same
(d) Who'sthat? Mary Smith. pronunciation.
(e) Whose is that? Mary's.
Who's is a contraction of who is.
Whose asks about possession.
*See Charts 6-11, p. 166, and 6-12, p. 168, for ways of expressing possession.

Work with a partner. Part ner B looks at the picture below and t ries t o remember what the
women are wearing. Then Partner B closes his/her book. Partner A asks questions by pointing
to an item on page 126 and using whose. Partners should change roles after four items.
Example:
PAR1NER A: Whose purse is that?
PAR1NER B: It's Rita's.
Nina Rita

0 Exercise 29. Listening. (Chart 5-7 )
(J Listen to the questions and circle the correct completions.
CD I 1. Who's Whose 3. Who's Whose 5. Who's Whose
Track 50
2. Who's Whose 4. Who's Whose 6. Who's Whose

(J Listen to the questions. Decide if the speaker is saying whose or who's.
CD I
Track 51
www.irLanguage.com
An old vacation photo

1. whose who's 3. whose who's 5. whose who's
2. whose who's 4. whose who's 6. whose who's

Match each question in Column A with the correct answer in Column B.
Column A ColumnB
1. How tall is your sister? __ a. By bus.
2. How old is your brother? __ b. In five minutes.
3. How did you get here? __ c. I don't. I only know his sister.
4. How soon do we need to go? __ d. Fifteen.
5. How well do you know Kazu? __ e. Five feet (1.52 meters).
126 CHAPTER 5
I drove. I By car. How has many uses. One use of
I took a taxi. I By taxi. how is to ask about means (ways) of
(a) Howdid you get here? I took a bus. I By bus. transportation.
I flew. I By plane.
I took a train. I By train.
I walked. I On foot.
(b) How old are you? Twenty-one. How is often used with adjectives
(c) How tall is he? About six feet. ( e.g., old, big) and adverbs (e.g., well,
(d ) How big is your apartment? It has three rooms. quickly).
( e) How sleepy are you? Very sleepy.
(f ) How hungry are you? I'm starving.
(g) How soon will you be ready? In five minutes.
(h ) How well does he speak English? Very well.
( i ) How quickly can you get here? I can get there in 30 minutes.
o Exercise 32. Reading and grammar. (Chart 5-8)

Read the passage about John and then answer the questions.
Long John
John is 14 years old. He is very tall for his age. He is 6 foot, 6 inches (2 meters). His
friends call him "Long John." People are surprised to find out that he is still a teenager. Both
his parents are average height, so John's height seems unusual.
It causes problems for him, especially when he travels. Beds in hotels are too short, and
there is never enough leg room on airplanes. He is very uncomfortable. When he can, he
prefers to take a train because he can walk around and stretch his legs.
1. How tall is John?
2. How old is John?
3. How well do you think he sleeps in hotels?
4. How comfortable is he on airplanes?
5. How does he like to travel?
Asking Questions 12]1

Make questions with How.
1. A: How old is your dau@hter?
B: Ten. (My daughter is ten years old.)
2. A:
B: Very important. (Education is very important.)
3. A:
B: By bus. (I get to school by bus.)
4. A:
B: Very, very deep. (The ocean is very, very deep.)
5. A:
B: By plane. (I'm going to get to Buenos Aires by plane.)
6. A:
B: Not very. (The test wasn't very difficult.)
7. A:
B: It's 29,029 feet high. (Mt. Everest is 29,029 feet high.)*
8. A:
B: I ran. (I ran here.)
0 Exercise 34. Listening. (Chart 5-8)
IJ
CD 1
Complete the conversations with the words you hear.
1. A: are these eggs?
Track 52
B: I just bought them at the Farmers' Market, so they should be fine.

2. A: ___________ were the tickets?
B: They were 50% off.
3. A: ___________ was the driver's test?
B: Well, I didn't pass, so that gives you an idea.
4. A: ___________ is the car?
B: There's dirt on the floor. We need to vacuum it inside.
5. A: ___________ is the frying pan?
B: Don't touch it! You'll bum yourself.
6. A: ___________ is the street you live on?
B: There is a lot of traffic, so we keep the windows closed a lot.
7. A: are you about interviewing for the job?
B: Very. I already scheduled an interview with the company.
*29,029 feet = 8,848 meters
128 CHAPTER 5
o Exercise 35. Warm· up: trivia. (Chart 5-9)
Match each question in Column A with the best answer in Column B. *
Column A ColumnB
1. How often does the earth go completely a. About six times a year.
around the sun? b. Several hundred times a day.
2. How often do the summer Olympics c. Once a year.
occur? d. Every four years.
3. How often do earthquakes occur? __ e. Exactly 22 times a day.
4. How many times a year can a healthy
person safely donate blood? __
5. How many times a day do the hands
on a clock overlap? __
Question
Every day. How often asks about frequency.
Once a week.
(a) How often do you go shopping? About twice a week.
Every other day or so.*
Three times a month.
(b) How many times a day do you eat? Three or four. Other ways of asking how often:
How many times a week do !'day
you go shopping? Two. a week
how many times
How many times a month do 8 month
you go to the post office? Once. a year
How many times a year do
you take a vacation? Once or twice.
Frequency Expressions
a lot every
occasionally every other
once in a while once a
day I week I month I year
not very often twice a
hardly ever three times a
almost never ten times a
never
*Every other day means "Monday yes, Tuesday no, Wednesday yes, Thursday no," etc.
Or so means "approximately."

Work with a partner. Take turns asking and answering questions with How often or How
many times a day/week/month/year.
Example: eat lunch at the cafeteria

SPEAKER A: How often do you eat lunch at the cafeteria?
SPEAKER B: About twice a week. How about you? How often do you eat at the cafeteria?
SPEAKER A: I don't. I bring my own lunch.
I. check email
2. listen to podcasts
3. go out to eat
4. cook your own dinner
5. buy a toothbrush
6. go sw1mmmg
7. attend weddings
8. download music from the Internet
Exercise 37. Reading and listening. (Charts 5-8 and 5-9)

(J
Read the short paragraph about Ben. Then complete the questions with the words you hear.
CD I
Track 53 Ben's Sleeping Problem
Ben has a problem with insomnia. He's unable to fall asleep at night very easily. He also
wakes up often in the middle of the night and has trouble getting back to sleep. Right now he's
talking to a nurse at a sleep disorders clinic. The nurse is asking him some general questions.
I. _____________ you?
2. _____________ you?
3. _____________ you weigh?
4. In general, _________ you sleep at night?
5. _____________ you fall asleep?
6. _____________ you wake up during the night?
7. _____________ you in the mornings?
8. _____________ you exercise?
9. _____________ you feeling right now?
10. _____________ you come in for an overnight appointment?
130 CHAPTER 5
irLanguage.com

Look at the map and answer the questions about flying distances to these cities.
1. How far is it from London to Madrid?

2. How many miles is it from London to Paris?
3. How many kilometers is it from Paris to Madrid?
5 • 10 Using How Far

(a) It is 489 miles from Oslo to Helsinki by air.* The most common way of expressing distance:
It is + distance + from/to + to/from
from Moscow to Beijing.
In (b): All tour expressions with from and to have the
(b) It is 3,605 miles ( from Beijing to Moscow.
to Beijing from Moscow. same meaning.
to Moscow from Beijing.
(c) - How far is it from Mumbai to Delhi? How far is used to ask questions about distance.
-725 miles.
(d) - How far do you live from school?
- Four blocks.
(e) How many miles is it from London to Paris? Other ways to ask how far:
( f ) How many kilometers is it to Montreal from here? • how many miles
(g) How many blocks is it to the post office? • how many kilometers
• how many blocks
*I mile = 1.60 kilometers; I kilometer = 00.614 mile

Make questions with How far.
1. A: How far is it from Pra@ue to Budapest?
B: 276 miles. (It's 276 miles to Prague from Budapest.)

2. A:
B: 257 kilometers. (It's 257 kilometers from Montreal to Quebec.)
3. A:
B: Six blocks. (It's six blocks from here to the post office.)
4. A:
B: A few miles. (I live a few miles from work.)

Write four questions with How far and words from the list. Use this model: How far is it
from ( _) to ( _ )? Look up the correct distances. Ask other students your questions.
the sun the moon the earth Mars
Venus Jupiter Saturn Neptune

Complete the sentences. Then ask three different classmates about their nighttime routine.
Begin with How long does it take you to ... ? Share some of their answers with the class.
1. It takes me _____ minutes to get ready for bed.
2. It takes me minutes to brush my teeth.
3. It usually takes me minutes/hour(s) to fall asleep.
5·11 Length of Time: It+ Take and How Long

IT+ TAKE+ (SOMEONE) + LENGTH OF TIME + INFINITIVE It + take is often used with time words
and an infinitive to express length of
(a) It takes 20 minutes to cook rice.
time, as in (a) and (b).
(b) It took Al two hours to drive to work. An infinitive = to + the simple form of a
verb.*
In (a): to cook is an infinitive.
(c) How long does it take to cook rice? Twenty minutes. How long asks about length of time.
(d) How long did it take Al to drive to work today? Two hours.
(e) How long did you study last night? Four hours.
(f) How long will you be in Hong Kong? Ten days.
(g) Howmany days will you be in Hong Kong? Other ways of asking how long:
minutes
hours
days
howmany+ ,
weeks
months
years
*See Chart 13-3i p. 346.
132 CHAPTER 5
o Exercise 42. let's talk: pairwork. (Chart 5-11)
Work with a partner. Take turns asking and answering questions using it + take. Share a few
of your answers with the class.
1. How long does it take you to ...
a. eat breakfast? � It takes me ten minutes to eat breakfast.
b. get to class?
c. write a short paragraph in English?
d. read a 300-page book?
2. Generally speaking, how long does it take to ...

a. fly from (a city) to (a city)?
b. get from here to your hometown?
c. get used to living in a foreign country?
d. commute from (a local place) to (a local place) during rush hour?

Make questions with How long.
1. A: How Ion@ did it take you to drive to Istanbul?

B: Five days. (It took me five days to drive to Istanbul.)
2. A:
B: A week. (Mr.McNally will be in the hospital for a week.)
3. A:
B: A long time. (It takes a long time to learn a second language.)
4. A:
B: Six months. (I've been living here for six months.)
5. A:
B: Six years. (I lived in Oman for six years.)
6. A:
B: A couple of years. (I've known Mr.Pham for a couple of years.)
7. A:
B: Since 2005. (He's been living in Canada since 2005.)

o Exercise 44. Warm -up: listening. (Chart s- 12)
rJJ Listen to the questions. The verbs in italics are contracted with the question word. Choose the
ck.I correct verb from the list for each question.
CD I
Track 54
does did IS are will
A birthday
1. When's your birthday?
2. When'll your party be?
3. WhereH you decide to have it?
4. Who're you inviting?
5·12 Spoken and Written Contractions with Question Words

Spoken Only
is (a) "When's he coming?" Is, are, does, did, has, have, and will are usually
"Whys she late?" contracted with qu�stion words in speaking.
are {b) "What're these?"
"Who're they talking to?"
does (c) "When's the movie start?"
"Where's he live?"
did (d) "Who'dyou see?"
"What'd you do?"
has (e) "What's she done?"
"Where's he gone?"
have ( f) "How've you been?"
"What've I done?"
will (g) "Where'/lyou be?"
"When'llthey be here?"
{h) What do you � Whaddaya think? What do you and What are you both can be reduced
( i) What are you � Whaddaya thinking? to "Whaddaya" in spoken English.
Written www.irLanguage.com
is (j) Where's Ed? Only contractions with where, what, or who + is are
What's that? commonly used in writing, such as in letters to friends
Who'.she? or emails. They are generally not appropriate in more
formal writing, such as in magazine articles or
reference material.
134 CHAPTER 5
0 Exercise 45. Ustening. (Chart 5-12)
Listen to the contractions in these questions.
CD I
Track 55
1. Where is my key? 8. Why is r.l)e teacher absent?
2. Where are my keys? 9. Who is that?
3. Who are those people? 10. Why did you say that?
4. What is in that box? 11. Who did you talk to at the party?
5. What are you doing? 12. How are we going to get to work?
6. Where did Bob go last night? 13. What did you say?
7. Who will be at the party? 14. How will you do that?

/J
cD I
Complete the sentences with the words you hear. Write the non-contracted forms.
On an airplane
Track 56
Example: You will hear: When's the plane land?

You will write: When does the plane land?
1. _________ you going to sit with?

2. _________ you going to get your suitcase under the seat?
3. _________ the flight attendant just say?
4, _________ we need to put our seat belts back on?
5. _________ the plane descending?
6. _________ we going down?
7. _________ the pilot tell us what's going on?
8. _________ meet you when you land?
9. _________ our connecting flight?
10. _________ we get from the airport to our hotel?

/J
cD I
Complete the questions with the words you hear. Write the non-contracted forms.
A mother talking to her teenage daughter
Track 57
1. -------------------- going?
2. ____________________ going with?
3. -------------------- that?
4. ____________________ known him?

5. ____________________ meet him?

6. ------ --------------go to school?
7. ---------------------a good student?
8. _______________ _____ be back?
9. _____ _______________ wearing that outfit?
10. --------------------- giving me that look?
11. _________ _ _ _ ________ asking so many questions?

Because I love you!
o Exercise 48. Listening. (Chart 5· 12)

{J Listen to the questions and circle the correct non-reduced forms of the words you hear.
co I Example: You will hear: Whaddya want?
Track 58
�
You will choose: What are you What do you
1. What are you What do you

Part I. Both sentences in each pair are grammatically correct. Which question in each pair do
you think is more common in spoken English?
1. a. How do you spell "Hawaii?"
b. What is the spelling for "Hawaii?"
2. a. How do you pronounce G-A-R-A-G-E?
b. What is the pronunciation for G-A-R-A-G-E?
Part II. Which two questions have the same meaning?
1. How are you doing?

2. How's it going?
3. How do you do?
136 CHAPTER 5
5-13 More Questions with How
Question Answer
(a) How do you spell "coming"? C-O-M-1-N-G. To answer (a): Spell the word.
(b) How do you say " yes" in Japanese? Hai. To answer (b): Say the word.
(c) How do you say /pronounce this word? -- To answer (c): Pronounce the word.
(d) How are you getting along? real In (d), (e). and (f): How is your life? Is your life
(e) How are you doing? Fine. okay? Do you have any problems?
( f ) How's it going? Okay.
NOTE: Example (f) is also used in greetings: Hi,
So-so.
Bob. How's it going?
Terrific! The questions in (g) ask about health or about

Wonderful! general emotional state.
Great!
(g) How do you feel? Fine.
How are you feeling? Okay.
So-so.
A bit under the weather.
Not so good.
Terrible! I Lousy. I Awful!
(h) How do you do? How do you do? How do you do? is used by two speakers
when they meet each other for the first time in a
somewhat formal situation, as in (h).*
*A: Dr. Erickson, I'd like to introduce you co a friend of mine, Rick Brown. Rick, this is my biology professor, Dr. Erickson.
B: How do you do, Mr. Brown?
C: How do you do, Dr. Erickson? I'm pleased co meet you.

Divide into two teams. Take turns spelling the words your teacher gives you. The team with
the most correct answers wins. Your book is closed.
Example: country
TEACHER: How do you spell "country"?
TEAMA: C-0-U-N-T-R-Y.
TEACHER: Good. (If the answer is incorrect, the other team gets a try.)
1. together 7. beginning
2. people 8. intelligent
3. daughter 9. Mississippi
4. beautiful 10. purple
5. foreign 11. rained
6. neighbor 12. different

Walk around the room and ask your classmates how to say each item in another language
Gapanese, Arabic, German, French, Korean, etc). If someone doesn't know, ask another
person. Use this question: How do you say ( _) in ( _ )?
Example:
SPEAKER A: How dci you say "yes" in French?
SPEAKER B: "Yes" in French is "oui."
1. No. 3. Okay. 5. Good-bye.
2. Thank you. 4. How are you? 6. Excuse me.

In the conversation, the speakers are making suggestions. Underline their suggestions.
A: Let's invite the Thompsons over for dinner.
B: Good idea! How about next Sunday?
A: Let's do it sooner. What about this Saturday?
5-14 Using How About and What About

(a) A: We need one more player. How about and what about have the same meaning
B: How about/What about Jack? and usage. They are used to make suggestions or
Let's ask him if he wants to play. offers.
(b) A: What time should we meet? How about and what about are followed by a noun
B: How about/What about three o'clock? (or pronoun) or the -ing form of a verb (gerund).
(c) A: What should we do this afternoon? NOTE: How about and what about are frequently used
B: How about going to the zoo? in informal spoken English, but are usually not used in
writing.
(d) A: What about asking Sally over for dinner next
Sunday?
B: Okay. Good idea.
(e) A: I'm tired. How about you? How about you? and What about you? are used to
B: Yes, I'm tired too. ask a question that refers to the information or
(f) A: Are you hungry? question that immediately preceded it.
B: No. What about you? In (e): How about you?= Are you tired?
A: I'm a little hungry. In ( f): What about you?= Are you hungry?
o Exercise 53. Grammar and listening. (Chart 5- 14)
fJ
Choose the best response. Then listen to each conversation and check your answer.
co I Example:
Track 59
SPEAKER A: What are you going to do over vacation?
SPEAKER B: I'm staying here. What about you?
SPEAKER A: a. Yes, I will. I have a vacation too.
@ I'm going to Jordan to visit my sister.
c. I did too.
138 CHAPTER 5
1. A: Did you like the movie?
B: It was okay, I guess. How about you?
A: a. I thought it was pretty good.
b. I'm sure.
c. I saw it last night.
2. A: Are you going to the company party?
B: I haven't decided yet. What about you?
A: a. I didn't know that.
b. Why aren't you going?
c. I think I will.
3. A: Do you like living in this city?
B: Sort of. How about you?
A: a. I'm living in the city.
b. I'm not sure. It's pretty noisy.
c. Yes, I have been.
4. A: What are you going to have?
B: Well, I'm not really hungry. I think I might order just a salad. How about you?
A: a. I'll have one too.
b. I'm eating at a restaurant.
c. No, I'm not.
o Exercise 54. Let's talk: pairwork. (Chart 5 -14)

Work with a partner. The given questions are common ways to begin casual conversations or
make "small talk." Partner A asks the question and Partner B answers. Both speakers look at
each other, not the book, when speaking.
Example: What kind of books do you like to read?
PARTNER A: What kind of books do you like to read?
PARTNER B: I like biographies. How about you?
PARTNER A: Thrillers are my favorite.
1. How long have you been living in (this city or country)?
2. What are you going to do after class today?
3. What kind of movies do you like to watch?
Change roles.
4. Do you come from a large family?
5. What kind of sports do you enjoy?
6. Do you speak a lot of English outside of class?

What is the expected response? Circle yes or no.
1. You're studying English, aren't you? yes no
2. You're not a native speaker of English, are you? yes no

5 • 15 Tag Questions
(a) Jill is sick, isn't she? A tag question is a question that is
(b) You didn't know, did you? added onto the end of a sentence.
(c) There's enough time, isn't there? An auxiliary verb is used in a tag
(d) I'm not late, am I? question.
(e) I'm late, aren't I? Notice that I am becomes aren't I
in a negative tag, as in (e). (Am I
not is also possible, but it is very
formal and rare.
Affirmative ( +) Negative ( -) Affirmative When the main verb is affirmative,

Expected Answer the tag question is negative, and
(d) You know Bill, don't you? Yes. the expected answer agrees with
(e) Marie is from Paris, isn't she? Yes. the main verb.
Negative (-) Affirmative ( +) Negative When the main verb is negative, the
Expected Answer tag question is affirmative, and the
( f ) You don't know Tom, do you? No. expected answer agrees with the
(g) Marie isn't from Athens, is she? No. main verb.
THE SPEAKER'S QUESTION THE SPEAKER'S IDEA
Tag questions have two types of intonation: rising and falling. The
intonation determines the meaning of the tag.
(h) It will be nice tomorrow, won't it? A speaker uses rising intonation to make sure information is correct. In
(h): the speaker has an idea; the speaker is checking to see if the idea
is correct.
�
( i ) It will be nice tomorrow, won't it? Falling intonation is used when the speaker is seeking agreement. In (i):
the speaker thinks it will be nice tomorrow and is almost certain the
listener will agree.
YES/No QUESTIONS In (j): The speaker has no idea. The speaker is simply looking for
(j ) - Will it be nice tomorrow? information.
- Yes, it will. OR No, it won't. Compare (h) and (i) with G).
0 Exercise 56. Listening and grammar. (Chart 5- 15)
{J
Listen to each pair of sentences and answer the question.
CD 1 1. a. You're Mrs. Rose, aren't you?
Track 60
b. Are you Mrs. Rose?
QUESTION: In which sentence is the speaker checking to see if her information is correct?
2. a. Do you take cream with your coffee?

b. You take cream with your coffee, don't you?
QUESTION: In which sentence does the speaker have no idea?
3. a. You don't want to leave, do you?

b. Do you want to leave?
QUESTION: In which sentence is the speaker looking for agreement?
140 CHAPTER 5
D Exercise 57. Grammar and listening. (Chart 5-15)
(J
Complete the tag questions with the correct verbs. Then listen to the questions and check
your answers.
CD I
Track 61
1. Simple Present
a. You like strong coffee, don't · you?
b. David goes to Ames High School, he?
c. Leila and Sara live on Tree Road, they? .
d. Jane has the keys to the storeroom, she?
e. Jane's in her office, she?
f. You 're a member of this class, you?
g. Oleg doesn't have a car, he?
h. Lisa isn't from around here, she? ·
i. I'm in trouble, I?
2. Simple Past
a. Paul went to Indonesia, ________ he?
b. You didn't talk to the boss, ________ you?
c. Ted's parents weren't at home, ________ they?
d. That was Pat's idea, _______ it?
3. Present Progressive, Be Going To, and Past Progressive

a. You're studying hard, you?
b. Greg isn't working at the bank, he?
c. It isn't going to rain today, it?
d. Michelle and Yoko were helping, they?
e. He wasn't listening, he?
4. Present Perfect
a. It has been warmer than usual, it?
b. You've had a lot of homework, you?
c. We haven't spent much time together, we?
d. Fatima has started her new job, she?
e. Bruno hasn't finished his sales report yet, he?
f. Steve's had to leave early, he?

o Exercise 58. let's talk: pairwork. (Chart 5-15)
Work with a partner. Make true statements for your partner to agree with. Remember, if your
partner makes an affirmative statement before the tag, the expected answer is "yes." If your
partner makes a negative statement before the tag, the expected answer is "no."
1. The weather is today, isn't it?
2. This books costs , doesn't it?
3. I'm , aren't I?
4. The classroom isn't , IS• It.
• ">
5. Our grammar homework wasn't ')

,was It.
6. Tomorrow will be , won't it?
o Exercise 59. listening. (Chart 5-15)

{i Listen to the tag questions and choose the expected responses.
T�� 2 Checking in at a hotel

Example: You will hear: Our room's ready, isn't it?
You will choose: § no
1. yes no 6. yes no
2. yes no 7. yes no
3. yes no 8. yes no
4. yes no 9. yes no
5. yes no 10. yes no

Edit the sentences. Correct the errors in question formation.
1. Who you saw? ---+ Who did you see?
2. Where I buy subway tickets?
3. Whose is that backpack?
4. What kind of tea you like best?
5. It's freezing out and you're not wearing gloves, aren't you?
6. Who you studied with at school?
7. She is going to work this weekend, doesn't she?
8. How long take to get to the airport from here?
9. How much height your father have?

10. It's midnight. Why you so late? Why you forget to call?
142 CHAPTER 5
o Exercise 61. Listening. (Chapter 5)
Listen to the questions and choose the correct answers.
{J
Part I.
CD 1 Example: You will hear: How often do you brush your teeth?
You will choose: @ Three times a day.
Track 63
b. Yes, I do.
c. In the evening.
1. a. I love it. 4. a. Two miles.
b. Jazz and rock. b. Three blocks.
c. The radio. c. Ten minutes.
2. a. I was really tired. 5. a. Amy is.
b. At 7:30. b. Amy's.
c. A package. c. That is Amy.
3. a. A little sick. 6. a. Next week.
b. No, I'm not. b. A few days ago.
c. Howard's fine. c. On Fifth Street.
Part II. Listen to each conversation and choose the sentence that best completes it.
7. a. My wallet. 9. a. Yes, I am.
b. At the box office. b. My company is moving to another city.
c. I think so. c. I loved my job.
8. a. It usually comes by noon. 10. a. It's great.
b. By truck. b. I'm a construction supervisor.
c. One time a day. c. We're doing really well.
o Exercise 62. Let's listen and talk: pairwork. (Chapter 5)

I'» Listen to the conversation. Then work with a partner. Take turns being the cashier and the
t:5.i customer. Complete the sentences with items from the menu and practice the conversation.
CD 1
Track 64
burger chicken strips soft dr�: cola, lemon soda, iced tea
cheeseburger fish burger milksha�es: vanilla, strawberry, chocolate
double cheeseburger veggie burger (small, medium, large)
fries salad
Ordering at a fast-food restaurant

CASHIER: So, what'll it be?
CUSTOMER: I'll have a ---------
CASHIER: Would you like fries or a salad with your burger?
CUSTOMER: I'll have (a) --------
CASHIER: W hat size?
CUSTOMER:
CASHIER: Anything to drink?
CUSTOMER: I'll have a ----------�
CASHIER: Size?

CUSTOMER:
CASHIER: Okay. So that's -----------------------
CUSTOMER: About how long'll it take?

CASHIER: We're pretty crowded right now. Probably 10 minutes or so. That'll be $6.50.
Your number's on the receipt. I'll call the number when your order's ready.
CUSTOMER: Thanks.
o Exercise 63. Let's read and write. (Chapters 1 � 5)

Part I. Read the fairy tale and answer the questions at the end.
The Frog Prince
Once upon a time, there was a king with three unmarried daughters. One day while the
king was thinking about his daughters' futures, he had an idea. He thought, "I'm going to drop
three jewels among the young men in the village center. The men who find* the jewels will
become my daughters' husbands." He announced his plan to all of the people of his kingdom.
The next day, the king took an emerald, a ruby, and a diamond into the village. He walked
among the young men and dropped the jewels. A handsome man picked up the emerald. Then
a wealthy prince found the ruby. But a frog hopped toward the diamond and took it. He said
to the king, "I am the Frog Prince. I claim your third daughter as my wife."
CR
irLanguage.com
When the king told Trina, his third daughter, about the Frog Prince, she refused to marry
him. She hid from her friends and grew sadder every day. Meanwhile, her two sisters had
grand weddings.
*The simple present is used here because the story is giving the king's exact words in a quotation. Notice that quotation marks
("...") are used. See Chart 14-8, p. 000, for more information about quotations.
144 CHAPTER 5
Eventually, Trina ran away and went to live in the woods, but she was very lonely and
unhappy. One day Trina went swimming in a lake. Trina became tired in the cold water and
decided to give up. She didn't want to live anymore. As she was drowning, the frog suddenly
appeared and pushed Trina to the shore.
"Why did you save my life, Frog?"
"Because you are very young, and you have a lot to live for."
"No, I don't," said the princess. "I am the most miserable person in the world."
"Let's talk about it," said the frog. Trina and the Frog Prince sat together for hours and
hours. Frog listened and understood. He told her about his own unhappiness and loneliness.
They shared their deepest feelings with each other.
One day while they were sitting near the lake, Trina felt great affection for the frog. She
bent down and kissed him on his forehead. Suddenly the frog turned into a man! He took
Trina in his arms and said, "You saved me with your kiss. An evil wizard changed me from a
prince into a frog. I needed to find the love of a woman with a truly good heart to set me free.*
You looked inside me and found the real me."
Trina and the prince returned to the castle and got married. Her two sisters, she
discovered, were very unhappy because their husbands treated them poorly. But Trina and her
Frog Prince lived happily ever after.
Questions:
1. What did the king want for his daughters?
2. Why did a frog claim Trina for his wife?
3. What did Trina do to escape the marriage?
4. Where did she meet the frog again?
5. Why did she kiss the frog?
6. What did an evil wizard do to the frog?
7. What kind of lives did her sisters have?
8. What kind of life did Trina and the Frog Prince have?
Part II. Write a story that begins Once upon a time. Use one of the given topics.
Topics:
1. Read the story again and then retell it in your own words. Write one or two paragraphs.
Do not look at the story when you write.
2. Write a fairy tale that you are familiar with, perhaps one that is well known in your culture.
3. Create a story with your classmates. Each student writes one or two sentences at a time.
One student begins the story. Then he or she passes the paper on to another student, who
then writes a sentence or two and passes the paper on - until everyone in the class has
had a chance to write part of the story, or until the story has an ending. This story can
then be reproduced for the class to edit together. The class may want to add art and
"publish" the final product as a small book.
*set me free= give me my freedom

o Exercise 1. What do I already know? (Chapter 6)
This exercise previews grammar terms used in this chapter. Identify the italicized word in each
sentence as a noun, adjective, preposition, or pronoun.
1. Miki is a student at my _school. noun
2. She is from Kyoto, Japan. 'pronoun
3. Kyoto is south of Tokyo. oreoosition
I l
4. It is a beautiful city. adjective

5. This summer I am going there with Miki.
6. I am looking forward to this trip.
7. My parents are happy for me.
8. I will stay with Miki's family.
9. They have a small hotel.
10. It is near a popular park.
11. The park has lovely gardens.
12. Miki has shown me postcards of them.

Write the word one before the singular nouns and the word two before the plural nouns.
1. ______ trips 4. ______ way
2. ______ vacation 5. ______ cities
3. ______ classes 6. ______ knives
146
Singular Plural
(a) one bird two birds To make most nouns plural, add -s.
one street two streets
one rose two roses
(b) one dish two dishes Add -es to nouns ending in -sh, -ch, -ss, and -x.
one match two matches
one class two classes
one box two boxes
( c) one baby two babies If a noun ends in a consonant + -y, change the y to i and add
one city two cities -es, as in (c) .
(d} one toy two toys If -y is preceded by a vowel, add only -s, as in (d}.
one key two keys
(e) one knife two knives If a noun ends in -fe or -f, change the ending to -ves.
one shelf two shelves EXCEPTIONS: beliefs, chiefs, roofs, cuffs, cliffs.
( f ) one tomato two tomatoes The plural form of nouns that end in -o is sometimes -oes and
one zoo two zoos sometimes -os.
one zero two zeroes/zeros
-oes: tomatoes, potatoes, heroes, echoes
-os: zoos, radios, studios, pianos, solos, sopranos, photos, autos,
videos
-oes or -os: zeroes/zeros, volcanoes/volcanos,
tornadoes/tornados, mosquitoes/mosquitos
(g) one child two children Some nouns have irregular plural forms.
one foot two feet
NOTE: The singular form of people can be person, woman, man,
one goose two geese
child. For example, one man and one child = two people.
one man two men
(Two persons is also possible.)
one mouse two mice
one tooth two teeth
one woman two women
two people
( h} one deer two deer The plural form of some nouns is the same as the singular form.
one fish two fish
one sheep two sheep
( i) one bacterium two bacteria Some nouns that English has borrowed from other languages
one crisis two crises have foreign plurals.

Write the correct singular or plural form of the given words.
1. one chair two ___________
2. a ________ a lot of windows
3. one wish several __________
Nouns and Pronouns 147

4. a
5. a tax
6. one boy
two dishes
a lot of
two
m
C:J�!f-!' C:J<iG=;,.re,,.
ir Language.com
7. a hobby several
8. one leaf two
9. a two halves
10. a belief many
11. one wolf two
12. a radio several
13. one a lot of sheep
14. one two feet
o Exercise 4. Looking at grammar. (Chart 6- 1 >

Write the plural form of each noun under the correct heading. The number of words for each
column is given in parentheses. NOTE: fish and thief can go in two places.
/'butterfly child hero mouse thief

baby city library /'museum tomato
boy fish /'man potato woman
/'bean girl mosquito sandwich zoo
People (8) Food (5) Things people catch (5) Places people visit (4)
mP-n hP,qn,::; b, ........ .£:/• -

m11,::;p11m,::;
148 CHAPTER 6
o Exercise 5. Check your knowledge. (Chart 6-1 >
Edit the newspaper ad by making the appropriate nouns plural. There are eight errors.
QN SA LE (while supply last)
shirt Jean pant dress
Outfit and shoe for babys 50% off
0 Exercise 6. Warm-up: listening. (Chart 6-2)

Listen to the nouns. Circle yes if you hear a plural ending. If not, circle no.
CD2
Track I
Example: You will hear: books
You will choose: @) no
You will hear: class
You will choose: yes (§)
1. yes no 3. yes no 5. yes no
2. yes no 4. yes no 6. yes no
6·2 Pronunciation of Final -s/-es

Final -sl-es has three different pronunciations: /s/, /z/, and /'3z/.
(a) seats = seat/s/ Final -sis pronounced /s/ after voiceless sounds. In (a): /s/ is the sound of "s"
maps = map/s/ in "bus."
lakes = lake/s/ Examples of voiceless* sounds: It!, /pl, /kl.
(b) seeds = seed/z/ Final -sis pronounced /z/ after voiced sounds. In (b): /z/ is the sound of "z"
stars = star/z/ in "buzz."
holes = hole/z/ Examples of voiced* sounds: /d/, Ir/, /1/, Im/, /b/, and all vowel sounds.
laws = law/z/
(c) dishes = dish/'3z/ Final -sf-es is pronounced /'3z/ after -sh, -ch, -s, -z, -gel-dge sounds.
matches = match/'3z/ In (c): faz/ adds a syllable to a word.
classes = classfaz/
sizes = sizefaz/
pages = page/'3z/
judges = judge/;:)z/
*See Chart 2-5, p. 39, for more information about voiceless and voiced sounds.

IJ
CD2
Listen to the words. Circle the sound you hear at the end of each word: Isl, lzl, or /-;Jz/.
1. pants Isl lzl /gz/ 4. pens Isl /zl /gz/
Track 2
2. cars Isl /zl !'dz/ 5. wishes Isl lz/ /gzl

3. boxes Isl /zl igz/ 6. lakes Isl lzl !'dz/
IJ
CD2
Listen to each pair of words. Decide if the endings have the same sound or a different sound.
Example: You will hear: maps streets
Track 3
You will choose: � different
You will hear: knives forks
You will choose: same
�
o Exercise 9. Listening and pronunciation. (Chart 6-2)

rJJI Listen to the words. W rite the pronunciation of each ending you hear: Isl, lzl, or faz/. Practice
& pronouncing the words.
CD2
Track 4
1. names = name/z/ 4. boats = boat/ I 7. lips = lip/ I
2. clocks = clock/sf 5. eyelashes = eyelash/ I 8. bridges = bridge/
3. eyes = eye/ I 6. ways = way/ I 9. cars = car/ I
IJ
CD 2
Listen to the sentences and circle the words you hear.
1. size sizes 3. fax faxes 5. glass glasses
Track 5
2. fax faxes 4. pnce pnces 6. pnze pnzes
o Exercise 11. Warm· up (Chart 6-3)

Part I. Work in small groups. Make lists.
1. Name things people need to take with them when they travel.
2. Name things you do when you have free time.
3. Name important people in your life.
Part II. Read your lists. Make sentences using the following information. Share some of your
sentences with the class.
1. People need to take __ with them when they travel.
2. I when I have free time.
3. __ have been important in my life.
150 CHAPTER 6
Part III. Answer these questions about your answers in Part II.
1. In which sentence did you write verbs?

2. In which two sentences did you write nouns?
3. In which sentence did you write subjects?
4. In which sentence did you write objects?
6·3 Subjects, Verbs, and Objects

·- --- ----- ------ ----� ----- ---·------------- --. ---------�� --
s v An English sentence has a SUBJECT (s) and a VEFla (°'i).
(a) The sun shines. The SUBJECT is a noun. In (a): sun is a noun; it is the subject of the verb
(noun) (verb)
shines.
s v
(b) Plants grow.
(noun) (verb)
s v 0 Sometimes a VERB is followed by an OBJECT (o).

(c) Plants need water. The OBJECT of a verb is a noun. In (c): water is the object of the verb
(noun) (verb) (noun)
need.
s v 0
(d) Sob is reading a book.
(noun) (verb) (noun)

Complete each diagram with the correct subject, verb, and object.
1. The carpenter built a table.

The carpenter built a table
subject verb object of verb
2. Birds fly.
Birds f( y (none)
3. Cows eat grass.
4. The actor sang.

5. The actor sang a song.
6. Accidents happen frequently.
7. The accident injured a woman.
0 Exercise 13. Looking at grammar. (Charts 6-2 and 6-3)

If the word in italics is used as a noun, circle "N." If the word in italics is used as a verb,
circle "V."
1. People smile when they're happy. N ®
2. Maryam has a nice smile when she's happy. @ v
3. Please don't sign your name in pencil. N v
4. People often name their children after relatives. N v
5. Airplanes land on runways at the airport. N v
6. The land across the street from our house is vacant. N v
7. People usually store milk in the refrigerator. N v
8. We went to the store to buy some milk. N v
9. I took the express train from New York to Washington, D.C., last week. N v
10. Lindsey trains horses as a hobby. N v

Work with a partner. Make true sentences about yourself using like or don't like. Share a
few of your partner's answers with the class.
I like/don't like to do my homework . ..
1. at the library. 6. in the evening.
2. at the kitchen table. 7. on weekends.
3. in my bedroom. 8. after dinner.
4. on my bed. 9. before class.
5. with a friend. 10. during class.
152 CHAPTER 6
-
6·4 Objects of Prepositions
-- -- -- --
------------ - -- - --- - - -
S V O PREP OOF PREP Many English sentences have prepositional phrases.

(a) Ann put her books on the desk. In (a): on the desk is a prepositional phrase.
(noun)
A prepositional phrase consists of a PREPOSITION (PREP) and
S V PREP OOF PREP an OBJECT OF A PREPOSITION (o of PREP). The object of a
(b) A leaf fell to the ground. preposition is a NOUN.
(noun)
Reference List of Prepositions

about before despite of to
above behind down off toward(s)
across below during on under
after beneath for out until
against beside from over up
along besides in since upon
among between into through with
around beyond like throughout within
at by near till without

Check (/') the prepositional phrases, and underline the noun in each phrase that is the object
of the preposition.
1. ./ across the street 5. __ next to the phone
2. in a minute 6. __ doing work
3. __ daily 7. in a few hours
4. down the hill 8. __ from my parents

Check (./) the sentences that have objects of prepositions. Identify the preposition (P) and the
object of the preposition (Obj. of P).
1. a. __ Emily waited quietly.
P Obj. of P
b. __!__ Emily waited quietly for her mother.
P Obj. of P
c. __!__ Emily's mother was talking to a friend.
2. a. __ Kimiko saw a picture on the wall.
b. __ Kimiko recognized the people.
c. __ Kimiko looked at the picture closely.

3. a. __ Annika lost her ring yesterday.
b. __ Annika lost her ring in the sand.
c. __ Annika lost her ring in the sand at the beach.
4. a. A talkative woman sat with her husband.
b. __ We were at a meeting.
c. She talked to her husband the entire time.

Review prepositions of place by using the given phrases in complete sentences. Demonstrate
the meaning of the preposition with an action while you say the sentence. Work in pairs, in
small groups, or as a class.
Example: across the room
-+ I'm walking across the room. OR I'm looking across the room.
1. above the door 9. below the window
2. against the wall 10. beside my book
3. toward(s) the door 11. near the door
4. between two pages of my book 12. far from the door
5. in the room 13. off my desk
6. into the room 14. out the window
7. on my desk 15. behind me
8. at my desk 16. through the door
o Exercise 18. Game: trivia. (Chart 6-4)

Work in small groups. Answer the questions without looking at a map. After you have
finished, look at a map to check your answers.* The team with the most correct answers wins.
1. Name a country directly under Russia.
2. Name the country directly above Germany.
3. What river flows through London?
4. What is a country near Haiti?
5. Name a country next to Vietnam.
6. Name a city far from Sydney, Australia.
7. What is the country between Austria and Switzerland?
8. · Name the city within Rome, Italy.
9. Name two countries that have a river between them.
10. Name a country that is across from Saudi Arabia.
154 CHAPTER 6
Read the passage and then answer the questions.
emergent layer--------+
- '
The Habitats of a Rainforest
Rainforests have different areas where animals live. These areas are called habitats.
Scientists have given names to the four main habitats or layers of a rainforest.
Some animals live in the tops of giant trees. The tops of these trees are much higher than
the other trees, so this layer is called the emergent* layer. Many birds and insects live there.
Under the emergent layer is the canopy. The canopy is the upper part of the trees. It is
thick with leaves and vines, and it forms an umbrella over the rainforest. Most of the animals in
the rainforest live in the canopy.
The next layer is the understory. The understory is above the ground and under the leaves.
In the understory, it is very dark and cool. It gets only 2-5% of the sunlight that the canopy
gets. The understory has the most insects of the four layers, and a lot of snakes and frogs also
live there.
Finally, there is the forest floor. On the surface of this floor are fallen leaves, branches, and
other debris.** In general, the largest animals in the rainforest live in this layer. Common
animals in this habitat are tigers and gorillas.
1. Name two types of animals that live in the tops of giant trees.
2. Where is the understory?
3. Where do you think most mosquitoes live?
4. What are some differences between the emergent layer and the forest floor?
*emergent = in botany, a plant that is taller than other plants around it, like a tall tree in a forest
**debris= loose, natural material, like dirt

I was born ...
1. m -------- (month). 3. on ________ (weekday).
2. on ________ (date). 4. at (time).
_6_· 5 Prepositions of Time _________ _ ____ __ ___ _ __ _ __

in (a) Please be on time in the future. in + the past, the present, the future*
(b) I usually watch TV in the evening. in + the morning, the afternoon, the evening
(c) I was born in October. a month
(d) I was born in 1995. . a year
(e) I was born in the 20th century. m + \
a century
(f) The weather is hot in (the) summer. a season
on (g) I was born on October 31st, 1995. on+ a date

(h) I went to a movie on Thursday. on + a weekday
( i ) I have class on Thursday morning(s). on+ (a) weekday morning(s), afternoon(s), evening(s)
at ( j ) We sleep at night. I was asleep at midnight. at + noon, night, midnight

(k) I fell asleep at 9:30 (nine-thirty). at + "clock time"
(I) He's busy at the moment. Can I take a message? at + the moment, the present time, present
*Possible in British English: in future (e.g., Please be on time in future.).

Complete the sentences with in, at, or on. All the sentences contain time expressions.
Studious Stan has college classes . . .
1. the morning. 6. Saturdays.
2. the afternoon. 7. Saturday mornings.
3. the evening. 8. noon.
4. night. 9. midnight.
5. weekdays.
Unlucky Lisa has a birthday every four years. She was born ...
10. February 29th. 13. 2000.
11. February 29th, 2000. 14. February 2000.
12. February. 15. the winter.
Cool Carlos is a fashion designer. He's thinking about clothing designs ...
16. ____ the moment.
17. ____ the present time.
18. ____ the past.
156 CHAPTER 6
Complete each question with an appropriate preposition. Interview seven classmates. Ask
each person one question.
1. What do you like to do ____ the evening?
2. What do you usually do ____ night before bed?
3. What do you like to do ____ Saturday mornings?
4. What did you do ____ January 1st ofthis year?
5. What were you doing ____ January 1st, 2000 (the beginning of the new
millennium)?
6. How do you spend your free time ____ January?
7. What will you do with your English skills the future?

Check (./) all the grammatically correct sentences.
1. a. I left Athens in 2005. 2. a. __ Lee sold his car yesterday.
b. I left in 2005 Athens. b. __ Yesterday Lee sold his car.
c. __ In 2005, I left Athens. c. __ Lee sold yesterday his car.
6·6 Word
- -
Order: Place and Time
- � - - -� - --- �- . -�- -�- -- � -�- -- --- --
S V PLACE TIME In a typical English sentence, "place" comes before '1ime," as in (a).
(a) Ann moved to Paris in 2008.
INCORRECT: Ann moved in 2008 to Paris.
We went to a movie yesterday.
S-V-0-P-T = Subject-Verb-Object-Place-Time
S V O P T
(basic English sentence structure)
(b) We bought a house in Miami in 2005.
TIME S V PLACE Expressions of time can also come at the beginning of a sentence,
(c) In 2008, Ann moved to Paris. as in (c) and (d).
(d) Yesterday we went to a movie. A time phrase at the beginning of a sentence is often followed by a
comma, as in (c).

Put the given phrases in correct sentence order.
1. to Paris \ next month
Monique's company is going to transfer her ----------------
2. last week \ through Turkey

William began a bike trip ----------------------

3. at his uncle's bakery\ Alexi\ on Saturday mornings\ works
4. arrived\ in the early morning\ at the airport\ my plane

Add -s where appropriate. If no final-sis necessary, write 0.
1. Lions roar 4. A tiger in the jungle roar __ .
2. A lion roar 5. Tigers in the jungle roar __ .
3. Lions and tigers roar __ . 6. Tigers in jungles roar __ .
6· 7 Subject-Verb Agreement
SINGULAR SINGULAR A singular subject takes a singular verb, as in (a).
(a) The sun shines. A plural subject takes a plural verb, as in (b).
PLURAL PLURAL
Notice: verb + -s = singular (shines)
noun + -s = plural (birds)
(b) Birds sing.
SINGULAR SINGULAR Two subjects connected by and take a plural verb, as

(c) My brother lives in Jakarta. in (d).
PLURAL PLURAL
(d) My brother and sister live in Jakarta.

(e) The glasses over there under the window by the Sometimes phrases come between a subject and a
sink are clean. verb. These phrases do not affect the agreement of
( f ) The information in those magazines about the subject and verb.
Vietnamese culture and customs is very interesting.
v s There + be + subject expresses that something
(g) There is a book on the desk. exists in a particular place. The verb agrees with the
noun that follows be.
v s
(h) There are some books on the desk.
( i ) Every student is sitting down. Every is a singular word. It is used with a singular,
( j ) Everybody/ Everyone hopes for peace. not plural, noun.
INCORRECT: Every students . . .
Subjects with every take singular verbs, as in (i)
and ( j).
(k) People in my country are friendly. People is a plural noun and takes a plural verb.
158 CHAPTER 6
Work in small groups. Complete the sentences with the correct form of the verb from the list.
Discuss the words you use to describe different animal sounds in your native language.
bark chirp hiss meow roar
Wnat sounds do these animals make?

1. A dog _____ 6. A bird _____
2. Dogs _____ 7. Cats _____
3. Lions in the wild _____ 8. Sea lions on a beach _____
4. Lions, tigers, and leopards _____ 9. A lizard _____
5. Every snake _____ 10. Baby chickens _____

Underline and identify the subject (S) and the verb (V). Correct errors in agreement.
s
1. The students in this class speak1 English very well.
2. My aunt and uncle speak Spanish. - OK (no error).
3. Every students in my class speak English well.
4. There are five student from Korea in Mr. Ahmad's class.
5. There's a vacant apartment in my building.
6. Does people in your neighborhood know each other?
7. The neighbors in the apartment next to mine is very friendly and helpful.
Exercise 28. Listening. (Charts 6-2 and 6-7)
{J
CD2
Listen to the passage. Listen a second time and add -s where necessary. Before you begin,
you may want to check your understanding of these words: sweat, fur, paw, flap, mud.
Track 6
How Some Animals Stay Cool
How do animal __ stay cool in hot weather? Many animal __ don't sweat like
1 2
human __ , so they have other way __ to cool themselves.
3 4
Dog __ , for example, have a lot of fur __ and can become very hot. They stay __
5 6 7
cool mainly by panting. By the way, if you don't know what panting means, this is the sound of
panting.

Cat __ lick __ their paw __ and chest __ . When their fur __ is wet, they
8 9 10 . 11 12
become cooler.
Elephant __ have very large ear __ . When they are hot, they can flap their huge
13 14
ear __ . The flapping ear __ act __ like a fan and it cool __ them. Elephant __ also
15 16 17 18 19
like to roll in the mud __ to stay cool.
20

Think about the very first teacher you had. Choose words from below to describe him/her.
young friendly serious

middle-aged unfriendly patient
elderly fun impatient
6-8 Using Adjectives to Describe Nouns

ADJECTIVE NOUN Words that describe nouns are called ADJECTIVES.
(a) Bob is reading a good book. In (a): good is an adjective; it describes the book.
(b) The tall woman wore a new dress. We say that adjectives "modify'' nouns. Modify means "change
(c) The short woman wore an old dress. a little." An adjective changes the meaning of a noun by giving
(d) The young woman wore a short dress. more information about it.
(e) Roses are beautiful flowers. Adjectives are neither singular nor plural. They do NOT have a
INCORRECT: Roses are beautifu/s flowers. plural form.
( f ) H e wore a white shirt. Adjectives usually come immediately before nouns, as in (f).
INCORRECT: He wore a shirt white.
Adjectives can also follow main verb be, as in (g) and (h).
(g) Roses are beautiful.
(h) His shirt was white.

Check(./) the phrases that have adjectives. Underline the adjectives.
1. __{___ a scary story 4. __ a small, dark, smelly room
2. __ on Tuesday 5. __ quickly and then slowly
3. __ going to a famous place 6. __ long or short hair

Add the given adjectives to the sentences. Choose two of the three adjectives in each item to
add to the sentence.
Example: hard, heavy, strong A man lifted the box.
� A strong man lifted the heavy box.
1. beautiful, safe, red Roses are flowers.
160 CHAPTER 6
2. empty, wet, hot The waiter poured coffee into my cup.
3. fresh, clear, hungry Mrs. Fields gave the kids a snack.
4. dirty, modern, delicious After our dinner, Frank helped me with the dishes.

Work in small groups.
Part I. Add your own nouns, adjectives, and prepositions to the list. Don't look at Part II.
1. an adjective old 6. an adjective

2. a person's name 7. an adjective
3. a plural noun 8. a preposition of place

4. a plural noun 9. an adjective
5. a singular noun 10. a plural noun
Part II. Complete the sentences with the same words you added in Part I. Some of your
completions might sound a little odd or funny. Read your completed passage aloud to another
group or to the rest of the class.
One day a/an ___.,._o=

ld'---- girl was walking in the city. Her name was
1
She was carrying a package for her grandmother. It contained some
2
_______ , some _______ , and a/an _______ , among other
4 5
things.
As she was walking down the street, a/an _______ thief stole her package.
The _______ girl pulled out her cell phone and called the police, who caught the
thief _______ a nearby building and returned her package to her. She took it
immediately to her _______ grandmother, who was glad to get the package
because she really needed some new _______

10

Combine the word chicken with the words in the list.
/'fresh hot /'legs recipe soup
1. chicken le@s 4.
2. fresh chicken 5.
3.

6·9 Using Nouns as Adjectives
(a) I have a flower garden. Sometimes words that are usually used as nouns are used as adjectives.
(b) The shoe store also sells socks. For example, flower is usually a noun, but in (a), it's used as an adjective
to modify garden.
(c) INCORRECT: a flowers garden When a noun is used as an adjective, it is singular in form, NOT plural.
( d} INCORRECT: the shoes store

Underline and identify the nouns (N). Use one of the nouns in the first sentence as an
adjective in the second sentence.
N N
1. This book is about grammar. It's a _(d....,r:=a=m�m=a=r�b�o=o�k*_____________
2. My garden has vegetables. It's a --------------------
3. The soup has beans. It's -----------------------
4. I read a lot of articles in magazines. I read a lot of --------------
5. The factory makes toys. It's a ---------------------
6. The villages are in the mountains. They are ________________
7. The lesson was about art. It was an -------------------
8. Flags fly from poles.. Many government buildings have ____________
D Exercise 35. Looking at grammar. (Chart 6-9)

Add -s to the italicized nouns if necessary. Then agree or disagree with each statement.
Circle yes or no.
1. One day, computer programs will make it possible for computers to think. yes no
2. Computer make life more stressful. yes no
3. Airplane trips are enjoyable nowadays. yes no
4. Airplane don't have enough legroom. yes no
5. Bicycle are better than cars for getting around in a crowded city. yes no
6. It's fun to watch bicycle races like the Tour de France on TV. yes no
7. �getable soups are delicious. yes no
8. Fresh vegetable are my favorite food. yes no
*When one noun modifies another noun, the spoken stress is usually on the first noun: a grammar book.
162 CHAPTER 6
0 Exercise .36. Ustening and speaking. (Charts 6-1---+ 6-9)
Part I. Listen to two friends talking about finding an apartment.
(J
CD 2 Part II. Complete your own conversation. Perform it for the class. You can use words from
Track 7
the list. NOTE: This conversation is slightly different from Part I.
air-conditioning an elevator near a bus stop a studio

a balcony an exercise room near a freeway a two-bedroom
close to my job a laundry room parking a walk-up
A: I'm looking for a new place to live.
B: How come?
A: ___________ . I need ___________
B: I just helped a friend find one. I can help you. What else do you want?
A: I want -----------· Also, I -------------�
I don't want
B: Anything else?
A: ___________ would be nice.
B: That's expensive.
A: I guess I'm dreaming.

Read the conversation. Look at the personal pronouns in green. Decide if they are subject or
object pronouns.
A: Did you hear? I van quit his job.
l
B: I know. I don't understand him. Between you and me, I think it's a bad decision.
2 3 4 5
1. you subject object

2. I subject object
3. him subject object
4. you subject object
5. me subject object

6· 10 Personal Pronouns: Subjects and Objects
Personal Pronouns
SUBJECT PRONOUNS: I we you he, she, it they
OBJECT PRONOUNS: me us you him, her, it them
s A pronoun refers to a noun.

(a) Kate is married. She has two children. In (a): she is a pronoun; it refers to Kate.
i i In (b): her is a pronoun; it refers to Kate.
0
(b) Kate is my friend. I know her well. In (a): She is a SUBJECT PRONOUN.
�t t In (b): her is an OBJECT PRONOUN.
(c) Mike has a new blue bike. A pronoun can refer to a single noun (e.g., Kate) or to a noun phrase.
He bought ityesterday.
In (c): it refers to the whole noun phrase a new blue bike.
s Guidelines for using pronouns following and:

(d) Eric and I are good friends.
If the pronoun is used as part of the subject, use a subject
0 pronoun, as in (d).
(e) Ann met Eric and me at the museum. If the pronoun is part of the object, use an object pronoun,
as in (e) and (f).
O of PREP
( f ) Ann walked between 'Eric and me. INCORRECT: Eric and me are good friends.
INCORRECT: Ann met Eric and I at the museum.
SINGULAR PRONOUNS: I me you he, she, it him, her

PLURAL PRONOUNS: we us you they them
(g) Mike is in class. H e is taking a test. Singular = one. Plural = more than one.
(h) The students are in class. Theyare Singular pronouns refer to singular nouns; plural pronouns refer to
taking a test. plural nouns, as in the examples.
( i ) Kate and Tom are married. They
have two children.
o Exercise 38. Looking at grammar. (Chart 6- 1 O)

Write the nouns that the pronouns in boldface refer to.
1. The apples were rotten, so the children didn't eat them even though they were really
hungry.
a. them = __________
2. Do bees sleep at night? Or do they work in the hive all night long? You never see them
after dark. What do they do after night falls?
a. they = __________
c. they = _________
164 CHAPTER 6
3. Table tennis began in England in the late 1800s. Today it is an international sport. My
brother and I played it a lot when we were teenagers. I beat him sometimes, but he was a
better player and usually won.
a. it= ___ ______
d. he = _________

Circle the correct words in italics.
1. Toshi ate dinner with I, me.
2. Toshi ate dinner with Mariko and I, me.
3. I, me had dinner with Toshi last night.
4. Jay drove Eva and I, me to the store. He waited for we, us in the car.
5. A: I want to get tickets for the soccer game.
B: You'd better get it, them right away. It, They is, are selling fast.

Complete the sentences with she, he, it, her, him, they, or them.
1. I have a grammar book. �'�t____ is black.
2. Brian borrowed my books. ______ returned ______ yesterday.
3. Sonya is wearing some new earrings. ______ look good on ______
4. Don't look directly at the sun. Don't look at ______ directly even if you are
wearing sunglasses. T he intensity of its light can injure your eyes.
5. Recently, I read about "micromachines." ______ are machines that are smaller
than a grain of sand. One scientist called ______ "the greatest scientific invention
of our time."

o Exercise 41. Warm· up. (Chart 6-11 >
Match the phrases to the pictures that describe them.
Picture A Picture B
1. the teacher's office

2. the teachers' office
6·11 Possessive Nouns www.irLanguage.com

SINGULAR: (a) I know the student's name. An apostrophe (') and an -s are used with nouns to
PLURAL: (b) I know the students' names. show possession.
PLURAL: (c) I know the children's names.
er (d) the student -1 the student's name SINGULAR POSSESSIVE NOUN:

..J my baby -1 my baby's name noun + apostrophe (') + -s
a man a man's name
z
-1
A singular noun that ends in -s has two possible
u5 (e) James -1 James'lJames's name possessive forms: James' OR James's.
( f) the students -1 the students' names PLURAL POSSESSIVE NOUN:

my babies -1 my babies' names noun + -s + apostrophe (')
..J
<{
(g) men -1 men's names IRREGULAR PLURAL POSSESSIVE NOUN:
the children -1 the children's names noun + apostrophe (') + -s
(An irregular plural noun is a plural noun that does not
end in -s: children, men, people, women. See
Chart 6-1.)
Compare: In (h): Tom's is not a possessive noun. It is a

(h) Tom's here. contraction of Tom is, used in informal writing.
( i ) Tom's brother is here.
In (i): Tom's is a possessive noun.

Decide if the meaning of the italicized word is "one" or "more than one."
1. The teacher answered the student's questions. more than one
2. The teacher answered the students' questions. one more than one
3. Our daughters' bedroom is next to our room. one more than one
166 CHAPTER 6
4. Our son's room is downstairs. one more than one
5. Men's clothing is on sale at the department store. one more than one
6. This looks like a woman's shirt. one more than one

Look at the Nelson's family tree. Complete the sentences using the correct possessive form.
1. Ned's wife is Ella. Nelson Family Tree
2. husband is Sam.
E 1 i: + Ned
3. Howard is brother.
4. Howard is husband.
5. grandmother is Ella.
Lisa+ Sam Howard + Moni1
6. parents are Sam and Lisa.
7. Ella and grandson is William. William
8. Howard and Monica are _________ aunt and uncle.
o Exercise 44. Game: trivia. (Chart 6-11>

Work in small groups. Use the correct possessive form of the given nouns to complete the
sentences. Decide if the information is true or false. The group with the most correct answers
wins.*
1. earth The _______ surface is about 70% water. T F
2. elephant An _______ skin is pink and wrinkled. T F
3. man Pat is a _______ name. T F
4. woman Pat is a _______ name. T F
5. women The area for language is larger in _______ brains. T F
6. Men _______ brains are bigger than women's brains. T F

7. person A _______ eyes blink more if he/she is nervous. T F
8. People _______ voices always get lower as they age. T F

Check (I") all the grammatically correct responses.
W'hose camera is this?
1. __ It's my camera. 5. __ It's your camera.
2. __ It's mine. 6. __ It's your's.
3. __ It's my. 7. __ It's theirs.
4. _ _ It's yours. 8. __ It's their camera.

6-12 Possessive Pronouns and Adjectives
This pen belongs to me. Examples (a) and (b) have the same meaning; they
both show possession.
(a) It's mine.
Mine is a possessive pronoun; my is a possessive
(b) It is mypen.
adjective.
POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS POSSESSIVE ADJECTIVES A POSSESSIVE PRONOUN is used alone, without a noun
(c) I have mine I have mypen. following it.
(d) You have yours. You have yourpen. A POSSESSIVE ADJECTIVE is used only with a noun
(e) She has hers. She has herpen. following it.
(f) He has his. He has his pen. INCORRECT: I have mine pen.
INCORRECT: I have my.
(g) We have ours. We have ourpens.
(h) You have yours. You have yourpen.
( i ) They have theirs They have theirpens.
(j) -- I have a book.
/tscover is black.
COMPARE its vs. it's: In (k): its (No apostrophe) is a possessive adjective
(k) Sue gave me a book. I don't remember itstitle. modifying the noun title.
( I ) Sue gave me a book. It's a novel. In (I): It's (with an apostrophe) is a contraction of it+ is.
COMPARE theirvs. therevs. they're: Their, there, and they're have the same
(m) The students have theirbooks. pronunciation, but not the same meaning.
(n) My books are over there their= possessive adjective, as in (m)
(o) Where are the students? They're in class. there= an expression of place, as in (n)
they're= they are, as in (o)
o Exercise 46. Looking at grammar. (Chart 6- 12)

Circle the correct completions.
1. Alice called <Fii)hers friend.
2. Hasan wrote a letter to his, he's mother.
3. It's, Its normal for a dog to chase it's, its tail.
4. The bird cleaned its, it's feathers with its, it's beak.
5. Paula had to drive my car to work. Hers, Her had a flat tire.
6. Junko fell off her bike and broke hers, her arm.
7. Anastasia is a good friend of me, mine. *
.
8. I met a friend of you, yours yesterday.
9. A: Excuse me. Is this my, mine pen or your, yours?
B: This one is my, mine. Thur, Thurs 1s on your, yours desk.
*A friend of+ possessive pronoun (e.g., a friend of mine) is a common expression.
168 CHAPTER 6
10. a. Adam and Amanda are married. They, Them live in an apartment building.
b. Their, There, They're apartment is on the fifth floor.
c. We live in the same building. Our, Ours apartment has one bedroom, but their,
theirs has two.
d. Their, There, They 're sitting their, there, they're now because their, there, they 're
waiting for a visit from their, there, they're son.

Work in small groups. Use a mirror to demonstrate the following sentences. Take turns saying
the sentences while students perform the actions.
1. I am looking at myself. 5. T hey are looking at themselves.
2. You are looking at yourself. 6. She is looking at herself.
3. You are looking at yourselves. 7. We are looking at ourselves.
4. He is looking at himself.
I 6· 13 Reflexive Pronouns u� Y- oltj {!:'?JD

1 1
myself (a) I saw myself in the mirror. Reflexive pronouns end in -self/-selves. They are used
yourself (b) You (one person) saw yourself. when the subject (e.g.,/) and the object (e.g., myself) are
the same person.
herself ( c) She saw herself.
himself (d) He saw himself. INCORRECT: I saw me in the mirror.
itself (e) It (e.g., the kitten) saw itself.
ourselves (f) We saw ourselves.
yourselves (g) You (plural) saw yourselves.
themselves (h) They saw themselves.
( i ) Greg lives by himself. By + a reflexive pronoun = alone

( j ) I sat by myself on the park bench. In (i): Greg lives alone, without family or roommates.
(k) I enjoyed myself at the fair. Enjoy and a few other verbs are commonly followed by a
reflexive pronoun. See the list below.
Common Expressions with Reflexive Pronouns

believe in yourself help yourself pinch yourself tell yourself
blame yourself hurt yourself be proud of yourself work for yourself
cut yourself give yourself (something) take care of yourself wish yourself (luck)
enjoy yourself introduce yourself talk to yourself
feel sorry for yourself kill yourself teach yourself

Complete the sentences with reflexive pronouns.
1. Are you okay, Heidi? Did you hurt yourself ?
2. Leo taught to play the piano. He never had a teacher.
3. Do you ever talk to _________ ? Most people talk to

sometimes.
4. A newborn baby can't take care of
5. It is important for all of us to have confidence in our own abilities. We need to believe in
6. Isabel always wishes _________ good luck before a big test.
7. Kazu, there's plenty of food on the table. Please help _________
8. I couldn't believe my good luck! I had to pinch _________ to make sure I

wasn't dreaming.

{J Listen to the sentences and complete them with reflexive pronouns.
CD2 Example: You will hear: The accident was my fault. I caused it. I was responsible. In other
Track 8
words, I blamed ...
You will write: myself
1. 4.
2. 5.
3. 6.

Interview six students in your class. Ask each student a different question. Share some of
their answers with the class.
1. In this town, what is a good way to enjoy yourself?
2. How do people introduce themselves in your country? What do they say?
3. Have you ever wished yourself good luck? When or why?
4. Have you ever felt sorry for yourself? Or, have you ever felt proud of yourself? If so, why?
5. When athletes talk to themselves before an important event, what do you imagine they say?
6. In your country, at what age does a person usually begin living by himself or herself?
170 CHAPTER 6
Choose the picture that matches the description.
One flower is red. Another is yellow. The other is pink.
Picture A Picture B
6· 14 Singular Forms of Other: Another vs. The Other

Another
(a) There is a large bowl of apples on the table. Paul Another means "one more out of a group of similar
is going to eat one apple. If he is still hungry after items, one in addition to the one(s) already mentioned."
that, he can eat another apple. There are many
Another is a combination of an + other, written as
apples to choose from.
one word.
The Other
(b) There are two apples on the table. Paul is going to The other means "the last one in a specific group; the
eat one of them. Sara is going to eat the only one that remains from a given number of similar
other apple. items."
another apple. Another and the other can be used as adjectives in

{
(c) Paul ate one apple. Then he ate another one. front of a noun (e.g., apple) or in front of the word one.
another.
Another and the other can also be used alone as
the other apple. pronouns.
(d) Paul ate one apple. Sara ate { the other one.
the other.
Nouns and Pronouns 1 71

Complete the sentences with another or the other.
1. There are two birds in Picture A. One is an eagle. __,_,_Th=e'""'o""""t""'h....
er___ is a chicken.
Picture A
i
�
Picture B
2. There are three birds in Picture B. One is an eagle.

a. _________ one is a chicken.
b. _________ bird is a crow.
3. There are many kinds of birds in the world. One kind is an eagle.
a. _________ kind is a chicken.
b. _________ kind is a crow.
c. _________ kind is a sea gull.
d. What is the name of _________ kind of bird in the world?
4. It rained yesterday, and from the look of those dark clouds, we're going to have
_________ rainstorm today.
5. Nicole and Michelle are identical twins. The best way to tell them apart is by looking at
their ears. One of them has pierced ears, and _________ doesn't.
6. France borders several countries. One is Spain. _________ is Italy.

Match the sentences to the correct pictures.
Picture A
� --�
Picture B
1. __ Some are red. Others are yellow.

2. __ Some are red. The others are yellow.
172 CHAPTER 6
6· 15 Plural Forms of Other: Other(s) vs. The Other(s)
Other(s)
There are many apples in Paul's kitchen. Paul is

•
Other(s) (without the) means "several more out of a
holding one apple. group of similar items, several in addition to the one(s)
(a) There are other apples in a bowl. already mentioned."
(adjective) + (noun) The adjective other (without an -s) can be used with a
(b) There are other ones on a plate. plural noun (e.g., apples) or with the word ones.
(adjective) + ones Others (with an -s) is a plural pronoun; it is not used
(c) There are others on a chair. with a noun.
(pronoun) In (c): others= other apples
The Other(s)
There are four apples on the table. Paul is going The other(s) means "the last ones in a specific group,
to take one of them. the remains from a given number of similar items."
(d) Sara is going to take the other apples. The other (without an -s) can be used as an adjective
(adjective) + (noun) in front of a noun or the word ones, as in (d) and (e).
(e) Sara is going to take the other ones. The others (with an -s) is a plural pronoun; it is not
(adjective) + ones used with a noun.
( f) Sara is going to take the others. In (f): the others= the other apples
(pronoun)

Perform these actions.
1. Hold two pens. Use a form of other to describe the second pen.
--+ I'm holding two pens. One is mine, and the other belongs to Ahmed.
2. Hold three pens. Use a form of other to describe the second and third pens.
3. Hold up your two hands. One of them is your right hand. Tell us about your left hand,
using a form of other.
4. Hold up your right hand. One of the five fingers is your thumb. Using forms of other, tell
us about your index finger, then your middle finger, then your ring finger, and then your
little finger, the last of the five fingers on your right hand.

Complete the sentences with other(s) or the other(s).
1. There are many kinds of animals in the world. The elephant is one kind. Some
____,o'-"t"'""he=r=-
s __ are tigers, horses, and bears.
2. There are many kinds of animals in the world. The elephant is one kind. Some
_________ kinds are tigers, horses, and bears.
3. There are three colors in the Italian flag. One of the colors is red.
_________ are green and white.
4. There are three colors in the Italian flag. One of the colors is red.
_________ colors are green and white.
5. Many people like to get up very early in the morning. _________ like to
sleep until noon.
6. There are many kinds of geometric figures. Some are circles.
figures are squares. Still _________ are rectangular.
D OD
7. There are four geometric figures in the above drawing. One is a square.
_________ figures are a rectangle, a circle, and a triangle.
8. Of the four geometric figures in the drawing, only the circle has curved lines.
_________ have straight lines.
174 CHAPTER 6
o Exercise 56. Let's read and write. (Charts 6-13 ___. 6-15)
Part I. Read the passage and answer the questions.
Calming Yourself
When was the last time you felt nervous or anxious? Were you able to calm yourself?
There are a variety of techniques that people use to calm themselves. Here are three that many
people have found helpful.
One way that people relax is by imagining a peaceful place, such as a tropical beach.
Thinking about the warm water, cool breezes, and steady sounds of the ocean waves helps
people calm themselves. Another popular method is deep breathing. Inhaling deeply and then
slowly exhaling is an easy way for people to slow their heart rate and relax their body. Still other
people find exercise helpful. Some people benefit from a slow activity like a 20-minute walk.
Others prefer activities that make them tired, like running or swimming.
How about you? How do you calm yourself when you feel nervous? Do any of these
methods help you, or do you do other things to relax?
1. What are three ways people relax when they are nervous? (Use one and another in your
answer.)
2. Why do some people choose activities like running and swimming as a way to relax?
3. Imagine you are trying to relax by thinking of a peaceful place. What place would you
think of ?
4. How do you relax when you are nervous?
Part II. Read this paragraph _ by one student who tells how he relaxes when he's nervous.
How I Calm Down

Sometimes I feel nervous, especially when I have to give a speech. My body begins to
shake, and I realize that I have to calm myself down. This is the technique I use: I imagine myself
in a peaceful place. My favorite place in the world is the sea. I imagine myself on the water. I am
floating. I feel the warm water around me. The sounds around me are very relaxing. I only hear
the waves and maybe a few birds. I don't think about the past or the future. I can feel my heart
rate decrease a little, and my body slowly starts to calm down.
Part III. Write a paragraph about how you relax when you are nervous. Follow the model.
Give specific details about how you relax and what the results are.
Sometimes I feel nervous, especially when I have to My
__________ and I realize that I have to calm myself down. This is the
technique I use: ____ __ __ ___

6-16 Summary of Forms of Other
Adjective Pronoun
SINGULAR another apple another Notice that the word others (other+ final -s) is used only as a
PLURAL other apples others plural pronoun.
SINGULAR the other apple the other

PLURAL the other apples the others

Complete the sentences with correct forms of other: another) other, others, the other,
the others.
1. Juan has only two suits, a blue one and a gray one. His wife wants him to buy
another one.
2. Juan has two suits. One is blue, and _________ 1s gray.
3. Some suits are blue. _________ are gray.
4. Some jackets have zippers. _________ jackets have buttons.
5. Some people keep dogs as pets. _________ have cats. Still

_________ people have fish or birds as pets.
6. My boyfriend gave me a ring. I tried to put it on my ring finger, but it didn't fit. So I had
to put it on _________ finger.
7. People have two thumbs. One is on the right hand. _________ is on the
left hand.
8. Sometimes when I'm thirsty, I'll have a glass of water, but often one glass isn't enough, so
I'll have _________ one.
9. There are five letters in the word fresh. One of the letters is a vowel.
are consonants.
10. Smith is a common last name in English. _________ common names are
Johnson, Jones, Miller, Anderson, Moore, and Brown.
Exercise 58. Listening. (Charts 6-15 and 6-16)

0CD2
Listen to each conversation and circle the correct statement (a. or b.).
1. a. The speaker was looking at two jackets.
Track 9
b. The speaker was looking at several jackets.
2. a. The speakers have only two favorite colors.
b. The speakers have more than two favorite colors.
176 CHAPTER 6
3. a. There are several roads the speakers can take.
b. There are two roads the speakers can take.
4. a. There are only two ways to get downtown.
b. There are more than two ways to get downtown.
5. a. The speaker had more than four pets.
b. The speaker had only four pets.
0 Exercise 59. Listening. (Charts 6-15 and 6-16)

{J
Listen to the conversation about dealing with loneliness. Complete the sentences with the
words you hear.
CD2
Track 10
A: What do you do when you're feeling lonely?
B: I go someplace where I can be around _________ people. Even if they

are strangers, I feel better when there are around me. How
about you?
A: That doesn't work for me. For example, if I'm feeling lonely and I go to a movie by
myself, I look at all _________ people who are there with their friends
and family, and I start to feel even lonelier. So I try to find _________
things to do to keep myself busy. When I'm busy, I don't feel lonely.

Edit the sentences. Correct errors in nouns, pronouns, adjectives, and subject-verb agreement.
wishes
1. Jimmy had three Wish- for his birthday.
2. I had some black beans soup for lunch.
3. The windows in our classroom is dirty.
4. People in Brazil speaks Portuguese.
5. Are around 8,600 types of birds in the world.
6. My mother and father work in Milan. Their teacher's.
7. Today many womens are carpenter, pilot, and doctor.
8. Is a new student in our class. Have you met her?
9. There are two pool at the park. The smaller one is for childs. The another is for adults.
10. The highways in my country are excellents.
11. I don't like my apartment. Its in a bad neighborhood. Is a lot of crime. I'm going to
move to other neighborhood.

Check (/') the sentences that are grammatically correct.
1. __ I can speak English well.
2. __ He cans speaks English well.
3. __ She can to speak English well.
4. __ Our neighbors can speak some English.
5. __ My parents can't speaking English at all.
7·1 The Form of Modal Auxiliaries

The verbs listed below are called "modal auxiliaries." They are helping verbs that express a wide range of
meanings ( ability, permission, possibility, necessity, etc.). Most of the modals have more than one meaning.
Auxiliary + the Simple Form of a Verb

can ( a) Olga can speak English. Can, could, may, might, should, had better, must, will,
could ( b} He couldn't come to c!ass. and would are immediately followed by the simple form
may ( c) It may rain tomorrow. of a verb.
• They are not followed by to.
might ( d} It might rain tomorrow.
INCORRECT: Olga can to speak English.
should ( e) Mary should study harder.
• The main verb does not have a final -s.
had better ( f) I had better study tonight. INCORRECT.' Olga can speaks English.
must ( g) Billy! You must listen to me! • The main verb is not in a past form.
will ( h} I will be in class tomorrow. INCORRECT: Olga can spoke English.
would ( i) Would you please close the door? • The main verb is not in its -ing form.
INCORRECT: Olga can speaking English.
Auxiliary + to + the Simple Form of a Verb

have to (j) I have to study tonight. To + the simple form is used with these auxiliaries:
have got to ( k) I have got to study tonight. have to, have got to, be able to, and ought to.
be able to ( I) Kate is able to study harder.
ought to (m) Kate ought to study harder.
178
Make sentences with the given verbs + come. Add to where necessary. Use this model:
Leo __ tonight.
Example: can --+ Leo can come tonight.
1. may 6. might
2. should 7. had better
3. ought 8. has
4. will not 9. has got
5. could not 10. is not able

0
CD2
Listen to the sentences. Add to where necessary. If to isn't necessary, write 0.
Notice that to may sound like "ta."
Track 11
1. I have __M_ go downtown tomorrow.
2. You must _1L_ fasten your seat belt.
3. Could you please __ open the window?
4. May I __ borrow your eraser?
5. I'm not able __ sign the contract today.
6. Today is the deadline. You must __ sign it!
7. I have got __ go to the post office this afternoon.
8. Shouldn't you __ save some of your money for emergencies?
9. I feel bad for Elena. She has __ have more surgery.
10. Alexa! Stop! You must not __ run into the street!

Circle the best completion for each sentence. Discuss your answers.
1. A newborn baby can I can't roll over.
2. A baby of four months can I can't smile.
3. A newborn baby is able to I isn't able to see black and white shapes.
4. A baby of six months is able to I isn't able to see colors.
5. When I was nine months old, I could I couldn't crawl.
6. When I was nine months old, I could I couldn't walk.
Modal Auxiliaries 179

7-2 Expressing Ability: Can and Could
(a) Bob can playthe piano. Can expresses ability in the present or future.
(b) You can buya screwdriver at a hardware store.
(c) I can meetyou at Ted's tomorrow afternoon.
{ can't } The negative form of can may be written can't, cannot,

(d ) I cannot understand that sentence. or can not.
can not
' In spoken English, can is usually unstressed and

(e) I can go.
'
( f ) I can'tga
pronounced /k-;m/ = "kun."
Can't is stressed and pronounced /kffin?/, with the final
sound being a glottal stop.* The glottal stop replaces the
/ti in spoken English. Occasionally native speakers have
trouble hearing the difference between can and can't
and have to ask for clarification.
(g) Our son could walkwhen he was one year old. The past form of can is could.
(h) He couldn't walkwhen he was six months old. The negative of could is couldn't or could not.
( i ) He can read Ability can also be expressed with a form of be able to.
(j) He is able to read Examples ( i) and ( j) have the same meaning.
(k) She could read Examples (k) and (I) have the same meaning.
(I) She was able to read
*A glottal stop is the sound you hear in the negative "unh-uh." The air is stopped by the closing of your glottis in the back of your
throat. The phonetic symbol for the glottal stop is 171.

Part I. Complete the sentences with can or can't.
1. A dog ______ swim, but it ______ fly.
2. A frog ______ live both on land and in water, but a cat ______
3. A bilingual person ______ speak three languages, but a trilingual person
4. People with a Ph.D. degree ______ use "Dr." in front of their name, but people
with a master's degree ______
Part II. Restate the sentences in Part I. Use be able to.

Interview your classmates. Ask each student a different question. If the answer is "yes,"
ask the follow-up question in parentheses. Share some of your answers with the class.
180 CHAPTER 7
Can you ...
1. speak more than two languages? (Which ones?)
2. play chess? (How long have you played?)
3. fold a piece of paper in half more than six times? (Can you show me?)
4. draw well - for example, draw a picture of me? (Can you do it now?)
Are you able to ...

5. write clearly with both your right and left hands?
(Can you show me?)
6. pat the top of your head with one hand and rub your
stomach in a circle with the other hand at the same time?
(Can you show me?)
7. drive a stick-shift car? (When did you learn?)
8. play a musical instrument? (Which one?)
0 Exercise 7. Listening. {Chart 7-2)

IJ
CD2
Listen to the conversation. You will hear reductions for can and can't. Write the words you
hear.
Track 12
In the classroom
A: I ___________ this math assignment.
B: I _________ you with that.

2
A: Really? ___________ this problem to me?
B: Well, we ___________ out the answer unless we do this part first.
A: Okay! But it's so hard.
B: Yeah, but I know you _________ it. Just go slowly.
A: Class is almost over. ___________ me after school today to finish this?
B: Well, I ___________ you right after school, but how about at 5:00?
A: Great!
o Exercise 8. Let's talk. {Chart 7-2>

Complete the sentences with could/couldn't/be able to/not be able to and your own words.
Example: A year ago I __ , but now I can.
-> A year ago I couldn't speak English, but now I can.
1. When I was a child, I __ , but now I can.

2. When I was six, I __ , but I wasn't able to do that
when I was three.
3. Five years ago, I __ , but now I can't.
4. In the past, I __ , but now I am.

www.irLanguage.com

Check(/') the sentences in each group that have the same meaning.
GROUP A
1. Maybe it w ill be hot tomorrow.
2. __ It might be hot tomorrow.
3. --. It may be hot tomorrow.
GROUP B
4. __ You can have dessert, now.
5. __ You may have dessert, now.
GROUP C
6. __ She can't stay up late.
7. __ She might not stay up late.
7-3 Expressing Possibility: May, Might, and Maybe;

Expressing Permission: May and Can
(a) It may rain tomorrow. May and might express possibility in the present or
(b) It might rain tomorrow. future. They have the same meaning. There is no
(c) - Why isn't John in class? difference in meaning between (a) and (b).
m y
- I don't know. He { � } be sick today.
m1ght
(d) It may not rain tomorrow. Negative: may not and might not
(e) It might not rain tomorrow. (Do not contract may and might with not.)
( f ) Maybe it will rain tomorrow. In (f) and (g): maybe (spelled as one word) is an
adverb. It means "possibly." It comes at the beginning
COMPARE:
of a sentence.
(g) Maybe John is sick. (adverb) INCORRECT: It will maybe rain tomorrow.
(h) John may be sick. (verb)
_ In (h): may be (two words) is a verb form: the
auxiliary may + the main verb be.
Examples (g) and (h) have the same meaning.
INCORRECT: John maybe sick.
( i ) Yes, children, you may have a cookie after dinner. May is also used to give permission, as in (i).
(j) Okay, kids, you can have a cookie after dinner. Can is often used to give permission, too, as in U).
NOTE: Examples (i) and U) have the same meaning,
but may is more formal than can.
(k) You may not have a cookie. May not and cannot (can't) are used to deny
You can't have a cookie. permission (i.e., to say "no").
182 CHAPTER 7
Complete the sentences with can) ma ) or might. Identify the meaning expressed by the
y
modals: possibility or permission.
In a courtroom for a speeding ticket
1. No one speaks without the judge's permission. You may I can not speak until the
judge asks you a question. Meaning: Ivermission
2. The judge _______ reduce your fine for your speeding ticket, or she
_______ not. It depends. Meaning:
3. You _______ not argue with the judge. If you argue, you will get a fine.
Meaning:
4. You have a strong case, but I'm not sure if you will convince the judge. You _______
wm or you _______ lose. Meaning:

. Rewrite the sentences with the words in parentheses.
1. It may snow tonight.
(might)
(Maybe) ___________________
2. You might need to wear your boots.

(may)
(Maybe) ___________________
3. Maybe there will be a blizzard.

(may)
(might) ___________________

Answer each question with may) might) and maybe. Include at least three possibilities in
each answer. Work in pairs, in small groups, or as a class.
Example: What are you going to do tomorrow?
- I don't know. I may go downtown. OR I might go to the laundromat.
Maybe I'll study all day. W'ho knows?
1. What are you going to do tomorrow night?
2. What's the weather going to be like tomorrow?
3. What is our teacher going to do tonight?
4. ( __ ) isn't in class today. Where is he/she?
5. What is your occupation going to be ten years from now?

You will hear sentences with can) may) or might. Decide if the speakers are expressing
(J
CD 2
ability; possibility, or permission.
Track 13
Example: You will hear: A: Where's Victor?
B: I don't know. He may be sick.
You will choose: ability � perm1ss1on
1. ability possibility perm1ss1on 4. ability possibility permission

2. ability possibility permission 5. ability possibility perm1ss1on
3. ability possibility permission

In which sentence is the speaker expressing a past ability? a present possibility? a future possibility?
A soccer game
1. There is five minutes left and the score is 3-3. Our team could win.
2. The goalie is on the ground. He could be hurt.
3. Our team didn't win. We couldn't score another goal.
7-4 Using Could to Express Possibility

(a) - How was the movie? Could you One meaning of could is past ability, as in (a).*
understandthe English? Another meaning of could is possibility.
- Not very well. I could only understand it In (b): He could be sick has the same meaning as
with the help of subtitles. He may/might be sick, i.e., It is possible that he is sick.
(b) -Why isn't Greg in class? In (b): could expresses a present possibility.
- I don't know. He could be sick.
(c) Look at those dark clouds. It could start raining In (c): could expresses a future possibility.
any minute.
*See also Chart 7-2.
184 CHAPTER 7
Does could express past, present, or future time? What is the meaning: ability or possibility?
Sentence Past Present Future Ability Possibility
1. I could be home late tonight. Don't x x

wait for me for dinner.
2. Thirty years ago, when he was a small
child, David could speak Swahili fluently.
Now he's forgotten a lot of it.
I.
.I
3. A: Where's Alicia?
B: I don't know. She could be at the mall.
4. When I was a child, I could climb trees,
but now I'm too old.
5. Let's leave for the airport now. Yuki's
plane could arrive early, and we want
to be there when she arrives.
6. A: What's that on the carpet?
B: I don't know. It looks like a bug.
Or it could be a piece of fuzz.

Suggest possible solutions for each situation. Use could. Work in pairs, in small groups, or as
a class.
Example: Tim has to go to work early tomorrow. His car is completely out of gas.
His bicycle is broken.
-+ He could take the bus to work.
-+ He could get a friend to take him to a gas station to get gas.
-+ He could try to fix his bike.
-+ He could get up very early and walk to work.
Etc.
1. Lisa walked to school today. Now she wants to go home. It's raining hard. She doesn't
have an umbrella, and she's wearing sandals.
2. Joe and Joan want to get some exercise. They have a date to play tennis this morning, but
the tennis court is covered with snow.
3. Roberto just bought a new camera. He has it at home now. He has the instruction
manual. It is written in Japanese. He can't read Japanese. He doesn't know how to
operate the camera.
4. Albert likes to travel around the world. He is 22 years old. Today he is alone in Paris. He
needs to eat, and he needs to find a place to stay overnight. But while he was asleep on the
train last night, someone stole his wallet. He has no money.

IJ
CD2
Listen to the conversation between a husband and wife. Listen again and complete the
sentences with the words you hear.
Track 14
In a home office
A: Look at this cord. Do you know what it's for?
B: I don't know. We have so many cords around here with all our electronic equipment. It
_________ for the printer,I guess.
A: No, I checked. The printer isn't missing a cord.
B: It _________ for one of the kid's toys.
A: Yeah,I But they don't have many electronic toys.
B: I have an idea. It _________ for the cell phone. You know - the one I
had before this one.
A: I bet that's it. We _________ probably throw this out.
B: Well, let's be sure before we do that.
www.irLanguage.com

Check (./) all the sentences that have the same meaning.
1. __ May I use your cell phone?
2. __ Can I use your cell phone?
3. __ Could I use your cell phone?
186 CHAPTER 7
irLanguage.com
7.5 Polite Questions: May I, Could I, Can I

Polite Question Possible Answers
(a) May I please borrow your pen? Yes. People use may I, could I,* and can I
(b) Could I please borrow your pen? Yes. Of course. to ask polite questions. The questions
(c) Can I please borrow your pen? Yes. Certainly. ask for someone's permission or
Of course. agreement.
Certainly. Examples (a), (b), and (c) have
Sure. (informal) basically the same meaning.
Okay. (informal) NOTE: can I is less formal than may I
Uh-huh (meaning 'yes") and could I.
I'm sorry, but I need to use it
(d) Can I borrow your pen, please? myself. Please can come at the end of the
question, as in (d).
(e) Can I borrow your pen? Please can be omitted from the
question, as in (e).
*In a polite question, could is NOT the past form of can.

Complete the phone conversations. Use may I, could I, or can I + a verb from the list.
NOTE: The caller is always Speaker B.
ask help leave speak/talk take
1. A: Hello?
B: Hello. Is Ahmed there?
A: Yes, he is.
B: to him?
A: Just a minute. I'll get him.
2. A: Hello. Mr. Black's office.

B: to Mr. Black?
A: who is calling?
B: Susan Abbott.
A: Just a moment, Ms. Abbott. I'll transfer you.
3. A: Hello?
B: Hi. This is Bob. to Pedro?
A: Sure. Hold on.
-------------------- - --
4. A: Good afternoon. Dr. Wu's office. ___________ you?
B: Yes. I have an appointment that I need to change.
A: Just a minute, please. I'll transfer you to our appointment desk.
5. A: Hello?
B: Hello. ___ ________ to Emily?
A: She's not at home right now. ___________ a message?
B: No, thanks. I'll call later.
6. A: Hello?
B: Hello. ___________ to Maria?
A: She's not here right now.
B: Oh. ___________ a message?
A: Sure. Just let me get a pen.

Work with a partner. Ask and answer polite questions. Begin with May I, Could I, or Can I.
Make conversations you can role-play for the class.
Example: (A), you want to see (B)'s grammar book for a minute.
SPEAKER A: May/Could/Can I (please) see your grammar book for a minute?
SPEAKER B: Of course. I Sure. I Etc.
SPEAKER A: Thank you. I Thanks. I forgot to bring mine to class today.
1. (A), you want to see (B)'s dictionary for a minute.
2. (A), you are at a restaurant. (B) is your server. You have finished your meal. You want the
check.
3. (B), you run into (A) on the street. (A) is carrying some heavy packages. What are you
going to say to him/her?
4. (A), you are speaking to (B), who is one of your teachers. You want to leave class early today.
5. (B), you are in a store with your good friend (A). The groceries cost more than you
expected. You don't have enough money. What are you going to say to your friend?

Check the questions that are grammatically correct. Which two questions do you think are
more polite than the others?
In the kitchen
1. __ Will you help me with the dishes?
2. __ Would you load the dishwasher?
3. __ May you load the dishwasher?
4. __ Can you unload the dishwasher?
5. __ Could you unload the dishwasher?
188 CHAPTER 7
7-6 Polite Questions: WouldYou, CouldYou, Will You, Can You
Polite Question Possible Answers
(a) Would you please open the door? Yes. People use would you, could you,
(b) Could yo� please open the door? Yes. Of course. will you, and can you to ask polite
(c) Will you please open the door? Certainly. I'd be happy to. questions. The questions ask for
(d) Can you please open the door? Of course. I'd be glad to. someone's help or cooperation.
Sure. (informal) Examples (a), (b), (c), and (d) have
Okay. (informal} basically the same meaning.
Uh-huh. (meaning "yes") Would and could are generally
I'm sorry. I'd like to help, but considered more polite than will and
my hands are full. can.
NOTE: May is NOT used when you is the

subject of a polite question.
INCORRECT: May you please open the
door?

Make two different questions for each situation. Use you.
1. You're in a room and it's getting very hot.
Formal: Would your
olease oven
I the window?
Informal: Can you turn on the air-conditioner?
2. You're trying to listen to the news on TV, but your friends are talking too loud, and you
can't hear it.
Formal:
Informal:
3. You're in a restaurant. You are about to pay and notice the bill is more than it should be.
The server has made a mistake.
Formal:
Informal:

Work with a partner. Make a conversation for one (or more) of the given situations. Perform
your conversation for the rest of the class.
Example: You're in a restaurant. You want the server to refill your coffee cup.
You catch the server's eye and raise your hand slightly. He approaches your table and
says: "Yes? What can I do for you?"
PARTNER A: Yes? What can I do for you?
PARTNER B: Could I please have some more coffee?
PARTNER A: Of course. Right away. Could I get you anything else?

PARTNER B: No thanks. Oh, on second thought, yes. Would you bring some cream too?
PARTNER A: Certainly.
PARTNER B: Thanks.
1. You've been waiting in a long line at a busy bakery. Finally, it's your turn. The clerk turns
toward you and says: "Next!"
2. You are at work. You feel sick and you have a slight fever. You really want to go home. You
see your boss, Mr. Jenkins, passing by your desk. You say: "Mr. Jenkins, could I speak with
you for a minute?"
3. The person next to you on the plane has finished reading his newspaper. You would like to
read it. He also has a bag on the floor that is in your space. You would like him to move it.
You say: "Excuse me."

Your friend Paula has a terrible headache. W hat advice would you give her? Check(/') the
sentences you agree with.
1. You should lie down.
2. You should take some medicine.
3. __ You ought to call the doctor.
4. __ You should go to the emergency room.
5. __ You ought to put an ice-pack on your forehead.
1·1 Expressing Advice: Should and Ought To

. should Should and ought to have the same meaning:
(a) My clothes are dirty. I { } wash them.
ought to ''This is a good idea. This is good advice."
(b) INCORRECT: I should to wash them. FORMS:
(c) INCORRECT: I ought washing them. should+ simple form of a verb (no to)
ought + to + simple form of a verb
(d) You need your sleep. You should not (shouldn't) NEGATIVE: should + not = shouldn't
stay up late. (Ought to is usually not used in the negative.)
(e) A: I'm going to be late for the bus. What should I do? QUESTION: should+ subject+ main verb
B: Run! (Ought to is usually not used in questions.)
( f ) A: I'm tired today. The use of maybe with should and ought to
B: You should/ought to go home and take a nap. "softens" advice.
COMPARE:
(g) A: I'm tired today.
B: Maybe you should/ought to go home and take a In (f): Speaker B is giving definite advice. He is
nap. stating clearly that he believes going home for a
nap is a good idea and is the solution to Speaker
A's problem.
In (g): Speaker B is making a suggestion: going
home for a nap is one possible way to solve
Speaker A's problem.
190 CHAPTER 7
Work with a partner. Partner A states the problem. Partner B gives advice using should or
ought to. Include maybe to soften the advice if you wish.
Example: I'm sleepy.

PARTNER A: I'm sleepy.
PARTNER B: (Maybe) You should/ought to drink a cup of tea.
1. I can't fall asleep at night.
2. I have a sore throat.
3. I have the hiccups.
4. I sat on my friend's sunglasses. Now the frames are bent.
Change roles.
5. I'm starving.*
6. I dropped my sister's camera, and now it doesn't work.
7. Someone stole my lunch from the refrigerator in the staff lounge at work.
8. I bought some shoes that don't fit. Now my feet hurt.

Marco has lost his passport. Here are some suggestions. Check (I) the sentences you agree
with. Which sentences seem more serious or urgent?
1. __ He had better go to the embassy.
2. He should wait and see if someone returns it.
3. __ He had better report it to the police.
4. __ He should ask a friend to help him look for it.
7-8 Expressing Advice: Had Better

ould
ought to
(a) My clothes are dirty. I r
} Had better has the same basic meaning as should
had better
wash them. and ought to: "This is a good idea. This is good
advice."
(b) You're driving too fast! You'd better slow down. Had better has more of a sense of urgency than
should or ought to. It often implies a warning about
possible bad consequences. In (b): If you don't slow
down, there could be a bad result. You could get a
speeding ticket or have an accident.
(c) You'd better not eat that meat. It looks spoiled. NEGATIVE: had better not
(d) I 'd better send my boss an email right away. In conversation, had is usually contracted: 'd.
*starving (informal English) = very, very hungry

Give advice using had better. W hat are some possible bad consequences if your advice is not
followed? Work in pairs, in small groups, or as a class.
1. I haven't paid my electric bill.
---+ rou 'd better pay it by tomorrow. If you don't pay it, the electric company will turn off the power.
2. Joe oversleeps a lot. This week he has been late to work three times. His boss is very
unhappy about that.
3. I don't feel good right now. I think I'm coming down with something.*
4. I can't remember if I locked the front door when I left for work.
5. My ankle really hurts. I think I've sprained it.
6. I can't find my credit card, and I've looked everywhere.

Edit the sentences. Correct the verb form errors.
had
1. You wilt better not be late.
2. Anna shouldn't wears shorts to work.
3. I should to go to the post office today.
4. I ought paying my bills today.
5. You'd had better to call the doctor today.
6. You don't should stay up too late tonight.
7. You better not leaving your key in the door.
8. Mr. Lim is having a surprise party for his wife. He ought told people soon.

Work in small groups. Give advice using should, ought to, and had better. The leader states
the problem, and others in the group offer suggestions. Select a different leader for each item.
Example:
LEADER: I study, but I don't understand my physics class. It's the middle of the term, and I'm
failing the course. I need a science course in order to graduate. W hat should I do?**
SPEAKER A: You'd better get a tutor right away.
SPEAKER B: You should make an appointment with your teacher and see if you can get some
extra help.
SPEAKER C: Maybe you ought to drop your physics course and take a different science course
next term.
•Toe idiom come down with something = get a sickness, like a cold or the flu
*-Should (NOT ought to or had better) is usually used in a question that asks for advice. The answer, however, can contain should,
ought co, or had better. For example;
A: My houseplants always die. What should I do?
B: rvu'd better get a book on plams. Thu should try to find out why they die. Maybe you ought to look on the Internet and see
if you can find some information.
192 CHAPTER 7
1. I forgot my dad's birthday yesterday. I feel terrible about it. What should I do?
2. I just discovered that I made dinner plans for tonight with two different people. I'm
supposed to meet my parents at one restaurant at 7:00, and I'm supposed to meet my boss
at a different restaurant across town at 8:00. What should I do?
3. Samira accidentally left the grocery store with an item she didn't pay for. Her young
daughter put it in Samira's shopping bag, but she didn't see it. What should Samira do?
4. I borrowed Karen's favorite book of poetry. It was special to her. A note on the inside
cover said "To Karen." T he author's signature was under it. Now I can't find the book.
I think I lost it. What should I do?

Which of these statements about writing a resume are true in your country? Check (/') them
and then decide which sentence is more common in writing and which sentences are more
common in speaking.
Writing a resume
1. __ You must list all your previous employers.
2. __ You have to provide references.
3. __ You have got to include personal information, for example, whether you are
married or not.
7-9 Expressing Necessity: Have to, Have Got to, Must

(a) I have a very important test tomorrow. Have to, have got to, and must have basically the
same meaning. They express the idea that something
is necessary.
I { �::: :ot to} study tonight.
must
(b) I'd like to go with you to the movie this evening, but Have to is used much more frequently in everyday
I can't. I have to go to a meeting. speech and writing than must.
(c) Bye now! I've got to go. My wife's waiting for me. Have got to is typically used in informal conversation,
I'll call you later. as in (c).
(d) All passengers must present their passports at
customs upon arrival. Must is typically found in written instructions or rules,
(e) Tommy, you must hold onto the railing when you as in (d). Adults also use it when talking to younger
go down the stairs. children, as in (e). It sounds very strong.
( f) Do we have to bring pencils to the test? QUESTIONS: Have to is usually used in questions, not
(g) Why did he have to leave so early? must or have got to. Forms of do are used with have
to in questions.
(h) I had to study last night. The PAST form of have to, have got to, and must
(meaning necessity) is had to.
( i ) I have to ("hafta") go downtown today. Notice that have to, has to, and have got to are
(j) Rita has to ("hasta") go to the bank. commonly reduced, as in (i) through (k).
(k) I've got to ("gotta") study tonight.

Answer the questions. Work in pairs, in small groups, or as a class.
1. What are some things you have w do today? tomorrow? every day?
2. What is something you had to do yesterday?
3. What is something you've got to do soon?
4. What is something you've got to do after class today or later tonight?
5. What is something a driver must do, according to the law?
6. What is something a driver should always do to be a safe driver?
7. What are some things a person should do to stay healthy?
8. What are some things a person must do to stay alive?
0
CD2
Complete the sentences with the words you hear. Before you begin, you may want to check
your understanding of these words: apply, applicable, legal, nickname, previous, employer.
Track 15
EMPLOYMENT APPLICATION
Applications are considered for aU positions without regard to race., color, religion,sex, national origin.
age, marital or veteran status, or in the presence of a non-related medical condition or handicap.
'00N-1Pt N/A Frost- M�4,ZO!f

First Name Middle Initial Last Name Date
1443 MPtpfe Ridge HetgMt.; !i!i!i-!i4!i-!i4!i4

Address Phone#
H"'ean1fe PA OfiOfifi 123-000-7890

City State Zip Code Social Security #
Filling out a job application

1. The application _________ be complete. You shouldn't skip any parts. If a
section doesn't fit your situation, you can write NIA (not applicable).
2. ______________ type it, but your writing __________
be easy to read.
3. ____________ use your full legal name, not your nickname.
4. ____________ list the names and places of your previ'ous employers.
5. ____________ list your education, beginning with either high school
or college.
6. always ________ apply in person. Sometimes you can do
it online.
7. ______________ write some things, like the same telephone number,
twice. You can write "same as above."
8. All spelling _________ be correct.
194 CHAPTER 7
o Exercise 33. Let's read and talk. (Charts 7-7 > 7-9)
Read the passage and then give advice.
A Family Problem
Mr. and Mrs. Hill don't know what to do about their 15-year-old son, Mark. He's very
intelligent but has no interest in learning. His grades are getting worse, and he won't do any
homework. Sometimes he skips school and spends the day at the mall.
His older sister Kathy is a good student, and she never causes any problems at home.
Kathy hasn't missed a day of school all year. Mark's parents keep asking him why he can't be
more like Kathy. Mark is jealous of Kathy and picks fights* with her.
All Mark does when he's home is stay in his room and listen to loud music. He often
refuses to eat meals with his family. He argues with his parents, his room is a mess, and he
won't** help around the house.
T his family needs advice. Tell them what changes they should make. What should they
do? What shouldn't they do?
Use each of these words at least once in the advice you give:
should ought to
shouldn't have to/has to
have got to/has got to must
had better

Which sentence (a. or b.) completes the idea of the given sentence?
We have lots of time.
a. You must not drive so fast!
b. You don't have to drive so fast.
7· 10 Expressing Lack of Necessity: Do Not Have To;

Expressing Prohibition: Must Not
(a) I finished all of my homework this afternoon. Don't/doesn't have to expresses the idea that
I don't have to study tonight. something is not necessary.
(b) Tomorrow is a holiday. Mary doesn't have to go
to class.
(c) Bus passengers must not talk to the driver. Must not expresses prohibition (DO NOT DO THIS!).
(d) Children, you must not play with matches!
(e) You mustn't play with matches. Must+ not= mustn't

(NOTE: The first "t'' is not pronounced.)
*pick a fighi = start a fight

**won'i is used here to express refusal: He refuses whelp around the house.

Complete the sentences with don't have to, doesn't have to, or must not.
1. You must not drive when you are tired. It's dangerous.
2. I live only a few blocks from my office. I don't have to drive to work.
3. Liz finally got a car, so now she drives to work. She ___________ take
the bus.
4. Mr. Murphy is very wealthy. He ___________ work for a living.
5. You ___________ tell Daddy about the birthday party. We want it to be

a surprise.
6. A: Did Professor Acosta give an assignment?
B: Yes, she assigned Chapters 4 and 6, but we ___________ read

Chapter 5.
7. A: Listen carefully, Kristen. If a stranger offers you a ride, you __________

get in the car. Never get in a car with a stranger. Do you understand?
B: Yes,Mom.

Read the situation and the conclusions that follow. W hich conclusion(s) seems logical to you?
Explain your answers, if necessary.
SITUATION: Mr. Ellis is a high school gym teacher. He usually wears gym clothes to work.
Today he is wearing a suit and tie.
1. He must have an important meeting.
2. He must be rich.
3. He must need new clothes.
4. He must want to make a good impression on someone.
5. His gym clothes must not be clean.
196 CHAPTER 7
7·11 Making Logical Conclusions: Must
(a) A: Nancy is yawning. In (a): Speaker Bis making a logical guess. He bases
B: She must be sleepy. his guess on the information that Nancy is yawning.
His logical conclusion, his "best guess;' is that Nancy
is sleepy. He uses must to express his logical
conclusion.
(b) LOGICAL CONCLUSION: Amy plays tennis every day. COMPARE: Must can express
She must like to play tennis. • a logical conclusion, as in (b).
(c) NECESSITY: If you want to get into the movie • necessity, as in (c).
theater, you must buy a ticl<et.
(d) NEGATIVE LOGICAL CONCLUSION: Eric ate everything COMPARE: Must not can express
on his plate except the pickle. He must not like • a negative logical conclusion, as in (d).
pickles. • prohibition, as in (e).
(e) PROHIBITION: There are sharks in the ocean near
our hotel. We must not go swimming there.

Complete the conversations with must or must not.
1. A: Did you offer our guests something to eat?

B: Yes, but they didn't want anything. They must not be hungry yet.
2. A: You haven't eaten since breakfast? That was hours ago. You must be
hungry.
B: I am.
3. A: Gregory has already had four glasses of water, and now he's having another.
B: He be really thirsty.
4. A: I offered Holly something to drink, but she doesn't want anything.

B: She _______ be thirsty.
5. A: The dog won't eat.

B: He _______ feel well.
6. A: Brian has watery eyes and has been coughing and sneezing.
B: Poor guy. He _______ have a cold.
7. A: Erica's really smart. She always gets above 95 percent on her math tests.
B: I'm sure she's pretty bright, but she ________ also study a lot.
8. A: Listen. Someone is jumping on the floor above us.

B: It ________ be Sam. Sometimes he does exercises in his apartment.

Make a logical conclusion for each situation. Use must.
1. Alima is crying. - She must be unhappy.
2. Mrs. Chu has a big smile on her face.
3. Samantha is shivering.
4. Olga watches ten movies a week.
5. James is sweating.
6. Toshi can lift one end of a compact car by himself.

Make logical conclusions with must or must not. Use the suggested completions and/or your
own words.
1. I am at Cyril's apartment door. I've knocked on the door and have rung the doorbell
several times. Nobody has answered the door. be at home? be out somewhere?
- Cyril must not be at home. · He must be out somewhere.
2. Jennifer reads all the time. She sits in a quiet corner and reads even when people come to
visit her. love books? like books better than people? like to talk to people?
3. Lara has a full academic schedule, plays on the volleyball team, has the lead in the school
play, is a volunteer at the hospital, takes piano lessons, and has a part-time job at an
ice-cream store. be busy all the time? have a lot of spare time? be a hard worker?
4. Simon gets on the Internet every day as soon as he gets home from work. He stays at his
computer until he goes to bed. be a computer addict? have a happy home life? have a lot of
friends?

Complete the sentences with must, have to, or had to and the correct form of the verbs in
parentheses.
At work
A: Your eyes are red. You (be) ________ really tired.
B: Yeah, I (stay) _________ up all night working on a project.
A: Did you finish?
B: No, I (work) ___________ on it later today, but I have a million other

things to do.
A: You (be) _______ really busy.
B: I am!
198 CHAPTER 7
Complete the questions with the correct words from the list. Two words don't fit any questions.
can't couldn't do does will wouldn't
1. You can work this weekend, you?
2. He won't be late, he?
3. We'd like you to stay, we?
4. They don't have to leave, they?
7-12 Tag Questions with Modal Auxiliaries

(a) You can come, can't you? Tag questions are common with these modal
(b) She won't tell, will she? auxiliaries: can, will, should, could, and would.*
(c) He should help, shouldn't he?
(d) They couldn't do it, could they?
(e) We would like to help, wouldn't we?
(f) They have to leave, don't they? Tag questions are also common with have to, has to,
(g) They don't have to leave, do they? and had to.
(h) He has to leave, doesn't he? Notice that forms of do are used for the tag in
( i ) He doesn't have to leave, does he? (f) through (k).
(j) You had to leave, didn't you?
(k) You didn't have to leave, did you?
*See Chart 5-15, p. 140, for information on how to use tag questions.
o Exercise 42. looking at grammar. (Chart 7-12 )

Complete the tag questions.
1. You can answer these questions, you?
2. Melinda won't tell anyone our secret, --------- she?
3. Alice would like to come with us, she?
4. I don't have to do more chores, I?

5. Steven shouldn't come to the meeting, _________ he?
6. Flies can fly upside down, they?
7. You would rather have your own apartment, _________ you?
8. Jill has to renew her driver's license, _________ she?
9. If you want to catch your bus, you should leave now, _________ you?

10. Ms. Baxter will be here tomorrow, _________ she?
11. You couldn't hear me, _________ you?
12. We have to be at the doctor's early tomorrow, _________ we?

Read each group of sentences. Decide who the speaker is and a possible situation for each
group.
GROUP A
1. Show me your driver's license.
2. Take it out of your wallet, please.
3. Step out of the car.
GROUPE
1. Open your mouth.
2. Stick out your tongue.
3. Say "ahhh."
4. Let me take a closer look.
5. Don't bite me!
7-13 Giving Instructions: Imperative Sentences

COMMAND: Imperative sentences are used to give commands,
(a) Captain: Open the door! make polite requests, and give directions. T he
Soldier: Yes, sir! difference between a command and a request lies in
REQUEST:
the speaker's tone of voice and the use of please.
(b) Teacher: Open the door, please. Please can come at the beginning or end of a request:
Student: Sure. Open the door, please.
DIRECTIONS:
Please open the door.
(c) Barbara: Could you tell me how to get to the post
office?
Stranger: Certainly. Walk two blocks down this
street. Turn left and walk three more
blocks. It's on the right-hand side of
the street.
(d) Close the window. The simple form of a verb is used in imperative
(e) Please sitdown. sentences. In (d): The understood subject of the
(f) Sequiet! sentence is you (meaning the person the speaker is
(g) Don't walkon the grass. talking to): Close the window= You close the window.
(h} Please don't waitfor me. NEGATIVE FORM:
(i) Don't be late. Don't + the simple form of a verb
200 CHAPTER 7
Part I. Read the steps for cooking rice. Put them in a logical order (1-9). Work with a partner
or in small groups.
1. Measure the rice.
2. Cook for 20 minutes.
3. Pour water into a pan.
4. Bring the water to a boil.
5. Put the rice in the pan.
6. Don't burn yourself.
7. Set the timer.
8. Turn off the heat.
9. Take the pan off the stove.
Part II. W rite instructions for cooking something simple. Share your recipe with the class.

(J Part I. Listen to the steps in this number puzzle and write the verbs you hear.
Before you begin, you may want to check your understanding of these words: add) subtract)
T�� 6 multiply) double.
Puzzle steps:
1. _______ down the number of the month you were born. For example,
_______ the number 2 if you were born in February.
_______ 3 if you were born in March, etc.

2. _______ the number.
3. _______ 5 to it.
4. ------- it by 50.
5. _______ your age.
6. ______ 250.
Part II.Now follow the steps in Part I to complete the puzzle. In the final number, the last·
two digits on the right will be your age, and the one or two digits on the left will be the month
you were born.

o Exercise 46. Reading and writing. (Chart 7-13)
Part I. Read the passage. Cross out suggestions that don't work for a job interview in your
country. Then add more suggestions until there are ten.
How to Make a Good Impression in a Job Interview

Do you want to know how to make a good impression when you interview for a job? Here
are some suggestions for you to consider.
1. Dress appropriately for the company. Flip-flops and shorts, for
example, are usually not appropriate.
2. Be sure to arrive early. Employers like punctual workers.
3. Bring extra copies of your resume and references. There may be
more than one interviewer.
4. Make eye contact with the interviewer. It shows confidence.
5. Don't chew gum during the interview.
6. Research the company before you go. That way you can show your
knowledge and interest in the company.
If you follow these suggestions, you will have a better chance of making a good impression
when you go for a job interview.
Part II. Write three paragraphs. Use the topic in Part I, or give general advice to people who
want to ...
1. improve their health. 4. find a job.
2. get good grades. 5. get a good night's sleep.
3. improve their English. 6. protect the environment by recycling.
Use this model.

I. Introductory paragraph: Do you want to ... ? Here are some suggestions for you to consider.
II. Middle paragraph: (List the suggestions and add details.)
III. Final paragraph: Ifyou follow these suggestions, you will . . . .
202 CHAPTER 7
Check (./) the items that are suggestions.
1. __ Why do bears hibernate?
2. __ I have a day off. Why don't we
take the kids to the zoo?
3. __ Let's go see the bears at the zoo.
I
7-14 Making Suggestions: Let's and Why Don't
(a) - It's hot today. Let's go to the beach. Let's and Why don't we are used to make
- Okay. Good idea. suggestions about activities for you and another
person to do.
(b) - It's hot today. Why don't we go to the beach?
- Okay. Good idea. Examples (a) and (b) have the same meaning.
Let's = let us
(c) - I'm tired. In (c): Why don't you is used to make a friendly
- Why don't you take a nap? suggestion or to give friendly advice.
- That's a good idea. I think I will.

Make suggestions beginning with Let's and Why don't we.
1. Where should we go for dinner tonight?
2. Who should we ask to join us for dinner tonight?
3. What time should we meet at the restaurant?
4. Where should we go afterwards?

Work in small groups. The leader states the problem, and then others in the group offer
suggestions beginning with Why don't you.
1. I'm freezing.
2. I'm feeling dizzy.
3. I feel like doing something interesting and fun this weekend. Any ideas?
4. I need to get more exercise, but I get bored with indoor activities. Any suggestions?
5. I haven't done my assignment for Professor Lopez. It will take me a couple of hours, and
class starts in an hour. What am I going to do?
6. I've lost the key to my apartment, so I can't get in. My roommate is at the library. What
am I going to do?
7. My friend and I had an argument, and now we aren't talking to each other. I've had some
time to think about it, and I'm sorry for what I said. I miss her friendship. What should
I do?

rf'i Listen to the conversation about a couple making suggestions for the evening. Listen a second
itl time and put the suggestions in the correct order (1-3).
CD2
Track 17
Suggestions:
1. go to a restaurant
2. go dancing
3. go to a movie
D Exercise 51. Warm-up. (Chart 7-15)

Check (./) the statements that are true for you.
1. __ I prefer fruit to vegetables.
2. __ I like raw vegetables better than cooked.
3. __ I would rather eat vegetables than meat.
7-15 Stating Preferences: Prefer, Like ... Better, Would Rather

(a) I prefer apples to oranges. prefer + noun + to + noun
(b) I prefer watching TV to studying. prefer + -ing verb + to + -ing verb
(c) I like apples better than oranges. like + noun + better than + noun
(d) I like watching TV better than studying. like + -ing verb + better than + -ing verb
(e) Ann would rather have an apple than an orange. Would rather is followed immediately by the simple
( f ) INCORRECT: Ann would rather has an apple. form of a verb (e.g., have, visit, live), as in (e).
(g) I'd rather visit a big city than live there. Verbs following than are also in the simple form, as
(h) INCORRECT: I'd rather visit a big city than to live there. in (g).
INCORRECT: I'd rather visit a big city than living there.
( i ) I'd !You'd I She'd I He'd I We'd !They'd rather have Contraction of would = 'd
an apple.
(j) Would you rather have an apple or an orange? In (j) : In a polite question, would rather can be
followed by or to offer someone a choice.

Complete the sentences with than or to.
1. When I'm hot and thirsty, I pre fer cold drinks __,to
""-- hot drinks.
2. When I'm hot and thirsty, I like cold drinks better than hot drinks.
3. When I'm hot and thirsty, I'd rather have a cold drink than a hot drink.
4. I prefer tea _____ coffee.
5. I like tea better _____ coffee.
204 CHAPTER 7
6. I'd rather drink tea ______ coffee.
7. When I choose a book, I prefer nonfiction ______ fiction.
8. I like folk music music better rock and roll.
9. My parents would rather work retire. T hey enjoy their jobs.
10. Do you like spring better fall?
11. I prefer visiting my friends in the evening _____ watching TV by myself.
12. I would rather read a book in the evening ______ visit with friends.

Work with a parmer. Take turns asking and answering questions. Be sure to answer in
complete sentences.
Examples: Which do you prefer: apples or oranges?*
- I prefer oranges to apples.
Which do you like better: bananas or strawberries?
----, I like bananas better than strawberries.
Which would you rather have right now: an apple or a banana?
4 I'd rather have a banana.
1. Which do you like better: rice or potatoes?
2. Which do you prefer: peas or corn?
3. Which would you rather have for dinner tonight: fish or chicken?
4. Name two sports. Which do you like better?
5. Name two movies. Which one would you rather see?
6. What kind of music would you rather listen to: rock or classical?
7. Name two vegetables. Which do you prefer?
8. Name two TV programs. Which do you like better?

Interview your classmates. Use would rather ... than in your answers.
Would you rather ...
1. live in an apartment or in a house?** Why? 5. surf the Internet or watch TV? Why?
2. be an author or an artist? Why? 6. have a big family or a small family? Why?
3. drive a fast car or fly a small plane? Why? 7. be a bird or a fish? Why?
4. be rich and unlucky in love or 8. spend your free time with other people
poor and lucky in love? Why? or be by yourself ? Why?
*Use a rising intonation on the first choice and a falling intonation on the second choice: Which do you prefer,� or �s?
**It is possible but not necessary to repeat a preposition after than.
CORRECT: I'd rather live in an apartment than in a house.
CORRECT: I'd rather live in an apartment than a house.

o Exercise 55. Looking at grammar. (Chapter 7)
Choose the best completion for each sentence.
Example: A: My cat won't eat.
®
B: You call the vet.
a. will had better c. may
1. A: Does this pen belong to you?

B: No. It be Susan's. She was sitting at that desk.
a. had better b. will c. must
2. A: Let's go to a movie this evening.
B: That sounds like fun, but I can't. I __ finish a report before I go to bed tonight.
a. have got to b. would rather c. ought to
3. A: Hey, Pietro. What's up* with Ken? Is he upset about something?
B: He's angry because you recommended Ann instead of him for the promotion. You
__ sit down with him and explain your reasons. At least that's what I think.
a. should b. will c. can
4. A: Does Omar want to go with us to the film festival tonight?
B: No. He __ go to a wrestling match than the film festival.
a. could b. would rather c. prefers
5. A: I did it! I did it! I got my driver's license!
B: Congratulations, Michelle. I'm really proud of you.
A: Thanks, Dad. Now __ I have the car tonight? Please, please?
B: No. You're not ready for that quite yet.
a. will b. should c. may
6. A: I just tripped on your carpet and almost fell. It's loose right by the door. You _ _ fix
it before someone gets hurt.
B: Yes, Uncle Ben. I should. I will. I'm sorry. Are you all right?
a. can b. ought to c. may
7. A: Are you going to the conference in Atlanta next month?
B: I __ . It's sort of iffy** right now. I've applied for travel money, but who knows what
my supervisor will do.
a. will b. have to c. might
8. A: What shall we do after the meeting this evening?
B: __ pick Jan up and all go out to dinner together.
a. Why don't b. Let's c. Should
9. A: What shall we do after that?
B: __ we go back to my place for dessert.
a. Why don't b. Let's c. Should
* What's up? = What's going on?

**iffy = uncertain; doubtful
206 CHAPTER 7
irLanguage.com
10. A: Have you seen my denim jacket? I __ find it.

B: Look in the hall closet.
a. may not b. won't c. can't
11. A: Bye, Mom. I'm going to go play soccer with my friends.
B: Wait a minute, young man! You __ do your chores first.
a. had better not b. have to c. would rather
12. A: Do you think that Scott will quit his job?
B: I don't know. He He's very angry. We'll just have to wait and see.
a. must b. may c. will
13. A: The hotel provides towels, you know. You __ pack a towel in your suitcase.
B: This is my bathrobe, not a towel.
a. don't have to b. must not c. couldn't
14. A: Did you climb to the top of the Statue of Liberty when you were in New York?
B: No, I didn't. My knee was very sore, and I __ climb all those stairs.
a. might not b. couldn't c. must not
15. A: Rick, __ work for me this evening? I'll take your shift tomorrow.
B: Sure. I was going to ask you to work for me tomorrow anyway.
a. should you b. could you c. do you have to
16. A: What are you children doing? Stop! You __ play with sharp knives.
B: W hy not?
a. must not b. couldn't c. don't have to
17. A: Don't wait for me. I late.
B: Okay.
a. maybe b. can be c. may be
18. A: The Bensons are giving their daughter a new skateboard for her birthday.
B: They __ give her a helmet, too. She does some dangerous things on a skateboard.
a. had better b. can't c. would rather

o Exercise 1. Warm· up. (Chart 8-1 >
Check (./) the sentences that have the correct punctuation.
1. ___ I ate an apple, and an orange.
2. __ I ate an apple and an orange.
3. __ I ate an apple, an orange, and a banana.
4. __ I ate an apple, Nina ate a peach.
5. __ I ate an apple, and Nina ate a peach.
8-1 Connecting Ideas with And

Connecting Items within a Sentence
(a) NO COMMA: I saw a cat and a mouse. When and connects only TWO WORDS (or phrases) within a
(b) COMMAS: I saw a cat, a mouse, and a dog. sentence, NO COMMA is used, as in (a).
When and connects THREE OR MORE items within a
sentence, COMMAS are used, as in (b).*
Connecting Two Sentences

(c) COMMA: I saw a cat, and you saw a mouse. When and connects TWO COMPLETE SENTENCES (also called
"independent'' clauses), a COMMA is usually used, as in (c).
(d) PERIOD: I saw a cat. You saw a mouse. Without and, two complete sentences are separated by a
(e) INCORRECT: I saw a cat, you saw a mouse. period, as in (d), not a comma.**
A complete sentence begins with a capital letter; note that
You is capitalized in (d).
*In a series of three or more items, the comma before and is optional.
ALSO CORRECT: I saw a cat, a mouse and a dog.
**A "period" (the dot used at the end of a sentence) is called a "full stop" in British English.
208
Underline and label the words (noun, verb, adjective) connected by and. Add commas as
necessary.
noun + noun
1. My mom puts milk and sugar in her tea. -+ (no commas needed)
noun+ noun + noun

2. My mom puts milk, sugar, and lemon in her tea. ---+ (commas needed)
3. The river is wide and deep.
4. The river is wide deep and dangerous.
5. The teenage girls at the slumber* party played music ate pizza and told ghost stories.
6. The teenage girls played music and ate pizza.
7. My mom dad sister and grandfather came to the party to see my son and daughter
celebrate their fourth birthday.
8. When he wanted to entertain the children, my husband mooed like a cow roared like a lion
and barked like a dog.
o Exercise 3. Let's talk and write: interview. (Chart 8-1 >

Interview another student in your class. Take notes and then write complete sentences using
and. Share some of the answers with the class.
'What are ...
1. your three favorite sports?
2. three adjectives that describe the weather today?
3. four cities that you would like to visit?
4. two characteristics that describe this city or town?
5. five things you did this morning?
6. three things you are afraid of ?
7. two or more things that make you happy?
8. three or more adjectives that describe the people in your country?
9. the five most important qualities of a good parent?
*slumber= sleep; at a slumber party, friends sleep overnight together.
Connecting Ideas 209

Add commas and periods where appropriate. Capitalize as necessary.
T
1. The rain fell. ,the wind blew.
2. The rain fell, and the wind blew.*
3. I talked he listened.
4. I talked to Ryan about his school grades and he listened to me carefully.
5. The five most common words in English are the and of to and a.
6. The man asked a question the woman answered it.
7. The man asked a question and the woman answered it.
8. Rome is an Italian city it has a mild climate and many interesting attractions.
9. You should visit Rome its climate is mild and there are many interesting attractions.

Complete the sentences with your own ideas. Make true statements.
1. When I'm not sure o{ the meaning of a word in English, I ____ ________
2. Sometimes I don't understand native speakers of English, but I __________
8·2 Connecting Ideas with But and Or

(a) I went to bed but couldn't sleep. A'!d, but, and or are called "coordinating conjunctions."
(b) Is a lemon sweet or sour? Like and, but and or can connect items within a
(c) Did you order coffee, tea, or milk? sentence.
Commas are used with a series of three or more items,
as in (c).
I dropped the vase. = a sentence A comma is usually used when but or or combines two
It didn't break. = a sentence complete (independent) sentences into one sentence,
(d) I dropped the vase, butit didn't break. as in (d) and (e).
(e) Do we have class on Monday, oris Monday a A conjunction can also come at the beginning of a
holiday? sentence, except in formal writing.
ALSO CORRECT: I dropped the vase. But it didn't break.
I saw a cat. And you saw a mouse.
*Sometimes the comma is omitted when and connects two very short independent clauses.
ALSO CORRECT: The rain fell and the wind blew. (NO COMMA)
In longer sentences, the comma is helpful and usual.
210 CHAPTER 8
Complete the sentences with and, but, or or. Add commas as necessary.
I. I washed my shirt, but it didn't get clean.
2. Would you like some water or some fruit juice?
3. I bought some paper, a birthday card, and some envelopes.
4. The flight attendants served dinner ______ I didn't eat it.
5. I was hungry ______ didn't eat on the plane. The food didn't look appetizing.
6. I washed my face, brushed my teeth ______ combed my hair.
7. Golf ______ tennis are popular sports.
8. Sara is a good tennis player ______ she's never played golf.
9. W hich would you prefer? Would you like to play tennis golf Saturday?
I0. Wrw made the call? Did Bob call you did you call Bob?

Add commas, periods, and capital letters as necessary.
Electronic devices* on airplanes
I. Laptops are electronic devices. ,tell phones are electronic devices.

2. Laptops and portable DVD players are electronic devices but flashlights aren't.
3. Passengers can't use these electronic devices during takeoffs and landings they can use
them the rest of the flight.
4. During takeoffs and landings, airlines don't allow passengers to use laptops DVD players
electronic readers or PDAs.**
5. The devices may cause problems with the navigation system and they may cause problems
with the communication system.

Match the sentences in Column A with a logical idea from Column B.
Column A ColumnB
I. I was tired, so I __ .· a. didn't sleep
2. I was tired, but I __ . b. slept
*device = a thing, often electric or electronic, that has a specific purpose
**PDA = personal digital assistant; a small device that has some computer functions

(a) The room was dark, so I turned on a light. So can be used as a conjunction, as in (a). It is
preceded by a comma. It connects the ideas in two
independent clauses.
So expresses results:
cause: The room was dark.
result: I turned on a light.
(b) COMPARE: But often expresses an unexpected result, as in (b).

The room was dark, but I didn't turn on a light.

Complete the sentences with so or but.
1. It began to rain, so I opened my umbrella.
2. It began to rain, but I didn't open my umbrella.
3. I didn't have an umbrella, ______ I got wet.
4. I didn't have an umbrella, ______ I didn't get wet because I was wearing my
raincoat.
5. The water was cold, _____ I went swimming anyway.
6. The water was cold, _____ I didn't go swimming.
7. Scott's directions to his apartment weren't clear, _____ Sonia got lost.
8. The directions weren't clear, ______ I found Scott's apartment anyway.
9. My friend lied to me, _____ I still like and trust her.
10. My friend lied to me, _____ I don't trust her anymore.

Add commas, periods, and capital letters as necessary.
Surprising animal facts:
1. Some tarantulas* can go two and a half years without food. 1hen they eat, they like
grasshoppers beetles small spiders and sometimes small lizards.
2. A female elephant is pregnant for approximately twenty months and almost always has
only one baby a young elephant stays close to its mother for the first ten years of its life.
*iarantula = a big, hairy spider
212 CHAPTER 8
3. Dolphins sleep with one eye open they need to be conscious or awake in order to breathe if
they fall asleep when they are breathing, they will drown so they sleep with half their brain
awake and one eye open.
o Exercise 11. Listening and grammar. (Charts 8-1 - 8-3)

IJ Listen to the passage. Then add commas, periods, and capital letters as necessary. Listen
again as you check your answers. Before you begin, you may want to check your
T�� s understanding of these words: blinker, do a good deed, motioned, wave someone on.
Paying It Forward*
A
(1) � few days ago, a friend and I were driving from Benton Harbor to Chicago.
(2) ,Pe didn't have any delays for the first hour but we ran into some highway construction
(3) near Chicago the traffic wasn't moving my friend and I sat and waited we talked about
(4) our jobs our families and the terrible traffic slowly it started to move
(5) we noticed a black sports car on the shoulder its blinker was on the driver
(6) obviously wanted to get back into traffic car after car passed without letting him in I
(7) decided to do a good deed so I motioned for him to get in line ahead of me he waved
(8) thanks and I waved back at him
(9) all the cars had to stop at a toll booth a short way down the road I held out my
(10) money to pay my toll but the toll-taker just smiled and waved me on she told me that the
(11) man in the black sports car had already paid my toll wasn't that a nice way of saying
(12) thank you?
*paying it forward = doing something nice for someone after someone does something nice for you. For example, imagine you
are at a coffee stand waiting to buy a cup of coffee. The person in front of you is chatting with you and pays for your cup of
coffee. You then buy a cup of coffee for the next person in line. You are paying it forward.
Paying ii forward means the opposite ofpaying it back (repaying a debt or an obligation).

0 Exercise 12. Warm· up. (Chart 8-4)
Complete the sentences. Make true statements.
1. I like fish , but my sister doesn't.
2. I don't like , but does.
3. I've seen , but hasn't.
4. I'm not , but IS.
. .
8·4 Using A�xi�i��y��tjbs after !J�t · . · _· .
(a) I don't like coffee, but my husband does. After but, often only an auxiliary verb is used. It has
(b} I like tea, but my husband doesn't. the same tense or modal as the main verb.
(c) I won't be here tomorrow. but Sue will. In (a): does = likes coffee
(d) I've seen that movie, but Joe hasn't. Notice in the examples:
(e) He isn't here, but she is.* negative + but + affirmative
affirmative + but + negative
*A verb is not contracted with a pronoun at the end of a sentence after but and and:
CORRECT: ' . ' but she is.
INCORRECT: ' . ' bur she's.

Part I. Complete each sentence with the correct negative auxiliary verb.
1. Alan reads a lot of books, but his brother o

d esn't
2. Alan reads a lot of books, but his brothers don't
3. Alan is reading a book, but his brother ________
4. Alan is reading a book, but his brothers _______
5. Alan read a book last week, but his brother(s) _______
6. Alan has read a book recently, but his brother ________
7. Alan has read a book recently, but his brothers _______
8. Alan is going to read a book soon, but his brother ________
9. Alan is going to read a book soon, but his brothers _______
10. Alan will read a book soon, but his brother(s) ________
Part II. Complete each sentence with the correct affirmative auxiliary verb.
1. Nicole doesn't eat red meat, but her sister -�doe� s� ___
2. Nicole doesn't eat red meat, but her sisters do
214 CHAPTER 8
3. Nicole isn't eating red meat, but her sister _______
4. Nicole isn't eating red meat, but her sisters ________
5. Nicole didn't eat red meat last night, but her sister(s) ________
6. Nicole hasn't eaten red meat recently, but her sister ________
7. Nicole hasn't eaten red meat recently, but her sisters ________
8. Nicole isn't going to eat red meat soon, but her sister ------·
9. Nicole isn't going to eat red meat soon, but her sisters _______
10. Nicole won't eat red meat soon, but her sister(s) _______
o Exercise l 4. Let's talk. (Chart 8-4)

Complete the sentences with true statements about your classmates. You may need to
interview them to get more information. Use appropriate auxiliary verbs.
1. Kira has long hair, but Yuki doesn't
2. isn't hungry right now, but
3. lives nearby, but
4. can speak (a language) , but
5. plays a musical instrument, but
6. wasn't here last year, but
7. will be at home tonight, but
8. doesn't wear a ring, but
9. didn't study here last year, but
10. has lived here for a long time, but

IJ
CD2
Complete the sentences with appropriate auxiliary verbs.
A strong storm
Track 19
Example: You will hear: My husband saw a tree fall, but I ...
You will write: didn't
1. 5.
2. 6.
3. 7.
4. 8.

Match each sentence with the correct picture. NOTE: One picture doesn't match any of the
sentences.
Picture A Picture B Picture C
1. __ Alice has a motorcycle, and her husband does too.

2. __ Alice has a motorcycle, and so does her husband.
3. _ _ Alice doesn't have a motorcycle, and her husband doesn't either.
4. __ Alice doesn't have a motorcycle, and neither does her husband.
��- - --� - ..
- ..
:'f �� ,_,,,.�, •••• r,_,.qY �·
8·5 Using And+ Too, So, Either, Neither:_______,. ____::·_ �-�- -'.-. _ -._ -�.},}-
S +AUX+ TOO In affirmative statements, an auxiliary verb + too
(a) Sue works, and Tom does too. or so can be used after and.
SO+ AUX+ S
(b) Sue works, and so does Tom. Word order:
subject + auxiliary + too
so + auxiliary + subject
S + AUX + EITHER An auxiliary verb + either or neither are used

(c) Ann doesn't work, and Joe doesn't either. with negative statements.
Examples (c) and (d) have the same meaning.
NEITHER + AUX + S
Word order:
(d) Ann doesn't work, and neither does Joe.
subject + auxiliary + either
neither + auxiliary + subject
NOTE: An affirmative auxiliary is used with neither.
(e) - I'm hungry. And is not usually used when there are two
- I am too. I So am I. speakers.
( f ) - I don't eat meat.

- I don't either. I Neither do I.
Me too, me either, and me neither are often
(g) - I'm hungry.
used in informal spoken English.
- Me too. (informal)
(h) - I don't eat meat.

- Me (n)either. (informal)
216 CHAPTER 8
Complete the sentences with the given words. Pay special attention to word order.
Omar James Marco
1. a. too Marco has a mustache, and James does too

b. so Marco has a mustache, and
2. a. either Omar doesn't have a mustache, and

b. neither Omar doesn't have a mustache, and
3. a. too Marco is wearing a hat, and

b. so Marco is wearing a hat, and
4. a. either Ivan isn't wearing a hat, and

b. neither Ivan isn't wearing a hat, and

Part I. Complete each sentence with the correct affirmative auxiliary verb.
1. Andy walks to work, and his roommate does too.
2. Andy walks to work, and his roommates _______ too.
3. Andy is walking to work, and his roommate _______ too.
4. Andy is walking to work, and his roommates ________ too.
5. Andy walked to work last week, and his roommate(s) ________ too.
6. Andy has walked to work recently, and so ________ his roommate.
7. Andy has walked to work recently, and so ________ his roommates.
8. Andy is going to walk to work tomorrow, and so ________ his roommate.
9. Andy is going to walk to work tomorrow, and so _______ his roommates.
10. Andy will walk to work tomorrow, and so _______ his roommate(s).
Connecting Ideas 21 7
Part II. Complete each sentence with the correct negative auxiliary verb.
1. Karen doesn't watch TV, and her sister doesn't either.
2. Karen doesn't watch TV, and her sisters ________ either.
3. Karen isn't watching TV, and her sister ________ either.
4. Karen isn't watching TV, and her sisters _______ either
5. Karen didn't watch TV last night, and her sister(s) ________ either.
6. Karen hasn't watched TV recently, and neither ________ her sister.
7. Karen hasn't watched TV recently, and neither ________ her sisters.
8. Karen isn't going to watch TV tomorrow, neither ________ her sister.
9. Karen isn't going to watch TV tomorrow, and neither ________ her sisters.
10. Karen won't watch TV tomorrow, and neither ________ her sister(s).
o Exercise 19. Let's talk and write. (Chart 8-5)

Work in small groups. Complete the sentences with too, so, either, or neither. Make true
statements. You may need to research your answers.
1. Haiti is a small country, and -=C=u��is�
ba �o�-----------------
to
2. Japan produces rice, and -------------------------
3. Turkey has had many strong earthquakes, and ---------------
4. Iceland doesn't grow coffee, and ---------------------
5. Most Canadian children will learn more than one language, and _________
6. Norway joined the United Nations in 1945, and _______________
7. Argentina doesn't lie on the equator, and -,-------------------
8. Somalia lies on the Indian Ocean, and -------------------
9. Monaco has never* hosted the Olympic Games, and --------------
10. South Korea had a Nobel Prize winner in 2000, and _____________
*Never makes a sentence negative: The teacher is never late, and neither am I. OR I'm not either.
218 CHAPTER 8
Work with a parmer. Speaker A says the given sentence. Speaker B agrees with Speaker A's
statement by using so or neither.
Example: I'm confused.
SPEAKER A (book open): I'm confused.
SPEAKER B (book closed): So am I.
1. I studied last night.
2. I study grammar every day.
3. I'd like a cup of coffee.
4. I'm not hungry.
5. I've never seen a vampire.
6. Running is an aerobic activity.
7. Snakes don't have legs.
8. Coffee contains caffeine.
Change roles.
9. I overslept this morning.
10. I don't like mushrooms.
11. Swimming is an Olympic sport.
12. Denmark doesn't have any volcanoes.
13. I've never touched a crocodile.
14. Chickens lay eggs.
15. Elephants can swim.
16. I'd rather go to (name of a place) than (name of a place).
o Exercise 21. Let's listen and talk. (Chart 8-5)

{J
There are responses you can use if you don't agree with someone else's statement.
co 2
Part I. Listen to the examples. As you listen, pay special attention to the sentence stress in
Track 20
items 4-6 when Speaker B is disagreeing.
To get more information:
1. A: I'm going to drop this class.
B: You are? Why? What's the matter?
2. A: My laptop doesn't have enough memory for this application.
B: Really? Are you sure?
3. A: I can read Braille.
B: You can? How did you learn to do that?
To disagree:
4. A: I love this weather.
B: I don't.
5. A: I didn't like the movie.
B: I did!
6. A: I'm excited about graduation.
B: I'm not.

Part II. Work with a parmer. Parmer A will make a statement, and Parmer B will ask for more
information. Take turns saying the sentences.
1. I'm feeling tired.
2. I don't like grammar.
3. I've seen a ghost.
4. I didn't eat breakfast this morning.
5. I haven't slept well all week.
6. I'm going to leave class early.
Part III. Now take turns disagreeing with the given statements.
7. I believe in ghosts.
8. I didn't study hard for the last test.
9. I'm going to exercise for an hour today.
10. I like strawberries.
11. I haven't worked very hard this week.
12. I don't enjoy birthdays.

Make true statements about your classmates using and and but. You may need to interview
them to get more information. Use the appropriate auxiliary verbs.
-'-'='-'=------ "'"""""'
lives in an apartment, and -B or'"'"'is
"--"'-
d= oe=s'-to
=
=o'----------
-=�---- is wearing jeans, but -�

R'=c
· =ar.�d= sn�'t�---------- -
o�i=
_______ is absent today, but -----------------
_______ didn't live here last year, and ___________ either.
_______ can cook, and ------------------ too.
_______ has a baseball cap, and -------------- too.
_______ doesn't have a motorcycle, and ___________ either.
_______ doesn't have a pet, but ________________
_______ will get up early tomorrow, but _____________
_______ has studied English for more than a year, and ______ too.

Circle all the logical completions.
Because Roger felt tired, __ .
a. he took a nap. c. he went to bed early.
b. he didn't take a nap. d. he didn't go to bed early.
220 CHAPTER 8
��;:v ·�:-�·. • ·�:��;:v-�--� ::::- �i":-;•f:,:;�•�:";:;:t�.��?��rt ;::.�,;··�:�::�·�,)·� ... [>-�.-��·;��;• �;;��i .�-:�: •
__
s": ',. ) •• �:/ ,.;
,,_a�.6-·-,._�Connect1ng·IdeaslWtth!,Because:,l'<,·-'
'··-· -.__,_��-��- u,:::::�·:;:, ':?\a;.'- ��- --:· :···,.:,·
·-:�;;,:'··!_:,.:':-.:; , .... __,.._....._....._ .
(a) He drank water because he was thirsty. Because expresses a cause; it gives a reason. Why did he
drink water? Reason: He was thirsty.
(b) MAIN CLAUSE: He drank water. A main clause is a complete sentence:

He drank water = a complete sentence
(c) ADVERB CLAUSE: because he was thirsty An adverb clause is NOT a complete sentence:
because he was thirsty = NOT a complete sentence
Because introduces an adverb clause:
because + subject + verb = an adverb clause
MAIN CLAUSE ADVERB CLAUSE An adverb clause is connected to a main clause, as in

(d) He drank water because he was thirsty. (d) and (e).
(no comma)
In (d): main clause+ no comma+ adverb clause
ADVERB CLAUSE MAIN CLAUSE In (e): adverb clause+ comma+ main clause
(e) Because he was thirsty, he drank water. Examples (d) and (e) have exactly the same meaning.
(comma)
(f) INCORRECT IN WRITING: Example (f) is incorrect in written English: Because he

He drank water. Because he was thirsty. was thirsty cannot stand alone as a sentence that starts
with a capital letter and ends with a period. It has to be
connected to a main clause, as in (d) and (e).
(g) CORRECT IN SPEAKING: In spoken English, an adverb clause can be used as the
- Why did he drink some water? short answer to a question, as in (g).
- Because he was thirsty.

Combine each pair of sentences in two different orders. Use because. Punctuate carefully.
1. We didn't have class. \ The teacher was absent.
---+ We didn't have class because the teacher was absent.
---+ Because the teacher was absent, we didn't have class.
2. The children were hungry. \ There was no food in the house.
3. The bridge is closed. \ We can't get across the river.
4. My car didn't start. \ The battery was dead.
5. Talya and Patti laughed hard. \ The joke was very funny.

Add periods, commas, and capital letters as necessary.
1. Jimmy is very young. )Secause he is afraid of the dark, he likes to have a light on in his
bedroom at night.
2. Mr. El-Sayed had a bad cold because he was not feeling well he stayed home from
the office.

3. Judy went to bed early because she was tired she likes to get at least eight hours of sleep
a night.
4. Frank put his head in his hands he was angry and upset because he had lost a lot of work
on his computer.

Make sentences with the same meaning as the given sentence. Use commas where
appropriate.
Part I. Restate the sentences. Use so.
1. Wendy lost her job because she never showed up for work on time.
- l.%ndy never showed up for work on time, so she lost her job.
2. I opened the window because the room was hot.
3. Because it was raining, I stayed indoors.
Part II. Restate the sentences. Use because.

4. Jason was hungry, so he ate.
- Because Jason was hungry, he ate. OR Jason ate because he was hungry.
5. The water in the river is polluted, so we shouldn't go swimming there.
6. My alarm clock didn't go off,* so I was late for my job interview.

Add commas, periods, and capital letters where appropriate. Don't change any of the words or
the order of the words.
1. Jim was hot. �e sat in the shade.

2. Jim was hot and tired so he sat in the shade.
3. Jim was hot tired and thirsty.
4. Because he was hot Jim sat in the shade.
5. Because they were hot and thirsty Jim and Susan sat in the shade and drank iced-tea.
6. Jim and Susan sat in the shade and drank iced-tea because they were hot and thirsty.
7. Jim sat in the shade drank iced-tea and fanned himself with his cap because he was hot
tired and thirsty.
8. Because Jim was hot he stayed under the shade of the tree but Susan went back to work.
*go off = ring
222 CHAPTER 8
0 Exercise 28. Listening. (Charts 8-1 - 8-6)
0 Listen
Listen to the passage. Then add commas, periods, and capital letters where appropriate.
CD 2
again as you check your answers.
Track 21
Understanding the Scientific Term Matter
The word matter is a chemical term. ¢1atter is anything that has weight this book your
finger water a rock air and the moon are all examples of matter heat and radio waves are not matter
because they do not have weight happiness dreams and fears have no weight and are not matter.

In which sentences is the result (in green) the opposite of what you expect?
1. Even though I didn't eat dinner last night, I wasn't hungry this morning.
2. Because I didn't eat dinner last night, I was hungry this morning.
3. Although I didn't eat dinner last night, I wasn't hungry this morning.
8· 7 �onne.;ting Ideas with Even Though/Although

(a) Even though I was hungry, I did not eat. Even though and although introduce an adverb
I did not eat even though I was hungry. clause.
(b) Although I was hungry, I did not eat. Examples (a) and (b) have the same meaning:
I did not eat although I was hungry. I was hungry, but I did not eat.
COMPARE: Because expresses an expected result, as in (c).

(c) Because I was hungry, I ate. Even though/although expresses an unexpected or
(d} Even though I was hungry, I did not eat. opposite result, as in (d).

Complete the sentences with the given words.
1. is, isn't
a. Because Dan is sick, he _____ going to work.
b. Although Dan is sick, he going to work.
c. Even though Dan is sick, he going to work.
2. went, didn't go
a. Even though it was late, we _____ home.
b. Although it was late, we home.
c. Because it was late, we _____ home.

Complete the sentences with even though or because.
-='-'-'--"==-'-''------- the weather is cold, Rick isn't wearing a coat.
-==-"'-"'-------- the weather is cold, Ben is wearing a coat.
___________ Jane was sad, she smiled.
___________ Jane was sad, she cried.
___________ it was cold outside, we went swimming in the lake.
___________ our friends live on an island, it isn't easy to get there by car.
7. People ask Kelly to sing at weddings ___________ she has a good voice.
8. ___________ I'm training for the Olympics, I biked up the mountain

___________ it was starting to snow.
9. George sings loudly ___________ he can't carry a tune.

1. Even though the test was fairly easy, most of the class __ .
@failed
b. passed
c. did pretty well
2. Jack hadn't heard or read about the bank robbery even though __ .
a. he was the robber
b. it was on the front page of every newspaper
c. he was out of town when it occurred
3. Although __ , she finished the race in first place.
a. Miki was full of energy and strength
b. Miki was leading all the way
c. Miki was far behind in the beginning
224 CHAPTER 8
4. We can see the light from an airplane at night before we can hear the plane because __ .
a. light travels faster than sound
b. airplanes travel at high speeds
c. our eyes work better than our ears at night
5. My partner and I worked all day and late into the evening. Even though __ , we stopped
at our favorite restaurant before we went home.
a. we were very hungry
b. we had finished our report
c. we were very tired
6. In the mountains, melting snow in the spring runs downhill into rivers. The water carries
soil and rocks. In the spring, mountain rivers become muddy rather than clear because
a. mountain tops are covered with snow

b. the water from melting snow brings soil and rocks to the river
c. ice is frozen water
0 Exercise 33. Listening. (Charts 8-6 and 8- 7)

(J
CD2
Track 22
Example: You will hear: Because there was a sale at the mall, ...
You will choose: a. it wasn't busy.
@ there were a lot of shoppers.
c. prices were very high.
1. a. they were under some mail.

b. my roommate helped me look for them.
c. I never found them.
2. a. the rain had stopped.

b. a storm was coming.
c. the weather was nice.
3. a. he was sick.
b. he had graduated already.
c. he was happy for me.
4. a. I mailed it.
b. I decided not to mail it.
c. I sent it to a friend.
5. a. the coaches celebrated afterwards.

b. the fans cheered loudly.
c. the players didn't seem very excited.

o Exercise 34. Let's talk. (Charts 8-6 and 8- 7)
Answer the questions in complete sentences, using either because or even though. Work in
pairs, in small groups, or as a class.
Example: Last night you were tired. Did you go to bed early?
-+ Yes) I went to bed early because I was tired. OR
-+ Yes) because I was tired, I went to bed before nine. OR
-+ No) I didn't go to bed early even though I was really sleepy. OR
-+ No, even though I was really tired) I didn't go to bed until after midnight.
1. Last night you were tired. Did you stay up late?
2. Vegetables are good for you. Do you eat a lot of them?
3. Space exploration is exciting. Would you like to be an astronaut?
4. What are the winters like here? Do you like living here in the winter?
5. (A recent movie) has had good reviews. Do you want to see it?
6. Are you a good artist? Will you draw a picture of me on the board?
7. Where does your family live? Are you going to visit them over the next holiday?
o Exercise 35. Reading and grammar. (Chapter 8)

The Importance of Water
What is the most common substance on earth? It isn't wood, iron, or sand. The most
common substance on earth is water. Every living thing contains water. For example, a
person's body is about 67 percent water, a bird's is about 75 percent water, and most fruit
contains about 90 percent water.
In addition, 70 percent of the earth's surface is water. Besides being in lakes, rivers, and
oceans, water is in the ground and in the air. However, most of the water in the world is
saltwater. Only 3 percent of the earth's water is fresh, and just one percent of that is available
for human use. The rest is saltwater, and people can't drink it or grow food with it.
Water is essential to life, but human beings often poison it with chemicals from industry
and farming. When people pollute water, the quality of all life - plant life, animal life, and
human life - suffers. Life cannot exist without fresh water, so it is essential that people take
care of this important natural resource.
Part II. Complete the sentences with because/although/even though/so.
1. __________ 70 percent of the earth's surface is water and water is in every
living thing, it is the most common substance on earth.
2. 70 percent of the earth's surface is water, only 3 percent is fresh.
3. water is everywhere, not much is available for human use.
4. Chemicals pollute water, it is important to keep them out of the

water supply.
5. __________ water is essential to human life, people need to take care of it.
6. Water is essential to human life, __________ people need to take care of it.
226 CHAPTER 8
Edit the sentences. Correct the errors in sentence structure. Pay special attention to
punctuation.
1. Even though I was sick, ffilt I went to work.
2. Gold silver and copper. They are metals.
3. The children crowded around the teacher. Because he was doing a magic trick.
4. I had a cup of coffee, and so does my friend.
5. My roommate didn't go. Neither I went either.
6. Even I was exhausted, I didn't stop working until after midnight.
7. Although I like chocolate, but I can't eat it because I'm allergic to it.
8. I like to eat raw eggs for breakfast and everybody else in my family too.
9. A hardware store sells tools and nails and plumbing supplies and paint.
10. Most insects have wings, spiders do not.
o Exercise 37. Let's write. (Chapter 8)

Write about an animal that interests you. Follow these steps:
1. Choose an animal you want to know more about.
Hint: If you are doing your research on the Internet, type in "interesting facts
about "
2. Take notes on the information you find. For example, here is some information about
giraffes from an Internet site.
Sample notes:
Giraffes
� have long necks (6 feet or 1.8 meters)
� can reach tops of trees
� need very little sleep (20 minutes to two hours out of 24 hours)
� eat about 140 pounds of food a day
� can go for weeks without drinking water
� get a lot of water from the plants they eat
� can grab and hold onto objects with their tongues
� don't have vocal cords
� can communicate with one another
(but humans can't hear them)

3. Write sentences based on your facts. Combine some of the ideas using and, but, or, so,
because, although, even though.
Sample sentences:
Giraffes
-+ Giraffes have long necks, so they can reach the tops of trees.
-+ Although they eat about 140 pounds of food a day, they can go for
weeks without drinking water.
-+ Even though giraffes don't have vocal cords, they can communicate
with one another.
-+ Giraffes can communicate, but people can't hear their communication.
4. Put your sentences into a paragraph.
Sample paragraph:
Interesting Facts About Giraffes
Giraffes are interesting animals. They have long necks, so they can
reach the tops of trees. They eat flowers, fruit, climbing plants, and the
twigs and leaves from frees. Although they eat about 140 pounds of food
a day, they can go for weeks without drinking water. They get a lot of
water from the plants they eat too. They have very long tongues and
these tongues are useful. Because they are so long, they can grab
objects with them. Even though giraffes don't have vocal cords, they can
communicate, but people can't hear their communication.
C:J�!,,,' C:J&JcJ:.;,.re/"
228 CHAPTER 8
irLanguage.com
Compare the lengths of the lines.
1. Line D is as long as Line __ . Line A
2. Line A isn't as long as Line __ . LineB
3. Line Eis almost as long as Line __ . LineC
LineD ____
LineE
9·1 Making Comparisons with As ... As

(a) Tina is 21 y ears old. Sam is also 21. As ... as is used to say that the two part s of a
Tina is as old as Sam (is). comparison are equal or the same in some way.
In (a): as + adjective + as
(b) Mike came as quickly as he could. In (b): as+ adverb + as
(c) Ted is 20. Tina is 21. Negative form: not as ... as.* Quite and nearly are
Ted is not as old as Tina. often used with the negative.
(d) Ted is not quite as old as Tina. In (d): not quite as ... as = a small difference.
(e) Amy is 5. She is not nearly as old as Tina. In (e): not nearly as ... as= a big difference.
(f) Sam is just as old as Tina. Common modifiers of as ... as are just (meaning
(g) Ted is nearly/almost as old as Tina. "exactly") and nearly/almost.
Tina Sam Ted Amy

21 21 20 5
*Also possible: not so . . . as: Ted is not so old as Tina.
229
Complete the sentences, with just as, almost as/not quite as, or not nearly as.
Part I. Compare the fullness of the glasses.
- �
I\ -
3 4
1. Glass 4 is almost as I not q uite as full as Glass 2.
2. Glass 3 is ____________ full as Glass 2.
3. Glass 1 "is ____________ full as Glass 2.
Part 11. Compare the size of the boxes.
A g c D �
4. Box B is big as Box A.
5. Box Eis big as Box A.
6. Box C is big as Box B.
7. Box Eis big as Box D.

Complete the sentences with as ... as and words from the list. Give your own opinion.
Use negative verbs where appropriate.
a housefly I an ant good health I money

a lake I an ocean honey I sugar
a lemon I a watermelon monkeys /people
a lion I a tiger reading a book I listening to music
a shower I a bath the sun I the moon
230 CHAPTER 9
1. An ant isn't as big as a housefly
2. A lion is as dangerous and wild as a tiger
3. large as
4. sweet as
5. important as
6. quiet as
7. hot as
8. good at climbing trees as
9. relaxing as
o Exercise 4. Listening. (Chart 9- 1 >
{J
CD2
Complete the sentences with the words you hear.
Track 23
Sylvia Brigita Lara Tanya

30 28 50 50
Example: You will hear: Brigita isn't as old as Lara.

You will write: isn't as old as
1. Lara
2. Sylvia
3. Sylvia and Brigita
4. Brigita --------------------------- Sylvia.
5. Brigita --------------------------- Sylvia.
Comparisons 231
o Exercise 5. Game. (Chart 9-1 >
As ... as is used in many traditional phrases. These phrases are generally spoken rather than
written. See how many of them you're familiar with by completing the sentences with the
given words. Work in teams. The team with the most correct answers wins.
.la bear a cat a hornet a mule an ox

a bird a feather a kite a rock the hills
ox mule
1. When will dinner be ready? I'm as hungry as a bear
2. Did Toshi really lift that heavy box all by himself? He must be as strong as
3. It was a lovely summer day. School was out, and there was nothing in particular that I had
to do. I felt as free as _________
4. Marco won't change his mind. He's as stubborn as _________
5. How can anyone expect me to sleep in this bed? It's as hard as _________
6. Of course I've heard that joke before! It's as old as _________
7. Why are you walking back and forth? What's the matter? You're as nervous as
8. Thanks for offering to help, but I can carry the box alone. It looks heavy, but it isn't. It's
as light as _________
9. When Erica received the good news, she felt as high as _________
10. A: Was he angry?

B: You'd better believe it! He was as mad as _________
hornet
232 CHAPTER 9
Compare the people.
David Paolo Matt
1. Paolo loo�s younger than _________

2. Matt looks younger than _________
3. _________ looks the youngest of all.
uWI Y- 1 uL. {!;_?y,

9·2 Comparative and Superlative - .J
(a) "A" is older than "B." The comparative compares this to that or these to those.
(b) "A" and "B" are older than "C" and "O:' Form: -eror more (See Chart 9-3.)
(c) Ed is more generous than his brother. Notice: A comparative is followed by than.
(d) "A," "B;' "C," and "D" are sisters. "A" is the The superlative compares one part of a whole group to
oldest of all four sisters. all the rest of the group.
(e) A woman in Turkey claims to be the oldest Form: -est or most (See Chart 9-3 for forms.)
person in the world. Notice: A superlative begins with the.
( f ) Ed is the most generous person in his family.

Work in teams. Decide if the sentences are true (T) or false (F). The team with the most
correct answers wins.
1. Canada is larger than France. T F
2. Russia and Canada are the largest countries in the world. T F
3. The South Pole is generally colder than the North Pole. T F
4. The Pacific Ocean is the coldest ocean in the world. T F
5. The Mediterranean Sea is the biggest sea of all. T F
6. In general, Libya is hotter than Mexico. T F
7. Africa is larger than Asia. T F
8. Argentina has the highest and lowest points in South America. T F
9. The nearest continent to Antarctica is Australia. T F
10. The longest country in the world is Chile. T F
Comparisons 233
r» Listen to the statements. Do you agree or disagree? Circle yes or no. Before you begin, you
C5.I may want to check your understanding of these words: talkative, cooked, tasty, raw.
CD2
Track 24
I. yes no
2. yes no
3. yes no
4. yes no
5. yes no
6. yes no
7. yes no
8. yes no

Compare the three handwriting samples.
A: 1:ht1 t1llJ/M 4.�, d ti� ·

1
B: //1,°' 1(1d't./ut "?r.u&i ef/?!/ ,U -

C: Vu.�!i�d�!
1. ___(_ is neater than A (or B)
2. __ is messier than
�
.J. __ is more readable than
4. __ is better than
5. __ is the best.
6. __ is the worst.
7. __ wrote more carefully than
234 CHAPTER 9
9.3 Comparative and Superlative Forms of Adjectives
and Adverbs
Comparative Superlative
ONE-SYLLABLE old older the oldest For most one-syllable adjectives,
ADJECTIVES wise wiser the wisest -er and -est are added.
TWO-SYLLABLE famous more famous the most famous For most two-syllable adjectives,
ADJECTIVES pleasant more pleasant the most pleasant more and most are used.
clever cleverer the cleverest Some two-syllable adjectives use

more clever the most clever either -er/-est or more/most: able,
gentle gentler the gentlest angry, clever, common, cruel,
more gentle the most gentle friendly, gentle, handsome, narrow,
friendly friendlier the friendliest pleasant, polite, quiet, simple, sour.
more friendly the most friendly
busy busier the busiest -Er and -est are used with two-
pretty prettier the prettiest syllable adjectives that end in -y.
The -y is changed to -i.
ADJECTIVES WITH important more important the most important More and most are used with long
THREE OR fascinating more fascinating the most fascinating adjectives.
MORE SYLLABLES
IRREGULAR good better the best Good and bad have irregular
ADJECTIVES bad worse the worst comparative and superlative forms.
-LY ADVERBS carefully more carefully the most carefully More and most are used with
slowly more slowly the most slowly adverbs that end in -ly. *
ONE-SYLLABLE fast faster the fastest The -er and -est forms are used
ADVERBS hard harder the hardest with one-syllable adverbs.
IRREGULAR well better the best Both farther and further are used
ADVERBS badly worse the worst to compare physical distances: I
far farther/further the farthest/furthest walked farther than my friend did.
OR I walked further than my friend
did. Further also means
"additional": I need further
information.
NOTE: Farther cannot be used
when the meaning is "additional."
*Exception: early is both an adjective and an adverb. Forms: earlier, earliest.
Comparisons 235
Write the comparative and superlative forms of the following adjectives and adverbs.
IX
irLanguage.com
1. high hi@her, the hi@hest 8. dangerous
2. good 9. slowly
3. lazy 10. common
4. hot* 11. friendly
5. neat* 12. careful
6. late* 13. bad
7. happy 14. far

Complete the sentences with the correct comparative form (morel-er) of the adjectives in
the list.
clean dangerous funny .!sweet

confusing dark pretty wet
1. Oranges are sweeter than lemons.
2. I heard some polite laughter when I told my jokes, but everyone laughed loudly when Janet
told hers. Her jokes are always much __________ than mine.
3. Many more people die in car accidents than in plane accidents. Statistics show that
driving your own car is __________ than flying in an airplane.
4. Professor Sato speaks clearly, but I have trouble understanding Professor Larson's lectures.
Her lectures are much __________ than Professor Sato's.
5. Is there a storm coming? The sky looks __________ than it did an hour ago.
6. That tablecloth has some stains on it. Take this one. It's __________
7. We're having another beautiful sunrise. It looks like an orange fireball. The sky is even
_______ __ than yesterday.
8. If a cat and a duck are out in the rain, the cat will get much __________ than
the duck. The water will just roll off the duck's feathers, but it will soak into the cat's hair.
*Spelling notes:
• When a one-syllable adjective ends in one vowel + a consonant, double the consonant and add -erl-est: sad, sadder,
saddest.
• When an adjective ends in two vowels + a consonant, do NOT double the consonant: cool, cooler, coolest.
• When an adjective ends in -e, do NOT double the consonant: wide, wider, widest.
236 CHAPTER 9
{J
Listen to the sentences and choose the words that- you hear.
co 2
Example: You will hear: I am the shortest person in our family.
Track 25
You will choose: short shorter �
My family
1. young younger youngest
2. tall taller tallest
3. happy happier happiest
4. happy happier happiest
5. old older oldest
6. funny funnier funniest
7. hard harder hardest
8. hard harder hardest

Choose the correct completion(s) for each sentence.
1. Ron and his friend went jogging. Ron ran two miles, but his friend got tired after one
mile. Ron ran than his friend did.
@farther � further
2. If you have any __ questions, don't hesitate to ask.

a. farther b. further
3. I gave my old computer to my younger sister because I had no __ use for it.
4. Paris is __ north than Tokyo.

5. I like my new apartment, but it is __ away from school than my old apartment was.
6. T hank you for your help, but I'll be fine now. I don't want to cause you any __ trouble.
7. Which is __ from here: the subway or the train station?

Comparisons 237
Work with a partner. Make comparison sentences with morel-er and adjectives in the list.
Share some of your answers with the class.
beautiful enjoyable light soft

cheap expensive relaxing stressful
deep fast shallow thick
easy heavy short -thin
1. traveling by air\ traveling by train

---+ Traveling by air is faster than traveling by train.
--+ Traveling by air is more stressful than traveling by train.
Etc.
2. a pool\ a lake
3. an elephant's neck\ a giraffe's neck
4. taking a trip\ staying home
5. iron\ wood
6. going to the doctor\ going to the dentist
7. gold\ silver
8. rubber\ wood
9. an emerald\ a diamond
10. a feather\ a blade of grass
0 Exercise 15. Listening. (Charts 9- 1 - 9-3)

(i
Listen to each sentence and choose the statement (a. or b.) that has a similar meaning.
co 2 Example: You will hear: I need help! Please come as soon as possible.
Track 26 •
You will choose: � Please come quickly.
r;:;\
b. Please come when you have time.
1. a. Business is better this year. 6. a. I'm going to drive faster.

b. Business is worse this year. b. I'm not going to drive faster.
2. a. Steven is a very friendly person. 7. a. Your work was careful.

b. Steven is an unfriendly person. b. Your work was not careful.
3. a. The test was difficult for Sam. 8. a. I am full.

b. The test wasn't so difficult for Sam. b. I would like more to eat.
4. a. We can go farther. 9. a. My drive and my flight take

b. We can't go farther. the same amount of time.
b. My drive takes more time.
5. a. Jon made a very good decision.
b. Jon made a very bad decision.
238 CHAPTER 9
Complete the sentences with the names of people you know. Make true statements.
1. I'm older than is.
2. I live nearer to/farther from school than does.
3. I got to class earlier/later than did.
4. ________ _ 's hair is longer/shorter than mine.
9-4 Completing a Comparative

(a) I'm older than my brother (is). In formal English, a subject pronoun (e.g., he) follows than, as
(b) I'm older than he is. in (b).
(c) I'm older than him. (informal) In everyday, informal spoken English, an object pronoun (e.g.,
him) often follows than, as in (c).
(d) He works harder than I do. Frequently an auxiliary verb follows the subject after than.
(e) I arrived earlier than they did. In (d): than I do= than I work
( f ) Ann's hair is longer than Kate's. A possessive noun (e.g., Kate's) or pronoun (e.g., mine) may
(g) Jack's apartment is smaller than mine. follow than.

Complete the sentences. Use pronouns in the completions.
1. My sister is only six. She's much younger than I am OR (informally) me
2. Peggy is thirteen, and she feels sad. She thinks most of the other girls in school are far
more popular than _______ __
3. The kids can't lift that heav y box, but Mr. El-Sayid can. He's stronger than
4. Jared isn't a very good speller. I can spell much better than _________
5. I was on time. Carlo was late. I got there earlier than _________
6. Mariko is out of shape. I can run a lot faster and farther than _________
7. Isabel's classes are difficult, but my classes are easy. Isabel's classes are more difficult than
_________ . My classes are easier than _________
8. Our neighbor's house is very large. Our house is much smaller than
_________ . Their house is larger than _________
Comparisons 239
0 Exercise 18. Warm· up. (Chart 9-5)
Do you agree or disagree with these statements? Circle yes or no.
1. I enjoy very cold weather. yes no
2. It's cooler today than yesterday. yes no
3. It's much warmer today than yesterday. yes no
4. It's a little hotter today than yesterday. yes no
9.5 Modifying Comparatives

(a) Tom is very old. Very often modifies adjectives, as in (a}, and adverbs, as
(b) Ann drives very carefully. in (b).
(c) INCORRECT: Tom is very older than I am. Very is NOT used to modify comparative adjectives and
INCORRECT: Ann drives very more carefully adverbs.
than she used to.
(d) Tom is much I a lot I far older than I am. Instead, much, a lot, or far are used to modify comparative
(e) Ann drives much I a lot I far more carefully adjectives and adverbs, as in (d) and (e).
than she used to.
( f) Ben is a little (bit) older than I am OR Another common modifier is a little/a little bit, as in (f).
(informally) me.

Add very, much, a lot, or far to the sentences.
1. It's hot today. - It's very hot today.
2. It's hotter today than yesterday. - It's much/a lot/far hotter today than yesterday.
3. An airplane is fast.
4. Taking an airplane is faster than driving.
5. Learning a second language is difficult for many people.
6. Learning a second language is more difficult than learning chemistry formulas.
7. You can live more inexpensively in student housing than in a rented apartment.
8. You can live inexpensively in student housing.

Complete the sentences with your own words.
1. Compare the cost of two cars:
(A/An) _________ is more expensive than (a/an) _________
2. Compare the cost of two kinds of fruit:

_________ are less expensive than _________
3. Compare the cost of two kinds of shoes (boots, sandals, tennis shoes, flip-flops, etc.):
_________ are not as expensive as ________
240 CHAPTER 9
4. Compare the cost of two kinds of heat: (gas, electric, solar, wood, coal, etc.):
_______ heat is not as cheap as ________ heat.
9·6 Comparisons with Less .. . Than and Not As ... As

MORE THAN ONE SYLLABLE: The opposite of -er/more is expressed by less or
(a) A pen is less expensive than a book. not as ... as.
(b) A pen is not as expensive as a book. Examples (a) and (b) have the same meaning.
Less and not as ... as are used with adjectives and adverbs
of more than one syllable.
ONE SYLLABLE: Only not as ... as (NOT less) is used with one-syllable
(c) A pen is not as large as a book. adjectives or adverbs, as in (c).
INCORRECT: A pen is less large than a book.

Circle the correct completion(s ) for each sentence.
1. My nephew is __ old __ my niece.
a. less ...than b. not as ...as
2. My nephew is __ hard-working __ my niece.
3. A bee is __ big __ a bird.
4. My brother is __ interested in computers _ _ I am.
5. Some students are serious about their schoolwork others.
6. I am __ good at repairing things __ Diane is.
o Exercise 22. Game. (Charts 9-1 -+ 9-6)

Work in teams. Compare the given words using (not) as ... as) less) and morel-er. How
many comparison sentences can you think of? The team with the most correct sentences wins.
Example: trees and flowers (big) coloiful) useful) etc.)
---+ Trees are bigger than flowers.
---+ Flowers are usually more coloiful than trees.
---+ Flowers are less useful than trees.
---+ Flowers aren't as tall as trees.
1. the sun and the moon 3. two restaurants in this area

2. teenagers and adults 4. two famous people in the world
Comparisons 241
0
co 2
Listen to each sentence and the statements that follow it. Choose "T" for true or "F" for false.
Example: France\ Brazil
Track 27
You will hear: a. France isn't as large as Brazil.
You will choose: 0 F
You will hear:
You will choose: T ®
b. France is bigger than Brazil.
1. a sidewalk\ a road 4. toes\ fingers

a. T F a. T F
b. T F b. T F
c. T F
2. a hill\ a mountain
a. T F 5. basic math\ algebra
b. T F a. T F
b. T F
3. a mountain path\ a mountain peak c. T F
a. T F d. T F
b. T F
www.irLanguage.com
o Exercise 24. Warm-up: trivia. (Chart 9-7)

Compare Manila, Seattle, and Singapore. Which two cities have more rain in December?*
____________ and have more rain

than in December.
9.7 Using More with �ouns

(a) Would you like some more coffee? In (a): Coffee is a noun. When more is used with
(b ) Not everyone is here. I expect more people to nouns, it often has the meaning of "additional." It is not
come later. necessary to use than.
(c) There are more people in China than there are in More is also used with nouns to make complete
the United States. comparisons by adding than.
(d ) Do you have enough coffee, or would you like When the meaning is clear, the noun may be omitted
some more? and more can be used by itself.
242 CHAPTER 9
Work in teams. Write true sentences using the given information. The team with the most
correct sentences wins.*
1. more kinds of mammals: South Africa \ Kenya
--+ Kenya has more kinds of mammals than South Africa .
. 2. more volcanoes: Indonesia\ Japan
3. more moons: Saturn\ Venus
4. more people: Sao Paulo, Brazil\ New York City
5. more islands: Greece\ Finland
6. more mountains: Switzerland\ Nepal
7. more sugar (per 100 grams): an apple\ a banana
8. more fat (per 100 grams): the dark meat of a chicken\ the white meat of a chicken
o Exercise 26. Looking at grammar. (Charts 9-2, 9-3, and 9-7)

First, underline the words in the list that are nouns. Second, use -er/more and the words in
the list to complete the sentences.
doctors information responsible

happily mistakes responsibly
happiness responsibilities ./traffic
happy
1. A city has �m�or,�e�t�ra=ff�=

1·c____ than a small town.
2. There is available on the Internet today than there was one
year ago.
3. I used to be sad, but now I'm a lot _________ about my life than I
used to be.
4. Unhappy roommates can live together _________ if they learn to respect
each other's differences.
5. Maggie's had a miserable year. I hope she finds _________ in the future.
6. I made _________ on the last test than I did on the first one, so I got a
worse grade.
7. My daughter Layla is trustworthy and mature. She behaves much _________
than my nephew Jakob.
8. A twelve-year-old has _________ at home and in school than an
eight-year-old.
9. My son is _________ about doing his homework than his older sister is.
10. Health care in rural areas is poor. We need __________ to treat people in
rural areas.
Comparisons 243
Do you agree or disagree with these statements? Circle yes or no.
1. The grammar in this book is getting harder and harder. yes no
2. The assignments in this class are getting longer and longer. yes no
3. My English is getting better and better. yes no
. f .
98R
• . ' a comp_arat1ve
epeattng
"_ • -., · .... _- -•
J.
• , -1
•
,,.-...-�.... -� � � . •
•
. .. - - .•• -
. , ".
· • "
- -· _ �"c
.-�• -··
(a) Because he was afraid, he walked faster and Repeating a comparative gives the idea that
faster. something becomes progressively greater, i.e., it
(b) Life in the modern world is getting more and increases in intensity, quality, or quantity.
more complicated

Complete the sentences by repeating a comparative. Use the words in the list.
big /'fast hard loud warm

discouraged good long tired wet
1. When I get excited, my heart beats faster and faster
2. When you blow up a balloon, it gets ____________
3. Brian's health is improving. It's getting ____________

every day.
4. As the ambulance came closer to us, the siren became _____________
5. The line of people waiting to get into the theater got ______________
_______ until it went around the building.
6. Thank goodness winter is over. The weather is getting _____________

_______ with each passing day.
7. I've been looking for a job for a month and still haven't been able to find one. I'm getting
8. The rain started as soon as I left my office. As I walked to the bus sto p,it rained
______________,and I got __ ____________
9. I started to row the boat across the lake, but my arms got ____________
___________ , so I turned back.
244 CHAPTER 9
o Exerc1se 29. Warm-up. {Chart 9-9)
Do you agree or disagree with the following idea? Why?
If you pay more money for something, you will get better quality. In other words,
the more expensive something is, the better the quality will be.
. � � ' !
9·9 Using Double Comparatives· : .
(a) The harder you study, the more you will learn. A double comparative has two parts; both parts begin
(b) The more she studied, the more she learned. with the, as in the examples. The second part of the
(c) The warmer the weather (is), the better I like it. comparison is the result of the first part.
In (a): If you study harder, the result will be that you
will learn more.
(d) -Should we ask Jenny and Jim to the party too? The more, the merrier and the sooner, the better
-Why not? The more, the merrier. are two common expressions.
(e) -When should we leave? In (d): It is good to have more people at the party.
- The sooner, the better. In (e): It is good if we leave as soon as we can.

Part I. Complete the sentences with double comparatives (the morel-er ... the morel-er)
and the words in italics.
1. If the fruit is fresh, it tastes good.
The fresher the fruit (is), the better it tastes.
2. We got close to the fire. We felt warm.

_________ we got to the fire, _________ we felt.
3. If a knife is sharp, it is easy to cut something with.

_________ a knife (is), _________ it is to cut something.
4. The party got noisy next door. I got angry.

_________ it got, _________ I got.
5. If a flamingo eats a lot of shrimp, it becomes very pink.

The _________ a flamingo eats,
the it gets.
Comparisons 245
o Exerc1se 29. Warm-up,. (Chart 9-9)
Do you agree or disagree with the following idea? W hy?
If you pay more money for something, you will get better quality. In other words,
the more expensive something is, the better the quality will be.
9·9 . U�ing Double Comparatives . J

(a) The harder you study, the more you will learn. A double comparative has two parts; both parts begin
(b) The more she studied, the more she learned. with the, as in the examples. The second part of the
(c) The warmer the weather (is), the better I like it. comparison is the result of the first part.
In (a): If you study harder, the result-will be that you
will learn more.
(d) - Should we ask Jenny and Jim to the party too? The more, the merrier and the sooner, the better
-Why not? The more, the merrier. are two common expressions.
(e) -When should we leave? In (d): It is good to have more people at the party.
- The sooner, the better. In (e): It is good if we leave as soon as we can.

Part I. Complete the sentences with double comparatives (the morel-er .. . the morel-er)
and the words in italics.
1. If the fruit is fresh, it tastes good.
The fresher the fruit (is), the better it tastes.
2. We got close to the fire. We felt warm.

_________ we got to the fire, we felt.
3. · If a knife is sharp, it is easy to cut something with.

_________ a knife (is), it is to cut something.
4. The party got noisy next door. I got angry.

_________ it got, I got.
5. If a flamingo eats a lot of shrimp, it becomes very pink.

The a flamingo eats,
the it gets.
wo�-��hmiue1J!'A\/M\
Comparisons 245
2. Mike and Julie were nervous, but Amanda was the most nervous of all.
3. Costa Rica is beautiful. It is one of ____ _____________

countries ___ the world.
4. Scott got a bad score on the test. It was one of ______ _____ scores
____ the class.
5. Neptune isfarfrom the sun. Is it _____________ planet from the

sun ____ our solar system?
6. There are a lot of good cooks in my family, but my mom is _________ cook
____ all.
7. My grandfather is very old. He is _________ person ____ the town

where he lives.
8. That chair in the corner is comfortable. It is ___________ ___

chair ____ the room.
9. Everyone who ran in the race was exhausted, but I was ____________ all.

Complete the sentences with the superlative form of the given phrases.
big bird long river in South America

two great natural dangers popular forms of entertainment
.! deep ocean three common street names
high mountains on earth
1. The Pacific is -""""'th-=e'-'d=e=e"""

,12e=s�t_,o=c=ea=n.,___ in the world.
2. ---------------------- are in the Himalayan Range

in Asia.
3. Most birds are small, but not the flightless North African ostrich. It is
--------------------- in the world.
4. --------------------- to ships are fog and icebergs.
5. One of---------------------- throughout the world

. .
IS moVIeS.
6. --------------------- in the United States are Park,

Washington, and Maple.
7. -------------------- is the Amazon.
Comparisons 247
Complete the sentences with the superlative form of the words in italics.
1. I have had many good experiences. Of those, my vacation to Honduras was one of
___________ _ _ ____________ lhave ever had.
2. Ayako has had many nice times, but her birthday party was one of _________
_____ she has ever had.
3. I've taken many difficult courses, but statistics is one of ___ _ _ _______
_______ I've ever taken.
4. I've made some bad mistakes in my life, but lending money to my cousin was one of
_________________ I've ever made.
5. We've seen many beautifulbuildings in the world, but the Taj Mahal is one of _____
_________________ I've ever seen.
6. The final exam I took was pretty easy. In fact, it was one of ___________
_________ I've ever taken.
o Exercise 35. Let's talk: pairwork. ,(Chart 9-10)

Work with a partner. Take turns asking and answering questions. Use superlatives in your
answers. Pay special attention to the use of plural nouns after one of
Example:
SPEAKER A: You have known many interesting people. Who is one of them?
SPEAKER B: One o/the most interesting people I've ever known is ( __ ). OR
( __ ) is one of the most interesting people I've ever known.
1. There are many beautiful countries in the world. What is one of them?
2. There are many famous people in the world. Who is one of them?
3. You've probably seen many good movies. What is one of them?
4. You've probably done many interesting things in your life. What is one of them?
5. Think of some happy days in your life. What was one of them?
6. There are a lot of interesting animals in the world. What is one of them?
7. You have probably had many good experiences. What is one of them?
8. You probably know several funny people. Who is one of them?
o Exercise 36. Grammar and listening. (Chart 9-10)

Part I. Circle the sentence (a. or b.) that is closest in meaning to the given sentence.
1. I've never been on a bun1pier plane ride.

a. The flight was bumpy. b. The flight wasn't bumpy.
2. I've never tasted hot chili peppers.
a. The peppers are hot. b. I haven't eaten hot chili peppers.
248 Clfl�PiTER '9

3. The house has never looked cleaner.
a. The house looks clean. b. The house doesn't look clean.
4. We've never visited a more beautiful city.
a. The city was beautiful. b. The city wasn't beautiful.
Part II. Listen to the sentences. Circle the sentence (a. or b.) that is closest in meaning to the
one you hear.
CD2
Track 28
5. a. His jokes are funny. b. His jokes aren't funny.
6. a. It tastes great. b. It doesn't taste very good.
7. a. The mattress is hard. b. I haven't slept on hard mattresses.
8. a. The movie was scary. b. I haven't watched scary movies.
o Exercise 37. Lers tal.k: interview� (Chart 9-10)

Make questions with the given words and the superlative form, and then interview your
classmates. Share some of their answers with the class.
1. what\ bad movie\ you have ever seen
-+ What is the worst movie you have ever seen?
2. what\ interesting sport to watch\ on TV
3. what\ crowded city\ you have ever visited
4. where\ good restaurant to eat\ around here
5. what\ fun place to visit\ in this area
6. who\ kind person\ you know
7. what\ important thing\ in life
8. what\ serious problem\ in the world
9. who\ most interesting person\ in the news right now
o Exercise 38.. Gome.. {Charrt5, 9- l -- 9- lOl

Work in teams. Compare each list of items using the words in italics. Write sentences using
as . . . as, the comparative (-er/more), and the superlative (-est/most). The group with the
most correct sentences wins.
Example: streets in this city: wide I narrow I busy I dangerous
-+ First Avenue is wider than Market Street.
-+ Second Avenue is nearly as wide as First Avenue.
- First Avenue is narrower than Interstate Highway 70.
- The busiest street is Main Street.
- Main Street is busier than Market Street.
-+ The most dangerous street in the city is Olive Boulevard.
1. a lemon, a grapefruit, and an orange: sweet I sour I large I small
2. a kitten, a cheetah, and a lion: weak I powerful I wild I gentle I fast
3. boxing, soccer, and golf: dangerous I safe I exciting I boring
4. the food at (three places in this city where you have eaten): delicious I
appetizing I inexpensive I good I bad
Comparisorns, 249
Complete the sentences with any appropriate form of the words in parentheses. Add any other
necessary words. In some cases, more than one completion may be possible.
1. Lead is a very heavy metal. It is (heavy) heavier than gold or silver. It is one of
(heavy) the heaviest metals -�of__ all.
2. Mrs. Cook didn't ask the children to clean up the kitchen. It was (easy)
_______ for her to do it herself _____ to nag them to do it.
3. A car has two (wheels) ________ _ _ _ _

_ a bicycle.
4. Crocodiles and alligators are different. The snout of a crocodile is (long) ______
and (narrow) _______ than an alligator's snout. An alligator has a (w ide)
_______ upper jaw than a crocodile.
5. Although both jobs are important, being a teacher requires (education) _______
_______________ being a bus driver.
6. The Great Wall of China is (long) __________ _ structure that has ever
been built.
7. Hannah Anderson is one of (friendly) ___________ and (delightful)

________ _______ people I've ever met.
8. One of (famous) _______________ volcanoes ____ the

world is Mount Etna in Sicily.
9. It's possible that the volcanic explosion of Krakatoa near Java in 1883 was (loud )
noise ____ recorded history. People heard it 2,760
miles/4,441 kilometers away.
250 CHAPTER 9
10. (hard) _________ I tried, (impossi ble) ------------
the math problem seemed.
11. World Cup Soccer is (big) _________ sporting event ____ the world.
It is viewed on TV by ( people) ____________ any other event in sports.
12. When the temperature stays below freezing for a long period of time, the Eiffel Tower
becomes six inches or fifteen centimeters (short) _________
13. Young people have (high) _________ rate of automobile accidents

____ all drivers.
14. You'd better buy the tickets for the show soon. (long) _____________
you wait, (difficult) --------------- it will be for you to get
good seats.
15. No animals can travel (fast) ___________ birds. Birds are (fast)
___________ animals -of all.
16. (great) ___________ variety of birds ____ a single area can be

found in the rainforests of Southeast Asia and India.
o Exercise 40. Warm- up. (Chart 9-11 >

Solve the math problems* and then complete the sentences.
PROBLEM A: 2+2=
PROBLEM B: V900 + 20 =
PROBLEM C: 3 X 127 =
PROBLEM D: 2+3=
PROBLEM E: 127 X 3=
1. Problem and Problem have the same answers.

2. Problem and Problem have similar answers
3. Problem and Problem have different answers.
4. The answer to Problem is the same as the answer to Problem
5. The answers to Problem and Problem are similar.
6. The answers to Problem Problem are different.
7. Problem has the same answer as Problem
8. Problem is like Problem
9. Problem and Problem are alike.
*See Trivia Answers, p. 421, for answers to the math problems.
Comparisons 251
9·11 Using The Same! Siniilar, Different, Like,Alike
(a) John and Mary have the same books. The same, similar, and different are used as adjectives.
(b) John and Mary have similar books. Notice: the always precedes same.
(c) John and Mary have different books.
(d) Their books are the same.
(e) Their books are similar.
(f ) Their books are different.
(g) This book is the same as that one. Notice: the same is followed by as;
(h) This book is similar to that one. similar is followed by to;
( i ) This book is different from that one. different is followed by from.*
( j ) She is the same age as my mother. A noun may come between the same and as, as in U).
My shoes are the same size as yours.
(k) My pen is like your pen. Notice in (k) and (1):

(I ) My pen and your pen are alike. noun + be like + noun
noun and noun + be alike
(m) She looks like her sister. In addition to following be, like also follows certain verbs, primarily
It looks like rain. those dealing with the senses.
It sounds like thunder. Notice the examples in (m).
This material feels like silk.
That smells like gas.
This chemical tastes like salt.
Stop acting like a fool.
He seems like a nice guy.
(n) The twins look alike. Alike may follow a few verbs other than be.
We think alike. Notice the examples in (n).
Most four-year-olds act alike.
My sister and I talk alike.
The little boys are dressed alike.
*In informal speech, native speakers might use than instead of.from after different. From is considered correct in formal English,
unless the comparison is completed by a clause: I have a different attitude now than I used to have.

Complete the sentences with as, to, from, or 0.
1. Geese are similar to ducks. They are both large water birds.
2. But geese are not the same ______ ducks. Geese are usually larger and have
longer necks.
3. Geese are different ______ ducks.
4. Geese are like ______ ducks in some ways, but geese and ducks are not exactly
alike
5. An orange is similar ______ a peach. They are both round, sweet, and juicy.
252 CHAPTER 9
ffi
1r Langu-age.com
6. However, an orange is not the same a peach.
7. An orange is different a peach.
8. An orange is like ______ a peach in some ways, but they are not exactly alike
0 Exercise 42. Listening. (Charts 9-3 and 9- 11)
(J
Listen to each passage. Complete th� sentences with the words you hear.
Gold vs. Silver

CD2
Track 29
Gold is similar ______ silver. They are both valuable metals that people use for
jewelry, but they aren't ______ same. Gold is not ______ same color
2 3
______ silver. Gold is also different ______ silver in cost: gold is
5
______ expensive ______ silver.
7
Two Zebras
Look at the two zebras in the picture. Their names are Zee and Be-e. Zee looks
______ Bee. Is Zee exactly ______ same ______ Bee? The pattern of
8 9 10
the stripes on each zebra in the world is unique. No two zebras are exactly ______
11
Even though Zee and Bee are similar ______ each other, they are different
12
______ each other in the exact pattern of their stripes.
13
Comparisons 253
o Exercise 43. Looking at grammar. (Chart 9- 11>
Compare the figures. Complete the sentences with the same (as), similar (to), different
(JromJ t)ike, or alike.
www.trLanguage.com
A B
I I
E2J
D
1. All of the figures are similar to each other.
2. Figure A is Figure B.
3. Figure A and Figure B are
4. A and C are
5. A and C are D.
6. C is A.
7. B isn't D.

Complete the sentences with the same (as), similar (to), different (from), like, or alike.
In some cases, more than one completion may be possible.
1. Jennifer and Jack both come from Rapid City. In other words, they come from
the same town.
2. This city is the same as I similar to I like my hometown. Both are quiet and
conservative.
3. You and I don't agree. Your ideas are ___________ mme.
4. Sergio never wears _________ clothes two days in a row.
5. A male mosquito is not _________ size _______ a female

mosquito. The female is larger.
254 CHAPTER 9
6. I'm used to stronger coffee. I think the coffee at this cafe tastes _______
dishwater!
7. Meet and meat are homonyms; in other words, they have _________
pronunciation.
8. Flower has _________ pronunciation _______ flour.
9. My twin sisters act _________ , but they don't look _________
10. Trying to get through school without studying is ___________ trying to

go swimming without getting wet.
o Exercise 45. Reading. (Chapter 9)

Part I. Read the passage and the statements that follow it. NOTE: He and she are used
interchangeably.
Birth Order
In your family, are you the oldest, youngest, middle, or only child? Some psychologists
believe your place in the family, or your birth order, has a strong influence on your personality.
Let's look at some of the personality characteristics of each child.
The oldest child has all the parents' attention when she is born. As she grows up, she may
want to be the center of attention. Because she is around adults, she might act more like an
adult around other children and be somewhat controlling. As the oldest, she might have to take
care of the younger children, so she may be more responsible. She may want to be the leader
when she is in groups.
The middle child (or children) may feel a little lost. Middle children have to share their
parents' attention. They may try to be different from the oldest child. If the oldest child is
"good," the second child may be "bad." However, since they need to get along with both the
older and younger sibling(s), they may be the peacekeepers of the family.
The youngest child is the "baby" of the family. Other family members may see him as
weaker, smaller, or more helpless. If the parents know this is their last child, they may not want
the child to grow up as quickly as the other children. As a way to get attention, the youngest
child may be the funniest child in the family. He may also have more freedom and turn out to
be more artistic and creative.
An only child (no brothers or sisters) often grows up in an adult world. Such children
may use adult language and prefer adult company. Only children may be more intelligent and
serious than other children their age. They might also be more self-centered because of all the
attention they get, and they might have trouble sharing with others.
Of course, these are general statements. A lot depends on how the parents raise the child,
how many years are between each child, and the culture the child grows up in. How about you?
Do you see any similarities to your family?
Comparisons 255
Part II. Read the statements. Circle "T" for true and "F" for false according to the
information in the passage.
1. The two most similar children are the oldest and only child. T F
2. The middle child often wants to be like the oldest child. T F
3. The youngest child likes to control others. T F
4. Only children may want to spend time with adults. T F
5. All cultures share the same birth order characteristics. T F
o Exercise 46. Writing. (Chapter 9)

Part I. The word list contains personality characteristics. Do you know all these words?
artistic
competitive
controlling immature
cooperative loud,
creative mature
flexible outgoing
Part II. Compare yourself to other members of your family. Write sentences using the
structures below:
Structures:
1. not as ...as
2. more ...than
3. -er ...than
4. the most ...
Part III. Write a paragraph comparing your personality to that of another member of your
family. Follow these steps:
1. Write an introductory sentence: I am different from I similar to my ...
2. Choose at least four characteristics from the list. For each one, make some type of
comparison.
3. Write a few details that explain each comparison.
4. Write one or two concluding sentences.
Sample paragraph:
My Father and I
I am different from my father in several ways. He is more hard-working
than I am. He is a construction worker and has to get up at 6:00 A.M. He often
doesn't get home until late in the evening. I'm a student, and I don't work as
hard. Another difference is that I am funnier than he is. I like to tell jokes and
make people laugh. He is serious, but he laughs at my jokes. My father was
an athlete when he was my age, and he is very competitive. I don't like playing
competitive sports, but we watch them together on TV. My father and I are
different, but we like to spend time with each other. Our differences make our
time together interesting.
256 CHAPTER 9
Edit the sentences. Correct the errors in comparison structures.
the
1. Did you notice? My shoes and your shoes arej same.
2. Alaska is largest state in the United States.
3. A pillow is soft, more than a rock.
4. Who is most generous person in your family?
5. The harder you work, you will be more successful.
6. One of a biggest disappointment in my life was when my soccer team lost the
championship.
7. My sister is very taller than me.
8. A firm mattress is so comfortable for many people than a soft mattress.
9. One of the most talkative student in the class is Frederick.
10. Professor Bennett's lectures were the confusing I have ever heard.
Comparisons 257
Choose the sentence in each item that describes the picture above it. More than one answer may be
correct.
1. a. The worm is watching the 2. a. The bird caught the 3. a. The bird ate the worm.
bird. worm. b. The worm was eaten.
b. The bird is watching the b. The worm was caught
worm. by the bird.
,. ..
10· 1 Active SentenceJI and Passive S�ntences , �, � �
Active Examples (a) and (b) have the same meaning.
(a) The mouse ate the cheese.
Passive
(b) The cheese was eaten by the mouse.
Active Passive
Active In (c): The object in an active sentence becomes the

S O subject in a passive sentence.
r-,
(c) Bob mailed the package.
Passiv�
S by+ 0 In (d): The subject in an active sentence is the object
(d) 'The package' was mailed 'by Bob.' of by in a passive sentence.
258
. .
10·2 Form.of the Passive
be + past participle Form of all passive verbs:
be + past participle
(a) Corn is grown by farmers.
(b ) Sara was surprised by the news. Be can be in any of its forms: am, is, are, was, were,
(c) The report will be :written by Mary. has been, have been, will be, etc.
Active Passive
SIMPLE PRESENT Farmers grow corn. Corn is grown by farmers.
SIMPLE PAST The news surprised Sara. Sara was surprised by the news.
PRESENT PROGRESSIVE Diana is copying the letters. The letters are being copied by Diana.
PAST PROGRESSIVE Diana was copying the letters. � The letters were being copied by Diana.
PRESENT PERFECT Jack has mailed the letter. The letter has been mailed by Jack.
FUTURE Mr. Lee will plan the meeting. -----+ The meeting will be planned by Mr. Lee.
Sue is going to write the report . � The report is going to be written by Sue.

Change the active verbs to passive by adding the correct form of be. Include the subject of the
passive sentence.
1. SIMPLE PRESENT
a. The teacher helps me. am helped by the teacher.
b. The teacher helps Eva. Eva is helped by the teacher.
c. The teacher helps us. ______ helped by the teacher.
2. SIMPLE PAST
a. The teacher helped him. ______ helped by the teacher.

b. The teacher helped them. ______ helped by the teacher.
3. PRESENT PROGRESSIVE
a. The teacher is helping us. ______ helped by the teacher.

b. The teacher is helping her. ______ helped by the teacher.
4. PAST PROGRESSIVE
a. The teacher was helping me. ______ helped by the teacher.

b. The teacher was helping him. ______ helped by the teacher.
5. PRESENT PERFECT
a. The teacher has helped Yoko. ______ helped by the teacher.

b. The teacher has helped Joe. ______ helped by the teacher.
The Passive 259

6. FUTURE
a. The teacher will help me. ______ helped by the teacher.

b. The teacher is going to help us. ______ helped by the teacher.
0 Exercise 3. Listening. (Charts 10-1 and l 0-2)

(J
Listen to the sentences and write the words and endings you hear. Listen to the sentences
again as you check your answers.
CD2
Track 30
An office building at night
1. The janitors clean the building at night.
The building is clean tzL_ by the janitors at night.
2. Window washers wash the windows.

The windows ____ wash __ by window washers.
3. A window washer is washing a window right now.

A window _______ wash __ by a window washer right now.
4. The security guard has checked the offices.

The offices _______ check __ by the security guard.
5. The security guard discovered an open window.

An open window ____ discover __ by the security guard.
6. The security guard found an unlocked door.

An unlocked door ______ found by the security guard.
7. The owner will visit the building tomorrow.

The building _______ visit __ by the owner tomorrow.
8. The owner is going to announce new parking fees.

New parking fees _________ announce __ by the owner.
260 CHAPTER 10
Check (./) the sentences that are passive.
At the dentist
1. __ The dental assistant cleaned your teeth.
2. __ Your teeth were cleaned by the dental assistant.
3. __ The dentist is checking your teeth.
4. __ Your teeth are being checked by the dentist.
5. __ You have a cavity.
6. __ You are going to need a filling.
7. __ The filling will be done by the dentist.
8. __ You will need to schedule another appointment.

Change the verbs from active to passive. Do not change the tenses.
1. Leo mailed the The package was mailed by Leo.

package.
2. That company Many people by that company.

employs many
people.
3. That company Ellen by that company.

has hired Ellen.
4. The secretary The letters by the secretary.

is going to fax
the letter.
5. A college My old car by a college student.

student bought
my old car.
6. Mrs.Adams The work by Mrs.Adams.

will do the work.
7. The doctor was The patient by the doctor.

examining the
patient.
The Passive 261

D Exercise 6. Looking at grammar. (Charts 10-1 and 10-2)
Change the sentences from active to passive.
Active Passive
1. a. The news surprised Carlo. Carlo was surprised by the news.
b. Did the news surprise you? Were ;x_ou sur12.rised
, by the news?
2. a. The news surprises Erin. by the news.

b. Does the news surprise you? by the news?
3. a. The news will shock Greta. by the news.

b. Will the news shock Pat? by the news?
4. a. Liz is signing the birthday card. by Liz.

b. Is Ricardo signing it? by Ricardo?
5. a. Jill signed the card. by Jill.

b. Did Ryan sign it? by Ryan?
6. a. Sarni was signing it. by Sarni.

b. Was Vicki signing it? by Vicki?
7. a. Rob has signed it. by Rob.

b. Has Kazu signed it yet? by Kazu yet?
8. a. Luis is going to sign it. by Luis.

b. Is Carole going to sign it? by Carole?

Change these hotel questions from active to passive.
1. Has the maid cleaned our room yet?
---+ Has our room been cleaned by the maid yet?
2. Does the hotel provide hair dryers?
3. Did housekeeping bring extra towels?
4. Has room service brought our meal?
5. Is the bellhop* bringing our luggage to our room?
6. Is maintenance going to fix the air-conditioning?
7. Will the front desk upgrade** our room?
*bellhop = a person who carries luggage for hotel guests

**upgrade = make better; in this case, provide a better room than the original one. Upgrade is a regular verb.
262 CHAPTER 10
o Exercise 8. Warm· up. (Chart 1 o -3)
Check (.I) the sentences that have objects. Underline the objects.
1. The tree fell over.
2. The tree hit the truck.
3. The tree fell on the truck.
4. __ Fortunately, the driver didn't die.
5. The tree didn't kill the driver.
.. - .i.: ·
�· ' ;:-,-'I • � ,,,..,.,,,..•{<l ' -< �'" • -· ,
•• ..,. � '-'�"':. ,,_ ;
10-3 Transitive and Intransitive Verbs. ·..

� � -- -- -- - ,... -- - - - - -
. · ·__ :·
-- - _._. ••• --
.,
·- -- -� �' .... ' -< --J;�
Transitive A TRANSITIVE verb is a verb that is followed by an

s v 0 object. An object is a noun or a pronoun.
(a) Bob mailed the letter.
(b) Mr. Lee signed the check.
(c) A cat killed the bird.
Intransitive An INTRANSITIVE verb is a verb that is NOT followed by an

s v object.
(d) Something happened.
(e) Kate came to our house.
( f) The bird died.
Common Intransitive Verbs*

agree die happen rise stand
appear exist laugh seem stay
arrive fall live sit talk
become flow occur sleep wait
come go rain sneeze walk
Transitive Verbs Only transitive verbs can be used in the passive.

(g) ACTIVE: Bob mailed the letter.
(h) PASSIVE: The letter was mailed by Bob.
Intransitive Verbs An intransitive verb is NOT used in the passive.

( i) ACTIVE: Something happened.
(j) PASSIVE: (not possible)
(k) INCORRECT: Something was happened.
*To find out if a verb is transitive or intransitive, look in your dictionary. The usual abbreviations are v.t. (transitive) and v.i.
(intransitive). Some verbs have both transitive and intransitive uses. For example:
transitive: Students study books.
intransitive: Siudems study.
The Passive 263

Underline the verbs and identify them as transitive (v.t.) or intransitive (v.i.). If possible,
change the sentences to the passive.
v.i.
1. Omar walked to school yesterday. (no change)
v.t.
2. Alexa broke the window. ---+ The window was broken by Alexa.
3. T he leaves fell to the ground.
4. I slept at my friend's house last night.
5. Many people felt an earthquake yesterday.
6. Dinosaurs existed millions of years ago.
7. I usually agree with my sister.
8. Many people die during a war.
9. Scientists will discover a cure for cancer someday.
10. Did the Italians invent spaghetti?
o Exercise 10. Game: trivia. (Charts 10-1 -----. 10-3)

Work in teams. Make true statements by matching the information in Column A with the
information in Column B. Some sentences are active and some are passive. Add was/were as
necessary. The team with the most answers wins.* A sentence is correct when both the facts
and the grammar are correct.
Example: 1. Alexander Eiffel designed the Eiffel Tower.
2. Anwar Sadat was shot in 1981.
Column A ColumnB
1. Alexander Eiffel _h_ a. killed in a car crash in 1997.
2. Anwar Sadat _c_ b. died in 2009.
3. Princess Diana ./c. shot in 1981.
4. Marie and Pierre Curie __ d. painted the Mona Lisa.
5. Oil_ e. elected president of the United States in 1960.
6. Mahatma Gandhi and Martin f. discovered in Saudi Arabia in 1938.
Luther King Jr. __ g. arrested** several times for peaceful protests.
7. Michael Jackson __ ./h. designed the Eiffel Tower.
8. Leonardo da Vinci __ 1. released from prison in 1990.
9. John F. Kennedy __ J. discovered radium.
10. Nelson Mandela
**arrested = taken to jail
264 CHAPTER l O
Complete the sentences with information from the front of this book.
1. This book, Fundamentals of English Grammar, was published by _________
2. It was written by _ _____ ______ and ____________
3. The illustrations were drawn by _________ and _________
�- - ... - ;---' ;, ' -�-· .. . - -·
10·� Us�g the by-rhrase ·--�. · :·· ___:·-·-�-·�-··· _____ ··. . .... __
;
__ ___ _ _
(a) This sweater was made by my aunt. The by-phrase is used in passive sentences when it is
important to know who performs an action.
In (a): by my aunt is important information.
(b) My sweater was made in Korea. Usually there is no by-phrase in a passive sentence.
(c) Spanish is spoken in Colombia. The passive is used when it is not known or not
(d) That house was built in 1940. important to know exactly who performs an action.
(e) Rice is grown in many countries. In (b): The exact person (or people) who made the
sweater is not known and is not important to know, so
there is no by-phrase in the passive sentence.
( f ) My aunt is very skillful. She made this sweater. Usually the active is used when the speaker knows
(g) A: I like your sweaters. who performed the action, as in (f), where the focus of
8: Thanks. This sweater was made by my aunt. attention is on my aunt.
That sweater was made by my mother. In (g): Speaker 8 uses the passive WITH a by-phrase
because he wants to focus attention on the subjects of
the sentences. The focus of attention is on the two
sweaters. The by-phrases add important information.

Change the sentences from active to passive. Include the by-phrase only as necessary.
1. Bob Smith built that house.

--+ That house was built by Bob Smith.
2. Someone built this house in 1904.
3. People grow rice in India.
4. Do people speak Spanish in Peru?
5. Alexander Graham Bell invented the telephone.
6. When did someone invent the first computer?
7. People sell hammers at a hardware store.
The Passive 265

8. Has anyone ever hypnotized you?
9. Someone published The Origin of Species in 1859.
10. Charles Darwin wrote The Origin of Species.

Underline the passive verbs in each pair of sentences and then answer the questions.
1. a. The mail is usually delivered to Hamid's apartment around ten o'clock.
b. The mail carrier usually delivers the mail to Hamid's apartment around ten o'clock.
QUESTIONS: Is it important to know who delivers the mail? -+ No.
Which sentence do you think is more common? - Sentence a.
2. a. Construction workers built our school in the 1980s.

b. Our school was built in the 1980s.
QUESTIONS: Is it important to know who built the school?
Which sentence do you think is more common?
3. a. That office building was designed in 1990.

b. That office building was designed by an architect in 1990.
c. That office building was designed by my husband in 1990.
QUESTIONS: What additional information do the by-phrases provide?
Which sentence has important information in the by-phrase?
4. a. Thailand means "land of the free."

b. The country of Thailand has never been ruled by a foreign power.
QUESTION: What happens to the meaning of the second sentence if there is no
by-phrase?

Make sentences with the given words, either orally or in writing. Some sentences are active
and some are passive. Use the past tense. Do not change the order of the words.
A traffic stop
1. The police \ stop\ a speeding car
- The police stopped a speeding car.
2. The driver\ tell\ to get out of the car\ by the police
3. The driver\ take out\ his license
4. The driver\ give\ his license\ to the police officer
5. The license\ check
6. The driver\ give\ a ticket
7. The driver\ tell\ to drive more carefully
266 CHAPTER 10
(J
Complete the sentences with the words you hear. Before you begin, you may want to check
your understanding of these words: treated, bruises, reckless.
CDZ
Track 31
A bike accident
A: Did you hear about the accident outside the dorm entrance?
B: No. What
A: A guy on a bike _________ by a taxi.
B: he _______ ?
4
A: Yeah. Someone _______ an ambulance. He _________ to
City Hospital and _________ in the emergency room for cuts and
bruises.
B: What to the taxi driver?
A: He ___________ for reckless driving.
B: He's lucky that the bicyclist

10

Complete the sentences with the correct form (active or passive) of the verb in parentheses.
1. Yesterday our teacher (arrive) �a=r�r�ive=d�--- five minutes late.
2. Last night my favorite TV program (interrupt) _____________

by breaking news.
3. That's not my coat. It (belong) _______ to Lara.
4. Our mail (deliver) _________ before noon every day.
5. The "b" in comb ( pronounce, not) _______________ . It is silent.
6. What (happen) _________ to John? Where is he?
7. When I (arrive) _________ at the airport yesterday, I (meet)

_______ by my cousin and a couple of her friends.
8. Yesterday Lee and I (hear) _______ about Scott's divorce. I (surprise, not)
______________ by the news, but Lee (shock)
9. A new house (build ) _____________ next to ours next year.
10. Roberto (write) _______ that composition last week. This one (write)
_________ yesterday.
The Passive 267

11. At the soccer game yesterday, the winning goal (kick) ___________ by
Luigi. Over 100,000 people (attend ) _______ the soccer game.
12. A: I think American football is too violent.
B: I (agree) _______ with you. I (prefer) _______ baseball.
13. A: When (your bike, steal ) _______________ ?
B: Two days ago.
14. A: (you,pay) __________ your electric bill yet?
B: No, I haven't, but I'd better pay it today. If I don't, my electricity (shut off)
_____________ by the power company.
o Exercise 17. Listening. (Charts 10-1 ___.. 10-4)

r»
Listen to the passage with your book closed. Listen again and complete the sentences with the
� verbs you hear. Before you begin, you may want to check your understanding of these words:
T�� 2 ancient, ath lete, designed, wealthy.
Swimming Pools
Swimming pools are very popular nowadays, but can you guess when swimming
pools ______ first ______ ? ______ it 100 years ago? Five hundred
2 3 4
years ago? A thousand years ago? Actually, ancient Romans and Greeks ________
the first swimming pools. Male athletes and soldiers ________ in them for training.
Believe it or not, as early as 1 B.C., a heated swimming pool ___________ for
a wealthy Roman. But swimming pools _____________ popular until the
middle of the 1800s. The city of London _______ six indoor swimming pools.
Soon after, the modern Olympic games ________ , and swimming races ____
10 11
included in the events. After this, swimming pools ________ even more popular,
12
and now they __________ all over the world.
13
268 CHAPTER 10
Read the paragraph and then the statements. Circle "T" for true and "F" for false.
Getting a Passport
Jerry is applying for a passport. He needs to bring proof of citizenship, two photographs,
and the application to the passport office. He also needs money for the fee. He will receive his
passport in the mail about three weeks after he applies for it.
1. The application process can be completed by mail. T F
2. Proof of citizenship must be provided. T F
3. A fee has to be paid. T F
4. Photographs should be taken before Jerry goes to the passport office. T F
5. The passport will be sent by mail. T F
:10,..s :ra;�i�:ModatAil,ini�;.1��: ·-.--:_-- ·. -·:-_:· \� . :_·__.. ·-:.·.·:.\ _ --:

·- �
.. - - - ·---��·�_.,j' ...__� --· ·,.,-�
......... -�}._�------w�- ------· �--- ......._____ .......
.. _ _�_2,
..__ � < -·'-- -�--M�•
•••••
Active Modal Passive Modal Auxiliaries Modal auxiliaries are often used in the
Auxiliaries (modal+ be + past participle) passive.
Bob will mail it. It will be mailed by Bob. FORM:
Bob can mail it. It can be mailed by Bob. modal + be + past participle
Bob should mail it. It should be mailed by Bob. (See Chapter 7 for information about the
Bob ought to mail it. It ought to be mailed by Bob. meanings and uses of modal auxiliaries.)
Bob must mail it. It must be mailed by Bob.
Bob has to mail it. It has to be mailed by Bob.
Bob may mail it. It may be mailed by Bob.
Bob might mail it. It might be mailed by Bob.
Bob could mail it. It could be mailed by Bob.

Complete the sentences by changing the active modals to passive.
1. Someone must send this letter immediately.
This letter must be sent immediately.
2. People should plant tomatoes in the spring.

Tomatoes --------------- in the spring.
3. People cannot control the weather.

The weather-------------------
4. Someone had to fix our car before we left for Chicago.

Our car before we left for Chicago.
5. People can reach me on my cell at 555-3815.

I on my cell at 555-3815.
The Passive 269

6. Someone ought to wash these dirty dishes soon.
These dirty dishes ------------------ soon.
7. People may cook carrots or eat them raw.

Carrots ____________ or ____________ raw.
8. Be careful! If that email file has a virus, it could destroy your reports.
Your reports if that email file has a virus.
9. You must keep medicine out of the reach of children.

Medicine out of the reach of children.
o Exercise 20. Reading. (Charts 10-1 - 10-5)

Part I. Read the questions and then the passage about jeans.
Are you wearing jeans right now, or do you have a pair at home?
If so, who were they made by?
The Origin ofJeans

Around the world, a very popular pant for men, women, and children is jeans. Did you
know that jeans were created more than 100 years ago? They were invented by Levi Strauss
during the California Gold Rush.
In 1853, Levi Strauss, a 24-year-old immigrant from Germany, traveled from New York to
San Francisco. His brother was the owner of a store in New York and wanted to open another
one in San Francisco. When Strauss arrived, a gold miner* asked him what he had to sell. Levi
said he had strong canvas for tents and wagon covers. The miner told him he really needed
strong pants because he couldn't find any that lasted very long.
So Levi Strauss took the canvas and designed a pair of overall pants. The miners liked
them except that they were rough on the skin. Strauss exchanged the canvas for a cotton cloth
from France called serge de Nimes. Later, the fabric was called "denim" and the pants were
given the nickname "blue jeans."
Eventually, Levi Strauss & Company was formed. Strauss and tailor David Jacobs began
putting rivets** in pants to make them stronger. In 1936, a red tab was added to the rear
pocket. This was done so "Levis" could be more easily identified. Nowadays the company is
very well known, and for many people, all jeans are known as Levis.
Part II. Answer the questions in complete sentences.
1. Who was Levi Strauss?
2. Why did Strauss go to California?
3. Who were jeans first created for?
4. What is denim?
5. What two changes were later made to jeans?
6. Why were rivets put in jeans?
7. Why was a red tab added to the rear pocket?
8. Many people have a different name for blue jeans. What is it?
*gold miner = a person who digs for gold

**rivet = a very strong pin to hold the seams of clothing together
270 CHAPTER 10
o Exercise 21. Warm-up: trivia. (Chart 10-6)
Do you know this trivia?* Complete the sentences with words from the list.
China monkeys sand spiders

Mongolia Nepal small spaces whales
1. Glass is composed mainly of _________

2. Dolphins are related to _________
3. The Gobi Desert is located in two countries:
4. People with claustrophobia are frightened by _________
- -.
10·6 Using Past Participles as Adjectives (Non-Progressive Pa�sive)
be + adjective Be can be followed by an adjective, as in (a)-(c). The
(a) Paul is young. adjective describes or gives information about the
(b) Paul is tall. subject of the sentence.
(c) Paul is hungry. Be can be followed by a past participle (the passive
form), as in (d)-(f). The past participle is often like an
adjective. The past participle describes or gives
(d) Paul is married. information about the subject of the sentence. Past
(e) Paul is tired. participles are used as adjectives in many common,
(f) Paul is frightened. everyday expressions.
(g) Paul is married to Susan. Often the past participles in these expressions are
(h) Paul was excited about the game. followed by particular prepositions + an object.
( i ) Paul will be prepared for the exam. For example:
In (g): married is followed by to ( + an object)
In (h): excited is followed by about ( + an object)
In ( i ): prepared is followed by for ( + an object)
Some Common Expressions with Be + Past Participle

be acquainted (with) be excited (about) be opposed ( to)
be bored ( with, by) be exhausted (from) be pleased ( with)
be broken be finished ( with) be prepared (for)
be closed be frightened (of, by, about) be qualified (for)
be composed of be gone (from) be related ( to)
be crowded ( with) be hurt be satisfied ( with)
be devoted ( to) be interested (in) be scared ( of, by)
be disappointed (in, with) be involved (in, with) be shut
be divorced (from) be located in I south of I etc. be spoiled
be done ( with) be lost be terrified ( of, by)
be drunk ( o n) be made of be tired (of, from)*
be engaged (to) be married ( to) be worried (about)
*I'm tired of the cold weather. = I've had enough cold weather. I wane the weather co get warm.
I'm tired .from working hard all day. = I'm tired because I worked hard all day.
The Passive 271

Choose all the correct completions.
1. Roger is disappointed with __ .
@his job b. in the morning @) his son's grades
2. Are you related to __ ?
a. the Browns b. math and science c. me
3. Finally! We are done with __ .
a. finished b. our chores c. our errands
4. My boss was pleased with __ .
a. my report b. thank you c. the new contract
5. T he baby birds are gone from ___
a. away b. their nest c. yesterday
6. Taka and JoAnne are bored with __ .
a. their work b. this movie c. their marriage
7. Are you tired of ?
a. work b. asleep c. the news
· o Exercise 23. Looking at grammar. (Chart 10-6)

Complete each sentence with an appropriate preposition.
Nervous Nick is ...
1. worried ________ almost everything in life.
2. frightened _______ being around people.
3. also scared _______ snakes, lizards, and dogs.
4. terrified _______ going outside and seeing a dog.
5. exhausted _______ worrying so much.
Steady Steve is ...

6. excited _______ waking up every morning.
7. pleased _______ his job.

8. interested _______ having a good time.
9. involved ________ many community activities.
10. satisfied ________ just about everything in his life.
272 CHAPTER l O
Complete the sentences with the present form of the given verbs. Note the boldface
prepositions that follow them.
compose interest oppose satisfy

finish marry prepare ./scare
are scared
1. Most children -��-- of loud noises.
2. Jane ___________ in ecology.
3. Don't clear the table yet. I ______ not ________ with my meal.
4. I ___________ with my progress in English.
5. Tony ___________ to Sonia. They have a happy marriage.
6. Roberta's parents ___________ to her marriage. They don't like

her fiance.
7. The test is tomorrow. ______ you _______ for it?
8. A digital picture ------------- of thousands of tiny dots
called pixels.

Complete each sentence with an appropriate preposition.
1. Because of the sale, the mall was crowded ______ shoppers.
2. Do you think you are qualified ______ that job?
3. Mr. Ahmad loves his family very much. He is devoted ______ them.
4. My sister is married ______ a law student.
5. I'll be finished ______ my work in another minute or two.
6. The workers are opposed ______ the new health-care plan.
7. Are you acquainted ______ this writer? I can't put her books down!*
8. Janet doesn't take good care of herself. I'm worried ______ her health.
*can't put a book down = can't stop reading a book because it's so exciting/interesting
The Passive 273

{J
Listen to the sentences and write the prepositions you hear.
CD 2
Track 33
Example: You will hear: Linda loves her grandchildren. She is devoted to them.
You will write: -=to"----
1. 5.
2. 6.
3. 7.
4. 8.

Complete the sentences with expressions in the list. Use the present and add prepositions as
necessary.
be acquainted be exhausted be qualified

be composed be located be spoiled
be crowded be made /'be worried
be disappointed
1. Dennis isn't doing well in school this semester. He is worried about his grades.
2. My shirt _________ cotton.
3. I live in a three-room apartment with six other people. Our apartment _______
4. Vietnam ___________ Southeast Asia.
5. I'm going to go straight to bed tonight. It's been a hard day. I __________
6. The kids ---------------· I had promised to take them to the

beach today, but now we can't go because it's raining.
7. This milk doesn't taste right. I think it ___________ . I'm not going to
drink it.
8. Water _____________ hydrogen and oxygen.
9. According to the job description, an applicant must have a master's degree and at least five
years of teaching experience. Unfortunately, I ______ not ________
that job.
10. A: Have you ever met Mrs. Novinsky?

B: No, I ______ not ___________ her.
274 CHAPTER 10
;,·
{J
Complete the sentences with the words you hear.
co 2
Track 34
Example: You will hear: My earrings are made of gold.
You will write: are made of
1. Thisfruit _________________ I think I'd better throw it out.
2. When we got to the post office, ·it ____ _______________
3. Oxford University _______________ _ _ _

_Oxford, England.
4. Haley doesn't like to ride in elevators. She's ___________ small spaces.
5. What's the matter? _____ you _______ ?
6. Excuse me. Could you please tell me how to get to the bus station from here?
! ___________
7. Your name is Tom Hood? ____ you __________ Mary Hood?
_
8. Where's my wallet? It's ____ _______ Did someone take it?
9. Oh, no! Look at my sunglasses. I sat on them and now they __________
10. It's starting to rain. _____ all of the windows _______ ?

Match three of the sentences with the pictures. One sentence does not match either picture.
Picture A Picture B
1. The shark is terrifying. __

2. The shark is terrified.
3. The swimmer is terrifying. __
4. The swimmer is terrified.
The Passive 275

-.-1 ()·.7 Parti�ip�a� A;�je�tjye�: -ed vs. �ing .
. . . . ,. - ....
.
Art interests me. The past participle (-ed)* and the present participle (-ing) can be
used as adjectives.
(a) �stedin art.
INCORRECT: I am interesting in art. In (a): The past participle (interested) describes how a person feels.
In (b): The present participle (interesting) describes the cause of
(b) Art is interesting. the feeling. The cause of the interest is art.
INCORRECT: Art is interested. In (c): surprised describes how Kate felt. The past participle carries
a passive meaning: Kate was surprised by the news.
The news surprised Kate.
In (d): the news was the cause of the surprise.
(c) Kate was surprised.
(d) The news was surprising.
(e) Did you hear the surprising news? Like other adjectives, participial adjectives may follow be, as in
examples (a) through (d), or they may come in front of nouns, as in
( f ) Roberto fixed the broken window.
(e) and (f).
*The past participle of regular verbs ends in -ed. For verbs that have irregular forms, see the inside front and back covers.
o Exercise 30. looking at grammar. (Chart 1 o- 7)

Complete the sentences with the correct word: girl, man, or roller coaster.
1. The is frightened.
2. The is frightening.
3. The is excited.
4. The is exciting.
5. The is thrilling.
6. The is delighted.
o Exercise 31. listening. (Chart 1 o- 7)

{J
Listen to the statements and choose the words you hear.
co 2
Track 35
Example: You will hear: It was a frightening experience.
You will choose: frighten frightened
�
1. bore boring bored
2. shock shocking shocked
3. confuse confusing confused
4. embarrass embarrassing embarrassed
5. surpnse surprising surprised
6. scare scary* scared
*The adjective ending is -y, not -fog.
276 CHAPTER 10
Complete the sentences with the -ed or -ing form of the verbs in italics.
1. Talal's classes interest him.
a. Talal's classes are interestin@
b. Talal is an interested student.
2. Emily is going to Australia. The idea of going on this trip excites her.
a. Emily is ___________ about going on this trip.
b. She thinks it is going to be an trip.
3. I like to study sea life. The subject of marine biology fascinates me.
a. Marine biology is a ___________ subject.
b. I'm . by marine biology.
4. Mike heard some bad news. The bad news depressed him.
a. Mike is very sad. In fact, he is ___________
b. The news made Mike feel very sad. The news was ___________
5. The exploration of space interests me.

a. I'm ___________ in the exploration of space.
b. The exploration of space is ___________ to me.
{J
Listen to each sentence and circle the word you hear.
co 2 SITUATION: Julie was walking along the edge of the fountain outside her office building. She
Track 36
was with her co-worker and friend Paul. Suddenly she lost her balance and accidentally fell into
the water.
The Passive 277

1. embarrassed embarrassing 6. surprised surpnsmg
2. embarrassed embarrassing 7. upset* upsetting
3. shocked shocking 8. depressed depressing
4. shocked shocking 9. interested interesting
5. surprised surpnsmg 10. interested interesting

Are any of these statements true for you? Circle yes or no.
Right now ...
1. I all_l getting tired. yes no
2. I am getting hungry. yes no
3. I am getting confused. yes no
Get + Adjective Get can be followed by an adjective. Get gives the idea of
(a) I am getting hungry. Let's eat. change - the idea of becoming, beginning to be, growing
(b) Eric got nervous before the job interview. to be.
In (a): I'm getting hungry. = I wasn't hungry before, but now
I'm beginning to be hungry.
Get + Past Participle Sometimes get is followed by a past participle. The past
(c) I'm getting tired Let's stop working. participle after get is like an adjective; it describes the subject
(d) Steve and Rita got married last month. of the sentence.
Get + Adjective Get + Past Participle

get angry get dry get quiet get acquainted get drunk get involved
get bald get fat get rich get arrested get engaged get killed
get big get full get serious get bored get excited get lost
get busy get hot get sick get confused get finished get married
get close get hungry get sleepy get crowded get frightened get scared
get cold get interested get thirsty get divorced get hurt get sunburned
get dark get late get well get done get interested get tired
get dirty get nervous get wet get dressed get invited get worried
get dizzy get old
*There is no -ed ending.
278 CHAPTER 10
Complete the sentences with the words in the list.
bald dirty hurt lost rich

busy v1 full late nervous serious
1. This food is delicious, but I can't eat any more. I'm getting full
2. This work has to be done before we leave. We'd better get and stop
wasting time.
3. I didn't understand Mariam's directions very well, so on the way to her house last night I
got _______ . I couldn't find her house.
4. It's hard to work on a car and stay clean. Paul's clothes always get ________
from all the grease and oil.
5. Tim doesn't like to fly. As soon as he sits down, his heart starts to beat quickly. He gets
really _______
6. We'd better go home. It's getting _______ , and you have school tomorrow.
7. Simon wants to get _______ , but he doesn't want to work. That's not very
realistic.
8. If you plan to go to medical school, you need to get ________ about the time
and money involved and start planning now.
9. Mr. Andersen is losing some of his hair. He's slowly getting ________
10. Was the accident serious? Did anyone get _______ ?
o Exercise 36. let's talk: interview. (Chart 10-8)

Interview your classmates. Share some of their answers with the class.
1. Have you ever gotten hurt? What happened?
2. Have you ever gotten lost? What happened?
3. When was the last time you got dizzy?
4. How long does it take you to get dressed in the morning?
5. In general, do you get sleepy during the day? When?
6. Do you ever get hungry in the middle of the night? What do you do?
7. Have you ever gotten involved with a charity? Which one?
The Passive 279

;{) Listen to the sentences and complete them with any adjectives that make sense.
co 2 Example: You will hear: This towel is soaking wet. Please hang it up so it will get ...
Track 37
You will write: dry

1. 4.
2. 5.
3. 6.

Complete the sentences with appropriate forms of get and the words in the list.
angry dressed kill tired

cold dry lost . well
crowd hungry marry worry
dark involve ./sunburn
1. When I stayed out in the sun too long yesterday, I eot sunburned
2. If you're sick, stay home and take care of yourself. You won't _________
if you don't take care of yourself.
3. Alima and Hasan are engaged. They are going to ___________ a year
from now.
4. Sarah doesn't eat breakfast, so she always ___________ by ten or

ten-thirty.
5. In the winter, the sun sets early. It _________ outside by six or

even earlier.
6. Put these towels back in the dryer. They didn't _________ the first time.
7. Let's stop working for a while. I'm ___________ I need a break.
8. Anastasia has to move out of her apartment next week, and she hasn't found a new place
to live. She's _____________
9. Tashiro was in a terrible car wreck and almost --------- He's lucky to
be alive.
10. The temperature is dropping. Brrr! I'm ___________ Can I borrow

your sweater?
11. Sorry we're late. We took a wrong turn and _________
280 CHAPTER 10
12. Good restaurants _________ around dinner time. It's hard to find a seat
because there are so many people.
13. Calm down! Take it easy! You shouldn't

_______ so _______ . It's not
good for your blood pressure.
14. I left when Ellen and Joe began to argue. I never

___________ in other people's quarrels.
15. Sam is wearing one brown sock and one blue sock today.
He _________ in a hurry this morning and
didn't pay attention to the color of his socks.

Read the passage and the statements that follow it. Circle "T" for true and "F" for false.
A Blended Family
Lisa and Thomas live in a blended family. They are not related to each other, but they are
brother and sister. Actually, they are stepbrother and stepsister. This is how they came to be in
the same family.
Lisa's mother got divorced when Lisa was a baby. Thomas' father was a widower. His
wife had died seven years earlier. Lisa and Thomas' parents met five years ago at a going-away
party for a friend. After a year of dating, they got engaged and a year later, they got married.
Lisa and Thomas are about the same age and get along well. Theirs is a happy, blended family.
1. Lisa's mother got married. Then she got divorced.

Then she got remarried. T F
2. Thomas' father got married, and then he got divorced.
After he got divorced, he got engaged, and then he got remarried. T F
3. Lisa and Thomas became stepsister and stepbrother when
their parents got remarried. T F

Circle the words in italics that make these sentences true for you.
1. I am used to, not used to speaking English with native speakers.
2. I am accustomed to, not accustomed to speaking English without translating from
my language.
3. I am getting used to, not getting used to English slang.
4. I am getting accustomed to, not getting accustomed to reading English without a dictionary.
The Passive 281

(a) I am used to hot weather. Examples (a) and (b) have the same meaning: "Living
(b) I am accustomed to hot weather. in a hot climate is usual and normal for me. I'm
familiar with what it is like to live in a hot climate. Hot
weather isn't strange or different to me."
(c) I am used to living in a hot climate. Notice in (c) and (d): to (a preposition) is followed by
(d) I am accustomed to living in a hot climate. the -ing form of a verb (a gerund).
(e) I just moved from Florida to Alaska. I have never In (e):

lived in a cold climate before, but I am getting I'm getting used to/accustomed to = something is
used to (accustomed to) the cold weather here. beginning to seem usual and normal to me.

Part I. Complete the sentences with be used to, affirmative or negative.
1. Juan is from Mexico. He is used to hot weather. He isn't used to cold

weather.
2. Alice was born and raised in Chicago. She _________ living in a big city.
3. My hometown is New York City, but this year I'm going to school in a town with a
population of 10,000. I ___________ living in a small town. I
_________ living in a big city.
4. We do a lot of exercises in class. We _________ doing exercises.
Part II. Complete the sentences with be accustomed to, affirmative or negative.
5. Spiro recently moved to Hong Kong from Greece. He is accustomed to eating
Greek food. He isn't accustomed to eating Chinese food.
6. I always get up around 6:00 A.M. I getting up early.

I sleeping late.
7. Our teacher always gives us a lot of homework. We _____________

having a lot of homework every day.
8. Young schoolchildren rarely take multiple-choice tests. They ___________

_________ taking that kind of test.
o Exercise 42. Listening and speaking. (Chart 10-9)

{J Part I. Complete the questions with the words you hear.
co 2 Example: You will hear: W hat time are you accustomed to getting up?
Track 38
You will write: are you accustomed to

1. What---------------------- doing in the evenings?
282 CHAPTER 10
2. What time going to bed?
3. What having for breakfast?
4. living in this area?
5. Do you live with someone or do you live alone? that?
6. speaking English every day?
7. What doing on weekends?
8. What do you think about the weather here? it?
Part JI. Work with a partner. Take turns asking and answering the questions in Part I.
o Exercise 43. Let's talk: interview. (Chart _10-9)

Ask your classmates questions with be used to/accustomed to.
Example: buy \ frozen food
-t Are you used to I accustomed to buying frozen food?
1. get up\ early 6. drink\ coffee in the morning

2. sleep\ late 7. have\ dessert at night
3. eat\ breakfast 8. live\ in a big city
4. skip\ lunch 9. live\ in a small town
5. eat\ a late dinner 10. pay\ for all your expenses
0 Exercise 44. Let's talk. (Chart 10-9)

Work in small groups. Discuss one or more of the given topics. Make a list of your answers.
Share some of them with the class.
Topics:
1. Junko is going to leave her parents' house next week. She is going to move in with two of
her cousins who work in the city. Junko will be away from her home for the first time in
her life. What is she going to have to get accustomed to?
2. Think of a time you traveled in or lived in a foreign country. What weren't you used to?
What did you get used to? What didn't you ever get used to?
3. Think of the first day of a job you have had. What weren't you used to? What did you get
used to?

Complete the sentences about food preferences. Make statements that are true for you.
1. There are some foods I liked when I was younger, but now I don't eat them. I used to eat
___________ , but now I don't.
2. There are some foods I didn't like when I first tried them, but now they're okay. For
example, the first time I ate _______ ____ , I didn't like it, but now I'm
used to eating them.
The Passive 283

. ' .. . .. ,. . .. . . ..
I·
10·10 Use�'{�y�.--B�.{J�ed_T_o_ _ . ·_. _ _ _ -�,��· .. __ ·_.__ . _; __ . :_'__:·_
(a) I used to live in Chicago, but now I live in Tokyo. In (a): Used to expresses the habitual past (see
INCORRECT: I used to living in Chicago. Chart 2-8, p. 53). It is followed by the simple form of
INCORRECT: I am used to live in a big city. a verb.
(b) I am used to living in a big city. In (b): be used to is followed by the -ingform of a
verb (a gerund).*
*NoTE: In both used to (habitual past) and be used to, the "d" is not pronounced.
o Exercise 46. Looking at grammar. (Chart 1 o- 1 O)

Complete the sentences with an appropriate form of be. If no form of be is necessary, use 0.
1. I have lived in Malaysia for a long time. I am used to warm weather.
2. I �_g�-- used to live in Portugal, but now I live in Spain.
3. I ______ used to sitting at this desk. I sit here every day.
4. I ______ used to sit in the back of the classroom, but now I prefer to sit in the
front row.
5. When I was a child, I ______ used to play games with my friends in a big field
near my house after school every day.
6. It's hard for my kids to stay inside on a cold, rainy day. They ______ used to
playing outside in the big field near our house. They play there almost every day.
7. A teacher _ ____ used to answering questions. Students, especially good

students, always have a lot of questions.
8. People ______ used to believe the world was flat.

Complete the sentences with used to/be used to and the correct form of the verb in
parentheses.
1. Nick stays up later now than he did when he was in high school. He (go) used to@o
to bed at ten, but now he rarely gets to bed before midnight.
2. I got used to going to bed late when I was in college, but now I have a job and I need my
sleep. These days I (go) am used to@Oin@ to bed around ten-thirty.
3. I am a vegetarian. I (eat) _____________ meat, but now I eat only

meatless meals.
4. Ms. Wu has had a vegetable garden all her life. She (grow) ___________
her own vegetables.
284 CHAPTER l O
5. Oscar has lived in Brazil for ten years. He (eat) _____________
Brazilian food. It's his favorite.
6. Georgio moved to Germany to open his own restaurant. He (have) ________

______ a small bakery in Italy.
7. I have taken the bus to work every day for the past five years. I (take) _______
______ the bus.
8. Juanita travels by train on company business. She (go) ___________

by plane, but now it's too expensive.

Complete the sentences about airline passengers.
1. Before getting on the plane, passengers are expected to ____________
2. After boarding the plane, passengers are supposed to _____________
3. During landing, passengers are not supposed to _______________
10�11 Using.Be Supposed To . ·: . .· ·

(a) Mike is supposed to call me tomorrow. Be supposed to is used to talk about an activity or
(IDEA: I expect Mike to call me tomorrow.) event that is expected to occur.
(b) We are supposed to write a composition. In (a): The idea of is supposed to is that Mike is
expected (by me) to call me. I asked him to call
(IDEA: The teacher expects us to write a composition.)
me. He promised to call me. I expect him to
call me.
(c) Alice was supposed to be home at ten, but she In the past form, be supposed to often expresses
didn't get in until midnight. the idea that an expected event did not occur, as
(IDEA: Someone expected Alice to be home at ten.) in (c).

Make a sentence with a similar meaning to the given sentence. Use be supposed to.
1. The teacher expects us to be on time for class.
- � are supposed to be on time for class.
2. People expect the weather to be cold tomorrow.
3. People expect the plane to arrive at 6:00.
4. My boss expects me to work late tonight.
5. I expected the mail to come an hour ago, but it didn't.
The Passive 285

o Exercise 50. Let's talk. (Chart 1o -11>
Summarize each conversation with a statement. Use be supposed to. Work in pairs, in small
groups, or as a class.
1. ToM's Boss: Mail this package.
TOM: Yes, sir.
- Tom is supposed to mail a package.
2. LENA: Call me at nine.
ANN: Okay.
3. Ms. MARTINEZ: Please make your bed before you go to school.
JOHNNY: Okay, Mom.
4. PROF. THOMPSON: Read the test directions carefully and raise your hand if you have any
questions.
STUDENTS: (no response)
5. DR. KEMPER: You should take one pill every eight hours.
PATIENT: Right. Anything else?
DR. KEMPER: Drink plenty of fluids.
D Exercise 51. Listening. (Chart 1o-11)

0
CD2
Listen to the statements with be supposed to. Choose "T" for true and "F" for false. Notice
that to in be supposed to sounds like "ta."
Track 39
Example: You will hear: Visitors at a museum are not supposed to touch the art.
You will choose: (I) F
1. T F 5. T F
2. T F 6. T F
3. T F 7. T F
4. T F 8. T F
o Exercise 52. Reading, grammar, and listening. (Chapter 1O)

Part I. Answer the questions and then read the passage on zoos.
Have you visited a zoo recently?

What was your opinion of it?
Were the animals well-taken care of?
Did they live in natural settings or in cages?
Zoos
Zoos are common around the world. The first zoo was established around 3,500 years ago
by an Egyptian queen for her enjoyment. Five hundred years later, a Chinese emperor
established a huge zoo to show his power and wealth. Later, zoos were established for the
purpose of studying animals.
Zoos were supposed to take good care of animals, but some of the early ones were dark
holes or dirty cages. At that time, people became disgusted with the poor care the animals were
286 CHAPTER 10
given. Later, these early zoos were replaced by scientific institutions. Animals were studied and
kept in better conditions there. These research centers became the first modern zoos.
Because zoos want to treat animals well and encourage breeding, animals today are put in
large, natural settings instead of small cages. They are fed a healthy diet and are watched
carefully for any signs of disease. Most zoos have specially trained veterinarians and a hospital
for their animals. Today, animals in these zoos are treated well, and zoo breeding programs have
saved many different types of animals.
Part II. Circle all the grammatically correct statements.

1. a. The first zoo was established around 3,500 years ago.
b. The first zoo established around 3,500 years ago.
c. An Egyptian queen established the first zoo.
2. a. Zoos supposed to take good care of animals.
b. Zoos were supposed to take good care of animals.
c. Zoos were suppose to take good care of animals.
3. a. The animals was poorly cared for in some of the early zoos.
b. The animals were poorly cared for in some of the early zoos.
c. The early zoos didn't take good care of the animals.
4. a. Today, animals are kept in more natural settings.
b. Today, zoos keep animals in more natural settings.
c. Today, more natural settings are provided for animals.
5. a. Nowadays, animals are treated better in zoos than before.
b. Nowadays, animals are taken better care of in zoos than before.
c. Nowadays, animals take care of in zoos than before.
IJ
CD 2
Part Ill.Listen to the passage. Complete the sentences with the verbs you hear and then
answer the questions.
Track 40
Zoos
Zoos are common around the world. The first zoo was established around 3,500
years ago by an Egyptian queen for her enjoyment. Five hundred years later, a Chinese
emperor ____________ a huge zoo to show his power and wealth. Later, zoos
_______________ for the purpose of studying animals.
Zoos ---------------- take good care of animals, but some of
the early ones were dark holes or dirty cages. At that time, people __________
5
disgusted with the poor care the animals ____________ Later, these early
zoos ________ replaced by scientific institutions. Animals _________

8
and ________ in better conditions there. These research centers became the first
9
modern zoos.
The Passive 287

Because zoos want to treat animals well and encourage breeding, animals today
_________ in large, natural settings instead of small cages. They

10
____ _ _ _ _ _
a healthy diet and _______ carefully for any signs of
11 12
disease. Most zoos _______ specially trained veterinarians and a hospital for their
13
animals. Today, animals in these zoos ___________ well, and zoo breeding
14
programs ___________ many different types of animals.
15
1. Why was the first zoo established?

2. What were some of the early zoos like?
3. What was the purpose of the first modern zoos?
4. What are zoos doing to encourage breeding?
5. Why do zoos want to encourage breeding?
o Exercise 53. Check your knowledge. (Chapter 1 O)

Edit the sentences.
1. I am agree with him.
2. Something was happened.
3. This pen is belong to me.
4. I'm interesting in that subject.
5. He is marry with my cousin.
6. Mary's dog was died last week.
7. Were you surprise when you heard the news?
8. When I went downtown, I am get lost.
9. The bus was arrived ten minutes late.
10. We're not suppose to have pets in our apartment.
288 CHAPTER 10
o Exercise 54. Reading and writing. (Chapter 1 O)
Part I. Read the passage and underline the passive verbs.
My Favorite Holiday
(1) New Year's is the most important holiday of the year in.my country. New Year's is
celebrated for fifteen days, but my favorite day is the first day.
(2) The celebration actually begins at midnight. Fireworks are set off, and the streets are
filled with people. Neighbors and friends greet each other and wish one another good luck for
the year. The next morning, gifts are exchanged. Children are given money. It is wrapped in
red envelopes because red is the color for good luck. When I was younger, this was always my
favorite part of the holiday.
(3) On New Year's Day, everyone wears new clothes. These clothes are bought especially for
the holiday. People are very polite to each other. It is considered wrong to yell, lie, or use bad
language on the first day of the year. It is a custom for younger generations to visit their elders.
They wish them good health and a long life.
Part II. Choose a holiday you like. Describe the activities on this day. What do you do in the
morning? afternoon? evening? Which activities do you enjoy the most? Make some of your
sentences passive.
The Passive 289

o Exercise 1. Warm· up. (Chart 11- 1)
Check(./) all the items you have with you right now. Do you know why some nouns have a
before them and others have an?
1. __ a pen
2. an eraser
3. a notebook
4. an umbrella
5. __ an interesting book
6. __ a university map
.. ,· ..
11•1 A vs. An � - -• - ..
-
- --- ..
--- ,.� � -� , ·'.i,
� . . -- ,.:·,:: .
:'.,� - ,_·.,-�-- . ..... � �
(a) I have a pencil. A and an a re used in front of a singular noun (e.g., pencil, apartment) . They
(b) I live in an apartment. mean "one."
(c) I have a small apartment. If a singular noun is modified by an adjective (e.g., small, old), a or an comes
(d) I live in an old building. in front of the adjective, as in (c) and (d).
A is used in front of words that begin with a consonant (b, c, d, f, g, etc.): a
boy, a bad day, a cat, a cute baby.
An is used in front of words that begin with the vowels a, e, i, and o: an

apartment, an angry man, an elephant, an empty room, etc.
(e) I have an umbrella. For words that begin with the letter u:
( f) I saw an ugly picture. (1) An is used if the u is a vowel sound, as in an umbrella, an uncle,
(g) I attend a university. an unusual day.
(h) I had a unique experience. (2) A is used if the u is a consonant sound, as in a university, a unit,
a usual event.
( i) He wi II arrive in an hour. For words that begin with the letter h:

(j) New Year's Day is a holiday. (1) An is used if the his silent: an hour, an honor, an honest person.
(2) A is used if the h is pronounced: a holiday, a hotel, a high grade.
290
0 Exercise 2. Looking at grammar. (Chart 11-1 >
Add a or an to these words.
1. _a_ mistake 10. __ urgent message
2. abbreviation 11. __ universal problem
3. dream 12. __ unhappy child
4. __ interesting dream 13. __ hour or two
5. __ empty box 14. __ hole in the ground
6. box 15. hill
7. uniform 16. handsome man
8. email 17. honest man
9. __ untrue story 18. __ honor

J Listen to the sentences. Decide if you hear a, an, or 0 (no article).
(
co 2 Example: You will hear: I have a bad toothache.
You will choose: @
Track 41
an 0
1. a an 0 6. a an 0
2. a an 0 7. a an 0
3. a an 0 8. a an 0
4. a an 0 9. a an 0
5. a an 0 10. a an 0

Circle all the correct completions.
1. I need one
a. chair b. chairs
2. There are two in the room.
a. chairs b. furniture
3. I found some __ in the storage room.
4. I found __ in the storage room.
Count/Noncount Nouns and Articles 291

Singular Plural
COUNT a chair 0 chairs A count noun:
NOUN one chair two chairs (1) can be counted with numbers: one chair, two chairs,
some chairs ten chairs, etc.
(2) can be preceded by a/an in the singular: a chair.
(3) has a plural form ending in -s or -es: chairs.*
NONCOUNT
NOUN
0 furniture
some furniture
"" A noncount noun:
(1) cannot be counted with numbers.
INCORRECT: one furniture
(2) is NOT immediately preceded by a/an.
INCORRECT: a furniture
(3) does NOT have a plural form (no final -s).
INCORRECT: furnitures
*See Chart 1-5, p. 14, and Chart 6-1, p. 147, for the spelling and pronunciation of-sf-es.

Check (/') the correct sentences. Correct the sentences with errors. Use some with the
noncount nouns.
some furniture
1. _i_ I bought one chair for my apartment.
some
2. __ I bought eHe- furniture for my apartment.*
3. __ I bought four chairs for my apartment.
4. __ I bought four furnitures for my apartment.
5. __ I bought a chair for my apartment. one chair
6. __ I bought a furniture for my apartment.
two chairs
7. __ I bought some chair for my apartment.
8. __ I bought some furnitures for my apartment.
some chairs

Write the words under the correct categories.
bracelets ideas letters postcards rmgs suggestions
Advice Mail Jewelry
*CORRECT: I bought some furniture for my apartment. OR I bought furniture for my apartment. See Chart 11-8 for more
information about the use of 0 and some.
292 CHAPTER 11
11·3 Noncount Nouns
Individual Parts ---+ The Whole Noncount nouns usually refer to a whole group of things
(Count Nouns) (Noncount Nouns ) that is made up of many individual parts, a whole
category made of different varieties.
(a ) letters
For example, furniture is a noncount noun; it describes a
postcards
---+ mail whole category of things: chairs, tables, beds, etc.
bills
etc.
chairs
tables
(b) apples ---+ furniture
beds
bananas
fruit etc.
oranges
etc. Mail, fruit, and jewelry are other examples of noncount
nouns that refer to a whole category made up of
(c) rings individual parts.
bracelets
---+ jewelry
necklaces
etc.
Some Common Noncount Nouns: Whole Groups Made up of Individual Parts

A. clothing B. homework E. grammar G. corn
equipment housework slang dirt
food work vocabulary flour
fruit C. advice F. Arabic hair
furniture information Chinese pepper
jewelry English rice
mail D. history salt
literature German
money Indonesian sand
scenery music sugar
poetry Spanish
stuff Etc.
traffic

Complete the sentences with a/an or some. Decide if the boldface nouns are count or noncount.
1. I often have some fruit for dessert. count
�
2. I had a banana for dessert. count noncount
3. I got letter today. count noncount
4. I got mail today. count noncount
5. Anna wears ring on her left hand. count noncount
6. Maria is wearing jewelry today. count noncount
7. I have homework to finish. count noncount
8. I have assignment to finish. count noncount
9. I needed information. count noncount
10. I asked question. count noncount

o Exercise 8. Grammar and speaking. (Charts 11-2 and 11-3)
Add final -sf-es if possible. Otherwise, write 0. Then decide if you agree or disagree with the
statement. Discuss your answers.
1. I'm learning a lot of grammar _i2_ this term. yes no
2. Count and noncount noun _s_ are easy. yes no
3. A good way to control traffic __ is to charge people money

to drive in the city. yes no
4. Electric car __ will replace gas car __ . yes no
5. Information __ from the Internet is usually reliable. yes no
6. Fact __ are always true. yes no
7. Many word __ in English are similar to those in my language. yes no
8. The best way to learri new vocabulary __ is to memorize it. yes no
9. I enjoy singing karaoke song _ _ . yes no
10. I enjoy listening to classical music __ . yes no
11. I like to read good literature __ . yes no
12. I like to read mystery novel __ . yes no
13. Beach __ are relaxing places to visit. yes no
14. Walking on sand __ is good exercise for your legs. yes no
15. Parents usually have helpful suggestion __ for their kids. yes no
16. Sometimes kids have helpful advice __ for their parents. yes no

Complete the sentences with words from the list. Make sentences that are true for you.
beauty health milk pollution traffic

coffee honesty money smog violence
happiness juice n01se tea water
1. During the day, I drink _________ or _________
2. Two things I don't like about big cities are _________ and
3. _________ is more important than _________
294 CHAPTER 11
irLanguage.com
11·4 More Noncount Nouns

( a) Liquids Solids and Semi-Solids Gases
coffee soup bread meat chalk paper air

milk tea butter beef glass soap pollution
oil water cheese chicken gold toothpaste smog
ice fish iron wood smoke
( b) Things That Occur in Nature

weather darkness thunder
rain light lightning
snow sunshine
(c) Abstractions*
beauty fun health ignorance luck selfishness
courage generosity help kindness patience time
experience happiness honesty knowledge progress violence
*An abstraction is an idea. It has no physical form. A person cannot touch it.
o Exercise 10. Looking at grammar. (Charts 11-2 -+ 11-4)

Add final -sf-es if possible. Otherwise, write 0. Choose verbs in parentheses as necessary.
1. I made some mistake_s_ on my algebra test.
2. In winter in Siberia, there (@, are) snow _fJ_ on the ground.
3. Siberia has very cold weather __ .
4. Be sure to give the new couple my best wish __ .
5. I want to wish them good luck __ .
6. Silver __ (is, are) expensive. Diamond __ (is, are) expensive too.
7. I admire Professor Yoo for her extensive knowledge __ of organic farming methods.
8. Professor Yoo has a lot of good idea __ and strong opinion __ .
9. Teaching children to read requires patience __ .
10. Doctors take care of patient __ .
11. Mr. Fernandez's English is improving. He's making progress __ .
12. Wood stoves are a source of pollution __ in many cities.

o Exercise 1 l. Listening. (Charts 11-2 - 11-4)
Q
Listen to the sentences. Add -s if the given nouns have plural endings. Otherwise, write 0.
co 2 Example: You will hear: Watch out! There's ice on the sidewalk.
Track 42
You will write: ice _Jj_
1. chalk_ _ 6. storm--
2. soap__ 7. storm--
3. suggestion__ 8. toothpaste__
4. suggestion__ 9. stuff
5. gold__ 10. equipment

Work in small groups. These common sayings use abstract nouns. Choose two sayings to
explain to the class.
Example: Ignorance is bliss.
- Ignorance means you don't know about something. Bliss means happiness.
This saying means that you are happier if you don't know about a problem.
1. Honesty is the best policy. 4. Knowledge is power.
2. Time is money. 5. Experience is the best teacher.
3. Laughter is the best medicine.

Complete the sentences. Give two to four answers for each item. Share your answers with a
partner. See how many of your answers are the same. Note: Abstract nouns are usually
noncount. To find out if a noun is count or noncount, check your dictionary or ask your
teacher.
1. Qualities I admire in a person are ....
2. Bad qualities people can have are ....
3. Some of the most important things in life are ....
4. Certain bad conditions exist in the world. Some of them are ....
o Exercise 14. Game. (Charts 11-1 - 11-4)

Work in small teams. Imagine your team is at one of the given places. Make a list of the
things you see. Share your team's list with the class. The team with the most complete and
grammatically correct list wins.
Example: a teacher's office
- two windows
- a lot of grammar books
- office equipment - a computer, a printer, a photocopy machine
- office supplies - a stapler, paper clips, pens, pencils, a ruler
- some pictures
etc.
296 CHAPTER 11
Places:
a restaurant an island
a museum a hotel
a popular department store an airport

Complete the sentences with apples or fruit.
1. I bought several yesterday.
2. Do you eat a lot of ?
3. Do you eat many ?
4. Do you eat much ?
5. I eat a few every week.
6. I eat a little for breakfast.
'
11·5 Using Several, A Lot Of, Many!)ttuch, and A Few/A Little

Count Noncount
(a) several chairs 0 Several is used only with count nouns.
(b) a lot of chairs a lot of furniture A lot of is used with both count and noncount nouns.
(c) many chairs much furniture Many is used with count nouns.
Much is used with noncount nouns.
(d) a few chairs a little furniture A few is used with count nouns.
A little is used with noncount nouns.

Check(/') the correct sentences. Correct the sentences that have mistakes. One sentence has
a spelling error.
some I fJ
1. __ Jakob learned several new vocabulary.
2. ./ He learned several new words.
3. Takashi learned a lot of new words.
4. __ Sonia learned a lot of new vocabulary too.
5. __ Lydia doesn't like learning too much new vocabulary in one day.
6. She can't remember too much new words.

7. __ Mr. Lee assigned a few vocabulary to his class.
8. __ He assigned a few new words.
9. __ He explained several new vocabulary:
10. There is alot of new word at this level.
11. __ There are a lot of new vocabulary at this level.
o Exercise 17. Looking at grammar: pairwork. (Charts 11-1 - 11-5)

Work with a partner. Take turns completing the questions with how many or how much.*
Make nouns plural as necessary.
1. How does Mr. Miller have?
a. son -+ many sons d. car
b. child -+ many children e. stuff
c. work -+ much work f. expenence
2. How __ did you buy?

a. fruit d. tomato
b. vegetable e. orange
c. banana f. food
3. How __ did you have?

a. fun d. information
b. help e. fact
c. time f. money

Interview your classmates. Begin your questions with How much or How many. Share
some of your answers with the class.
How much/How many ...
1. pages does this book have?
2. coffee do you drink every day?
3. cups of tea do you drink every day?
4. homework do you have to do tonight?
5. assignments have you had this week?
6. provinces does Canada have?
7. countries does Africa have?
8. snow does this area get in the winter?
*Much and many are more commonly used in questions than in affirmative statements.
298 CHAPTER 11
irLanguage.com

Complete the sentences with a few or a little and the given noun. Use the plural form of the
noun as necessary.
1. music I feel like listening to a little music tonight.
2. song We sang a few songs at the party.
3. help Do you need ____________ with that?
4. pepper My grandfather doesn't use salt, but he always puts

_____________ on his eggs.
5. thing I need to pick up _____________ at the store on my way

home from work tonight.
6. apple I bought _____________ at the store.*
7. fruit I bought _____________ at the store.
8. advice I need _______________
9. money If I accept that job, I'll make ________ more ______
10. friend ______________ came by last night to visit us.
11. ram It looks like we might get ______________ today. I

think I'll take my umbrella with me.
12. French I can speak ______________ , but I don't know any

Italian at all.
13. hour Ron's plane will arrive in ________ more ______
OD
Match the sentences to the pictures.
'f
I
1
- .
1. Do you need one glass or two?

2. Your glasses fit nicely.
3. A: W hat happened?
B: Some neighborhood kids were playing baseball, and their ball went through the glass.
*I bought a few apples. = I bought a small number of apples.

I bought a liule apple. = I bought one apple, and it was small, not large.

!
11·6 �_Count or Noncount_______ -------�
Quite a few nouns can be used as either count or noncount nouns. Examples of both count and noncount
usages for some common nouns follow.
Noun Used as a Noncount Noun Used as a Count Noun
glass (a) Windows are made of glass. (b) I drank a glass of water.
(c) Janet wears glasses when she reads.
hair (d) Rita has brown hair. ( e) There's a hair on my jacket.
iron ( f) Iron is a metal. (g) I pressed my shirt with an iron.
light (h) I opened the curtain to let in ( i) Please turn off the lights (lamps).
some light.
paper ( j ) I need some paper to write a note. (k) I wrote a paper for Professor Lee.
( I ) I bought a paper (a newspaper).
time (m) How much time do you need to (n) How many times have you been to Mexico?
finish your work?
work (o) I have some work to do tonight. (p) That painting is a work of art.
coffee (q) I had some coffee after dinner. ( r) Two coffees, please.
chicken/fish (s) I ate some chicken/some fish. ( t) She drew a picture of a chicken/a fish.
experience ( u) I haven't had much experience (v) I had many interesting experiences on my trip.
with computers. (I don't have (Many interesting events happened to me on my
much knowledge or skill in using trip.)
computers.)

Match the correct picture to each sentence on page 301. Discuss the differences in meaning.
Picture D Picture E Picture F
300 CHAPTER 11
1. That was a great meal. I ate a lot of chicken. Now I'm stuffed.*
2. Are you hungry? How about a little chicken for lunch?
3. When I was a child, we raised a lot of chickens. __
4. I bought a few chickens so I can have fresh eggs.
5. There's a little chicken in your yard. __
6. That's a big chicken over there. Who does it belong to?

Complete the sentences with the given words. Make words plural as necessary. Choose words
in parentheses as necessary. Discuss the differences in meaning.
1. time It took a lot of time to write my composition.
2. time I really like that movie. I saw it three times .
3. paper Students in Professor Young's literature class have to write a lot of
4. paper Students who take careful lecture notes can use a lot of
5. paper The New 1-vrk Times is (a, some) famous
6. work Van Gogh's painting Irises is one of my f avorite of art.
7. work I have a lot of to do tomorrow at my office.
8. hair Erin has straight , and Mariam has curly
9. hair Brian has a white cat. When I stood up from Brian's sofa, my black slacks
were covered with short white _______
10. glass I wear _______ for reading.
11. glass In some countries, people use ________ for their tea; in other
countries, they use cups.
12. glass Many famous paintings are covered with ________ to protect them.
13. iron _______ (is, are) necessary to animal and plant life.
14. iron _______ (is, are) used to make clothes look neat.
*swffed = very full

15. experience My grandfather had a lot of interesting ________ in his long
career as a diplomat.
16. experience You should apply for the job at the electronics company because you have a
lot of _______ in that field.
17. chicken Joe, would you like (a, some) more ________ ?
18. chicken My grandmother raises _______ in her yard.
19. light There (is, are) a lot of _______ on the ceilings of the school
building.
20. light A: If you want to take a picture outside now, you'll need a flash. The
_______ (isn't, aren't) good here.
B: Or, we could wait an hour. (It, They) will be brighter then.

Which of the following do you have in your kitchen? Check (./) the items.
1. a can* of tuna
2. __ a bag of flour
3. __ a jar of olive oil
4. __ a bottle of soda pop
5. __ a box of tea bags
6. __ a bowl of sugar
I
11 • 7 Using Units of 'easure with Noncount Nouns
(a) I had some tea. To mention a specific quantity of a noncount noun, speakers
(b) I had two cups of tea. use units of measure such as two cups of or one piece of.
A unit of measure usually describes the container (a cup of,
(c) I ate some toast. a bowl of), the amount (a pound of, a quart of),* or the
(d) I ate one piece of toast. shape (a bar of soap, a sheet of paper).
*Weight measure: one pound= 0.45 kilograms/kilos.

Liquid measure: one quart= 0.95 litres/liters; four quarts= one gallon= 3.8 litres/liters.
www.irLanguage.com
*a can in American English = a tin in British English
302 CHAPTER 11
o Exercise 24. Looking at grammar. (Chart 11- 7)
What units of measure are usually used with the given nouns? More than one unit of measure
can be used with some of the nouns.
Part I. At the store
bag bottle box can jar"
1. a -="-,!="------
can/iar
0 of olives
2. a -��----
box of crackers
3. a _______ of mineral water·
4. a _______ of jam or jelly
5. a _______ of tuna
6. a _______ of soup
7. a _______ of sugar
8. a _______ of wine
9. a _______ of soda
10. a _____ _ _ of flour
11. a _______ of paint
12. a ______ _ of breakfast cereal
Part II. In the kitchen
bowl cup glass piece slice
13. a cur2/<a.lass
' of green tea
14. a bowl of cereal
15. a of candy
16. a of bread
17. a of cake
18. a of orange juice
19. a of soup
20. a of pizza

Part II. (continued)
bowl cup glass piece slice
21. a _______ of soda
22. a _______ of noodles
23. a _______ of mineral water
24. a _______ of popcorn
25. a _______ of cheese
26. a _______ of rice
27. a _______ of strawberries
28. a _______ of watermelon
watermelon

You and your partner are planning a party for the class. You have already prepared most of the
food, but you still need to buy a few things at the store. Decide what you'd like to get using
the sentences below as your guide. You can be serious or silly. Perform your conversation for
the class. Then your classsmates will tell you if they want to come to your party or not.
NOTE: You can look at your conversation before you speak. W hen you speak, look at your partner.
Shopping list
A: So what else do we need from the store?
B: Let's see. We need a few jars of _________ . We should also get a box of
_________ . Oh, and a couple of bags of _________
A: Is that it? Anything else?
B: I guess a few cans of _________ would be good.
I almost forgot. W hat should we do about drinks?
A: How about some bottles (or cans) of _________ ?
B: Good idea.
A: By the way, I thought we could serve slices of _________ . How does that
sound?
B: Sure.
304 CHAPTER 11
Read the conversations. Why does Speaker A use a or the? Discuss what both Speaker A and
Speaker B are thinking about.
A: A dog makes a good pet. B: I agree.
Conversation 2
A: I saw a dog in my yard

B: Oh?
Conversation 3
A: Did you feed the dog? B: Yes.

11-8 Guidelines for Ai-ticle
I
Usage
TO MAKE A GENERALIZATION
Singular Count Nouns: A/An

( a ) A dog makes a good pet. In (a): The speaker is talking about any dog, all dogs,
( b) An apple is red. dogs in general.
( c) A pencil contains lead.
Plural Count Nouns: 0

( d ) 0 Dogs make good pets. In (d): The speaker is talking about any dog, all dogs,
( e) 0 Apples are red. dogs in general.
( f ) 0 Pencils contain lead.
NOTE: Examples (a) and (d) have the same meaning.
Noncount Nouns: 0
( g ) 0 Fruit is good for you. In (g): The speaker is talking about any fruit, all fruit,
( h ) 0 Coffee contains caffeine. fruit in general.
( i ) I like 0 music.
TO TALK ABOUT NON-SPECIFIC PERSON(S) OR THING(S)
Singular Count Nouns: A/An

( j ) I saw a dog in my yard. In ( j ): The speaker is saying, "I saw one dog (not two
( k ) Mary ate an apple. dogs, some dogs, many dogs). It wasn't a specific dog
( I ) I need a pencil. (e.g., your dog, the neighbor's dog, that dog). It was
only one dog out of the whole group of animals called
dogs."
Plural Count Nouns: Some

(m) I saw some dogs in my yard. In (m): The speaker is saying, "I saw more than one
( n ) Mary bought some apples. dog. They weren't specific dogs (e.g., your dogs, the
( o ) Bob has some pencils in his pocket. neighbor's dogs, those dogs). The exact number of
dogs isn't important (two dogs, five dogs); I'm simply
saying that I saw an indefinite number of dogs:·
See Chart 11-5 for other words that can be used with
plural count nouns, such as several, a few, and a lot of.
Noncount Nouns: Some

( p) I bought some fruit. In (p): The speaker is saying, "I bought an indefinite
( q) Bob drank some coffee. amount of fruit. The exact amount (e.g., two pounds of
( r ) Would you like to listen to some music? fruit, four bananas, and two apples) isn't important.
And I'm not talking about specific fruit (e.g., that fruit,
the fruit in that bowl.)"
See Chart 11-5 for other words that can be used with
noncount nouns, such as a little and a lot of.
306 CHAPTER 11
11·8 Guidelines for Article Usage (continued)
THE SPEAKER AND THE LISTENER ARE THINKING ABOUT THE SAME SPECIFIC PERSON(S) OR THINGS.
Singular Count Nouns: The
( s) Did you feed the dog? In (s): The speaker and the listener are thinking about
( t) Kay is in the kitchen. the same specific dog. The listener knows which dog
(u) The sun is shining. the speaker is talking about: the dog that they own,
(v) Please close the door. the dog that they feed every day. There is only one
(w) The president is speaking on TV tonight. dog that the speaker could possibly be talking about.
( x ) I had a banana and an apple. I gave In (x): A speaker uses the when she/he mentions a
the banana to Mary. noun the second time.
First mention: I had a banana ...
Second mention: I gave the banana ...
In the second mention, the listener now knows which

banana the speaker is talking about: the banana the
speaker had (not the banana John had, not the
banana in that bowl).
Plural Count Nouns: The
( y ) Did you feed the dogs? In (y): The speaker and the listener are thinking about
(z) The pencils on that desk are Jim's. more than one dog, and they are thinking about the
(aa) Please turn off the lights. same specific dogs.
(bb) I had some bananas and apples. I gave In (bb) the is used for second mention.
the bananas to Mary.
Noncount Nouns: The
(cc) The fruit in this bowl is ripe. When the is used with noncount nouns, the speaker
(dd) I can't hear you. The music is too loud. knows or can assume the listener is familiar with and
(ee) The air smells fresh today. thinking about the same specific thing.
(ff) I drank some coffee and some milk. The coffee In (ff): the is used for second mention.
was hot.
NOTE: a, an, and 0 are not possible for the situations
described in (s) through (ff).

Read the following conversations and answer the questions that follow.
A: Dogs make good pets. B: I agree .
Conversation 2
A: I saw some dogs in my yard. B: Oh?
Conversation 3
A: Did you feed the dogs? B: Yes.
1. In which conversation are the speakers thinking about all dogs?

2. In which conversation are the speakers talking about the same dogs?
3. In which conversation are the speakers talking about an indefinite number of dogs?
308 CHAPTER 11
Conversation 4
�
-� Ct<.>
0
6 •
0
A: I ate some fruit. B: Oh?

Conversation 5
A: Fruit is good for you. B: I agree.
Conversation 6
A: The fruit in this bowl is ripe. B: Good.
4. In which conversation are the speakers talking about all fruit?

5. In which conversation are the speakers talking about an indefinite amount of fruit?
6. In which conversation are the speakers thinking about the same fruit?

Read the conversations and decide whether the speakers would probably use the or a/an.
1. A: What did you do last night?

B: I went to a party.
A: Oh? Where was it?
2. A: Did you have a good time at the party last night?

B: Yes.
A: So did I. I'm glad that you decided to go with me.
3. A: Do you have ____ car?

B: No. But I have ____ motorcycle.
4. A: Do you need ____ car today, honey?

B: Yes. I have a lot of errands to do. Why don't I drive you to work today?
A: Okay. But be sure to fill ____ car up with gas sometime today.
5. A: Have you seen my keys?

B: Yes. They're on ____ table next to ____ front door.
6. A: Where's professor?
B: She's absent today.
7. A: Is Mr. Jones graduate student?

B: No. He's professor.
8. A: Would you like to go to ____ zoo this afternoon?

B: Sure. Why not?
9. A: Does San Diego have ____ zoo?

B: Yes. It's world famous.
10. A: Where's Dennis?

B: He's in ____ kitchen.
11. A: Do you like your new apartment?

B: Yes. It has ___ big kitchen.
12. A: Did you lock ____ door?

B: Yes.
A: Did you check ____ stove?
B: Yes.
A: Did you close all ____ windows downstairs?
310 CHAPTER 11
irLanguage.com
B: Yes.
A: Did you set alarm clock?
B: Yes.
A: Then let's turn out lights.
B: Goodnight, dear.
A: Oh, don't forget your appointment with doctor tomorrow.
B: Yes, dear. Goodnight.

Decide if the boldface noun is singular, plural, or noncount. Then decide if it has a general or
specific meaning.
:: Singular Plural Noncount General Specific

1. Birds have feathers. x x
2. A bird has feathers.
3. A bird eats worms.
4. A worm lives under the ground.
5. Birds and worms need water.
6. The bird is drinking water.
7. The birds are drinking water.
8. The water is on the ground.

Complete the sentences with the given nouns. Use the for specific statements. Do not use the
for general statements.
1. flowers a. -�Th=e�n=lo��=e�rs�-- in that vase are beautiful.
b. _F�l�o�we=r=s____ are beautiful.
2. mountains a. _____________ are beautiful.

b. _____________ in Switzerland are beautiful.
3. water a. I don't want to go swimming today. _________ is too

cold.
b. _________ consists of hydrogen and oxygen.
4. information a. _____________ in this magazine article is upsetting.

b. The Internet is a widely used source of _________
5. health a. ___________ is more important than money.

b. Doctors are concerned with _________ of their patients.

6. men a. _________ generally have stronger muscles than
women
b. At the party last night, _________ sat on one side of the
room, and _________ sat on the other.
7. problems a. Everyone has

b. Irene told me about _ _ ______ she had with her car
yesterday.
8. vegetables a. _______________ we had for dinner last night

were overcooked.
b. --------------- are good for you.

Read the passage. Then cover it with a piece of paper and complete the sentences.
Money
In ancient times, people did not use coins for money. Instead, shells, beads, or salt were
used. Around 2,600 years ago, the first metal coins were made. Today most money is made
from paper. Of course, many people use plastic credit or debit cards to pay for goods. In the
future, maybe we'll use only cards, and paper money won't exist.
1. In ancient times, two forms of money were -----------------
2. People first made -------------------- 2,600 years ago.
3. Nowadays, paper is used for ----------------------
4. Today people can pay for goods with _________ or _________
5. In the future, ___________ may replace ___________

Complete the sentences with the or 0. Capitalize the beginning of sentences as necessary.
1. �11�_·_ �utter is a dairy product.
2. Please pass me ____ butter.
3. ____ air is humid today.
4. When I was in Memorial Hospital, ____ nurses were wonderful.
5. I'm studying ____ grammar. I'm also studying ____ vocabulary.
6. ____ trees reduce ____ pollution by cleaning the air.

7. ____ trees in my yard are 200 years old.
312 CHAPTER 11
Complete the sentences with a/an, the, or some.
1. I had a banana and an apple. I gave the banana to Mary. I ate the
apple.
2. I had _____ bananas and ______ apples. I gave _____
bananas to Mary. I ate _____ apples.
3. I forgot to bring my things with me to class yesterday, so I borrowed _____ pen

and _____ paper from Joe. I returned ______ pen, but I used
_____ paper for my homework.
4. A: What did you do last weekend?

B: I went on _____ picnic Saturday and saw _____ movie Sunday.
A: Did you have fun?
B: _____ picnic was fun, but ______ movie was boring.
5. I bought _____ bag offlour and _____ sugar to make _ _____
cookies. _____ sugar was okay, but I had to return _____ flour. When
I opened it, I found _____ little bugs in it. I took it back to the people at the
store and showed them _____ little bugs. They gave me _____ new
bag of flour. new bag didn't have any bugs in it.
o
IJ Exercise 34. Listening. (Chart 11- 8)
Listen to the passage. Then listen again and write a/an, the, or 0. Before you begin, you may
want to check your understanding of these words: roof (ofyour mouth), nerves, blood vessels,
CD2
Track 43 avoz"d
Ice-Cream Headaches
Have you ever eaten something really cold like ice cream and suddenly gotten _a�--
1
headache? This is known as _ ___ "ice-cream headache." About 30 percent of the
population gets this type of ___ headache. Here is one theory about why ___
4

ice-cream headaches occur. ____ roof of your mouth has a lot of nerves. W hen
something cold touches these nerves, they want to warm up ____ your brain. They
make ____ your blood vessels swell up (get bigger), and this causes ____ lot of pain.
7 8
____ ice-cream headaches generally go away after about 30-60 seconds. _ __ best
9 10
way to avoid these headaches is to keep cold food off ____ roof of your mouth.
11
o Exercise 35. Looking at grammar. (Chapter 11- 8)

Write a/an, the, or 0 in the blanks.
1. I have ____.a.,____ window in my bedroom. I keep it open at night because I like fresh air.
The window is above my bed.
2. Kathy likes to listen to ____ music when she studies.
3. Would you please turn ____ radio down? ____ music is too loud.
4. Last week I read ____ book about ____ life of Indira Gandhi, India's only
female prime minister, who was assassinated in 1984.
5. Let's go swimming in ____ lake today.
6. ____ water is essential to human life, but don't drink ____ water in the Flat
River. It'll kill you! ____ pollution in that river is terrible.
7. People can drink ____ fresh water. They can't drink ____ seawater because it
contains ____ salt.
8. Ted, pass ____ salt, please. And ____ pepper. Thanks.
9. A: How did you get here? Did you walk?

B: No, I took ____ taxi.
10. A: Wow! What a great meal!

B: I agree. ____ food was excellent - especially ____ fish. And ____
service was exceptionally good. Let's leave ____ waitress a good tip.
11. A: Kids, get in ____ car, please.

B: We can't. doors are locked.
314 CHAPTER 11
0 Exercise 36. Warm· up. (Chart 11 -9)
Complete the questions with the or 0.
Would you like to see . .
1. the Amazon River? 6. Australia?
2. fJ Korea? 7. Mississippi River?
3. Mexico City? 8. Red Sea?
4. Indian Ocean? . 9. Lake Michigan?
5. Ural Mountains? 10. Mount Fuji?
11·9 Using The or 0 with Names

( a) We met 0 Mr. Wang. The is NOT used with titled names.
I know 0 Doctor Smith. INCORRECT: We met the Mr. Wang.
0 President Rice has been in the news.
( b) He lives in 0 Europe. The is NOT used with the names of continents.

0 Asia is the largest continent. INCORRECT: He lives in the Europe.
Have you ever been to 0 Africa?
( c) He lives in 0 France. The is NOT used with the names of most countries.
0 Brazil is a large country. INCORRECT: He lives in the France.
Have you ever been to 0 Thailand?
The is used in the names of only a few countries, as
(d) He lives in the United States. in (d). Others: the Czech Republic, the United Arab
The t:Jetherlands is in Europe. Emirates, the Dominican Republic.
Have you ever been to the Philippines?
(e) He lives in 0 Paris. The is NOT used with the names of cities.
0 New York is the largest city in the United States. INCORRECT: He lives in the Paris.
Have you ever been to 0 Istanbul?
(f) The Nile River is long. The is used with the names of rivers, oceans, and
They crossed the Pacific Ocean. seas.
The Yellow Sea is in Asia. The is NOT used with the names of lakes.
(g) Chicago is on 0 Lake Michigan.
0 Lake Titicaca lies on the border between Peru
and Bolivia.
( h) We hiked in the Alps. The is used with the names of mountain ranges.
The Andes are in South America. The is NOT used with the names of individual
( i ) He climbed 0 Mount Everest mountains.
0 Mount Fuji is in Japan.

Work in teams. Complete the sentences with the or 0. T hen decide if the statements are true
or false. Circle "T" for true and "F" for false. The team with the most correct answers wins.*
1. ____ Moscow is the biggest city ____ Russia. T F
2. ____ Rhine River flows through ____ Germany. T F
3. ____ Vienna is in ____ Australia. T F
4. ____ Yangtze is the longest river in ____ Asia. T F
5. ____ Atlantic Ocean is bigger than ____ Pacific. T F
6. ____ Rocky Mountains are located in ____ Canada
and ____ United States. T F
7. ____ Dr. Sigmund Freud is famous for his studies of astronomy. T F
8. ____ Lake Victoria is located in ____ Tanzania. T F
9. Another name for ____ Holland is ____ Netherlands. T F
10. ____ Swiss Alps are the tallest mountains in the world. T F

Work in groups. Choose a place in the world. It can be a continent, country, city, sea, river,
mountain, etc. Your classmates will try to guess where it is by asking yes/no questions. Limit
the number of questions to ten for each place.
Example:
SPEAKERA: (thinking of the Mediterranean Sea)
SPEAKER B: Is it a continent?
SPEAKERA: No.
SPEAKER C: Is it hot?
SPEAKERA: No.
SPEAKER D: Is it big?
SPEAKERA: Yes.
Etc.
o Exercise 39. Warm· up. (Chart 11-1 O)

1. I was born in ___________
(continent)
2. I have lived most of my life in ___________
(country)
3. This term I am studying -----------------------
4. Two of my favorite movies are -------------------- and
316 CHAPTER 11
11-10 Capitalization
Capitalize
1. The first word of a sentence We saw a movie last night. Capitalize = use a big letter, not a
It was very good. small letter
2. The names of people I met George Adams yesterday.
3. Titles used with the names of I saw Doctor (Dr.) Smith. I saw a doctor. BUT
people There's Professor (Prof.) Lee. I saw.Doctor Wilson.
4. Months, days, holidays I was born in April. NOTE: Seasons are not capitalized:
Bob arrived last Monday. spring, summer, fall/autumn, winter.
It snowed on New Year's Day.
5. The names of places:

city He lives in Chicago. She lives in a city. BUT
state/province She was born in California. She lives in New York City.
country They are from Mexico.
continent Tibet is in Asia.
ocean They crossed the Atlantic Ocean. They crossed a river.
lake Chicago is on Lake Michigan. They crossed the Yellow River.
river The Nile River flows north.
desert The Sahara Desert is in Africa.
mountain We visited the Rocky Mountains.
school I go to the University of Florida. I go to a university. BUT
business I work for the Boeing Company. I go to the University of Texas.
street He lives on Grand Avenue. We went to a park. BUT
building We have class in Ritter Hall. We went to Central Park.
park, zoo I went jogging in Forest Park.
6. The names of courses I'm taking Chemistry 101. Here's your history book. BUT
I'm taking History 101.
7. The titles of books, articles, Gone with the Wind Capitalize the first word of a title.
movies The Sound of the Mountain Capitalize all other words except
articles (the, a/an), coordinating
conjunctions (and, but, or), and
short prepositions (with, in, at, etc.).
8. The names of languages and She speaks Spanish. Words that refer to the names of
nationalities We discussed Japanese customs. languages and nationalities are
always capitalized.
9. The names of religions Buddhism, Christianity, Hinduism, Words that refer to the names of
Islam, and Judaism are major religions are always capitalized.
religions in the world.
Talal is a Muslem.

o Exercise 40. Looking at grammar.· (Chart 11-1 O)
Add capital letters where necessary. Some sentences need no changes.
1. We're going to have a test next juesday.
2. Do you know richard smith? he is a professor at this university.
3. I know that professor smith teaches at the university of arizona.
4. W here was your mother born?
5. John is a catholic. ali is a muslem.
6. Anita speaks french. she studied in france for two years.
7. I'm taking a history course this semester.
8. I'm taking modern european history 101 this semester.
9. We went to vancouver, british columbia, for our vacation last summer.
10. Venezuela is a spanish-speaking country.
11. Canada is in north america. *
12. Canada is north of the united states.
13. The sun rises in the east.
14. The mississippi river flows south.
15. The amazon is a river in south america.
16. We went to a zoo. We went to brookfield zoo in chicago.
17. The title of this book is fundamentals of english grammar.
18. I enjoy studying english grammar.
19. On valentine's day (february 14th), sweethearts give each other presents.
20. I read a book called the cat and the mouse in my aunt's house.
*When north, south, east, and west refer to the direction on a compass, they are not capitalized: Japan is east of China.
When they are part of a geographical name, they are capitalized: Japan is in the Far East.
318 CHAPTER 11
irLanguage.com
D Exercise 41. Grammar, reading, and writing. (Chapter 11) irLanguage.com

Part I. Read the passage. Add capital letters as necessary.
Jane Goodall
(1) Do you recognize the name/ane goodall? Perhaps you know her for her studies of
chimpanzees. She became very famous from her work in tanzania.
(2) Jane goodall was born in england, and as a child, was fascinated by animals. Her
favorite books were the jungle book, by rudyard kipling, and books about tarzan, a fictional
character who was raised by apes.
(3) Her childhood dream was to go to africa. After high school, she worked as a secretary
and a waitress to earn enough money to go there. During that time, she took evening courses in
journalism and english literature. She saved every penny until she had enough money for a trip
to africa.
(4) In the spring of 1957, she sailed through the red sea and southward down the african
c_oast to mombasa in kenya. Her uncle had arranged a job for her in nairobi with a british
company. When she was there, she met dr. louis leakey, a famous anthropologist. Under his
guidance, she began her lifelong study of chimpanzees on the eastern shore of lake tanganyika.
(5) Jane goodall lived alone in a tent near the lake. Through months and years of patience,
she won the trust of the chimps and was able to watch them closely. Her observations changed
forever how we view chimpanzees - and all other animals we share the world with.

Part II. Read the passage again and then read these stateme�ts. Circle "T" for true and "F"
for false.
1. Jane Goodall was interested in animals from an early age. T F
2. Her parents paid for her trip to Africa. T F
3. She studied animals in zoos as well as chimpanzees in the wild. T F
4. Dr. Leakey was helpful to Jane Goodall. T F
5. Jane studied chimpanzees with many other people. T F
6. Goodall's work changed how chimpanzees look at the world. T F
Part 111. Read the sample paragraph about the organization called Roots and Shoots. T hen
write your own paragraph about an organization that is doing something to help people or
animals. Focus on correct article usage and capitalization. Note the articles in green in the
passage. Follow these steps:
(1) Choose an organization you are interested in.
(2) Research the organization. Find the organization's website if possible. Take notes on
the information you find. Include information about its history, why it was formed,
the person or people who formed it, and its goals.
(3) Review Chart 11-10 and check your paragraph for proper capitalization.
(4) Edit your paragraph for article use. You may also want to ask another student to
read it.
Example:
Roots and Shoots

Jane Goodall went to Africa to study animals. She spent 40 years observing and
studying chimpanzees in Tanzania. As a result of Dr. Goodall's work, an organization
called Roots and Shoots was formed. This organization focuses on work children and
teenagers can do to help the local and global community. The idea began in 1991. A
group of 16 teenagers met with Dr. Goodall at her home in Dar Es Salaam, Tanzania.
They wanted to discuss how to help with a variety of problems, such as pollution,
deforestation, the treatment of animals, and the future of wildlife, like Dr. Goodall's
chimpanzees. Dr. Goodall was involved in the meetings, but the teenagers chose the
service projects and did the work themselves. The first Roots and Shoots community
project was a local one. The group educated villagers about better treatment of chickens
at home and in the marketplace. Today, there are tens of thousands of members in
almost 100 countries. They work to make their environment and the world a better place
through community-service projects.
320 CHAPTER 11
o Exercise 1. Warm -up. (Chart 12- 1 >
Check (./) the completions that are true for you.
I have a friend who . . .
1. lives near me. 3. __ likes to do exciting things.
2. is interested in soccer. 4. __ is studying to be an astronaut.
12· 1 Adjective Clauses: Introduction

Adjectives Adjective Clauses
An adjective modifies a noun. Modify means to An adjective clause* modifies a noun. It describes or
change a little. An adjective describes or gives gives information about a noun.
information about the noun. (See Chart 6-8, p. 160.)
An adjective usually comes in front of a noun. An adjective clause follows a noun.
adjective + noun noun + adjective clause

.--------,
(a) I met a 'kind' 'man'. (c) I met a man 'who is kind to everybody.'
adjective + noun noun + adjective clause
.--------,
(b) I met a 'famous' 'man'. (d) I met a man who is a famous poet
noun + adjective clause
.--------,
(e) I met a man who lives in Chicago.'
*GRAMMAR TERMINOLOGY
(1) I met a man = an independent clause; it is a A clause is a structure that has a subject and a verb.
complete sentence. There are two kinds of clauses: Independent and
(2) He lives in Chicago = an independent clause; dependent.
it is a complete sentence. • An independent clause is a main clause and can
(3) who lives in Chicago= a dependent clause; stand alone as a sentence, as in (1) and (2).
it is NOT a complete sentence. • A dependent clause, as in (3), cannot stand alone
(4) I met a man who lives in Chicago = an as a sentence. It must be connected to an
independent clause + a dependent clause; independent clause, as in (4).
a complete sentence.
321
o Exercise 2. looking at grammar. (Chart 12- 1 >
Check(/) the items that have complete sentences.
1. __ I know a teenager. She flies airplanes.
2. __ · I know a teenager who flies airplanes.
3. __ A teenager who flies airplanes.
4. __ Who flies airplanes.
5. __ Who flies airplanes?
6. __ I know a teenager flies airplanes.

Complete the sentences with the correct words from the list. Underline the word that follows
doctor in each sentence.
A dermatologist An orthopedist A pediatrician A surgeon
1. ------------- is a doctor who performs operations.

2. _____________ is a doctor that treats skin problems.
3. _____________ is a doctor who treats bone injuries.
4. _____________ is a doctor that treats children.
12·2 Using Who and That in Adjective Clauses

to Describe Peo�le www.irLanguage.com
In adjective clauses, who and that are used as subject
s v
pronouns to describe people.
(a) The man is friendly. He lives next to me.
i In (a): He is a subject pronoun. He refers to "the man."
who To make an adjective clause, change he to who.
i Who is a subject pronoun. Who refers to "the man."
s v
who lives next to me
(b) The man who lives next to me is friendly.
v That is also a subject pronoun and can replace who, as

s
(c) The woman is talkative. She lives next to me. in (d).
i The subject pronouns who and that cannot be omitted
that from an adjective clause.
i INCORRECT: The woman lives next to me is talkative.
s v As subject pronouns, both who and that are common in
that lives next to me conversation, but who is more common in writing.
(d) The woman that lives next to me is talkative. In (b) and (d): The adjective clause immediately follows
the noun it modifies.
INCORRECT: The woman is talkative that lives next
to me.
322 CHAPTER 12
o Exercise 4. Looking at grammar. (Chart 12·2>
Circle the two sentences that express the ideas in the given sentence.
1. The librarian who helped me with my research lives near my parents.
a. The librarian lives near my parents.
b. I live near my parents.
c. The librarian helped my parents.
d. The librarian helped me.
2. The veterinarian that took care of my daughter's goat was very gentle.
a. The veterinarian took care of my goat.
b. The goat was gentle.
c. The veterinarian treated my daughter's goat.
d. The veterinarian was gentle.
o Exercise 5. Looking at grammar. (Charts 12· 1 and 12·2)

Underline each adjective clause. Draw an arrow to the noun it modifies.
1. The hotel clerk who gave us our room keys speaks several languages.
2. The manager that hired me has less experience than I do.
3. I like the manager that works in the office next to mine.
4. My mother is a person who wakes up every morning with a positive attitude.
5. A person who wakes up with a positive attitude every day is lucky.
o Exercise 6. Looking at grammar. (Charts 12· 1 and 12·2)

Change the b. sentences to adjective clauses. Combine each pair of sentences with who
or that.
Example: a. Do you know the people? b. They live in the house on the corner.
---+ Do you know the people who (or that) live in the white house?
1. a. The police officer was friendly. b. She gave me directions.
2. a. The waiter was slow. b. He served us dinner.
3. a. I talked to the women. b. They walked into my office.
4. a. The man talked a lot. b. He sat next to me on the plane.
5. a. The people have three cars. b. They live next to me.
o Exercise 7. Looking at grammar. (Charts 12-1 and 12·2)

Add who or that as necessary.
who
1. I liked the people A sat next to us at the soccer game.
2. The man answered the phone was polite.
Adjective Clauses 323

3. People paint houses for a living are called house painters.
4. I'm uncomfortable around married couples argue all the time.
5. W hile I was waiting at the bus stop, I stood next to an elderly man started a conversation
with me about my school.

Work in pairs or small groups. Complete the sentences. Make true statements. Share some of
your sentences with the class.
1. I know a man/woman who .... 4. Workers who ... are brave.
2. · I have a friend who .... 5. People who ... make me laugh.
3. I like athletes who .... 6. Doctors who ... are admirable.

1. The teacher that I had for first grade was _________________
2. The first English teacher I had was -------------------
3. The first English teacher who I had wasn't ______ _ ________
12·3 Using Object P�onouns in Adjective Clauses

to Describe Peqple
In adjective clauses, pronouns are used as the object of a
S V O
I met him verb to describe people.
(a) The man was friendly.
t In (a): him is an object pronoun. Him refers to '�he man."
that One way to make an adjective clause is to change him to
that. That is the object pronoun. That refers to '�he man."
O S V
That comes at the beginning of an adjective clause.
(b) The man that I met was friendly.
(c) The man 0 I met was friendly. An object pronoun can be omitted from an adjective clause,
as in (c).
S V O
Him can also be changed to who or whom, as in
(d) The man was friendly. I met (e) and (f).
him.
t As an object pronoun, that is more common than who in
who speaking. 0 is the most common choice for both speaking
whom and writing.
Whom is generally used only in very formal writing.
O S V
(e) The man who I met was friendly.
(f) The man whom I met was friendly.
324 CHAPTER 12
Check(./) the sentences that have object pronouns.
1. _.L_ The children who we invited to the party are from the neighborhood.
2. __ The children that we invited to the party were excited to come.
3. __ The children whom we invited to the party had a good time.
4. The children who live next door are a lot of fun.
5. __ Marie and Luis Escobar still keep in touch with many of the students that they met
in their English class five years ago.
6. __ People who listen to loud music on earphones can suffer gradual hearing loss.
7. __ I know a couple who sailed around the world.
8. __ The couple whom we had over for dinner sailed around the world.

Circle all the correct completions.
1. The woman __ was interesting.
a. that I met last night c. who I met last night
b. I met last night d. whom I met last night
2. The man was fast.
a. that painted our house c. who painted our house
b. painted our house d. whom painted
3. The people __ live on Elm Street.
a. that Nadia is visiting c. who Nadia is visiting
b. Nadia is visiting d. whom Nadia is visiting
4. The students __ missed the quiz.
a. that came to class late c. who came to class late
b. came to class late d. whom came to class late

Combine each pair of sentences with that) who) or whom. Underline the object pronouns in
the b. sentences and change the sentences to adjective clauses.
Example: a. A woman asked me for my phone number b. I didn't know her.
.-. A woman that/whom I didn't know asked me for my phone number.
1. a. The couple was two hours late. b. I invited them for dinner.
2. a. The man snored the entire flight. b. I sat next to him on the plane.
3. a. The man tried to shoplift some groceries. b. The police arrested him.
4. a. The chef is very experienced. b. The company hired her.

...

o Exercise 13. Let's talk: pairwork . (Charts 12-2 and 12-3)
Work with a partner. Take turns making adjective clauses by combining the given sentences
with the main sentence.
Main sentence:· The man was helpful.
1. He gave me directions. -4 The man who/that gave me directions was helpful.
2. He answered my question.
3. I called him.
4. You recommended him.
5. He is the owner.
6. You invited him to the party.
7. He was walking with his kids.
8. I saw him in the waiting room.
9. He sold us our museum tickets.
10. He gave us a discount.

Complete the sentences with that, 0, who, or whom. Write all the possible completions.
1. The man _____________ married my mother is now my stepfather.
2. The man _____________ my mother married is now my stepfather.
3. Do you know the boy _____________ is talking to Anita?
4. I've become good friends with several of the people _____________

I met in my English class last year.
5. A woman -----·------ I saw in the park was holding several balloons.
6. The woman _____________ was holding several balloons was

entertaining some children.

Read the paragraph about James and then check (v') the sentences that you agree with. What
do you notice about the adjective clauses in green?
James is looking for a pet. He is single and a little lonely. He isn't sure what kind of pet
would be best for him. He lives on a large piece of property in the country. He is gone during
the day from 8:00 A.M. to 5:00 P.M. but is home on weekends. He travels about two months a
year but has neighbors that can take care of a pet, as long as it isn't too big. What kind of pet
should he get?
1. __ He should get a pet that likes to run and be outside, like a dog.
2. __ He needs to get a pet which is easy to take care of, like a fish or turtle.
3. __ He should get an animal that he can leave alone for a few days, like a horse.
4. __ He needs to get an animal his neighbors will like.
326 CHAPTER 12
12·4 Using
� Pronouns in Adjective Clauses to Describe Things
- --�
Who and whom refer to people.

s v
Which refers to things.
(a) The river is polluted. It flows through the town.
That can refer to either people or things.
i
that In (a): To make an adjective clause, change itto
which that or which. It, that, and which all refer to a
thing (the river).
s v
(b) The river that flows through the town is polluted. (b) and (c) have the same meaning, but (b) is
(c) The river which flows through the town is polluted. more common than (c) in speaking and writing.
When that and which are used as the subject of

an adjective clause, they CANNOT be omitted.
INCORRECT: The river flows through the town is
polluted.
S V O That or which can be used as an object in an

(d} The books were expensive. I bought them. adjective clause, as in (e) and (f).
i
that An object pronoun can be omitted from an
which adjective clause, as in (g).
(e), (f), and (g) have the same meaning. In
O S V speaking, that and 0 are more common than
(e) The books that I bought were expensive. which. In writing, that is the most common, and
(0 The books which I bought were expensive. 0 is rare.
(g) The books 0 I bought were expensive.

Underline each adjective clause. Draw an arrow to the noun it modifies.
1. I lost the scarf that I borrowed from my roommate.
2. The food we ate at the sidewalk cafe was delicious.
3. The bus that I take to school every morning is usually very crowded.
4. Pizza which is sold by the slice is a popular lunch in many cities throughout the world.
5. Piranhas are dangerous fish that can tear the flesh off an animal as large as a horse in a few
minutes.
irLanguage.com
D &:ercise 11. looking ,at ,grammar. :(Chart 12-4)
Combine each pair of sentences into one sentence. Give all possible forms.
1. a. The pill made me sleepy. b. I took it.
-+ The pill that I took made me sleepy.
-+ The pill 0 I took made me sleepy.
-+ The pill which I took made me sleepy.
2. a. The soup was too salty. b. I had it for lunch.
3. a. I have a class. b. It begins at 8:00 A.M.
4. a. The information helped me a lot. b. I found it on the Internet.
5. a. My daughter asked me a question. b. I couldn't answer it.
6. a. Where can I catch the bus? b. It goes downtown.
o !Exercise 18. ·Looking at grammat (Charts J 2-3 and 12-.4)

Cross out the incorrect pronouns in the adjective clauses.
1. The books I bought them-at the bookstore were expensive.
2. I like the shirt you wore it to class yesterday.
3. Amanda Jones is a person I would like you to meet her.
4. The apartment we wanted to rent it had two bedrooms.
5. My wife and I are really enjoying the TV set that we bought it for our anniversary.
6. The woman you met her at Aunt Barbara's house is an Olympic athlete.
7. Ayako has a cat that it likes to catch mice.
8. The mice that Ayako's cat catches them live in the basement.
o Exercise 19. Looking CLt grammar. {Charis ·12-·2 -12-4)

Write all the pronouns that can be used to connect the adjective clauses to the main clauses:
that, who, which, or whom. If the pronoun can be omitted, use 0.
Example: The manager � fired Tom is a difficult person to work for.
D
�
I. The box I mailed to my sister was heavy.
2. The people D sat in the stadium cheered for the home team.
328 <CHAPTER 11'2

D
D
3. The calendar hangs in Paul's office has pictures of his kids.
D
4. The teenagers returned the wallet they found on the sidewalk.
5. The people my brother called didn't answer their phone.
D
6. The tree branch was lying in the street caused problems for drivers.
o Exercise 20. Listening. (Charts 12-2 ..... 12-4)

(J
CD2
Listen to the sentences. They all have adjective clauses. Circle the words you hear. If there is no
subject or object pronoun, choose 0. NOTE: In spoken English, that often sounds like "thut."
Track 44
My mother's hospital stay
Example: You will hear: The doctor who treated my mother was very knowledgeable.
You will choose: � that which whom 0
1. who that which whom 0
0 Exercise 21. Let 1s talk. (Charts 12-1 ..... 12-4)

Answer the questions in complete sentences. Use any appropriate pattern of adjective clause.
Use the with the noun that is modified by the adjective clause.
1. • One phone wasn't ringing.
• The other phone was ringing.
QUESTIONS: Which phone did Hasan answer? Which phone didn't he answer?
..... Hasan answered the phone that was ringing.
..... He didn't answer the phone that wasn't ringing.
2. • One student raised her hand in class.
• Another student sat quietly in his seat.
QUESTIONS: Which student asked the teacher a question? Which one didn't?
Adjective Clauses 329 ·

3. • One girl won the bike race.
• The other girl lost the bike race.
QUESTIONS: Which girl is happy? Which girl isn't happy?
4. • We ate some food from our garden.

• We ate some food at a restaurant.
QUESTIONS: Which food was expensive? Which food wasn't expensive?
5. One man was sleeping.

• Another man was listening to the radio.
QUESTIONS: Which man heard the special report about the earthquake in China? Which
one didn't?
6. • One person bought a small car.
• Another person bought a large car.
QUESTIONS: Which person probably spent more money than the other?
o Exercise 22. Game. (Charts 12-3 and 12-4)

Work in teams. Complete each phrase in Column A with the correct phrase in Column B by
using that or who. Check your dictionary if necessary. The team that finishes first and has
the most grammatically correct sentences wins.
Column A ColumnB
1. A hammer is a tool .... that is used a. She/He leaves society and lives completely
to pound nails. alone.
A
2. comedian is someone .... b. He/She tells jokes.
3. An obstetrician is a doctor .... c. It forms when water boils.
4. Plastic is a chemical material .... d. It is square at the bottom and has four sides
5. An architect is someone .... that come together in a point at the top.
6. A puzzle is a problem .... e. She/He designs buildings.
7. A carnivore is an animal .... f. He/She delivers babies.
8. Steam is a gas .... .lg. It is used to pound nails.
9. A turtle is an animal .... h. It can be shaped and hardened to form
10. A hermit is a person .... many useful things.
1. It can be difficult to solve.
11. A pyramid is a structure ....
J. It eats meat.
k. It has a hard shell and can live in water or
on land.

Read the sentences. What do you notice about the verbs in green and the nouns that precede
them?
1. I have a friend who is vegetarian. He doesn't eat any meat.
2. I have friends who are vegetarian. They don't eat any meat.
330 CHAPTER 12
12· 5 Singular and Plural Verbs in Adjective Clauses
- -. - -- --- --- - -- �
-
-- - ---- - �- - -- -�- -�- -- -
(a) I know the man who is sitting over there. In (a): The verb in the adjective clause (Is) is singular
because who refers to a singular noun, man.
(b) I know the people who are sitting over there. In (b): The verb in the adjective clause (are) is plural·
because who refers to a plural noun, people.

Circle the correct word in parentheses. Underline the noun that determines whether the verb
should be singular or plural.
1. A saw is a tool that(@ are) used to cut wood.
2. Shovels are tools that(isJ are) used to dig holes.
3. I recently met a woman that(liveJ lives) in Montreal.
4. Most people that(liveJ lives) in Montreal speak French as their first language.
5. I have a cousin who (worksJ work) as a coal miner.

6. Some coal miners that(worksJ work) underground suffer from lung disease.
7. A professional athlete who(playJ plays) tennis is called a tennis pro.
8. Professional athletes who(playJ plays) tennis for a living can make a lot of money.
9. Biographies are books which(tellsJ tell ) the stories of people's lives.
10. A book that(tellsJ tell ) the story of a person's life is called a biography.
11. I talked to the men who (wasJ were) sitting near me.
12. The woman that(wasJ were) sitting next to me at the movie was texting on her cell phone.

1. A person that I recently spoke to was ------------------
2. A person whom I recently spoke to wasn't ----------------
3. The room which we are sitting in is -------------------
4. The room we are sitting in has ---- ------------ ----
5. The room in which we are sitting doesn't have ---------------
i
12·6 Using Prepositi 1ns in Adjective Clauses
PREP OBJ That, whom, and which can be used as the object
(a) The man was nice. I talked to him. (OBJ)of a preposition (PREP) in an adjective clause.
OBJ
REMINDER: An object pronoun can be omitted from an
PREP
(b) The man that I talked to was nice. adjective clause, as in (c) and (h).
(c) The man 0 I talked to was nice. In very formal English, a preposition comes at the
(d) The man whom I talked to was nice. beginning of an adjective clause, followed by either
PREP OBJ
whom or which, as in (e) and 0). This is not common
(e) The man to whom I talked was nice. in spoken English.
NOTE: In (e) and 0), that or who cannot be used, and

the pronoun CANNOT be omitted.
PREP OBJ (b), (c), (d), and (e) have the same meaning.
( f ) The chair is hard. I am sitting in it.
(g), (h), (i), and 0) have the same meaning.
OBJ PREP
(g) The chair that I am sitting in is hard.
(h) The chair 0 I am sitting in is hard.
( i) The chair which I am sitting in is hard.
PREP OBJ
( j ) The chair in which I am sitting is hard.

Change the b. sentences to adjective clauses. Combine each pair of sentences. Give all the
possible forms of these clauses and underline them.
1. a. The movie was funny. b. We went to it.
- The movie that we went to was funny.
- The movie 0 we went to was funny.
- The movie which we went to was funny.
- The movie to which we went was funny.
2. a. The man is over there. b. I told you about him.
332 CHAPTER 12
3. a. The woman pays me a fair salary. b. I work for her.
4. a. Alicia likes the family. b. She is living with them.
5. a. The picture is beautiful. b. Tom is looking at it.
6. a. I enjoyed the music. b. We listened to it ·after dinner.

Complete the sentences with appropriate prepositions.* Draw brackets around the adjective
clauses.
1. I spoke to a person. The person [I spoke _t=o,._____ ] was friendly.
2. We went ____ a movie. The movie we went ____ was very good.
3. We stayed ____ a motel. The motel we stayed ____ was clean and
comfortable.
4. We listened ____ a new CD. I enjoyed the new CD we listened ____

5. Sally was waiting ____ a person. The person Sally was waiting ____
never came.
6. I talked a man. The man ____ whom I talked was helpful.
7. I never found the book that I was looking ____
8. The interviewer wanted to know the name of the college I had graduated ____
9. Oscar likes the Canadian family whom he is staying.
10. The man who is staring us looks unfriendly.
11. My sister and I have the same ideas about almost everything. She is the one person
____ whom I almost always agree.
12. What's the name of the person you introduced me ____ at the restaurant last night?
I've already forgotten.
13. My father is someone I've always been able to depend ____ when I need advice
or help.
14. The person you waved ____ is waving back at you.
15. Your building supervisor is the person ____ whom you should complain if you have
any problems with your apartment.
*See Appendix 2 for a list of preposition combinations.

D Exercise 28. Listening. (Charts 12-1 - 12-6)
{i
Listen to the sentences and choose all the true statements.
en 2
Example: You will hear: The university I want to attend is in New York.
@ I want to go to a university.
Track 45
You will choose:
b. I live in New York.
@ The university is in New York.
1. a. The plane is leaving Denver.
b. I'm taking a plane.
c. The plane leaves at 7:00 A.M.
2. a. Stores are expensive.
b. Good vegetables are always expensive.
c. The best vegetables are at an expensive store.
3. a. My husband made eggs.
b. My husband made breakfast.
c. The eggs were cold.
4. a. I sent an email.
b. Someone wanted my bank account number.
c. An email had my bank account number.
5. a. The hotel clerk called my wife.
b. The speaker spoke with the hotel clerk.
c. The hotel room is going to have a view.
o Exercise 29. Reading and grammar. (Charts 12-1-12-6)

Part I. Answer the questions and then read the passage. Write the nouns that the pronouns
refer to.
Have you ever visited or lived in another country?
What differences did you notice?
What customs did you like? What customs seemed strange to you?
An Exchange Student in Ecuador
Hiraki is from Japan. When he was sixteen, he spent four months in South America. He
stayed with a family who lived near Quito, Ecuador. Their way of life was very different from
l
his. At first, many things that they did and said seemed strange to Hiraki: their eating customs,
2
political views, ways of showing feelings, work habits, sense of humor, and more. He felt
homesick for people who were more similar to him in their customs and habits.
3
As time went on, Hiraki began to appreciate* the way of life that his host family had.
4
Many activities which he did with them began to feel natural, and he developed a strong
5
*appreciate= to understand a situation more completely
334 CHAPTER 12
friendship with them. At the beginning of his stay in Ecuador, he had noticed only the customs
and habits that were different between his host family and himself. At the end, he appreciated
6
the many things which they also had in common.
7
1. who
2. that
3. who
4. that
5. which
6. that
7. which
Part II. Complete the sentences with information from the passage.
1. One thing that Hiroki found strange ___________________
2. At first, he wanted to be with people -------------------
3. After a while, he began to better understand _________________
4. At the end of his stay, he saw many things _________________

Check (./) all the sentences that are true about the given statement.
We spoke with someone whose house burned down.
1. Our house burned down.
2. __ Another person's house burned down.
3. Someone told us our house burned down.
4. Someone told us their house burned down.
5. Someone burned down their house.

12 • 7 Using Whose in Adjective Clauses
Whose* shows possession.
(a) The man called the police. His car was stolen. In (a): His car can be changed to whose car to
t make an adjective clause.
whose car
In (b): whose car was stolen= an adjective
(b) The man whose car was stolen called the police. clause.
In (c): Her brother can be changed to whose

(c) I know a girl. Her brother is a movie star.
brother to make an adjective clause.
whose brother
(d) I know a girl whose brother is a movie star.
In (e): Their house can be changed to whose

(e) The people were friendly. We bought their house.
house to make an adjective clause.
t
whose house
( f) The people whose house we bought were friendly.
*Whose and who's have the same pronunciation but NOT the same meaning.
Who's = who is: Who's (Who is) your teacher?

Combine each pair of sentences. Follow these steps:
(1) Underline the possessive adjective in sentence b.
(2) Draw an arrow to the noun it refers to in sentence a.
(3) Replace the possessive adjective with whose.
(4) Place whose+ the noun (that follows) after the noun you drew an arrow to (in Step 2).
(5) Complete the whose phrase by using the rest of the words from sentence b., and make
one sentence.
��-- whose
Examples: a. The woman is taking some time off from work. b. Her baby is sick.
-+ The woman whose baby is sick is taking some time offfrom work.
whose
a. The man said there isn't a lot of damage. b. You hit his car.
---+ The man whose car you hit said there isn't a lot of damage.
1. a. The C.E.O.* is resigning. b. His company lost money.

2. a. Let me introduce you to the woman. b. Her company is hiring right now.
3. a. I talked to the couple. b. Their house was burglarized.
4. a. The child is fine. b. You stepped on her foot.
5. a. The man is on the phone. b. You found his cell phone.
*C.E. 0. = chief executive officer or head of a company
336 CHAPTER 12
Work with a partner. Take turns changing the b. sentences to adjective clauses by combining
each pair of sentences with whose.
SITUATION: You and your friend are at a party. You are telling your friend about the people at
the party.
1. a. There is the man. b. His car was stolen.

- There is the man whose car was stolen.
2. a. There is the woman. b. Her husband writes movie scripts.

3. a. Over there is the man. b. His daughter is in my English class.
4. a. Over there is the woman. b. You met her sister yesterday.
5. a. There is the professor. b. I'm taking her course.
6. a. That is the man. b. His daughter is a newscaster.
7. a. That is the girl. b. I taught her brother.
8. a. There is the boy. b. His mother is a famous musician.
O Exercise 33. Listening. (Chart 12-7)

{J Listen to the sentences and choose the words you hear: who's or whose.
en 2 Example: You will hear: The neighbor who's selling her house is moving overseas.
Track46
You will choose: �
� whose
1. who's whose 4. who's whose

Work in small groups. Change a. through f. to adjective clauses. Take turns completing each
sentence.
1. The man ___ __ is an undercover police officer.
a. His car was stolen. c. His son broke our car window.
- The man whose car was stolen d. His dog barks all night.
is an undercover police officer. e. He is standing out in the rain.
b. He invited us to his party. f. His wife is an actress.
2. The nurse is leaving for a trip across the Sahara Desert.
a. Her picture was in the paper. d. She works for Dr. Lang.
b. Her father climbed Mount Everest. e. I found her purse.
c. She helped me when I cut myself. f. I worked with her father.
3. The book is very valuable.
a. Its pages are torn. d. Its cover is missing.
b. It's on the table. e. I gave it to you.
c. Sam lost it. f. I found.

Complete the sentences with all the correct answers. Use who) that) 0, which) whose) or
whom.
1. The people who I that moved into town are Italian.
2. The lamp that I fJ I which I bought downtown is beautiful but quite expensive.
3. Everyone ___________ came to the audition got a part in the play.
4. Ms. Rice is the teacher ___________ class I enjoy most.
5. The man ___________ I found in the doorway had collapsed from heat
exhaustion.
6. I like the people with ___________ I work.
7. I have a friend ___________ father is a famous artist.
8. The camera ___________ I bought takes very sharp pictures.
9. Students ___________ have part-time jobs have to budget their time

very carefully.
10. Flying squirrels _______ live in tropical rain forests

stay in the trees their entire lives without ever touching the ground.
11. The people ________ _ __ car I dented

were a little upset.
12. The person to you should

send your application is the Director of Admissions.
13. Monkeys will eat almost anything ___________ they can find.
338 CHAPTER 12
o Exercise 36. Ustening . (Chapter 12)
Listen to the conversation. Complete the sentences with that, which, whose, or 0.
{J
co2 Friendly advice
Track 47
A: A magazine ________ _ I saw at the doctor's office had an article
_________ you ought to read. It's about the importance of exercise in

2
dealing with stress.
B: Why do you think I should read an article _________ deals with exercise
and stress?
A: If you stop and think for a minute, you can answer that question yourself. You're under a
lot of stress, and you don't get any exercise.
B: The stress _ _ __ _ _ _ I have at work doesn't bother me. It's just a normal
part of my job. And I don't have time to exercise.
A: Well, you should make time. Anyone _________ job is as stressful as
yours should make physical exercise part of their daily routine.

Complete the sentences by making adjective clauses from the statements in the list. Omit the
object pronoun from the adjective clauses if possible.
Their specialty is heart surgery.

/James chose the color of paint for his bedroom walls.
Its mouth was big enough to swallow a whole cow in one gulp.
It erupted in Indonesia.
His son was in an accident.
They lived in the jungles of Southeast Asia.
I slept on it in a hotel last night.
1. The color of paint ,James chose for his bedroom walls . was an uµus�al shade ? f . blue.
..
2. The man-----------------------------
called an ambulance.
3. My back hurts today. The mattress-------------------

was too soft.
4. A volcano _______________________ killed six people

and damaged large areas of crops.
5. Doctors and nurses _________________________

are some of the best-trained medical personnel in the world.
Adjecti¥e Clauses, 339

6. Originally, chickens were wild birds _____ __ __________
At some point in time, humans learned how to raise them for food.
7. In prehistoric times, there was a dinosaur _________________
o ,bercise 38. :let's ·talk: interview. (Chapter 12)

Interview your classmates. Ask two classmates each question. Share their responses with the
class and see which answers are the most popular.
1. What is a dessert that you like? � A dessert that I like is ice cream.
2. What are some of the cities in the world you would like to visit?
3. What is one of the programs which you like to watch on TV?
4. What is one subject that you would like to know more about?
5. What are some sports you enjoy playing? watching on TV?
6. What is one of the best movies that you've ever seen?
7. What is one of the hardest classes you've ever taken?
8. Who is one of the people that you admire most in the world?
Cl Exercise 39.. Game. 1(Chopter 12}

Work in teams. Answer each question with sentences that have adjective clauses. The team
that has the most grammatically correct answers wins.
Example: What are the qualities of a good friend?
-+ A good friend is someone who you can depend on in times of trouble.
-+ A good friend is a person who accepts you as you are.
-+ A good friend is someone you can trust with secrets.
- Etc.
1. What is your idea of the ideal roommate?
2. What are the qualities of a good neighbor?
3. What kind of people make good parents?
4. What are the qualities of a good boss and a bad boss?
5. What is your idea of the ideal school?

Edit the sentences. Correct the mistakes in adjective clauses.
1. The book that I bought it at the bookstore was very expensive.
2. The woman was nice that I met yesterday.
3. I met a woman who her husband is a famous lawyer.
4. Do you know the people who lives in that house?
340 OHAPTER 12
5. The professor teaches Chemistry 101 is very good.
6. The people who I painted their house want me to do other work for them.
7. The people who I met them at the party last night were interesting.
8, I enjoyed the music that we listened to it.
9. The'apple tree is producing fruit that we planted it last year.
10. Before I came here, I didn't have the opportunity to speak to people who their native
language is English.
11. One thing I need to get a new alarm clock.
12. The people who was waiting to buy tickets for the game they were happy because their
team had made it to the championship.
o Exercise 41. Reading and writing. (Chapter 12)

Part I. Read the passage and underline the adjective clauses.
My Friend's Vegan Diet
I have a friend who is a vegan. As you may know, a vegan is a person who eats no animal
products. When I first met him, I didn't understand the vegan diet. I thought vegan was
another name for vegetarian, except that vegans didn't eat eggs. I soon found out I was wrong.
The first time I cooked dinner for him, I made a vegetable dish which had a lot of cheese. Since
cheese comes from cows, it's not vegan, so he had to scrape it off. I also served him bread that
had milk in it and a dessert that was made with ice cream. Unfortunately, there wasn't much
that he could eat that night. In the beginning, I had trouble thinking of meals which we could
both enjoy. But he is a wonderful cook and showed me how to create delicious vegan meals. I
don't know if I'll ever become a complete vegan, but I've learned a lot about the vegan diet and
the delicious possibilities it has.
Part II. Write a paragraph about someone you know and something interesting or unusual
about his/her life. Try to use a few adjective clauses in your paragraph.
Sample beginnings:
I have a friend who ....
I know a person who ....
I've heard of a movie star who ....

Check(/') all.the completions that are true for you.
I enjoy ...
1. --. traveling. 4. __ watchingTV commercials.
2. __ shopping for clothes. 5. __ surfing the Internet.
3. __ playing sports. 6. __ learning about ancient history.
' ,
13· 1
i
Verb + Gerund1
VERB GERUND A gerund is the -ing form of a verb. It is used as a
(a) I enjoy walking in the park. noun.
In ( a): walking is a gerund. It is used as the object
of the verb enjoy.
Common Verbs Followed by Gerunds The verbs in the list are followed by gerunds. The
enjoy (b) I enjoy working in my garden. list also contains phrasal verbs (e.g., put off) that
finish (c) Ann finished studying at midnight. are followed by gerunds.
quit (d ) David quit smoking. The verbs in the list are NOT followed by to + the
mind (e) Would you mind opening the window? simple form of a verb (an infinitive).
postpone ( f) I postponed doing my homework. INCORRECT: I enjoy to walk in the park.
put off (g) I put off doing my homework. INCORRECT: Bob finished to study.
keep (on) (h) Keep (on) working. Don't stop. INCORRECT: I'm thinking to go to Hawaii.
consider ( i ) I'm considering going to Hawaii.
think about (j) I 'm thinking about going to Hawaii. See Chart 2-2, p. 29, for the spelling of -ing verb
discuss (k) They discussed getting a new car. forms.
talk about (I) They talked about getting a new car.
(m) I considered not going to class. Negative form: not + gerund

Complete each sentence with the correct form of a verb from the list.
clean hand in sleep

close hire smoke
eat pay work
342
1. The Boyds own a bakery. They work seven days a week and they are very tired. They are
thinking about ...
a. _________ fewer hours a day.
b. their shop for a few weeks and going on vacation.
c. _________ more workers for their shop.
2. Joseph wants to live a healthier life. He made several New Year's resolutions. For example,
he has quit ...
a. _________ cigars
b. high-fat foods.
c. _________ until noon on weekends.
3. Martina is a procrastinator.* She puts off ...
a. her bills.
b. _________ her assignments to her teacher.
c. _________ her apartment.

Complete each sentence with a gerund.
1. We discussed @Oin@ I drivin@ to the ocean for our vacation.
2. The Porters' car is too small for their growing family. They're considering
_ ________ a bigger one.
3. When Martha finished _________ the floor, she dusted the furniture.
4. Beth doesn't like her job. She's talking about _________ a different job.
5. A: Are you listening to me?
B: Yes. Keep ---------· I'm listening.
6. A: Do you want to take a break?
B: No. I'm not tired yet. Let's keep on _________ for another hour or so.
7. A: Would you mind _________ the window?
B: No problem. I'm too hot too.

0 completion.
Complete each conversation with the words you hear.
CD2
NOTE: There is a gerund in each
Track 48
Example: You will hear: A: I enjoy watching sports on 1V, especially soccer.
B: Me too.
You will write: enJoy watchin@
1. A: When you _________ your homework, could you help me it:\ the kitchen?
B: Sure.
*procrastinacor = someone who postpones or delays doing things
Gerunds and Infinitives 343

2. A: Do you have any plans for this weekend?
B: Henry and I _____________ the dinosaur exhibit at the museum.
3. A: I didn't understand the answer. ------------------- it?

B: I'd be happy to.
4. A: I'm _ ___________________ the meeting tomorrow.

B: Really? Why? I hope you go. We need your input.
5. A: I've been working on this math problem for the last half hour, and I still don't
understand it.
B: Well, don't give up.

Complete the sentence using the activities in the pictures. Share your answers with a
classmate. Your classmate will report a few of your answers to the class.
W hen I'm on vacation, I like/don't like to go __ ing.
13·2 Go+ -ing -- -

-- - - - ---- - ----- -
(a) Didyou go shoppingyesterday? Go is followed by a gerund in certain idiomatic

(b) I went swimming last week. expressions about activities.
(c) Bob hasn't gone fishing in years. NOTE: There is no to between go and the gerund.
INCORRECT: Did you go to shopping?
Common Expressions with go + -ing

go boating go dancing go jogging go (window) shopping go (water) skiing
go bowling go fishing go running go sightseeing go skydiving
go camping go hiking go sailing go (ice) skating go swimming
344 CHAPTER 13
o Exercise 6. let's talk: pairwork. (Chart ?3-2')
Work with a partner. Take turns asking and answering questions. Use the expressions with
go + -ing listed in Chart 13-2.
1. Patricia often goes to the beach. She spends hours in the water. What does she like to do?
-+ She likes to go swimming.
2. Nancy and Frank like to spend the whole day on a lake with poles in their hands. What do
they like to do?
3. Last summer Adam went to a national park. He slept in a tent and cooked his food over a
fire. What did Adam do last summer?
4. Tim likes to go to stores and buy things. What does he like to do?
5. Laura takes good care of her health. She runs a couple of miles every day. What does
Laura do every day? (There are two possible responses.)
6. On weekends in the winter, Fred and Jean sometimes drive to a resort in the mountains.
They like to race down the side of a mountain in the snow. What do they like to do?
7. Ivan likes to take long walks in the woods. What does Ivan like to do?
8. Sonia prefers indoor sports. She goes to a place where she rolls a 13-pound ball at some
wooden pins. What does Sonia often do?
9. Liz and Greg know all the latest dances. What do they probably do a lot?
10. The Taylors are going to go to a little lake near their house tomorrow. The lake is
completely frozen now that it's winter. The ice is smooth. What are the Taylors going to
do tomorrow?
11. Mariko and Taka live near the ocean. When there's a strong wind, they like to spend the
whole day in their sailboat. What do they like to do?
12. Tourists often get on tour buses that take them to see interesting places in an area. What
do tourists do on these buses?
13. Colette and Ben like to jump out of airplanes. They don't open their parachutes until the
last minute. What do they like to do?
14. What do you like to do for exercise and fun?
o Exercise 7. let's talk: interview. (Chart 13-2)

Interview your classmates. Try to find someone who has done each activity. Make a question
for each item before you begin the interview. Share some of your answers with the class.
Find someone who . . .
1. has gone skydiving before. -+ Have you gone skydiving before?
2. likes to go waterskiing. ..... Do you like to go waterskiing?
3. likes to go bowling.
4. goes dancing on weekends.
5. goes jogging for exercise.
6. goes fishing in the winter.
7. goes camping in the summer.
8. likes to go snow skiing.

Check(./) the sentences that are true for you.
1. __ I hope to move to another town soon.
2. __ I would like to get married in a few years.
3. __ I intend to visit another country next year.
4. __ I'm planning to become an English teacher.
13·3 Verb + Infinitive ----

· ·
(a) Tom offered to lend me some money. Some verbs are followed by an infinitive.
(b) I've decided to buy a new car. Infinitive = to+ the simple form of a verb
(c) I've decided not to keep my old car. Negative form: not + infinitive
Common Verbs Followed by Infinitives

want hope decide. seem learn (how)
need expect promise appear try
would like plan offer pretend
would love intend agree (can't) afford
mean refuse (can't) wait

Complete each sentence with the correct form of a word from the list.
be fly to hear lend visit

buy get to hurt see watch
eat go to leave tell
to fly to I to @O to
1. I'm planning -��'-"-'"-""'��- Chicago next week.
2. Hasan promised not _________ late for the wedding.
3. My husband and I would love _________ Fiji.
4. What time do you expect _________ Chicago?
5. You seem in a good mood today.
6. Nadia appeared _________ asleep, but she wasn't. She was only
pretending.
7. Nadia pretended _________ asleep. She pretended not

_________ me when I spoke to her.
8. The Millers can't afford ___ ______ a house.
346 CHAPTER 13
9. My friend offered _________ me some money.
10. Tommy doesn't like broccoli. He refuses _________ it.
11. My wife and I wanted to do different things this weekend. Finally, I agreed
_________ a movie with her Saturday, and she agreed
_________ the football game with me on Sunday. broccoli
12. I try ___ ______ class on time every day.
13. I can't wait _________ my family again! It's been a long time.
14. I'm sorry. I didn't mean _________ you.
15. I learned how _________ time when I was six.

Check(.!) the completions that are grammatically correct.
Many children love . . .
1. to eat ice cream.
2. __ eating ice cream.
3. eat ice cream.
13·4 Verb + Gerund or Infinitive

-- �- -- --- - -- ---- -- ------ -- -- -- -- - -
- -
--- - -- -- --- -- --�------ - ---
(a) It began raining. Some verbs are followed by either a gerund, as in (a),
(b) It began to rain. or an infinitive, as in (b). Usually there is no difference
in meaning.
Common Verbs Followed by Either a Gerund or an Infinitive

begin like* hate
start love* can't stand
continue
*COMPARE: Like and love can be followed by either a gerund or an infinitive:
I like going I 10 go co movies. I love playing I 10 play chess.
Would like and would love are followed by infinitives:
I would like to go co a movie conight. I'd love to play a game of chess right now.
..
Choose the correct verbs.
1. It started _______ around midnight.
a. snow @snowing @to snow
2. I continued _______ even though everyone else stopped.
a. work b. working c. to work

3. I like emails from my friends.
a. get b. getting c. to get
4. I would like an email from my son who's away at college.
a. get b. getting c. to get
5. I love to baseball games.
a. go b. going c. to go
6. I would love to the baseball game tomorrow.
a. go b. gomg c. to go
7. I hate to pushy salespeople.
a. talk b. talking c. to talk
8. I can't stand in long lines.
a. wait b. waiting c. to wait
o Exercise 12. Let's talk: pairwork. (Charts 13-1 - 13-4)

Work with a partner. Take turns combining the words in the list with the given ideas to make
sentences about what you like and don't like to do.
I like I enjoy I hate I don't mind

I love I don't like I can't stand
1. cook
--+ I like to cook. I I like cooking. I I hate to cook. I I hate cooking. I I Mn 't mind cooking. I
I Mn 't enjoy cooking. I Etc.
2. live in this city
3. wash dishes
4. wait in airports
5. fly
6. eat food slowly
7. speak in front of a large group
8. drive in the city during rush hour
9. go to parties where I don't know anyone
10. listen to music while I'm trying to fall asleep
11. get in between two friends who are having an argument
12. travel to unusual places
o Exercise 13. Grammar and speaking. (Charts 13-1 - 13-4)

Complete each sentence with the infinitive or gerund form of the verb in parentheses.
Then agree or disagree with the statement. Discuss your answers.
What do you M when you can't understand a native English speaker?
1. I pretend (understand) ___________ yes ·no
2. I keep on (listen) _________ politely. yes no
348 CHAPTER 13
3. I think, "I can't wait (get) out of here!" OR yes no
"I can't wait for this person (stop) talking." yes no
4. I say, "Would you mind .(repeat) that?" yes no
5. I begin (nod) my head so I look like I understand. yes no
6. I start (look) at my watch, so it appears I'm in a hurry. yes no
7. As soon as the person finishes (speak) yes no
I say I have to leave.
o Exercise 14. Looking at grammar. (Charts 13- 1 - 13-4)

Complete the sentences with the infinitive or gerund form of the verbs in parentheses.
1. We finished (eat) _________ around seven.
2. My roommate offered (help) _________ me with my English.
3. I'm considering (move) _________ to a new apartment.
4. Some children hate ( go) _________ to school.

5. What seems (be) _________ the problem?
6. I don't mind (live) _________ with four roommates.
7. My boss refused (give) _________ me a raise, so I quit.
8. That's not what I meant! I meant (say) _________ just the opposite.
9. Julia can't stand (sleep) _________ in a room with all of the windows
closed.
10. Max seemed (want) _________ (leave) _________ the

party, but he kept (talk) _________ anyway.
11. Sam's tomato crop always failed. Finally he quit (try) _________ to grow
tomatoes in his garden.

o Exercise 15. let's talk: pairwork. (Charts 13-1 4 13-4)
Work with a partner. Take turns completing the sentences with to go/going+ a place.
Example: I would like ....
PARTNER A: I would like to go to the Beach Cafe for dinner tonight.
PARTNER B: I would like to go to the movies later today.
1. I like .... 11. I can't afford ....

2. I love .... 12. Would you mind ...?
3. I'd love .... 13. My friend and I agreed ....
4. I refuse .... 14. I hate ....
5. I expect .... 15. I don't enjoy ....
6. I promised .... 16. My friend and I discussed ....
7. I can't stand .... 17. I've decided ....
8. I waited .... 18. I don't mind ....
9. I am thinking about .... 19. Sometimes I put off ....
10. Are you considering ...? 20. I can't wait ....
o Exercise 16. Looking at grammar. (Charts 13-1 13-4) 4
Complete the sentences with the infinitive or gerund form of the verbs in parentheses.
1. I want (relax) _________ tonight.
2. I want (stay) _________ home and (relax)* _________

tonight.
3. I want (stay) _________ home, (relax) _________ , and

(go) _________ to bed early tonight.
4. I enjoy (get) _________ up early in the morning and (watch)

_________ the sunrise.
5. I enjoy (get) _________ up early in the morning, (watch)

_________ the sunrise, and (listen) _________ to the birds.
6. Mr.and Mrs.Bashir are thinking about (sell ) _________ their old house
and (buy) _________ a new one.
7. Kathy plans (move) _________ to New York City, (find)

_________ a job, and (start) _________ a new life.
*When infinitives are connected by and, it is not necessary to repeat to.

Example: I need to stay home and (w) study wnight.
350 CHAPTER 13
8. Do you like (go) _________ out to eat and (let) _________
someone else do the cooking?
9. Kevin is thinking about (quit) _________ his job and (go)

_________ back to school.
10. Before you leave the office tonight, would you mind (unplug) _________
the coffee pot, (turn off) _________ all the lights, and (lock)
_________ the door?
o Exercise 17. Game. (Charts 13-1 --. 13-4)

Work in teams. Your teacher will call out an item number. Make a sentence using the given
words and any verb tense. Begin with I. The first team to come up with a grammatically
correct sentence wins a point. The team with the most points wins the game.
Example: want\ go
� I want to go to New rbrk City next week.
1. plan\ go 11. postpone\ go
2. consider \ go 12. finish\ study
3. offer\ help 13. would mind\ help
4. like\ visit 14. begin\ study
5. enjoy\ read 15. think about\ go
6. intend\ get 16. quit\ try
7. can't afford\ buy 17. continue\ walk
8. seem\ be 18. learn\ speak
9. put off\ write 19. talk about\ go
10. would like\ go\ swim 20. keep\ try

Agree or disagree with the statements. Notice the use of the prepositions and gerunds in green
that follow the verbs.
I know someone who ...
1. never apologizes for being late. yes no
2. is interested in coming to this country. yes· no
3. is worried about losing his/her job. yes no
4. is excited about becoming a parent. yes no

13 • 5 Preposition + Gerund
(a) Kate insisted on coming with us. A preposition is followed by a gerund, not an infinitive.
(b) We're excited about going to Tahiti. In (a): The preposition (on) is followed by a gerund
(c) I apologized for being late. (coming).
Common Expressions with Prepositions Followed by Gerunds

be afraid of (doing something) be good at be responsible for
apologize for insist on stop (someone) from
believe in instead of thank (someone) for
dream about/of be interested in be tired of
be excited about look forward to worry about/be worried about
feel like be nervous about
forgive (someone) for plan on
· O Exercise 19. Looking at grammar. (Charts 13-5 and C-2)

Complete the sentences with a preposition + gerund and the given words.
1. I'm looking forward + go away for the weekend
---+ I'm looking forward to going away for the weekend.
2. T hank you + hold the door open

3. I'm worried + be late for my appointment
4. Are you interested + go to the beach with us
5. I apologized + be late
6. Are you afraid + fly in small planes
7. Are you nervous + take your driver's test
8. We're excited + see the soccer game
9. Tariq insisted + pay the restaurant bill
10. Eva dreams + become a veterinarian someday
11. I don't feel + eat right now
12. Please forgive me + not write sooner
13. I'm tired + live with five roommates
14. I believe + be honest at all times
15. Let's plan + meet at the restaurant at six
16. W ho's responsible + clean the classroom
17. T he police stopped us + enter the building
18. Jake's not very good + cut his own hair
o Exercise 20. Let's talk: pairwork. (Charts 13-5 and C-2)

Work with a partner. Take turns asking and answering questions using the following pattern:
What + the given words+ preposition + doing.
Example: be looking forward

PARTNER A: W hat are you looking forward to doing?
PARTNER B: I'm looking forward to going to a movie tonight.
352 CHAPTER 13
1. be interested 6. be nervous
2. be worried 7. be excited
3. thank your friend 8. feel
4. apologize 9. plan
5. be afraid 10. be tired
o Exercise 21. Looking at grammar. (Charts 13-5 and C-2)

Complete each sentence with the correct preposition and the gerund form of the verb in
parentheses.
1. Carlos is nervous about (meet) meetin@ his girlfriend's parents for

the first time.
2. I believe ____ (tell) _________ the truth no matter what.
3. I don't go swimming in deep water because I'm afraid ____ (drown)
4. Every summer, I look forward ____ (take) _________ a vacation

with my family.
5. Do you feel ____ (tell) _________ me why you're so sad?
6. My father-in-law always insists · - · - (pay)-·_________ for everything
when we go out for dinner.
7. I want you to know that I'm sorry. I don't know if you can ever forgive me ____
(cause) _________ you so much trouble.
8. I'm not very good (remember) _________ people's names.
9. How do you stop someone (do) _________ something you

know is wrong?
10. The kids are responsible ____ (take) _________ out the garbage.
11. Monique lost her job. That's why she is afraid ____ (have, not) ________
_______ enough money to pay her rent.
12. Sheila is pregnant. She's looking forward ____ (have) _________

another child.
13. A: I'm not happy in my work. I often dream ____ (quit) _________
my job.
B: Instead ____ (quit) _________ your job, why don't you see if you
can transfer to another department?

0 Exercise 22. Listening. (Charts 13-1-+ 13-5)
0
CD2
Listen to the conversation. Then listen again and complete the sentences with the words you
hear.
Track 49
A: Have you made any vacation plans?
B: Well, I __________ home because I don't like _________
I hate _________ and _________ suitcases. But my wife

4
loves _________ and _________ a boat trip somewhere.
6
A: So, what are you going to do?
B: Well, we couldn't agree, so we _____________ home and
_______ tourists in our own town.
A: Interesting. W hat are you planning _________ ?
B: Well, we haven't seen the new Museum of Space yet. There's also a new art exhibit
downtown. And my wife ----------------- a boat trip in

10
the harbor. Actually, when we --------------- about it, we
11
discovered there were lots of things to do.
A: Sounds like a great solution!
B: Yeah, we're both really ----------------- more of our

12
own town.

Circle the completions that are true for you.
1. I sometimes pay for things __ .
a. by credit card b. by check c. in cash
2. I usually come to school __ .

a. by bus b. by car c. on foot
3. My favorite way to travel long distances is __ .

a. by plane b. by boat c. by train
4. I like to communicate with my family __ .

a. by email b. by phone c. m person
354 CHAPTER 13
13·6 Using By and With to Express How Something Is Do��- .. �-�-
(a) Pat turned off the TV by pushing the "off" button. By+ a gerund is used to express how something is
done.
(b) Mary goes to work by bus. By or with followed by a noun is also used to express
(c) Andrea stirred her coffee with a spoon. how something is done.
BY IS USED FOR MEANS OF TRANSPORTATION AND COMMUNICATION

by (air)plane by subway* by mail/email by air
by boat by taxi by (tele)phone by land
�� n �� by sea
by car by foot (or: on foot) (but: in person)
OTHER USES OF BY
by chance by mistake by check (but: in cash)
by choice by hand** by credit card
WITH IS USED FOR INSTRUMENTS OR PARTS OF THE BODY

I cut down the tree with an ax (by using an ax).
I swept the floor with a broom.
She pointed to a spot on the map with her finger.
* by subway = American English; by underground, by iube = British English.

**The expression by hand is usually used to mean that something was made by a person, not by a machine: This rug was made by
hand. (A person, not a machine, made this rug.)
COMPARE: I iouched his shoulder with my hand.

Complete the sentences by using by + a gerund. Use the words in the list or your own words.
eat smile wag wave

drink stay wash ,/write
guess take watch
1. Students practice written English by writin@ compositions.
2. We clean our clothes them in soap and water.
3. Khalid improved his English a lot of TV.
4. We show other people we are happy
5. We satisfy our hunger something.
6. We quench our thirst something.
7. I figured out what quench means
8. Alex caught my attention his arms in the air.

9. My dog shows me she is happy ___________ her tail.
10. Carmen recovered from her cold ___________ jn bed and

___________ care ofherself.

Complete the sentences. Use with and words in the list.
/a broom a pair ofscissors a spoon

a hammer a saw a thermometer
a needle and thread a shovel
1. I swept the floor with a broom

2. I sewed a button on my shirt
3. I cut the wood
4. I took my temperature
5. I stirred cream in my coffee
6. I dug a hole in the garden
7. I nailed two pieces of wood together

8. I cut the paper

Complete the sentences with by or with.
1. I opened the door with a key .
2. I went downtown by bus.
3. I dried the dishes a dishtowel.
4. I went from Frankfurt to Vienna train.
5. Ted drew a straight line a ruler.
6. Rebecca tightened the screw in the corner ofher eyeglasses _____ her fingernail.
7. I called Bill "Paul" _____ mistake.

8. I sent a copy ofthe contract _____ fax.
9. Talya protected her eyes from the sun _____ her hand.
10. My grandmother makes tablecloths _____ hand.
356 CHAPTER 13
Read the passage and then agree or disagree with the statements.
A White Lie
Jane gave her friend Lisa a book for her birthday. When Lisa opened it, she tried to look
excited, but her husband had already given her the same book. Lisa had just finished reading it,
but she thanked Jane and said she was looking forward to reading it. Lisa told a "white lie."
White lies are minor or unimportant lies that a person often tells to avoid hurting someone
else's feelings.
1. Telling white lies is common. yes no
2. It is sometimes acceptable to tell a white lie. yes no
3. I sometimes tell white lies. yes no
13· 7 Using Gerunds as Subjects; Using It + Infinitive

(a) Riding horses is fun. Examples (a) and (b) have the same meaning.
(b) It is fun to ride horses. In (a): A gerund (riding) is the subject of the sentence.
(c) Coming to class on time is important. Notice: The verb (is) is singular because a gerund is singular.*
(d) It is important to come to class on time. In (b): It is used as the subject of the sentence. It has the same
meaning as the infinitive phrase at the end of the sentence: it
means to ride horses.
*It is also correct (but less common) to use an infinitive as the subject of a sentence: To ride horses is fun.
o Exercise 28. Grammar and speaking: pairwork. (Chart 13-7)

Make sentences with the same meaning as the given sentences, and then decide if you agree
with them. Circle yes or no. Share your answers with a partner.
Living in this town
Part I. Use a gerund as the subject.
1. It's hard to meet people here.

--t Meeting people here is hard. yes no
2. It takes time to make friends here. yes no
3. It is easy to get around the town. yes no
4. Is it expensive to live here? yes no
Part II. Use it + an infinitive.
5. Finding things to do on weekends is hard.

--t It's hard to find things to do on weekends. yes no
6. Walking alone at night is dangerous. yes no
7. Exploring this town is fun. yes no
8. Is finding affordable housing difficult? yes no

Interview your classmates. Ask a question and then agree or disagree with your classmate's
answer. Practice using both gerunds and infinitives in your answers.
Example:
SPEAKER A (book open): Which is easier: to make money or to spend money?
SPEAKER B (book closed): It's easier to spend money than (it is) to make money.
SPEAKER A (book open): I agree. Spending money is easier than making money. OR
I don't agree. I think that making money is easier than
spending money.
1. Which is more fun: to visit a big city or to spend time in the countryside?
2. Which is more difficult: to write English or to read English?
3. Which is easier: to understand spoken English or to speak it?
4. Which is more expensive: to go to a movie or to go to a concert?
5. Which is more comfortable: to wear shoes or to go barefoot?
6. Which is more satisfying: to give gifts or to receive them?
7. Which is more dangerous: to ride in a car or to ride in an airplane?
8. Which is more important: to come to class on time or to get an extra hour of sleep in the
morning?

Agree or disagree with these statements.
In my culture . . .
1. it is common for people to shake hands when they meet. yes no
2. it is important for people to look one another in the eye when
they are introduced. yes no
3. it is strange for people to kiss one another on the cheek when they meet. yes no
1 - -
13·8 It+ Infi�itive: Us_ing For (Someone)

(a) Youshould study hard. Examples (a) and (b) have a similar meaning.
(b) It is important for you to study hard. Notice the pattern in (b):
(c) Maryshould study hard. It is+ adjective+ for (someone) + infinitive phrase
(d) It is important for Maryto study hard.
(e) We don't have to go to the meeting.
(f) It isn't necessary for usto go to the meeting.
(g) A dog can't talk.
(h) It is impossible for a dog to talk.
358 CHAPTER 13
Complete the sentences with the given information. Use/or (someone) and an infinitive
phrase in each completion.
1. Students should do their homework.
It's really important for students to do their homework
2. Teachers should speak clearly.

It's very important -------------------------
3. We don't have to hurry. T here's plenty of time.

It isn't necessary --------------------------
4. A fish can't live out of water for more than a few minutes.
It's impossible ---------------------------
5. Working parents have to budget their time carefully.

It's necessary ---------------------------
6. A young child usually can't sit still for a long time.

It's difficult ----------------------------
7. My family spends birthdays together.

It's traditional ---------------------------
8. My brother would love to travel to Mars someday.

Will it be possible ______________ to Mars someday?
9. I usually can't understand Mr. Alvarez. He talks too fast. How about you?
Is it easy _____________________________ ?

Work in small groups. Make sentences by combining the given ideas with the words in the list.
Use gerunds as subjects or it + an infinitive. Share some of your sentences for other groups to
agree or disagree with.
boring embarrassing hard impossible scary

dangerous exciting illegal interesting waste of time
educational fun important relaxing
Example: ride a bicycle

---+ Riding a bicycle is fun. OR It's fun to ride a bicycle.
1. ride a roller coaster 6. know the meaning of every word
2. read newspapers in a dictionary
3. study economics 7. never tell a lie
4. drive five miles over the speed limit 8. visit museums
5. walk in a cemetery at night

o Exercise 33. Reading and grammar. (Charts 13-7 and 13-8)
Body Language
Different cultures use different body language. In some countries, when people meet one
another, they offer a strong handshake and look the other person straight in the eye. In other
countries, however, it is impolite to shake hands firmly, and it is equally rude to look a person in
the eye.
How close do people stand to another person when they are speaking to each other? This
varies from country to country. In the United States and Canada, people prefer standing just a
little less than an arm's length from someone. But many people in the Middle East and Latin
America like moving in closer during a conversation.
Smiling at another person is a universal, cross-cultural gesture. Although people may
smile more frequently in some countries than in others, people around the world understand
the meaning of a smile.
Part II. Complete the sentences with information about body language.
1. In some countries, it is important --------------------
2. In some countries, --------------------- is impolite.
3. In my country, ---------------------- is important.
4. In my country, it is impolite ----------------------
o EKercise 34. Warm -up.. (Clitart 13-9)

Check (I') all the sentences that are grammatically correct.
1. __ I went to the store because I wanted to buy groceries.
2. __ I went to the store in order to buy groceries.
3. __ I went to the store to buy groceries.
4. __ I went to the store for groceries.
5. __ I went to the store for to buy groceries.
360 1QHAPJER 13
� -
13·9 E�re�.sing P�rpose with In Order To and_For
-Why did you go to the post office? In order to expresses purpose. It answers
(a) I went to the post office because I wanted to mail a letter. the question "Why?"
(b) I went to the post office in order to mail a letter.
In (c): in order is frequently omitted. Examples
(c) I went to the post office to mail a letter.
(a), (b), and (c) have the same meaning.
(d) I went to the post office for some stamps. For is also used to express purpose, but it is
(e) I went to the post office to buy some stamps. a preposition and is followed by a noun
INCORRECT: I went to the post office for to buy some stamps. phrase, as in (d).
INCORRECT: I went to the post office for buying some stamps.

Make sentences by combining the phrases in Column A with those in Column B. Connect the
ideas with (in order) to.
Example: I called the hotel desk ...
--+ I called the hotel desk (in order) to ask for an extra pillow.
Column A ColumnB
1. I called the hotel desk _e_. a. keep their feet warm and dry
2. I turned on the radio b. reach the top shelf
3. Andy went to Egypt __ . c. listen to a ball game
4. People wear boots __ . d. find the population of Malaysia
5. I looked on the Internet ./ e. ask for an extra pillow
6. Ms.Lane stood on her tiptoes __ . f. chase a mean dog away
7. The dentist moved the light closer to my face __ . g. help her pay the rent
8. I clapped my hands and yelled __ . h. get some fresh air and exercise
9. Maria took a walk in the park __ . 1. see the ancient pyramids
10. I offered my cousin some money __ . J. look into my mouth

Add in order to the sentences whenever possible.
1. I went to the bank to cash a check. --+ I went to the bank in order to cash a check.
2. I'd like to see that movie. � (No change. The infinitive does not express purpose.)
3. Steve went to the hospital to visit a friend.
4. I need to go to the bank today.
5. I need to go to the bank today to deposit my paycheck.
6. On my way home, I stopped at the store to buy some shampoo.
7. Masako went to the cafeteria to eat lunch.
8. Jack and Katya have decided to get married.
9. Pedro watches TV to improve his English.
10. I didn't forget to pay my rent.
11. Donna expects to graduate next spring.
12. Jerry needs to go to the bookstore to buy school supplies.

Complete the sentences with to or for.
1. I went to Chicago for a visit.
2. I went to Chicago to visit my aunt and uncle.
3. I take long walks relax.
4. I take long walks relaxation.
5. I'm going to school a good education.
6. I'm going to school get a good education.
7. I sent a card to Carol wish her a happy birthday.
8. Two police officers came to my apartment ______ ask me about a neighbor.
9. I looked on the Internet ______ information about Ecuador.
10. My three brothers, two sisters, and parents all came to town ______ my
graduation.
o Exercise 38. Reading and grammar. (Charts 13-1 - 13-9)

Car Sharing
In hundreds of cities around the world, people can use a car without actually owning one.
It's known as car sharing.
Car sharing works like this: people pay a fee to join a car-share organization. These
organizations have cars available in different parts of a city 24 hours a day. Members make
reservations for a car, and then go to one of several parking lots in the city to pick up the car.
They pay an hourly or daily rate for driving it. They may also pay a charge for every
mile/kilometer they drive. When they are finished, they return the car to a parking area for
someone else to use.
Car sharing works well for several reasons. Some people only need to drive occasionally.
Oftentimes, people only need a car for special occasions like moving items or taking long trips.
Many people don't want the costs or responsibilities of owning a car. The car-share
organization pays for gas, insurance, cleaning, and maintenance costs. Members also don't have
to wait in line or fill out forms in order to get a car. They know a variety of cars will be available
when they need one.
Car sharing also benefits the environment. People drive only when they need to, and fewer
cars on the road means less traffic and air pollution. As more and more cities become
interested in reducing traffic, car-share programs are becoming an effective alternative.
362 CHAPTER 13
Part II. Complete the sentences with information from Part I. Use gerunds or infinitives.
1. ___________ is helpful to people who don't own a car.
2. People pay a fee in order _______ a car-sharing organization.
3. Car-sharing members pay an hourly or daily rate for _________ a car.
4. Sometimes people need a car _______ furniture or to _______ a

trip.
5. Many people don't want the costs of _________ a car.
Part Ill. Answer the questions.

1. What are three reasons that people car share?
2. What are two benefits of car sharing?
3. Does the city you live in have a form of car sharing? If yes, has it been successful? If not,
why do you think there is no car-sharing program?
o Exercise 39. Warm -up: pairwork. (Chart 13-1 O)

Work with a partner. Read the conversation aloud and complete the sentences with the correct
words in the list.
strong heavy strength
PARTNER A: Can you pick up a piano?
PARTNER B: No. It's too _________ for me to pick up. How about you?
Can you pick up a piano?
PARTNER A: No, I'm not _________ enough to pick one up. What about the
class? Can we pick up a piano together?

PARTNER B: Maybe. We might have enough _________ to do that as a class.

I
13-10 Using Irifinitiv�s with Too and Enough -
too+ adjective+ (for someone) + infinitive Infinitives often follow expressions with too.
too heavy to lift. Too comes in front of an adjective. In the
(a) That box is
too heavy for me to lift. speaker's mind, the use of too implies a
(b) A piano is
too heavy for Bob to lift. negative result.
(c) That box is
COMPARE:
enough+ noun + infinitive The box is too heavy. I can't lift it.
(d) I don't have enough money to buy that car. The box is very heavy, but I can lift it.
(e) Did you have enough time to finish the test?
adjective+ enough+ infinitive Infinitives often follow expressions with

(f ) Jimmy isn't old enough to go to school. enough.
(g) Are you hungry enough to eat three sandwiches? Enough comes in front of a noun.*
Enough follows an adjective.
*Enough can also follow a noun: I don't have money enough to buy that car. In everyday English, however, enough usually comes
in front of a noun.

Complete the sentences with the given words. Use too or enough + an infinitive.
1. strong/lift I'm not stron@ enou@h to lift a refrigerator.
2. weak/lift Most people are too weak to lift a refrigerator without help.
3. busy/answer I was _______________ the phone. I let the call go

to voice mail.
4. early/get I got to the concert ________________ good seats.
5. full/hold My suitcase is _________

_______ any more clothes.
6. large/hold My suitcase isn't --------------------

all the clothes I want to take on my trip.
7. big/get Rex is ___________

into the doghouse.
8. big/hold Julie's purse is _______

______ her dog Pepper.
364 CHAPTER 13
Combine each pair of sentences.
Part I. Use too.
1. We can't go swimming today. It's very cold.
___. It's too cold (for us) to go swimming today.
2. I couldn't finish my homework last night. I was very sleepy.
3. Mike couldn't go to his aunt's housewarming party. He was very busy.
4. This jacket is very small. I can't wear it.
5. I live far from school. I can't walk there.
Part II. Use enough.

6. I can't reach the top shelf. I'm not that tall.
---+ I'm not tall enough to reach the top shelf.
7. I can't move this furniture. I'm not that strong.

8. It's not warm today. You can't go outside without a coat.
9. I didn't stay home and miss work. I wasn't really sick, but I didn't feel good all day.

Work with a partner. Take turns completing the sentences with infinitives.
1. I'm too short ....
2. I'm not tall enough ....
3. I'm not strong enough ....
4. Last night I was too tired ....
5. Yesterday I was too busy ....
6. A Mercedes-Benz is too expensive ....
7. I don't have enough money ....
8. Yesterday I didn't have enough time ....
9. A teenager is old enough ...but too young ....
10. I know enough English ... but not enough ....
D Exercise 43. Looking

, at .grammar. (Chapter 13)
Complete each sentence with the gerund or infinitive form of the word in parentheses.
1. It's difficult for me (remember) to remember phone numbers.
2. My cat is good at (catch) catchin@ mice.
3. I called my friend (invite) _________ her for dinner.
4. Fatima talked about ( go) _______ to graduate school.
5. Sarosh found out what was happening by (listen) _________ carefully to

everything that was said.
Gerunds ond lnfinitives 365

6. Michelle works 16 hours a day in order (earn) _________ enough money
(take) _________ care of her elderly parents and her three children.
7. No matter how wonderful a trip is, it's always good (get) ________ back home
and (sleep) _______ in your own bed.
8. I keep (forget) _________ to call my friend Jae. I'd better write myself a
note.
9. Exercise is good for you. Why don't you walk up the stairs instead of (use) ______
the elevator?
0 Exercise 44. Listening. (Chapter 13)

IJ Listen
CD2
to each item. Then listen again and complete the sentences with the words you hear.
1. My professor goes through the lecture material too quickly. It is difficult for us
Track 50
--------- him. He needs --------- down and

--------- us time to understand the key points.
2. _________ others about themselves and their lives is one of the secrets of
_________ along with other people. If you want to make and
_________ friends, it is important _________ sincerely
interested in other people's lives.
3. Large bee colonies have 80,000 workers. These worker bees must visit 50 million flowers
_________ one kilogram, or 2.2 pounds, of honey. It's easy
___________ why "busy as a bee" is a common expression.
o Exercise 45. Reading and grammar. (Chapter 13)

Uncle Ernesto
Have you ever had an embarrassing experience? My Uncle Ernesto did a few years ago
while on a business trip in Norway.
Uncle Ernesto is a businessman from Buenos Aires, Argentina. He manufactures
equipment for ships and needs to travel around the world to sell his products. Last year, he
went to Norway to meet with a shipping company. While he was there, he found himself in an
uncomfortable situation.
Uncle Ernesto was staying at a small hotel in Oslo. One morning, as he was getting ready
to take a shower, he heard a knock at the door. He opened it, but no one was there. He
stepped into the hallway. He still didn't see anyone, so he turned to go back to his room.
Unfortunately, the door was locked. This was a big problem because he didn't have his key and
he was wearing only a towel.
366 CHAPTER 13
Instead of standing in the hallway like this, he decided to get help at the front desk and
started walking toward the elevator. He hoped it would be empty, but it wasn't. He took a deep
breath and got in. The other people in the elevator were surprised when they saw a man who
was wrapped in a towel.
Uncle Ernesto thought about trying to explain his problem, but unfortunately he didn't
know Norwegian. He knew a little English, so he said, "Door. Locked. No key."
A businessman in the elevator nodded, but he wasn't smiling. Another man looked at
Uncle Ernesto and smiled broadly.
The elevator seemed to move very slowly for Uncle Ernesto, but it finally reached the
ground floor. He walked straight to the front desk and looked at the hotel manager helplessly.
The hotel manager didn't have to understand any language to figure out the problem. He
grabbed a key and led my uncle to the nearest elevator.
My uncle is still embarrassed about this incident. But he laughs a lot when he tells the story.
Part II. Check (.!) all the sentences that are grammatically correct.
1. a. __ Uncle Ernesto went to Norway for a business meeting.
b. __ Uncle Ernesto went to Norway to have a business meeting.
c. __ Uncle Ernesto went to Norway for having a business meeting.
2. a. __ Is necessary for him to travel in order to sell his products.

b. __ To sell his products, he needs to travel.
c. __ In order to sell his products, he needs to travel.
3. a. __ Instead staying in the hall, he decided to get help.

b. __ Instead of staying in the hall, he decided to get help.
c. __ Instead to stay in the hall, he decided to get help.
4. a. __ Uncle Ernesto thought about trying to explain his problem.

b. __ Uncle Ernesto considered about trying to explain his problem.
c. __ Uncle Ernesto decided not to explain his problem.
5. a. __ It wasn't difficult for the hotel manager fi guring out the problem.
b. __ It wasn't difficult for the hotel manager figure out the problem.
c. __ It wasn't difficult for the hotel manager to figure out the problem.

o Exercise 46. Let's write. (Chapter 13)
Read the sample paragraph. Then write a paragraph about one of the most embarrassing
experiences you have had in your life. Include some gerunds and infinitives in your writing.
Example:
My Most Embarrassing Experience
My most embarrassing experience happened at work. One morning, I was in a

hurry to get to my office, so I quickly said good-bye to my wife. She knew I was planning
to give an important presentation at my firm, so she wished me good luck and kissed me
on the cheek. Because traffic was heavy, I got to work a few minutes after the meeting
had begun. I quietly walked in and sat down. A few people looked at me strangely, but I
thought it was because I was late. During my presentation, I got more stares. I began to
think my presentation wasn't very good, but I continued speaking. As soon as my talk
was over, I went to the restroom. When I looked in the mirror, it wasn't hard to see the
problem. There was smudge of red lipstick on my cheek. I felt pretty embarrassed, but
later in the day I started laughing about it and tried not to take myself so seriously.

Edit the sentences. Correct the errors in the use of infinitives, gerunds, prepositions, and word
order.
to get
1. It is important g@�mg an education.
2. I went to the bank for cashing a check.
3. Did you go to shopping yesterday?
4. I cut the rope by a knife.
5. I thanked my friend for drive me to the airport.
6. Is difficult to learn another language.
7. Timmy isn't enough old to get married.
8. Is easy this exercise to do.
9. Last night too tired no do my homework.
10. I've never gone to sailing, but I would like to.
11. Reading it is one of my hobbies.
12. The teenagers began to built a campfire to keep themselves warm.
13. Instead of settle down in one place, I'd like to travel around the world.
368 CHAPTER 13
14. I enjoy to travel because you learn so much about other countries and cultures.
15. My grandmother likes to fishing.
16. Martina would like to has a big family.

Check (./) all the sentences that are grammatically correct.
1. How much does this book cost?
2. I don't know.
3. How much this books costs?
4. I don't know how much this book costs.
,. i -
14·1 Noun Clauses: Introduction

s v 0 Verbs are often followed by objects. The object is usually a noun
(a) I know his address.' phrase.*
(noun phrase)
In (a): his address is a noun phrase;
s v 0 his address is the object of the verb know.
(b) I know 'where he lives' .
(noun clause) Some verbs can be followed by noun clauses.*
In (b): where he lives is a noun clause;
where he lives is the object of the verb know.
0 A noun clause has its own subject and verb.

s v s v In (c): he is the subject of the noun clause;
(c) I know where he lives. lives is the verb of the noun clause.
(d) I know where my book is. A noun clause can begin with a question word. (See Chart 14-2.)
(noun clause)
(e) I don't know if Ed is married. A noun clause can begin with ifor whether. (See Chart 14-3.)
(noun clause)
( f ) I know that the world is round. A noun clause can begin with that. (See Chart 14-4.)
(noun clause)
*A phrase is a group of related words. It does NOT contain a subject and a verb.
A clause is a group of related words. It contains a subject and a verb.

Underline the noun clauses. Some sentences have no noun clauses.
1. Where are the Smiths living? 4. We know that they moved a month ago.
2. I don't know where the Smiths are living. 5. Are they coming back?
3. We don't know what city they moved to. 6. I don't know if they are coming back.
370
Work with a partner. Ask and answer the questions. Make true statements.
1. PARTNER A: Where do I live?
PARTNER B: I know I don't know where you live.
2. PARTNER B: Where does our teacher live?
PARTNER A: I know I don't know where our teacher lives.
3. PARTNER B: In your last sentence, why is "does" missing?

PARTNER A: I know I don't know why "does" is missing.
4. PARTNER A: In the same sentence, why does "lives" have an "s"?

PARTNER B: I know I don't know why "lives" has an "s."
14·2 Noun Clauses That Begin with a Question Word

T hese question words can be used to introduce a noun clause: when, where, why, how, who, (whom), what,
which, whose.
Information Notice in the examples:

-- -------+----------------- Usual question word order is NOT used
Question Noun Clause
-1 in a noun clause.
s v
Where does he live? (a) I don't know where he lives. INCORRECT: I know where does he live.
CORRECT: I know where he lives.
s v
When did they leave? (b) Do you know when they left?*
s v
What did she say? (c) Please tell me what she said.
s v
Why is Tom absent? (d) I wonder why Tom is absent.
v s s v A noun or pronoun that follows main

Who7s1 'that boy'? (e) Tell me who'that boy 7s1. verb be in a question comes in front of
v s s v be in a noun clause, as in (e) and (f).
Whose pen7s1 'this'? (f) Do you know whose pen'this 7s?
s v s v A prepositional phrase (e.g., in the

'Who' 7s1in the office? (g) I don't know'who' 7s1in the office. office) does not come in front of be in
a noun clause, as in (g) and (h).
s v s v
'Whose keys' 'are' on (h) I wonder'whose keys' 'are'on the counter.
the counter?
s v In (i) and U): Question word order and

Who came to class? (i) I don't know who came to class. noun clause word order are the same
s v when the question word is used as a
What happened? U) Tell me what happened. subject.
*A question mark is used at the end of this sentence because Do you know asks a question.
Example: Do you know when ihey left?
Do you know asks a question; when they lefi is a noun clause.
Noun Clauses 3 71
Decide if the given words are a noun clause or an information question. If a noun clause, add
I don't know. If an information question, add a capital letter and a question mark.
NOUN INFORl'v1ATION
CLAUSE QUESTION
1. a. I don't know why he left. � D

b. W vJhy did he leave? D �
2. a. where she is living D D

b. where is she living D D
3. a. where did Nick go D D
b. where Nick went D D
4. a. what time the movie begins D D
b what time does the movie begin D D
5. a. why is Yoko angry D D
b. why Yoko is angry D D

Underline and identify the subject (S) and verb (V) of Speaker A's question. Complete
Speaker B's response with a noun clause.
v s
1. A: Why is fire hot?
B: I don't know why fire is hot.
2. A: Where does Frank go t0 school?

B: I don't know ___________ to school.
3. A: Where did Natasha go yesterday?

B: I don't know. Do you know ________________ yesterday?
4. A: Why is Maria laughing?

B: I don't know. Does anybody know _________________ ?
5. A: How much does an electric car cost?

B: Peter can tell you
6. A: How long do elephants live?

B: I don't know
372 CHAPTER 14
7. A: When was the first wheel invented?
B: I don't know. Do you know _____________________ ?
8. A: How many hours does a light bulb burn?

B: I don't know exactly
9. A: Where did Emily buy her computer?

B: I don't know
10. A: Who lives next door to Kate?

B: I don't know next door to Kate.
11. A: Who did Julie talk to?

B: I don't know to.
12. A: Why is Mike always late?

B: You tell me! I don't understand late.

Work with a partner. Take turns asking questions. Begin with Can you tell me.
Questions to a teacher
1. How do I pronounce this word? -4 Can you tell me how I pronounce this word?
2. What does this mean?
3. When will I get my grades?
4. What is our next assignment?
5. How soon is the next assignment due?
6. Why is this incorrect?
7. When is a good time to meet?
8. What day does the term end?
9. Why did I fail?
10. Who will teach this class next time?
Noun Clauses 373

Complete the responses with noun clauses.
1. A: Who is that woman?
B: I don't know who that woma n is
2. A: Who is on the phone?
B: I don't know-= w= is_,,o'"'"'
h o<-= h-"-
n'--'t'"'"' p.,_,_ho=n-=e'----------------- - -
e+
3. A: What is a lizard?
B: I don't know----------------------- �-
4. A: What is in that bag?

B: I don't know
5. A: Whose car is that?
B: I don't know
6. A: Whose car is in the driveway?
B: I don't know
7. A: Who is Bob's doctor?
B: I'm not sure
8. A: Whose ladder is this?
B: I don't know _______________ . Hey, Hank, do you know
?
C: It's Hiro's.
9. A: What's at the end of a rainbow?
B: What did you say, Susie?
A: I want to know

Work with a partner. Take turns asking questions. Begin with Do you know.
Questions at home
1. Where is the phone?
2. Why is the front door open?
3. Who just called?
4. Whose socks are on the floor?
374 CHAPTER 14
5. Why are all the lights on?
6. There's water all over the floor. What happened?
7. What did the plumber say about the broken pipe?
8. What is the repair going to cost?

Complete the sentences with the correct form of the words in parentheses.
1. A: Where (Sophia, eat) _d
=,·d�S�o-e�h
= = ia�e=a=t�_ lunch yesterday?
B: I don't know where (she, eat) she ate lunch yesterday.
2. A: Do you know where (Jason, work) __________ _ ?

B: Who?
A: Jason. Where (he, work) ___________ ?
B: I don't know.
3. A: Where (you, see) ___________ the ad for the computer sale

last week?
B: I don't remember where (I, see) ________ it. In one of the local papers,
I think.
4. A: How can I help you?

B: How much (that camera, cost) ____________________ ?
A: You want to know how much (this camera, cost) _________ , is that right?
B: No, not that one. The one next to it.
5. A: How far (you, can run) ___________ without stopping?

B: I have no idea. I don't know how far (I, can run) ___________
without stopping. I've never tried.
6. A: Ann was out late last night, wasn't she? When (she, get) _________ in?
B: Why do you want to know when (she, get) _________ home?
A: Just curious.
7. A: What time (it, is) _________ ?

B: I don't know. I'll ask Sara. Sara, do you know what time (it, is) ________ ?
C: Almost four-thirty.
8. A: Mom, why (some people, be) _______________ mean to other

people?
B: Honey, I don't really understand why (some people, be) ____________
mean to others. It's difficult to explain.
Noun Clauses 375

Check (/') all the sentences that are grammatically correct.
Is Sam at work?
1. I don't know if Sam is at work.
2. I don't know Sam is at work.
3. I don't know if Sam is at work or not.
4. I don't know whether Sam is at work.
14-3 Noun Clauses That Begin with If or Whether

Yes/No Question Noun Clause When a yes/no question is changed to a
noun clause, if is usually used to
Is Eric at home? (a) I don't know if Eric is at home introduce the clause.*
Does the bus stop here? (b) Do you know if the bus stops here?
Did Alice go to Chicago? (c) I wonder if Alice went to Chicago
(d) I don't know if Eric is at home or not When if introduces a noun clause, the expression or not
sometimes comes at the end of the clause, as in (d) ..
(e) I don't know whether Eric is at home (or not). In (e): whether has the same meaning as if.
*See Chart 14-10 for the use of if with ask in reported speech.

Change the yes/no questions to noun clauses.
1. YEs/No QUESTION: Is Carl here today?
NOUN CLAUSE: Can you tell me if I whether Carl is here today ?
2. YES/No QUESTION: Will Mr. Piper be at the meeting?

NOUN CLAUSE: Do you know _ _ _ _ _ _ _____________ ?
3. YES/No QUESTION: Did Niko go to work yesterday?

NOUN CLAUSE: I wonder---------------------
4. YEs/No QUESTION: Is there going to be a windstorm tonight?

NOUN CLAUSE: I'm not sure ____________________
5. YEs/No QUESTION: Do you have Yung Soo's email address?

NOUN CLAUSE: I don't know ___________________
376 CHAPTER 14
Complete the noun clause in each conversation. Use if to introduce the noun clause.
1. A: Are you tired?
B: Why do you want to know if I am tired?
A: You look tired. I'm worried about you.
2. A: Are you going to be in your office later today?

B: What? Sorry. I didn't hear you.
A: I need to know --------------- in your office later today.
3. A: Did Tim borrow my cell phone?

B: Who?
A: Tim. I want to know ___________ my cell phone.
4. A: Can Pete watch the kids tonight?

B: Sorry. I wasn't listening. I was thinking about something else.
A: Have you talked to your brother Pete? We need to know _______
___________ the kids tonight.
5. A: Are my car keys in here?

B: Why are you asking me? How am I supposed to know _______
___________ in here?
A: You're sure in a bad mood, aren't you?
6. A: Does your car have a CD player?

B: What was that?
A: I want to know -------------------------
Noun Clauses 37 7
o Exercise 13. Let's talk: interview. (Charts 14-2 and 14-3)
Interview your classmates. Begin your questions with Do you know. Try to find people who
can answer your questions.
1. What does it cost to fly from London to Paris?
2. When was this building built?
3. How far is it from Vancouver, Canada, to Riyadh, Saudi Arabia?
4. Is Australia the smallest continent?
5. How many eyes does a bat have?
6. What is one of the longest words in English?
7. Does a chimpanzee have a good memory?
8 .. How old is the Great Wall of China?
9. Do all birds fly?
10. Did birds come from dinosaurs?

Work in small groups. Choose a famous movie star or celebrity. Make complete statements
using noun clauses and the given words. Share some of your sentences with the class. See if
anyone knows the information.
1. What do you wonder about him/her?
a. where --. I wonder where she lives.
b. what
c. if
d. who
e. how
f. why
2. What do you want to ask him/her?

a. who --. I want to ask him who his friends are.
b. when
c. what
d. whether
e. why
f. where

Check (./) the sentences that are grammatically correct. Which checked sentences do you
agree with?
1. I think that noun clauses are hard.
2. __ I suppose that this chapter is useful.
3. __ I think that some of the exercises are easy.
4. __ Is interesting this chapter I think.
378 CHAPTER 14
14·4 Noun Clauses That Begin with That
S V O A noun clause can be introduced by the word that.
n r---i
(a) I think that Mr. Jones is a good teacher. In (a): that Mr. Jones is a good teacher is a noun clause.
(b) I hope that you can come to the game. It is the object of the verb think.
(c) Mary realizes that she should study harder. That-clauses are frequently used as the objects of verbs
(d) I dreamed that I was on the top of a mountain. that express mental activity.
(e) I think that Mr. Jones is a good teacher. The word that is often omitted, especially in speaking.
(f) I think 0 Mr. Jones is a good teacher. Examples (e) and (f) have the same meaning.
Common Verbs Followed by That-clauses*

agree that dream that know that realize that
assume that feel that learn that remember that
believe that forget that notice that say that
decide that guess that predict that suppose that
discover that hear that prove that think that
doubt that hope that read that understand that
*See Appendix Chart A 4
- for more verbs that can be followed by thai-clauses.

Add the word that to mark the beginning of a noun clause.
that
1. I think /\ most people have kind hearts.
2. Last night I dreamed a monster was chasing me.
3. I believe we need to protect the rain forests.
4. Did you notice Yusef wasn't in class yesterday? I hope he's okay.
5. I trust Linda. I believe what she said. I believe she told the truth.

Work with a partner. Take turns asking and answering questions. Use that-clauses. Share
some of your partner's answers with the class.
1. What have you noticed about English grammar?
2. What have you heard in the news recently?
3. What did you dream recently?
4. What do you believe about people?
5. What can scientists prove?
6. What can't scientists prove?
Noun Clauses 379

Check (./) the sentences that you agree with.
1. _ _ I'm sure that vitamins give people more energy.
2. __ It's true that vitamins help people live longer.
3. __ It's a fact that vitamins help people look younger.
l
14·5 Other Uses of That-Clauses
(a) I'm sure that the bus stops here. That-clauses can follow certain expressions with
(b) I'm glad that you're feeling better today. be + adjective or be + past participle.
(c) I'm so rry that I missed class yesterday.
The word that can be omitted with no change in meaning:
(d) I was disappointed that you couldn't come.
I'm sure 0 the bus stops here.
(e) It is true that the world is round. Two common expressions followed by that-clauses are:
( f ) /tis a fact that the world is round. It is true ( that) ....
It is a fact ( that) ....
Common Expressions Followed by That-clauses*

be afraid that be disappointed that be sad that be upset that
be angry that be glad that be shocked that be worried that
be aware that be happy that be sorry that
be certain that be lucky that be sure that It is a fact that
be convinced that be pleased that be surprised that It is true that
*See Appendix Chart A-5 for more expressions that can be followed by that-clauses . .

Add that wherever possible.
that
1. A: Welcome. We're glad I\ you could come.
B: Thank you. I'm happy to be here.
2. A: Thank you so much for your gift.
B: I'm pleased you like it.
3. A: I wonder why Paulo was promoted to general manager instead of Andrea.
B: So do I. I'm surprised Andrea didn't get the job. I think she is more qualified.
4. A: Are you aware you have to pass the English test to get into the university?
B: Yes, but I'm certain I'll do well on it.
380 CHAPTER 14
5. Are you surprised dinosaurs lived on earth for one hundred and twenty-five million
(125,000,000) years?
6. Is it true human beings have lived on earth for only four million (4,000,000) years?

Part I.Work in small groups. Look at the health treatments below. Which ones do you know
about? Which ones do you think are helpful? You may need to check your dictionary.
acupuncture massage naturopathy

hypnosis meditation yoga
Part II.Complete the sentences with words from the list. Use noun clauses. Discuss your
sentences with other students.
1. I believe/think ____________ is useful for ___________
2. I am certain -----------------------------
3. I am not convinced --------------------------
0 Exercise 21. Listening and grammar. (Charts 14-4 and 14-5)

(J
Listen to each conversation and then complete the sentences.
CD2 Example: You will hear: MAN: I heard Jack is in jail. I can't believe it!
Track 51
WOMAN: Neither can I! The police said he robbed a house.
They must have the wrong person.
You will say: a. The man is shocked that Jack is in jail.
b. The woman is sure that the police have the wrong person.
1. a. The woman thinks that ....

b. The man is glad that ... .
2. a. The mother is worried that ....
b. Her son is sure that ....
3. a. The man is surprised that ....
b. The woman is disappointed that ....
4. a. The man is happy that ....
b. The woman is pleased that ....
5. a. The woman is afraid* that ....
b. The man is sure that ....
*Sometimes be afraid expresses fear:

I don'1 wam 10 go near 1ha1 dog. I'm afraid cha1 ii will bite me.
Sometimes be afraid expresses polite regret:
I'm afraid you have the wrong number. = I'm sorry, but I think you have the wrong number.
I'm afraid I can't come to your party. = I'm sorry, but I can't come to your party.
Noun Clauses 381

Circle all the statements that are true for each conversation.
1. A: DidTaka remember to get food for dinner tonight?
B: I think so.
a. Speaker B thinksTaka got food for dinner.
b. Speaker B is sure thatTaka got food for dinner.
c. Speaker B doesn't know for sure if Taka got food for dinner.
2. A: Is Ben marryingTara?
B: I hope not.
a. Speaker B says Ben is not going to marry Tara.
b. Speaker B doesn't know if Ben is going to marry Tara.
c. Speaker B doesn't want Ben to marry Tara.
14·6 Substituting So for a That-Clause in Conversational

Responses
(a) A: Is Ana from Peru? Think, believe, and hope are frequently followed by so in
B: I think so. (so= that Ana is from Peru) conversational English in response to a yes/no question.
(b) A: Does Judy live in Dallas? They are alternatives to yes, no, or I don't know.
B: I believe so. (so= that Judy lives in Dallas) So replaces a that-clause.
(c) A: Did you pass the test? INCORRECT: I think so that Ana is from Peru.
B: I hope so. (so= that I passed the tesQ
(d) A: Is Jack married? Negative usage of think so and believe so:
B: I don'tthink so. / I don't believe so. do not think so I do not believe so
(e) A: Did you fail the test? Negative usage of hope in conversational responses:
B: I hope not. hope not.
In (e): I hope not= I hope I didn't fail the test.
INCORRECT: I don't hope so.
(f) A: Do you want to come with us? Other common conversational responses:
B: Oh, I don't know. I guess so. I guess so. I guess not.
I suppose so. I suppose not.
NOTE: In spoken English, suppose often sounds like
"spoze."

Restate Speaker B's answers by using a that-clause.
1. A: Is Karen going to be home tonight?.
B: I think so.
- I think that Karen is going to be home tonight.
382 CHAPTER 14
2. A: Are we going to have a grammar test tomorrow?
B: I don't believe so.
3. A: Will Margo be at the conference in March?
B: I hope so.
4. A: Can horses swim?
B: I believe so.
5. A: Do gorillas have tails?
B: I don't think so.
6. A: Will Janet be at Omar's wedding?
B: I suppose so.
7. A: Will your flight be canceled because of the storms?
B: I hope not.

Work with a partner. Take turns answering the questions. If you are not sure, use think so.
If you are sure, use Yes or No.
Example:
SPEAKER A (book open): Does this book have more than 500 pages?
SPEAKER B (book closed): I think so. I I don't think so.
Yes, it does. I No, it doesn't.
1. Are we going to have a grammar quiz tomorrow?
2. Do spiders have noses?
3. Do spiders have eyes?
4. Is there a fire extinguisher in this room?
5. Does the word patient have more than one meaning?
6. Does the word dozen have more than one meaning?
7. Is your left foot bigger than your right foot?
8. Is there just one sun in our universe?
9. Do any English words begin with the letter "x"?
10. Do you know what a noun clause is?

Circle the quotation marks and underline the punctuation inside each quotation. What are the
differences in punctuation?
1. "Help!" Marcos yelled.
2. "Can someone help me?" he asked.
3. "I'm going to drop this box of jars," he said.
Noun Clauses 383

14·7 Quoted Speech
Sometimes we want to quote a speaker's words - to write a speaker's exact words. Exact quotations are used
in many kinds of writing, such as newspaper articles, stories, novels, and academic papers. When we quote a
speaker's words, we use quotation marks.
(a) SPEAKERS' EXACT WORDS (b) QUOTING THE SPEAKERS' WORDS
Jane: Cats are fun to watch. Jane said, "Cats are fun to watch."
Mike: Yes, I agree. They're graceful and playful. Mike said, "Yes, I agree. They're graceful and
Do you have a cat? playful. Do you have a cat?"
(c) HOW TO WRITE QUOTATIONS
1. Add a comma after said.*-------------�:;;;.- Jane said,
2. Add quotation marks.** ::: Jane said, "
3. Capitalize the first word of the quotation. :;;; Jane said, "Cats
4. Write the quotation. Add a final period. :;;.. Jane said, "Cats are fun to watch.
5. Add quotation marks after the period. :;;; Jane said, "Cats are fun to watch."
(d) Mike said, "Yes, I agree. They're graceful and When there are two (or more) sentences in a
playful. Do you have a cat?" quotation, put the quotation marks at the beginning
(e) INCORRECT: Mike said, "Yes, I agree." "They're and end of the whole quote, as in (d).
graceful and playful." "Do you have a cat?" Do NOT put quotation marks around each sentence.
As with a period, put the quotation marks after a
question mark at the end of a quote.
(f) "Cats are fun to watch," Jane said. In (f): Notice that a comma (not a period) is used at
(g) "Do you have a cat?" Mike asked. the end of the QUOTED SENTENCE because Jane said
comes after the quote.
In (g): Notice that a question mark (not a comma) is
used at the end of the QUOTED QUESTION.
*Other common verbs besides say that introduce questions: admi1, announce, answer, ask, complain, explain, inquire, repon, reply, show,
siaze, wrile.
**Quotation marks are called "inverted commas" in British English.

Make sentences in which you quote the speaker's exact words. Use said or asked. Punctuate
carefully.
1. ANN: My sister is a student.
-+ Ann said, "My sister is a student." OR "My sister is a student," Ann said.
2. ANN: Is your brother a student?
3. RITA: We're hungry.
4. RITA: Are you hungry too?
5. RITA: Let's eat. The food is ready.
6. }OHN F. KE1'1NEDY: Ask not what your country can do for you. Ask what you can do for
your country.
384 CHAPTER 14
A teacher recently had a conversation with Roberto. Practice punctuating their quoted speech.
(TEACHER) You know sign language, don't you I asked Roberto.
(ROBERTO) Yes, I do he replied both my grandparents are deaf.
(TEACHER) I'm looking for someone who knows sign language. A deaf student is
going to visit our class next Monday I said. Could you interpret for her I
asked.
(ROBERTO) I'd be happy to he answered. Is she going to be a new student?
(TEACHER) Possibly I said. She's interested in seeing what we do in our English
classes.
o Exercise 28. Reading and writing. (Chart 14-7)

Part I. Read the story. Underline the quoted speech.
The Ugly Duckling

Once upon a time, there was a mother duck. She lived on a farm and spent her days
sitting on her nest of eggs. One morning, the eggs began to move and out came six little
ducklings. But there was one egg that was bigger than the rest, and it didn't hatch. The mother
didn't remember this egg. "I thought I had only six," she said. "But maybe I counted
incorrectly."
A short time later, the seventh egg hatched. But this duckling had gray feathers, not
brown like his brothers, and was quite ugly. His mother thought, "Maybe this duck isn't one of
mine." He grew faster than his brothers and ate more food. He was very clumsy, and none of
the other animals wanted to play with him. Much of the time he was alone.
He felt unloved by everyone, and he decided to run away from the farm. He asked other
animals on the way, "Do you know of any ducklings that look like me?" But they just laughed
and said, "You are the ugliest duck we have ever seen." One day, the duckling looked up and
saw a group of beautiful birds overhead. They were white, with long slender necks and large
wings. The duckling thought, "I want to look just like them."
He wandered alone most of the winter and finally found a comfortable bed of reeds in a
pond. He thought to himself, "No one wants me. I'll just hide here for the rest of my life."
There was plenty of food there, and although he was lonely, he felt a little happier.
Noun Clauses 385

www.irLanguage.com
By springtime, the duck was quite large. One morning, he saw his reflection in the water.
He didn't even recognize himself. A group of swans coming back from the south saw him and
flew down to the pond. "Where have you been?" they asked. "You're a swan like us." As they
began to swim across the pond, a child saw them and said, "Look at the youngest swan. He's
the most beautiful of all." The swan beamed with happiness, and he lived happily ever after.
Part II. Work in small groups and answer this question: What lessons does this story teach?
Part III. Write a story that includes quoted speech. Choose one of these topics:
1. Write a fable* from your country in which animals speak.

2. Write a story that you learned when you were young.

Circle the correct words in italics.
Kathy and Mark said that we I they didn't like our I their new apartment.
*a fable = a traditional story that teaches a lesson about life
386 CHAPTER 14
14· 8 Quoted Spee�h vs. Reported Speech
QUOTED SPEECH auoTED SPEECH = giving a speaker's exact words. Quotation marks
(a) Ann said, "I'm hungry." are used.*
(b) Tom said,"/ need my pen."
REPORTED SPEECH REPORTED SPEECH = giving the idea of a speaker's words. Not all of the
(c) Ann said (that) she was hungry. exact words are used; pronouns and verb forms may change.
Quotation marks are NOT used.*
(d) Tom said (that) he needed his pen.
That is optional; it is more common in writing than in speaking.
*Quoted speech is also called direci speech. Reported speech is also called indirect speech.

Change the pronouns from quoted speech to reported speech.
1. Mr. Smith said, "I need help with my luggage."
--+ Mr. Smith said that he needed help with his luggage.
2. Mrs. Hart said, "I am going to visit my brother."

--+ Mrs. Hart said that ______ was going to visit ______ brother.
3. Sergey said to me, "I will call you."

--+ Sergey said ______ would call ______
4. Rick said to us, "I'll meet you at your house after I finish my work at my house."
--+ Rick said that ______ would meet ______ at ______ house
after ______ finished ______ work at ______ house.
o Exercise 31. Warm -up. (Chart 14-9)

Read the conversation and look at the sentences that describe it. All are correct. What
difference do you notice?
}ENNY: What are you doing tomorrow?
ELLA: I'm going to take my parents out to dinner.
a. Ella said she was going to take her parents out to dinner.
b. Ella just said she is going to take her parents out to dinner.
c. Last week Ella said she was going to take her parents out to dinner.
d. Ella says she is going to take her parents out to dinner.
Noun Clauses 387

I i
14 • 9 Verb For:ms in Reported
t
• ->
Speech
•a& • I
(a) QUOTED: Joe said, "I fee/good." In formal English, if the reporting verb (e.g., said) is in
(b) REPORTED: Joe said (that) he felt good. the past, the verb in the noun clause is often also in a
(c) QUOTED: Ken said, "I am happy." past form, as in (b) and (d).
(d) REPORTED: Ken said (that) he was happy.
-Ann said, "I am hungry." In informal English, often the verb in the noun clause
(e) -What did Ann just say? I didn't hear her. is not changed to a past form, especially when words
- She said (that) she is hungry. are reported soon after they are said, as in (e).
(f ) -What did Ann say when she got home last night? In later reporting, however, or in formal English, a
- She said (that) she was hungry. past verb is commonly used, as in (f).
(g) Ann says (that) she is hungry. If the reporting verb is present tense (e.g., says), no
change is made in the noun clause verb.
QUOTED SPEECH REPORTED SPEECH REPORTED SPEECH

(formal or later reporting) (informal or immediate reporting)
He said, "I workhard:' He said he workedhard. He said he works hard.

He said, "I am working hard." He said he was working hard. He said he is working hard.
He said, "I worked hard." He said he had worked hard. He said he worked hard.
He said, "I have workedhard." He said he had worked hard. He said he has worked hard.
He said, "I am going to workhard." He said he was going to work hard. He said he is going to work hard.
He said, "I will workhard." He said he would work hard. He said he will work hard.
He said, "I can workhard." He said he could workhard. He said he can work hard.

Complete the reported speech sentences. Use formal verb forms.
1. Sonia said, "I need some help."
-+ Sonia said (that) she needed some help.
2. Linda said, "I'm meeting David for dinner."

-+ Linda said (that) she _________ David for dinner.
3. Ms. Chavez said, "I have studied in Cairo."

-+ Ms. Chavez said (that) she _________ in Cairo.
4. Kazu said, "I forgot to pay my electric bill."

-+ Kazu said (that) he _________ to pay his electric bill.
5. Barbara said, "I am going to fly to Hawaii for my vacation."

-+ Barbara said (that) she _________ to Hawaii for her vacation.
6. I said, "I'll carry the box up the stairs."

-+ I said (that) I _________ the box up the stairs.
7. Tarik said to me, "I can teach you to drive."

-+ Tarik said (that) he _________ me to drive.
388 CHAPTER 14
Change the quoted speech to reported speech. Change the verb in quoted speech to a past
form in reported speech if possible.
1. Jim said, "I'm sleepy."
---+ Jim said (that) he was sleepy.
2. Kristina said, "I don't like chocolate."

3. Carla said, "I'm planning to take a trip with my family."
4. Ahmed said, "I have already eaten lunch."
5. Kate said, "I called my doctor."
6. Mr. Rice said, "I'm going to go to Chicago."
7. Pedro said, "I will be at your house at ten."
8. Emma said, "I can't afford to buy a new car."
9. Olivia says, "I can't afford to buy a new car."
10. Ms. Acosta said, "I want to see you in my office
after your meeting with your supervisor."

Circle all the sentences that are grammatically correct.
1. a. David asked Elena if she would marry him.
b. David asked Elena would she marry him.
c. David wanted to know if Elena would marry him.
2. a. Elena said she wasn't sure.
b. Elena told she wasn't sure.
c. Elena told David she wasn't sure.
14· 10 Common.Reporting Verbs: Tell, Ask, Answer/Reply

(a) Kay said that* she was hungry. A main verb that introduces reported speech is called
(b) Kay told me that she was hungry. a "reporting verb." Say is the most common reporting
(c) Kay told Tom that she was hungry. verb** and is usually followed immediately by a noun
INCORRECT: Kay told that she was hungry. clause, as in (a).
INCORRECT: Kay told to me that she was hungry. Tell is also commonly used. Note that told is followed
INCORRECT: Kay said me that she was hungry. by me in (b) and by Tom in (c).
Tell needs to be followed immediately by a (pro)noun
object and then by a noun clause.
(d) QUOTED: Ken asked me, "Are you tired?" Asked is used to report questions.
REPORTED: Ken asked (me) if I was tired.
(e) Ken wanted to know if I was tired. Questions are also reported by using want to know,
Ken wondered if I was tired. wonder, and inquire.
Ken inquired whether or not I was tired.
( f ) QUOTED: I said (to Kay), "I am not tired." The verbs answer and reply are often used to report
REPORTED: I answered I replied that I wasn't tired. replies.
*That is optional. See Chapter 14-8.

**Other common reporting verbs: Kay announced I commented I complained I explained I remarked I stated chat she was
hungry.
Noun Clauses 389

o Exercise 35. Looking at grammar. (Chart 14-1O)
Complete the sentences with said, told, or asked.
1. Karen told me that she would be here at one o'clock.
2. Jamal said that he was going to get here around two.
3. Sophia asked me what time I would arrive.
4. William that I had a message.
5. William me that someone had called me around ten-thirty.
6. I William if he knew the caller's name.
7. I had a short conversation with Alice yesterday. I ______ her that I would help
her move into her new apartment next week. She ______ that she would welcome
the help. She _____ me if I had a truck or knew anyone who had a truck. I
_____ her Dan had a truck. She she would call him.
8. My uncle in Toronto called and that he was organizing a surprise party for
my aunt's 60th birthday. He me if I could come to Toronto for the party.
I ______ him that I would be happy to come. I ______ when it was. He
______ it was the last weekend in August.
o Exercise 36. Let's talk: pairwork. (Charts 5-2, 14-2, 14-3, and 14-10)
Work with a partner. Write down five questions to ask your partner about his/her life or
opinions. Interview your partner and write down the answers. Then report to the class some
of the information you found out about your partner. Include both the question and the
response. Use either formal or informal verb forms.*
Examples:
STUDENT A's question: Where were you born?
STUDENT B's response: In Nepal.
STUDENT A's report: I asked him where he was born. He said he was born in Nepal.
STUDENT B's question: Who do you admire most in the world?
STUDENT A's response: I admire my parents.
STUDENT B's report: I asked him who he admires most in the world. He said he admires his
parents the most.
*In everyday spoken English, native speakers sometimes change formal/later noun clause verbs to past forms, and sometimes
they don't. In an informal reporting situation such as in this exercise, either informal/immediate reporting or reporting tenses
are appropriate.
390 CHAPTER 14
o Exercise 37. Looking at grammar. (Charts 14-8 � 14-1 O)
Complete the paragraph based on what the people in the picture are saying. Use the form al
sequence of tenses.
Nothing. I'm
Whal are you going not hungry.
to have? I've already
eaten.
irLanguage.com
One da y Katya and Pavel were at a restaurant. Katya picked up her me nu and looked at it.
'
Pavel left his menu on the ta ble. Katya asked Pa vel what he was r3oin@ to have . He said
1
------------------� an ythi n g because he
2
-----------· He ___________ already. Katya was
4
surprised. She asked him why ___________ He told her
5
o Exercise 38. Looking at grammar. (Charts 14-8 - 14-1O)

Change the reported speech to quoted speech. Begin a new paragraph each time the speaker
ch anges. Pay special attention to pronouns, verb forms, and word order.
Example:
REPORTED SPEECH: This morning my mother asked me if I had gotten enough sleep last night.
I told her that I was fine. I explained that I didn't need a lot of sleep. She
told me th at I needed to take better care of myself.
QUOTED SPEECH: This morning my mother said, "Did you get enough sleep last night?"
"I'm fine," I replied. "/ don't need a lot of sleep."
She said, ''You need to take better care of yourself."
1. In the middle of class yesterday, my friend tapped me o n the shoulder and asked me what I
was doing after class. I told her that I would tell her later.
2. When I w as putting on my coat, Robert asked me where I was going. I told him that I had
a da te with Anna. He wanted to know what we were goi ng to do. I told him that we were
going to a movie.
Noun Clauses. 391

C:J�!P-' C:JticJ:.;,.re,,..
0 Exercise 39. Listening. (Charts 14-8 - 14-10) irLanguage.com
{i
Listen to Roger's report of his phone conversation with Angela. Then listen again and write
the missing words.
CD2
Track 52
Angela called and _________ me where Bill ___________
I _________ her he _________ in the lunchroom. She

3 4
_________ when he _ ________ back. I _________
5 6 7
he _________ back around 2:00. I _________ her if I
8 9
_ ________ something for her.
10
She _________ that Bill had the information she _________
11 12
and only he _________ her. I _________ her that I
13 14
_________ him a message. She thanked me and hung up.
15
o Exercise 40. Reading. (Chapter 14)

The Last Lecture

In 2007, a 47-year-old computer science professor from Carnegie Mellon
University was invited to give a lecture at his university. His name was Randy
Pausch, and the lecture series was called "The Last Lecture." Pausch was
asked to think about what wisdom he would give to people if he knew it was
his last opportunity to do so. In Pausch's case, it really was his last lecture
because he had cancer and wasn't expected to survive. Pausch gave an
uplifting lecture called "Really Achieving Your Childhood Dreams." The
lecture was recorded and put on the Internet. A reporter for the Wall Street
Jour'nal was also there and wrote about it. Soon millions of people around the
world heard about Pausch's inspiring talk.
Here are some quotes from Randy Pausch:
To the general public:
"Proper apologies have three parts: (1) What I did was wrong. (2) I'm sorry that!
hurt you. (3) How do I make it better? It's the third part that people tend to forget."
"If I could only give three words of advice, they would be 'tell the truth.' If I got
three more words, I'd add 'all the time'.''
"The key question to keep asking is, 'Are you spending your time on the right
things?' Because time is all you have.''
"We cannot change the cards we are dealt, just how we play the hand.''
To his students: "Whether you think you can or can't, you're right."
To his children: "Don't try to figure out what I wanted you to become. I want you to
become what you want to become.''
392 CHAPTER 14
Sadly, in 2008, Randy Pausch died. Before his death he was able to put down his thoughts
in a book, appropriately called The Last Lecture.
Part II. Work in small groups. Make sure the members of your group understand each
quotation in Part I. Then, individually, choose one of the quotes to agree or disagree with.
Use some of these phrases and support your statement with reasons.
I agree I disagree that I think I don't think that
I believe I don't believe that It's true that

Edit the sentences. Correct the errors in noun clauses.
1. My friend knows where de I live.
2. I don't know what is your email address?
3. I think so that Mr. Lee is out of town.
4. Can you tell me that where Victor is living now?
5. I asked my uncle what kind of movies does he like.
6. I think, that my English has improved a lot.
7. Is true that people are basically the same everywhere in the world.
8. A man came to my door last week. J didn't know who is he.
9. I want to know does Pedro have a laptop computer.
10. Sam and I talked about his classes. He told that he don't like his algebra class.
11. A woman came into the room and ask me Where is your brother?
12. I felt very relieved when the doctor said, you will be fine. It's nothing serious.
13. My mother asked me that: "When you will be home?
Noun Clauses 393

394
irLanguage.com
UNIT A
.. -
A· 1 The Present Perfect vs. Th� Past Perfect _
------------ --------------·-----
--------------�----- -
Present Perfect (a) I am not hungry now. I have The PRESENT PERFECT expresses an
already eaten. activity that occurred before now, at an
3:; unspecified time in the past, as in (a).
0
3:;
0
c:
,/
/'
'/
'
Past Perfect (b) I was not hungry at 1 :00 P.M. The PAST PERFECT expresses an activity
I had already eaten. that occurred before another time in
the past.
::i
p.; In (b): I ate at noon. I was not hungry
0
0
at 1 :00 P.M. because I had already
v
,'
eaten before 1 :00 P.M.
' •-· ·1hed when I saw my son.

He had poured 1 bowl of noodles on top of his head.
395
A· 2 The Past I>rogres�ive vs. The P��t Perfect _ _
Past Progressive (a) I was eating when Bob came. The PAST PROGRESSIVE expresses an
activity that was in progress at a
particular time in the past.
E
"'
()
In (a): I began to eat at noon. Bob
.D came at 12: 10. My meal was in
0
o::l
progress when Bob came.
V 'I
Past Perfect (b) I had eaten when Bob came. The PAST PERFECT expresses an activity
that was completed before a particular
time in the past.
In (b): I finished eating at noon. Bob
came at 1:00 P.M. My meal was
completed before Bob came.
,, ,,
Aey
- ��
- - Still_vs. more_;__ ___ _______ _ _________ _ ___ ________ ___ __ _ _____ ___ ·� ___
Still
(a) It was cold yesterday. It is still cold today. We still need to Still= A situation continues to exist from
wear coats. past to present without change. Still is
(b) The mail didn't come an hour ago. The mail still hasn't come. used in either affirmative or negative
sentences.
Position: midsentence*
Anymore
(c) I lived in Chicago two years ago, but then I moved to another Anymore = A past situation does not
city. I don't live in Chicago anymore. continue to exist at present; a past
situation has changed. Anymore has the
same meaning as any longer. Anymore is
used in negative sentences.
Position: end of sentence
*See Chart 1-3, p. 10. A midsentence adverb

(1) precedes a simple present verb: � still need to wear coats.
(2) follows am, is, are, was, were: Ii is still cold.
(3) comes between a helping verb and a main verb: Bob has already arrived.
(4) precedes a negative helping verb: Ann still ham't come.
(5) follows the subject in a question: Have you already seen ihai movie?
396 APPENDIX
conclude that guess that pretend that show that
demonstrate that imagine that recall that suspect that
fear that indicate that recognize that teach that
figure out that observe that regret that
find out that presume that reveal that
*See Chart 14-4, p. 379, for more information.
Scientists have concluded that dolphins can communicate with each other.
A·S _ A��itional__Expressions with�Be + That-Clauses* ________________

be ashamed that be furious that be proud that
be amazed that be horrified that be terrified that
be astounded that be impressed that be thrilled that
be delighted that be lucky that
be fortunate that be positive that
*See Chart 14-5, p. 380, for more information.
Supplementary Grammar Charts 397

UNIT B: Phrasal Verbs
NOTE: See the Fundamentals of English Grammar Workbook appendix for more practice exercises for
phrasal verbs.
l i
B • 1 Phrasal Verbs
(a) We put off our trip. We'll go next month instead of this In (a): put off= a phrasal verb
month. (put off= postpone) A PHRASAL VERB = a verb and a particle that
(b) Jimmy, put on your coat before you go outdoors. together have a special meaning. For example,
(put on = place clothes on one's body) put off means "postpone."
(c) Someone left the scissors on the table. They didn't A PARTICLE = a "small word" (e.g., off, on, away,
belong there. I put them away. back) that is used in a phrasal verb.
(put away = put something in its usual or proper place) Notice that the phrasal verbs with put in (a), (b),
(d) After I used the dictionary, I put it back on the shelf. (c), and (d) all have different meanings.
(put back = return something to its original place)
Separable Some phrasal verbs are separable: a NOUN

.__------------------�
OBJECT can either
(e) We put off our trip. =(vb+ particle+ NOUN) (1) follow the particle, as in (e), OR
( f ) We put our trip off. = (vb + NOUN + particle) (2) come between (separate) the verb and
(g) We put it off. = (vb + PRONOUN + particle) the particle, as in (f).
If a phrasal verb is separable, a PRONOUN OBJECT
comes between the verb and the particle, as in (g).
INCORRECT: We put off it.
Nonseparable If a phrasal verb is nonseparable, a NOUN or

PRONOUN always follows (never precedes) the
(h) I ran into Bob. = (vb + particle + NOUN) particle, as in (h) and (i).
( i) I ran into him. = (vb + particle + PRONOUN}
INCORRECT: I ran Bob into.
INCORRECT: I ran him into.
Phrasal Verbs: Intransitive

...._-------------------
Some phrasal verbs are intransitive; i.e., they are
---1 not followed by an object.
( j ) The machine broke down.
(k) Please come in.
(I) I fell down.
Three-Word Phrasal Verbs Some two-word verbs (e.g., drop in) can become
three-word verbs (e.g., drop in on).
(m) Last night some friends dropped in. In (m): drop in is not followed by an object. It is
an intransitive phrasal verb (i.e., it is not followed
by an object).
( n ) Let's drop in on Alice this afternoon. In (n): drop in on is a three-word phrasal verb.
. Three-word phrasal verbs are transitive (they are
followed by objects).
( o ) We dropped in on her last week. In (o): Three-word phrasal verbs are

nonseparable (the noun or pronoun follows the
phrasal verb).
398 APPENDIX
B· 2 Phrasal Verbs: A Reference List
A ask out = ask (someone) to go on a date get over = recover from an illness or a shock
get together (with) = join, meet
blow out = extinguish (a match, a candle) get through (with) = finish
break down = stop functioning properly get up = get out of bed in the morning
break out = happen suddenly give away = donate, get rid of by giving
break up = separate, end a relationship give back = return (something) to (someone)
bring back = return give up = quit doing (something) or quit trying
bring up = (1) raise (children) go on = continue
(2) mention, start to talk about
go back (to) = return to a place
call back = return a telephone call go out = not stay home

c
call off = cancel go over (to) = (1) approach
(2) visit another's home
call on = ask (someone) to speak in class
grow up (in) = become an adult
call up = make a telephone call
cheer up = make happier H hand in = give homework, test papers, etc., to
clean up = make neat and clean a teacher
come along (with) = accompany hand out = give (something) to this person,
come from = originate then to that person, then to
come in = enter a room or building another person, etc.
come over (to) = visit the speaker's place hang around/out (with) = spend time relaxing
cross out = draw a line through hang up = (1) hang on a hanger or a hook
cut out (of) = remove with scissors or knife (2) end a telephone conversation
have on = wear
D dress up = put on nice clothes help out = assist (someone)
drop in (on) = visit without calling first or
without an invitation K keep away (from) = not give to
drop out (of) = stop attending (school) keep on = continue
E eat out = eat outside of one's home L lay off = stop employment
leave on = (1) not turn off (a light, a machine)
F fall down = fall to the ground (2) not take off (clothing)
figure out = find the solution to a problem look into = investigate
fill in = complete by writing in a blank space look over = examine carefully
fill out = write information on a form look out (for) = be careful
fill up = fill completely with gas, water, coffee, look up = look for information in a dictionary,
etc. a telephone directory, an
find out (about) = discover information encyclopedia, etc.
fool around (with) = have fun while wasting
p pay back = return borrowed money to
time
(someone)
G get on = enter a bus/an airplane/a train/a pick up = lift
subway point out = call attention to
get out of = leave a car, a taxi
( continued)

I '
B· 2 Phrasal Verbs: A;Reference List (continued) . .
print out = create a paper copy from a T take back= return

computer take off = (1) remove clothes from one's body
put away = put (something) in its usual or (2) ascend in an airplane
proper place take out = invite out and pay
put back = return (something) to its original talk over = discuss
place tear down = destroy a building
put down = stop holding or carrying tear out (of) = remove (paper) by tearing
put off = postpone tear up = tear into small pieces
put on = put clothes on one's body think over = consider
put out = extinguish (stop) a fire, a cigarette throw away/out = put in the trash, discard
try on = put on clothing to see if it fits
R run into = meet by chance
turn around
run out (of) = finish the supply of (something) } change to the opposite direction
turn back
s set out (for) = begin a trip turn down = decrease the volume
shut off = stop a machine or a light, turn off turn off = stop a machine or a light
sign up (for) = put one's name on a list turn on = start a machine or a light
show up = come, appear turn over = turn the top side to the bottom
sit around (with) = sit and do nothing turn up = increase the volume
sit back = put one's back against a chair back
sit down = go from standing to sitting
w wake up = stop sleeping
watch out (for) = be careful
speak up = speak louder
work out = solve
stand up = go from sitting to standing
write down = write a note on a piece of paper
start over = begin again
stay up = not go to bed
o EXERCISE 1. Looking at grammar. (Charts 8-1 and 8-2)

Underline the second part of the phrasal verb in each sentence.
1. I picked � a book and started to read.
2. The teacher called on me in class.
3. I get up early every day.
4. I feel okay now. I got over my cold last week.
5. I woke my roommate up when I got home.
6. I turned the radio on to listen to some music.
7. When I don't know how to spell a word, I look it up.
400 APPENDIX
o EXERCISE 2. Looking at grammar. (Charts 8-1 and 8-2)
Check (/') the correct sentences. In some cases, both are correct.
1. __ I turned the light on.
__ I turned on the light.
2. __ I ran into Mary.

__ I ran Mary into.
3. __ Joe looked up the definition.

__ Joe looked the definition up.
4. __ I took off my coat.

__ I took my coat off.
5. __ I got in the car and left.

__ I got the car in and left.
6. __ I figured out the answer.

__ I figured the answer out.
0 EXERCISE 3. Looking at grammar. (Charts 8-1 and 8-2)

Complete the sentences with particles and the pronouns it or them. If the phrasal verb is
separable, circle SEP. If it is nonseparable, circle NONSEP.
1. I got over my cold. --. I got over it SEP
�
2. I made up the story. -+ I made SEP NONSEP
3. I put off my homework. -+ I put SEP NONSEP
4. I wrote down the numbers. -+ I wrote SEP NONSEP
5. I looked up the answer. -+ I looked SEP NONSEP
6. I got on the bus. -+ I got SEP NONSEP
7. I looked into the problem. -+ I looked SEP NONSEP
8. I shut off the engine. -+ I shut SEP NONSEP
9. I turned off the lights. -+ I turned SEP NON SEP
10. I got off the subway. -+ I got SEP NONSEP
NOTE: See the Fundamentals of English Grammar Workbook appendix for more practice
exercises for phrasal verbs.

UNIT C: Prepositions
NOTE: See the Fundamentals of English Grammar Workbook appendix for practice exercises for preposition
combinations.
, · l · r · ·· ·
C· 1 Preposition Combina:tions:. Intr.oduction · .
� •1 _ .I ., . , ,, _ , ,
ADJ+ PREP At, from, of, on, and to are examples of prepositions.
(a) Ali is absent from class today. Prepositions are often combined with adjectives, as in (a), and verbs,
V + PREP as in (b).
(b) This book belongs to me.
' • •I ••
.C· 2
t
I '
Prepositioh _Com�inations: A ��fer�nce List . .

A be devoted to
be absent from die of I from
be accustomed to be different from
add (this) to (that) disagree with (someone) about (something)
be acquainted with be disappointed in
admire (someone) for (something) discuss (something) with (someone)
be afraid of divide (this) into (that)
agree with (someone) about (something) be divored from
be angry at I with (someone) about I over (something) be done with
apologize to (someone) for (something) dream about I of
apply for ( something) dream of
approve of
argue with (someone) about I over (something) E
arrive at (a building I a room) be engaged to
arrive in (a city I a country) be equal to
ask (someone) about (something) escape from (a place)
ask (someone) for (something) be excited about
be aware of excuse (someone) for (something)
excuse from
8 be exhausted from
be bad for
believe in F
belong to be familiar with
be bored with I by be famous for
borrow (something) from (someone) feel about
feel like
c fill (something) with
be clear to be finished with
combine with forgive (someone) for (something)
compare (this) to I with (that) be friendly to I with
complain to (someone) about (something) be frightened of I by
be composed of be full of
concentrate on
consist of G
be crazy about get rid of
be crowded with be gone from
be curious about be good for
graduate from
D
depend on (someone) for (something)
be dependent on (someone) for (something)
402 APPENDIX
. C·2 Prep9s�tion Combinations: A �efere�ce List (continued) . _
H be prepared for
happen to protect ( this) from ( that)
be happy about (something) be proud of
be happy for (someone) provide (someone) with
hear about I of (something) from (someone)
help (someone) with (something) Q
hide (something) from (someone) be qualified for
hope for
be hungry for R
read about
be ready for
insist on be related to
be interested in rely on
introduce (someone) to (someone) be resonsible for
invite (someone) to (something)
be involved in s
be sad about
K be satisfied with
be kind to be scared of I by
know about search for
separate (this) from (that)
L be similar to
laugh at speak to I with (someone) about (something)
leave for (a place) stare at
listen to subtact (this) from (that)
look at be sure of I about
look for
look forward to T
look like take care of
talk about ( something)
M talk to I with (someone) about (something)
be made of tell (someone) about (something)
be married to be terrified of I by
matter to thank (someone) for (something)
be the matter with think about I of
multiply (this) by (that) be thirsty for
be tired from
N be tired of
be nervous about translate from (one language) to (another)
be nice to
u
0 be used to
be opposed to
w
p wait for
pay for wait on
be patient with warn about I of
be pleased with I about wonder about
play with be worried about
point at
be polite to
prefer (this) to (that)

404
NOTE: You may want to pause the audio after each item or in longer passages so that there is enough time to
complete each task.
Exercise 6, p. 5.
Chapter 1: Present Time 1. Irene designs video games.
2. She is working on a new project.
Exercise 1, p. 1. 3. She is sitting in front of her computer.
SAM: Hi. My name is Sam. 4. She spends her weekends at the office.
USA: Hi. I'm Lisa. It's nice to meet you. 5. She's finishing plans for a new game.
SAM: Nice to meet you too. Where are you from?
USA: I'm from Boston. How about you?
SAM: I'm from Quebec. So, how long have you been Exercise 9, p. 6.
here?
USA: Just one day. I still have a little jet lag. A problem with the printer
SAM: Me too. I got in yesterday morning. So we need to 1. Does it need more paper?
ask each other about a hobby. What do you like to 2. Does it have enough ink?
do in your free time? 3. Are you fixing it yourself?
USA: I spend a lot of time outdoors. I love to hike. 4. Do you know how to fix it?
When I'm indoors, I like to surf the Internet. 5. Do we have another printer in the office?
SAM: Me too. I'm studying Italian right now. There are 6. Hmmm. Is it my imagination or is it making a
a lot of good websites for learning languages on the strange noise?
Internet.
USA: I know. I found a good one for Japanese. I'm
trying to learn a little. Now, when I introduce you
to the group, I have to write your full name on the Exercise 21, p. 14.
board. What's your last name and how do you Natural disasters: a flood
spell it? 1. The weather causes some natural disasters.
SAM: It's Sanchez. S-A-N-C-H-E-Z. 2. Heavy rains sometimes create floods.
USA: My last name is Paterson - with one "t": 3. A big flood causes a lot of damage.
P-A-T-E-R-S-0-N. 4. In towns, floods can damage buildings, homes, and
SAM: It looks like our time is up. Thanks. It's been nice roads.
talking to you. 5. After a flood, a town needs a lot of financial help for
USA: I enjoyed it too. repairs.
Exercise 5, p. 4.
Lunch at the Fire Station Exercise 24, p. 15.
It's 12:30, and the firefighters are waiting for their next 1. talks 9. mixes
call. They are taking their lunch break. Ben, Rita, and 2. fishes 10. bows
Jada are sitting at a table in the fire station. Their co 3. hopes 11. studies
worker Bruno is making lunch for them. He is an 4. teaches 12. buys
excellent cook. He often makes lunch. He is fixing spicy 5. moves 13. enjoys
chicken and rice. Their captain isn't eating. He is doing 6. kisses 14. tries
paperwork. He skips lunch on busy days. He works in 7. pushes 15. carries
his office and finishes his paperwork. 8. waits
405
(J Exercise 33, p. 21.
Part I. Chapter 2: Past Time
At the doctor's office
Exercise 4, p. 27.
1. Do you becomes Dyou Do you have an
1. We studied ...
appoinnnent?
2. Mr.Green wrote a magazine article ...
2. Does he becomes Dze Does he have an
3. The sun sets ...
appoinnnent?
4. A substitute teacher taught ...
3. Does she becomes Duh-she Does she have an
5. Mr.Watson drove a sports car ...
appoinnnent?
4. Do we becomes Duh-we Do we have an
appoinnnent? Exercise 5, p. 28.
5. Dothey becomes Duh-they Dothey have an
Part I.
appoinnnent?
1. I was in a hurry. I wasn't in a hurry.
6. Ami becomes Mi Am I late for my
2. They were on time. They weren't on time.
appoinnnent?
3. He was at the doctor's. He wasn't at the doctor's.
7. Is it becomes Zit Is it time for my
4. We were early. We weren't early.
appoinnnent?
8. Does it becomes Zit Does it hurt? Part II.
Part II. At a wedding
1. Do you have pain anywhere? 1. The bride wasn't nervous before the ceremony.
2. Does it hurt anywhere else? 2. The groom was nervous before the ceremony.
3. Does she have a cough or sore throat? 3. His parents weren't nervous about the wedding.
4. Does he have a fever? 4. The bride and groom were excited about their
5. Does she need lab tests? wedding.
6. Am I very sick? 5. The ceremony was in the evening.
7. Is it serious? • 6. The wedding reception wasn't after the wedding.
8. Does he need to make another appointment? 7. It was the next day.
9. Do they want to wait in the waiting room? 8. It was at a popular hotel.
10. Do we pay now or later? 9. A lot of guests were there.
10. Some relatives from out of town weren't there.
Exercise 35, p. 22.

1. We have a few minutes before we need to leave. Do Exercise 8, p. 30.
you want a cup of coffee? 1. Shhh. The movie is beginning.
2. We need to leave. Are you ready? 2. Oh, no. The elevator door is stuck. It isn't opening.
3. Look outside. Is it raining hard? 3. Here's a letter for you. I opened it accidentally.
4. Do we need to take an umbrella? 4. I'm listening to the phone message that you aready
5. Mr.Smith has his coat on. Is he leaving now? listened to.
6. I'm looking for the office supplies. Are they in here? 5. Are you lying to me or telling me the truth?
6. We enjoyed the party.
7. I'm enjoying the nice weather today.
Exercise 37, p. 24. 8. You look upset. W hat happened?
Aerobic Exercise
Jeremy and Nancy believe exercise is important. They
go to an exercise class three times a week. They like Exercise 16, p. 37.
aerobic exercise. Part I.
Aerobic exercise is a special type of exercise. It 1. Did you becomes Did-ja Did you forget
increases a person's heart rate. Fast walking, running, something? OR
and dancing are examples of aerobic exercise. During Did you becomes Did-ya Did you forget
aerobic exercise, a person's heart beats fast. This brings something?
more oxygen to the muscles. Muscles work longer when 2. Did I becomes Dih-di Did I forget
they have more oxygen. something? OR
Right now Jeremy and Nancy are listening to some Didi becomes Di Did I forget
lively music. They are doing special dance steps. They something?
are exercising different parts of their body. 3. Did he becomes Dih-de Did he forget
How about you? Do you like to exercise? Do your something? OR
muscles get exercise every week? Do you do some type Did he becomes De Did he forget
of aerobic exercise? something?
406 LISTENING SCRIPT Chapter 2

4. Did she becomes Dih-she Did she forget Exercise 21, p. 39.
something? 1. We agree with you.
5. Did we becomes Dih-we Did we forget 2. We agreed with you.
something? 3. I arrived on time.
6. Did they becomes Dih-they Did they forget 4. The teacher explains the answers well.
something? 5. My doctor's appointment ended late.
Part II. 6. The train stopped suddenly.
· 1. Alex hurt his finger. Did he cut it with a knife? 7. You touched a spider!
2. Ms.Jones doesn't have any money in her wallet.
Did she spend it all yesterday?
3. Karen's parents visited. Did you meet them Exercise 22, p. 40.
yesterday? 1. It rains in the spring ...
4. The Browns don't have a car anymore. Did they 2. It rained a lot ...
sell it? 3. The mail carrier walks to our house ...
5. I dropped the glass. Did I break it? 4. My friend surprised me with a birthday present ...
6. Ann didn't throw away her old clothes. Did she 5. The taxi picks up passengers at the airport ...
keep them? 6. I passed my final exam in math ...
7. John gave a book to his son. Did he read it to him?
8. You don't have your glasses. Did you lose them?
9. Mr.Jones looked for his passport in his desk drawer. Exercise 23, p. 40.
Did he find it? I. cooked 5. started 9. added
10. The baby is crying. Did I upset her? 2. served 6. dropped 10. passed
3. wanted 7. pulled 11. returned
Exercise 17, p. 37. 4. asked 8. pushed 12. pointed
Luka wasn't home last night.
1. Did he go to a party last night? Exercise 24, p. 40.
2. Did he have a good time? A: Did you have a good weekend?
3. Did he eat a lot of food? B: Yeah, I went to a waterslide park.
4. Did he drink a lot of soda? A: Really? That sounds like fun!
5. Did he meet some new people? B: It was great! I loved the fast slides. How about you?
6. Did he shake hands with them when he met them? How was your weekend?
7. Did he dance with friends? A: I visited my aunt.
8. Did he sit with his friends and talk? B: Did you have a good time?
A: Not really. She didn't like my clothes or my haircut.
Exercise 19, p. 38.
A Deadly Flu
Exercise 31, p. 46.
Every year, the flu kills 200,000 to 300,000 people
At a checkout stand in a grocery store
around the world. But in 1918, a very strong flu virus
killed millions of people. This flu began in 1918 and 1. A: Hi. Did you find what you needed?
lasted until 1920. It spread around the world, and B: Almost everything. I was looking for sticky rice,
between 20 million and 100 million people died. Unlike but I didn't see it.
other flu viruses that usually kill the very young and the A: It's on aisle 10, in the Asian food section.
very old, many of the victims were healthy young adults. 2. A: This is the express lane. Ten items only. It looks
This was unusual and made people especially afraid. like you have more than ten. Did you count
them?
Exercise 20, p. 39. B: I thought I had ten. Ob, I guess I have more.
Part I. Sorry.
1. watch, watched A: The checkout stand next to me is open.
2. studied, studied 3. A: Do you have any coupons you wanted to use?
3. works, worked B: I had a couple in my purse, but I can't find them
4. decided, decided now.
Part/I. A: W hat were they for? I might have some extras
1. We watched a movie. here.
2. They studied in the morning. B: One was for eggs, and the other was for ice
3. She worked at the library. · cream.
4. They decided to leave. A: I think I have those.
Chapter 2 LISTENING SCRIPT 407

Exercise 39, p. 51. B: Are you going to need to pay a deposit?
Jennifer's Problem A: I'm sure we're going to need to pay the first and last
month's rent.
Jennifer works for an insurance company. When
people need help with their car insurance, they call her. Part II.
Right now it is 9:05 A.M., and Jennifer is sitting at her A: W here are you going to move to?
desk. B: We're going to look for something outside the city.
She came to work on time this morning. Yesterday We're going to spend the weekend apartment
Jennifer was late to work because she had a minor auto hunting.
accident. While she was driving to work, her cell phone A: W hat fees are you going to need to pay?
rang. She reached for it. B: I think we are going to need to pay the first and last
While she was reaching for her phone, Jennifer lost month's rent.
control of the car. Her car ran into a row of mailboxes A: Are there going to be other fees?
beside the road and stopped. Fortunately, no one was B: There is probably going to be an application fee and
hurt in the accident. a deaning fee. Also, the landlord is probably going
Jennifer is okay, but her car isn't. It needs repairs. to run a credit check, so we are going to need to pay
Jennifer feels very embarrassed now. She made a bad for that.
decision, especially since it is illegal to talk on a cell
phone and drive at the same time where she lives. Exercise 10, p. 60.
Part I.
Exercise 43, p. 53. 1. I'll be ready to leave soon.
1. I used to stay up past midnight, but now I often go 2. You'll need to come.
to bed at 10:00 because I have an 8:00 class. 3. He'll drive us.
2. What time did you used to go to bed when you were 4. She'll come later.
a child? 5. We'll get there a little late.
3. Tom used to play tennis after work every day, but 6. They'll wait for us.
now he doesn't. Part II.
4. I used to skip breakfast, but now I always have 1. Don't wait up for me tonight. I'll be home late.
something to eat in the morning because I read that 2. I paid the bill this morning. You'll get my check in
students who eat breakfast do better in school. the next day or two.
5. I didn't used to like grammar, but now I do. 3. We have the better team. We'll probably win the game.
4. Henry twisted his ankle while running down a hill.
Chapter 3: Future Time
He'll probably take a break from running this week.
5. We can go to the beach tomorrow, but it'll probably
be too cold to go swimming.
Exercise 2, p. 56. 6. I invited some guests for dinner. They'll probably
At the airport get here around seven.
7. Karen is doing volunteer work for a community
1. The security line will take about a half hour. health-care clinic this week. She'll be gone a lot in
2. The plane is going to arrive at Gate 10. the evenings.
3. Your flight is already an hour late.
4. Your flight will be here soon.
5. Did you print your boarding pass? Exercise 11, p. 61.
6. Are you printing my boarding pass too? Part I.
7. Are we going to have a snack on our flight? At the doctor's office
8. We will need to buy snacks on the flight. 1. The doctor'll be with you in a few minutes.
2. Your appointment'll take about an hour.
Exercise 6, p. 58. 3. Your fever'll be gone in a few days.
Part I. 4. Your stitches'll disappear over the next two weeks.
Looking for an apartment 5. The nurse'll schedule your tests.
6. The lab'll have the results next week.
A: We're going to look for an apartment to rent this 7. The receptionist at the front desk'll set up your next
weekend. appointment.
B: Are you going to look in this area?
A: No, we're going to search in an area closer to our Part II.
jobs. At the pharmacy
B: Is the rem going to be cheaper in that area? 1. Your prescription'll be ready in ten minutes.
A: Yes, apartment rents are definitely going to be 2. The medicine'll make you feel a little tired.
cheaper. 3. The pharmacist'll call your doctor's office.

4. This cough syrup'll help your cough. B: Not that I know of. Mine says,"Your life will be (J
5. Two aspirin'll be enough. long and happy."
6. The generic drug'll cost less. Good. I want a long life.
7. This information'll explain all the side effects for C: Mine says,"A smile solves all communication
this medicine. problems." Well,that's good! After this,when I
don't understand someone, I'll just smile at them.
Exercise 13, p. 62. D: My fortune is this: "If you work hard,you will be
My day tomorrow successful."
A: Well,it looks like all of us will have good luck in the
1. I'm going to go to the bank tomorrow. future!
2. I'll probably do other errands too.
3. I may stop at the post office.
4. I will probably pick up groceries at the store.
5. It is going to be hot. Chapter 4: Present Perfect and
6. Maybe I'll do my errands early. Past Perfect
Exercise 17, p. 64. Exercise 2, p. 82.
Predictions about the future 1. call,called,called 6. come,came,come
1. People'll have flying cars. 2. speak,spoke,spoken 7. eat,ate,eaten
2. Cars'll use solar power or energy from the sun 3. do,did,done 8. cut,cut,cut
instead of gas. 4. know,knew,known 9. read,read,read
3. Some people'll live underwater. 5. meet,met, met 10. be, was/were,been
4. Some people may live in outer space.
5. Maybe creatures from outer space'll live here. Exercise 12, p. 88.
6. Children'll learn on computers in their homes,not 1. I saw a two-headed snake once. Have you ever ...?
at school. 2. I flew in a small plane last year. Have you ever ... ?
7. Robots may clean our homes. 3. I rode in a limousine once. Have you ever ...?
8. Maybe computers'll have feelings. 4. I did volunteer work last month. Have you ever ...?
9. People won't die. 5. I accidentally tore my shirt yesterday. Have you
10. The earth'll be too crowded. ever ...?
6. I had a scary experience on an airplane last year.
Exercise 23, p. 67. Have you ever ...?
1. Could someone please open the window? 7. I fell out of a boat last week. Have you ever ...?
2. Do you have plans for the weekend? 8. I felt very,very embarrassed once,and my face got
3. Do you have a car? hot. Have you ever ...?
4. I feel sick. I need to leave. 9. I spoke to a famous person yesterday. Have you
ever ... ?
Exercise 33, p. 73. 10. I wanted to be famous once. Have you ever ...?
Going on vacation
A: I'm going on vacation tomorrow. Exercise 17, p. 91.
B: Where are you going? 1. Lori holds the baby a lot.
A: To San Francisco. 2. Richard gives the baby a bath at the end of the day.
B: How are you getting there? Are you flying or driving 3. Lori changes the baby's diapers.
your car? 4. Richard has taken lots of pictures of the baby.
A: I'm flying. I have to be at the airport by seven 5. Lori wakes up when the baby cries.
tomorrow morning. 6. Richard does some of the household chores.
B: Do you need a ride to the airport? 7. Lori is tired during the day.
A: No,thanks. I'm taking a taxi. What about you? Are
you planning to go somewhere over vacation? Exercise 19, p. 92.
B: No. I'm staying here. At a restaurant
Exercise 44, p. 79. 1. My coffee's a little cold.

2. My coffee's gotten a little cold.
At a Chinese restaurant 3. Your order's not ready yet.
A: Okay,let's all open our fortune cookies. 4. Wow! Our order's here already.
B: What does yours say? 5. Excuse me, I think our waiter's forgotten our order.
A: Mine says,"You will receive an unexpected gift." Great! 6. Actually, your waiter's just gone home sick. I'll take
Are you planning to give me a gift soon? care of you.

Exercise 20, p. 93. 2. This month's been unusually warm.
A job interview 3. My parents've been living in the same house for
25 years.
Mika is a nurse. She is interviewing for a job with the 4. My cousins've lived in the same town all their
manager of a hospital emergency room. He is looking at lives.
her resume and asking her some general questions. 5. You slept late.Your friend's already gotten up and
INTERVIEWER: It looks like you've done a lot of things made breakfast.
since you became a nurse. 6. My friends've planned a going-away party for me.
MIKA: Yes, I've worked for a medkal clinic. I've I'm moving back to my hometown.
worked in a prison. I've worked in several 7. I'm afraid your work's been getting a little sloppy.
area hospitals. And I've done volunteer 8. My roommate's traveled a lot. She's visited many
work at a community health center for different countries.
low-income patients.
INTERVIEWER: Very good. But, let me ask you, why have
you changed jobs so often? Exercise 34, p. 103.
MIKA: Well, I like having new challenges and Today's t%ather
different experiences.
The weather has certainly been changing today.
INTERVIEWER: Why have you applied for this job?
Boy, what a day! We've already had rain, wind, hail,
MIKA: Well, I'm looking for something more fast
and sun. So, what's in store for tonight? As you have
paced,�d I've been interested in working
probably seen, dark clouds have been building. We
in an E.R.for a long time. I've heard that
have a weather system moving in that is going to bring
this hospital provides great training for its
colder temperatures and high winds. We've been
staff, and it offers excellent patient care.
saying all week that this system is coming, and it
INTERVIEWER: Thank you for coming in. I'll call you
looks like tonight is it! We've even seen snow down
next week with our decision.
south of us, and we could get some snow here too.
MIKA: It was good to meet you. Thank you for
So hang onto your hats! We may have a rough night
your time.
ahead of us.

1. Every day, I spend some money. Yesterday, I spent l. A: What song is playing on the radio?
some money. Since Friday, I have ... B: I don't know, but it's good, isn't it?
2. I usually make a big breakfast. Yesterday, I made a 2. A: How long have you lived in Dubai?
big breakfast. All week, I have ... B: About a year.
3. Every day, I send emails. Yesterday I sent an email. 3. A: Where are the kids?
Today I have already ... B: I don't know. I've been calling them for ten
4. Every time I go to a restaurant, I leave a nice tip. minutes.
Last night I left a nice tip. I just finished dinner, and 4. A: Who have you met tonight?
I have ... B: Actually, I've met a few people from your office.
5. Every weekend, I sleep in late. Last weekend, I slept How about you? Who have you met?
in late. Since I was a teenager, I have ... A: I've met some interesting artists and musicians.
6. I drive very carefully. On my last trip across the
country, I drove very carefully. All my life, I Exercise 37, p. 104.
have ... A common illness
7. Every morning, I sing in the shower. Earlier today, I
sang in the shower. Since I was little, I have ... LARA: Hi, Mom. I was just calling to tell you that I can't
come to your birthday party this weekend. I'm
afraid I'm sick.
Exercise 31, p. 100. MOM: Oh, I'm sorry to hear that.
LARA: Yeah, I got sick Wednesday night, and it's just
Part I.
been getting worse.
1. Jane's been out of town for two days.
MOM: Are you going to see a doctor?
2. My parents've been active in politics for 40 years.
LARA: I don't know. I don't want to go to a doctor if it's
3. My friends've moved into a new aparnnent.
not serious.
4. I'm sorry. Your credit card's expired.
MOM: Well, what symptoms have you been having?
5. Bob's been traveling in Montreal since last Tuesday.
LARA: I've had a cough, and now I have a fever.
6. You're the first one here. No one else's come yet.
MOM: Have you been taking any medicine?
Part II. LARA: Just over-the-counter stuff.
1. The weather's been warm since the beginning of MOM: If your fever doesn't go away, I think you need to
April. call a doctor.

(J
irLanguage.com
IARA: Yeah, I probably will. Exercise 9, p. 116.
MOM: Well, call me tomorrow and let me know how Where are Roberto and Isabel?
you're doing.
LARA: Okay. I'll call you in the morning. A: Do you know Roberto and Isabel?
B: Yes, I do. They live around the corner from me.
A: Have you seen them lately?
Exercise 43, p. 110. B: No, I haven't. They're out of town.
l . A: Oh, no! We're too late. The train has already A: Did they go to their parents? I heard Roberto's
left. parents are ill.
B: That's okay. We'll catch the next one. B: Yes, they did. They went to help them.
2. A: Last Thursday we went to the station to catch the A: Are you going to see them soon?
train, but we were too late. B: Yes, I am. In fact, I'm going to pick them up at the
B: Yeah, the train had already left. airport.
A: Will they be back this weekend? I'm having a party,
3. A: You sure woke up early this morning!
and I'd like to invite them.
B: Well, I wasn't sleepy. I had already slept for eight
B: No, they won't. They won't be back until
hours.
Monday.
4. A: Go back to sleep. It's only six o'clock in the
morning. Exercise 14, p. 118.
B: I'm not sleepy. I'm going to get up. I have 1. Do you want to go to the mall?
already slept for eight hours. 2. When are the Waltons coming?
3. Where will I meet you?
4. Why were you late?
Chapter 5: Asking Questions 5. What did you buy?
Exercise 19, p. 120.

Exercise 4, p. 113.
A secret
Leaving for the airport
A: John told me something.
1. Do you have your passport? B: What did he tell you?
2. Did you remember to pack a snack for the plane? A: It's confidential. I can't tell you.
3. Will your carry-on bag fit under the seat? B: Did he tell anyone else?
4. Is your taxi coming soon? A: He told a few other people.
5. Will you call me when you get there? B: Who did he tell?
A: Some friends.
Exercise 6, p. 113. B: Then it's not a secret. What did he say?
Part I. A: I can't tell you.
1. Is he absent? becomes Ih-ze absent? OR B: Why can't you tell me?
Ze absent? A: Because it's about you. But don't worry.
2. Is she absent? becomes Ih-she absent? It's nothing bad.
3. Does it work? becomes Zit work? B: Gee. Thanks a lot. That sure makes me feel better.
4. Did it break? becomes Dih-dit break? OR
Dit break? Exercise 29, p. 126.
5. Has he been sick? becomes Ze been sick? OR 1. Who's ringing the doorbell?
A-ze been sick? 2. Whose coat is on the floor?
6. Is there enough? becomes Zere enough? 3. Whose glasses are those?
7. Is that okay? becomes Zat okay? 4. Who's sitting next to you?
Part II. 5. Whose seat is next to yours?
6. Who's out in the hallway?
At the grocery store
1. I need to see the manager. Is she available? Exercise 30, p. 126.
2. I need to see the manager. Is he in the store
today? An old vacation photo
3. Here is one bag of apples. Is that enough? 1. Whose picture is this?
4. I need a drink of water. Is there a drinking 2. Who's in the picture?
fountain? 3. Who's standing in back?
5. My credit card isn't working. Hmmm. Did it 4. You don't wear glasses. Whose glasses are you
expire? wearing?
6. Where's Simon? Has he left? 5. Who's the woman in the purple jacket?
7. The price seems high. Does it include the tax? 6. Whose cabin are you at?

(J Exercise 34, p. 128.
1. A: How fresh are these eggs?
B: I just bought them at the Farmers' Market, so
12. How're we going to get to work?
13. What'd you say?
14. How'll you do that?
CR
LrLanguage.com
they should be fine.

2. A: How cheap were the tickets? Exercise 46, p. 135.
B: They were 50% off.
On an airplane
3. A: How hard was the driver's test?
B: Well, I didn't pass, so that gives you an idea. I. Who're you going to sit with?
2. How're you going to get your suitcase under
4. A: How clean is the car? the seat?
B: There's dirt on the floor. We need to vacuum it 3. What'd the flight attendant just say?
inside. 4. Why'd we need to put our seat belts back on?
5. A: How hot is the frying pan? 5. Why's the plane descending?
B: Don't touch it! You'll burn yourself. 6. Why're we going down?
7. When'll the pilot tell us what's going on?
6. A: How noisy is the street you Jive on?
8. Who'll meet you when you land?
B: There is a lot of traffic, so we keep the windows
9. When's our connecting flight?
closed a lot.
10. How'll we get from the airport to our hotel?
7. A: How serious are you about interviewing for the
job?
B: Very. I already scheduled an interview with the Exercise 47, p. 135.
company.
A mother talking to her teenage daughter
1. Where're you going?
Exercise 37, p. 130. 2. Who're you going with?
Questions: 3. Who's that?
1. How old are you? 4. How long've you known him?
2. How tall are you? 5. Where'd you meet him?
3. How much do you weigh? 6. Where's he go to school?
4. In general, how well do you sleep at night? 7. Is he a good student?
5. How quickly do you fall asleep? 8. What time'IJ you be back?
6. How often do you wake up dt¢ng the night? 9. Why're you wearing that outfit?
7. How tired are you in the mo¢ings? 10. Why're you giving me that look?
8. How many umes. a week do you exercise? 11. Why am I asking so many questions? Because
9. How are you feeling right now? I love you!
10. How soon can you come in for an overnight
appointment?
1. What do you want to do?
Exercise 44, p. 134. 2. What are you doing?
A birthday 3. What are you having for dinner?
4. What are you doing that for?
1. When's your birthday?
5. What do you think about that?
2. When'll your party be?
6. What are you laughing for?
3. Where'd you decide to have it?
7. What do you need?
4. Who're you inviting?
8. What do you have in your pocket?

1. Where's my key? Exercise 53, p. 138.
2. Where're my keys? 1. A: Did you like the movie?
3. Who're those people? B: It was okay, I guess. How about you?
4. What's in that box? 2. A: Are you going to the company party?
5. What're you doing? B: I haven't decided yet. What about you?
6. Where'd Bob go last night?
7. Who'll be at the party? 3. A: Do you like living in this city?
8. Why's the teacher absent? B: Sort of. How about you?
9. Who's that? 4. A: What are you going to have?
10. Why'd you say that? B: Well, I'm not really hungry. I think I might order
11. Who'd you talk to at the party? just a salad. How about you?

Exercise 56, p. 140. 3. How are you feeling? (J
l . a. You're Mrs. Rose, aren't you? 4. How long does the bus ride take?
b. Are you Mrs. Rose? 5. W hose children are those?
2. a. Do you take cream with your coffee? 6. W hen did the Browns move into their new
b. You take cream with your coffee, don't you? apartment?
3. a. You don't want to leave, do you? Part II.
b. Do you want to leave? 7. A: We only have a few minutes before the movie
starts.
Exercise 57, p. 141. B: I'm hurrying.
1. Simple Present A: Do you have enough money for the tickets?
a. You like strong coffee, don't you? 8. A: Is the mail here yet?
b. David goes to Ames High School, doesn't he? B: No, I just checked.
c. Leila and Sara live on Tree Road, don't they? A: I'm expecting a package. How soon will it be
d. Jane has the keys to the storeroom, doesn't she? here?
e. Jane's in her office, isn't she?
9. A: I start my new job next week.
f. You're a member of this class, aren't you?
B: Wow, that's soon.
g. Oleg doesn't have a car, does he?
A: Yeah, I wanted to start as soon as possible.
h. Llsa isn't from around here, is she?
B: Now, how come you're changing jobs?
i. I'm in trouble, aren't I?
10. A: Are you new to the area?
2. Simple Past , B: Yes, I moved here last month. My company
a. Paul went to Indonesia, didn't he?
transferred me here.
b. You didn't talk to the boss, did you?
A: Oh, so what do you do?
c. Ted's parents weren't at home, were they?
d. That was Pat's idea, wasn't it?
3. Present Progressive, Be Going To, and Past Progressive
a. You're studying hard, aren't you? Ordering at a fast-food restaurant
b. Greg isn't working at the bank, is he? Cashier: So, what'll it be?
_s; It isn't going to rain today, is it? Customer: I'll have a burger.
d. Michelle and Yoko were helping, weren't they? Cashier: Would you like fries or a salad with your
e. He wasn't listening, was he? burger?
4. Present Perfect Customer: I'll have fries.
a. It has been warmer than usual, hasn't it? Cashier: W hat size?
b. You've had a lot of homework, haven't you? Customer: Medium.
c. We haven't spent much time together, have we? Cashier: Anything to drink?
d. Fatima has started her new job, hasn't she? Customer: I'll have a vanilla shake.
e. Bruno hasn't finished his sales report yet, has he? Cashier: Size?
f. Steve's had to leave early, hasn't he? Customer: Medium.
Cashier: Okay. So that's a burger, fries, vanilla shake.
Customer: About how long'll it take?
Exercise 59, p. 142. Cashier: We're pretty crowded right now. Probably 10
Checking in at a hotel minutes or so. That'll be $6.50. Your
1. You have our reservation, don't you? number's on the receipt. I'll call the number
2. We have a non-smoking room, don't we? when your order's ready.
3. There's a view of the city, isn't there? Customer: Thanks.
4. I didn't give you my credit card yet, did I?
5. The room rate doesn't include tax, does it?
6. Breakfast is included in the price, right?
7. Check-out time's noon, isn't it?
8. You don't have a pool, do you? Chapter 6: Nouns and Pronouns
9. There are hair dryers in the rooms, aren't there?
10. Kids aren't allowed in the hot tub, are they? Exercise 6, p. 149.
1. hat 3. pages 5. keys
Exercise 61, p. 143. 2. toys 4. bridge 6. dish
Part/.
1. What kind of music do you enjoy listening to? Exercise 7, p. 150.
2. I just saw you for a few minutes last night. What did 1. pants 3. boxes 5. wishes
you leave so early for? 2. cars 4. pens 6. lakes

(J Exercise 8, p. 150. Exercise 49, p. 170.
1. prizes ways 1. Be careful with that knife! It's very sharp. If you're
2. lips pants not careful, you'll cut ...
3. glasses matches 2. My wife and I have our own business. We don't have
4. taxes shirts a boss. In other words, we work for ..
5. pills stars 3. Rebecca is home in bed because she has the flu.
6. toes fingers She's resting and drinking plenty of fluids. She's
7. laws maps being careful about her health. In other words, she
8. lights places is taking care of ...
4. In a cafeteria, people walk through a section of the
restaurant and pick up their food. They are not
Exercise 9, p. 150. served by waiters. In other words, in a cafeteria
1. names 4. boats 7. lips people serve...
2. clocks 5. eyelashes 8. bridges 5. When Joe walked into the room, he didn't know
3. eyes 6. ways 9. cars anyone. He smiled confidently and began
introducing ...
6. When I didn't get the new job, I felt sad and
Exercise 10, p. 150. depressed. I sat in my apartment and felt sorry
1. This shirt comes in three sizes: small, medium, and for ...
large.
2. I found this fax on my desk. It's for you. Exercise 58, p. 176.
3. I found these faxes on my desk. They're for you. 1. A: Did you buy the black jacket?
4. I'm not going to buy this car. The price is too high. B: No. I bought the other one.
5. I can't find my glasses anywhere. Have you seen
them? 2. A: One of my favorite colors is dark blue. Another
6. The prize for the comest is a new bike. one is red.
B: Me too.
3. A: This looks like the wrong street. Let's go back
Exercise 28, p. 159. and take the other road.
How Some Animals Stay Cool B: Okay.
How do animals stay cool in hot weather? Many 4. A: What's the best way to get downtown from here?
animals don't sweat like humans, so they have other ways B: It's pretty far to walk. Some people take the bus.
to cool themselves. Others prefer the subway.
Dogs, for example, have a lot of fur and can become 5. A: When I was a kid, I had lots of pets. One was a
very hot. They stay cool mainly by panting. By the way, black dog. Another was an orange cat. Some
if you don't know what panting means, this is the sound
of panting.
others were a goldfish a'�a {l turtle.
B: Pets are great for kids.
Cats lick their paws and chests. When their fur is wet,
they become cooler.
Elephants have very large ears. When they are hot, Exercise 59, p. 177.
they can flap their huge ears. The flapping ear acts like a A: What do you do when you're feeling lonely?
fan and it cools them. Elephants also like to roll in the B: I go someplace where I can be around other people.
mud to stay cool. Even if they are strangers, I feel better when there
are others around me. How about you?
A: That doesn't work for me. For example, if I'm
Exercise 36, p. 163. feeling lonely and I go to a movie by myself, I look
A: I'm looking for a new place to live. at all the other people who are there with their
B: How come? friends and family, and I start to feel even lonelier.
A: My two roommates are moving out. I can't afford So I try to find other things to do to keep myself
my apartment. I need a one-bedroom. busy. When I'm busy, I don't feel lonely.
B: I just helped a friend find one. I can help you. What
else do you want?
A: I want to be near the subway ...within walking
distance. But I want a quiet location. I don't want
Chapter 7: Modal Auxiliaries
to be on a busy street.
B: Anything else? Exercise 3, p. 179.
A: A small balcony would be nice. 1. I have to go downtown tomorrow.
B: That's expensive. 2. You must fasten your seat belt.
A: Yeah. I guess I'm dreaming. 3. Could you please open the window?

4. May I borrow your eraser? Exercise 32, p. 194.
5. I'm not able to sign the contract today. Filling out a job application
6. Today is the deadline. You must sign it!
7. I have got to go to the post office this afternoon. 1. The application has to be complete. You shouldn't
8. Shouldn't you save some of your money for skip any parts. If a section doesn't fit your situation,
emergencies? you can write NIA (not applicable).
9. I feel bad for Elena. She has to have more surgery. 2. You don't have to type it, but your writing has to be
lO. Alexa! Stop! You must not run into the street! easy to read.
3. You've got to use your full legal name, not your
Exercise 7, p. 181. nickname.
4. You've got to list the names and places of your
In the classroom previous employers.
A: I can't understand this math assignment. 5. You have to list your education, beginning with
B: I can help you with that. either high school or college.
A: Really? Can you explain this problem to me? 6. You don't always have to apply in person.
B: Well, we can't figure out the answer unless we do Sometimes you can do it online.
this part first. 7. You don't have to write some things, like the same
A: Okay! But it's so hard. telephone number, twice. You can write "same as
B: Yeah, but I know you can do it. Just go slowly. above."
A: Class is almost over. Can you meet me after school 8. All spelling has to be correct.
today to finish this?
B: Well, I can't meet you right after school, but how Exercise 45, p. 201.
about at 5:00?
A: Great! Puzzle steps
1. Write down the number of the month you were
Exercise 13, p. 184. born. For example, write the number 2 if you were
1. A: Mom, are these oranges sweet? born in February. Write 3 if you were born in
B: I don't know. I can't tell if an orange is sweet March, etc.
just by looking at it. 2. Double the number.
2. A: W hat are you going to order? 3. Add 5 to it.
B: I'm not sure. I might have pasta, or I might have 4. Multiply it by 50.
pizza. 5. Add your age.
6. Subtract 250.
3. A: Mom, can I have some candy?
B: No, but you can have an apple.
4. A: What are you doing this weekend? A: Why don't we go dancing tonight?
B: I don't know yet. I may go snowboarding with B: I don't know how to dance.
friends, or I may try to fix my motorcycle. A: Oh. Then why don't we go to a movie?
5. May I have everyone's attention? The test is about B: I don't like movies.
to begin. If you need to leave the room during the A: You don't like movies?!
examination, please raise your hand. You may not B: No.
leave the room without asking. Are there any A: Well then, let's go to a restaurant for dinner.
questions? No? Then you may open your test B: That's a waste of money.
booklets and begin. A: Well, you do what you want tonight, but I'm going
to go out and have a good time.
In a home office
A: Look at this cord. Do you know what it's for?
B: I don't know. We have so many cords around here Chapter 8: Connecting Ideas
with all our electronic equipment. It could be for
the printer, I guess. Exercise 11, p. 213.
A: No, I checked. The printer isn't missing a cord.
B: It might be for one of the kid's toys. Paying It Forward
A: Yeah, I could ask. But they don't have many A few days ago, a friend and I were driving from
electronic toys. Benton Harbor to Chicago. We didn't have any delays for
B: I have an idea. It may be for the cell phone. You the first hour, but we ran into some highway construction
know-the one I had before this one. near Chicago. The traffic wasn't moving. My friend and
A: I bet that's it. We can probably throw this out. I sat and waited. We talked about our jobs, our families,
B: Well, let's be sure before we do that. and the terrible traffic. Slowly it started to move.

(J We noticed a black sports car on the shoulder. Its Exercise 33, p. 225.
blinker was on. The driver obviously wanted to get back 1. Even though I looked all over the house for my
into traffic. Car after car passed without letting him in. I keys, ...
decided to do a good deed, so I motioned for him to get 2. Although it was a hot summer night, we went inside
in line ahead of me. He waved thanks, and I waved back and shut the windows because ...
at him. 3. My brother came to my graduation ceremony
All the cars had to stop at a toll booth a short way although ...
down the road. I held out my money to pay my toll, but 4. Because the package cost so much to send, .. .
the toll-taker just smiled and waved me on. She told me 5. Even though the soccer team won the game, .. .
that the man in the black sports car had already paid my
toll. Wasn't that a nice way of saying thank you?
Exercise 15, p. 215. Chapter 9: Comparisons

A strong storm
1. The noise lasted only a short time, but the wind and Exercise 4, p. 231.
rain ... 1. Lara is as old as Tanya.
2. Some roads were under water, but ours ... 2. Sylvia isn't as old as Lara.
3. Our neighbors didn't lose any trees, but we ... 3. Sylvia and Brigita aren't as old as Tanya.
4. My son got scared, but my daughter ... 4. Brigita isn't quite as old as Sylvia.
5. My son couldn't sleep, but my daughter ... 5. Brigita is almost as old as Sylvia.
6. My daughter can sleep through anything, but my
son ... Exercise 8, p. 234.
7. We still need help cleaning up from the storm, but
our neighbors ... 1. Old shoes are more comfortable for me than new
8. We will be okay, but some people ... shoes.
2. I like food from other countries better than food
from my country.
Exercise 21, p. 219. 3. W inter is more enjoyable than summer for me.
4. I am the most talkative person in my family.
Part/.
5. I am the friendliest person in my family.
To get more information: 6. Cooked vegetables are tastier than raw vegetables.
1. A: I'm going to drop this class. 7. Taking a bath is more relaxing than taking a
B: You are? W hy? W hat's the matter? shower.
2. A: My laptop doesn't have enough memory for this 8. Speaking English is the easiest of all the English
application. skills for me.
B: Really? Are you sure?
3. A: I can read Braille. Exercise 12, p. 237.
B: You can? How did you learn to do that? My family
Part II. 1. My father is younger than my mother.
To disagree: 2. My mother is the tallest person in our family.
3. My father is a fun person to be around. He seems
4. A: I love this weather. happy all the time.
B: I don't. 4. My mother was happier when she was younger.
5. A: I didn't like the movie. 5. I have twin sisters. They are older than me.
B: I did! 6. I have one brother. He is the funniest person in our
6. A: I'm excited about graduation. family.
B: I'm not. 7. He is a doctor. He works hard every day.
8. My sisters just like to have fun. I don't think they
work hard at all.
Understanding the Scientific Term "Mand' Exercise 15, p. 238.
The word matter is a chemical term. Matter is 1. Frank owns a coffee shop. Business is busier this
anything that has weight. This book, your finger, water, a year for him than last year.
rock, air, and the moon are all examples of matter. Heat 2. I've know Steven for years. He's the friendliest
and radio waves are not maner because they do not have person I know.
weight. Happiness, dreams, and fears have no weight 3. Sam expected a hard test, but it wasn't as hard as he
and are not matter. expected.

4. The road ends here. This is as far as we can go. (J
5. Jon's decision to leave his job was the worst decision Chapter 1 0: The Passive
he has ever made.
6. I don't know if we'll get to the theater on time, but Exercise 3, p. 260.
I'm driving as fast as I can.
An office building at night
7. When you do the next assignment, please be more
careful. 1. The janitors clean the building at night.
8. The dessert looks delicious, but I've eaten as much The building is cleaned by the janitors at night.
as I can. 2. Window washers wash the windows.
9. It takes about an hour to drive to the airp ort and my The windows are washed by window washers.
flight takes an hour. So the drive takes as long as my 3. A window washer is washing a window right now.
flight. A window is being washed by a window washer right
now.
4. The security guard has checked the offices.
Exercise 23, p. 242. The offices have been checked by the security guard.
5. The security �ard discovered an open window.
1. a sidewalk, a road
An open window was discovered by the security
a. A sidewalk is as wide as a road.
guard.
b. A road is wider than a sidewalk.
6. The security guard found an unlocked door.
2. a hill, a mountain
An unlocked door was found by the security guard.
a. A hill isn't as high as a mountain.
7. The owner will visit the building tomorrow.
b. A hill is higher than a mountain.
The building will be visited by the owner tomorrow.
3. a mountain path, a mountain peak
8. The owner is going to announce new parking fees.
a. In general, hiking along a mountain path is more
New parking fees are going to be announced by the
dangerous than climbing a mountain peak.
owner.
b. In general, hiking along a mountain path is less
dangerous than climbing a mountain peak.
4. toes, fingers
a. Toes are longer than fingers. Exercise 15, p. 267.
b. Fingers aren't as long as toes. A bike acculent
c. Toes are shorter than fingers.
A: Did you hear about the accident outside the dorm
5. basic math, algebra
entrance?
a. Basic math isn't as hard as algebra.
B: No. What happened?
b. Algebra is harder than basic math.
A: A guy on a bike was hit by a taxi.
c. Basic math is as confusing as algebra.
B: Was he injured?
d. Basic math is less confusing than algebra.
A: Yeah. Someone called an ambulance. He was taken
to City Hospital and treated in the emergency room
for cuts and bruises.
Exercise 36, p. 249. B: What happened to the taxi driver?
5. Tom has never told a funny joke. A: He was arrested for reckless driving.
6. Food has never tasted better. B: He's lucky that the bicyclist wasn't killed.
7. I've never slept on a hard mattress.
8. I've never seen a scarier movie.
Exercise 42, p. 253. Swimming Pools
Gold vs. Silver Swimming pools are very popular nowadays, but can
you guess when swimming pools were first built? Was it
Gold is similar to silver. They are both valuable metals
100 years ago? Five hundred years ago? A thousand
that people use for jewelry, but they aren't the same.
years ago? Actually, ancient Romans and Greeks built
Gold is not the same color as silver. Gold is also
the first swimming pools. Male athletes and soldiers
different from silver in cost: gold is more expensive than
swam in them for training. Believe it or not, as early as
silver.
1 B.C., a heated swimming pool was designed for a
Two Zebras wealthy Roman. But swimming pools did not become
Look at the two zebras in the picture. Their names are popular until the middle of the 1800s. The city of
Zee and Bee. Zee looks like Bee. Is Zee exactly the same as London built six indoor swimming pools. Soon after, the
Bee? The pattern of the stripes on each zebra in the world modem Olympic games began, and swimming races were
is unique. No two zebras are exactly alike. Even though included in the events. After this, swimming pools
Zee and Bee are similar to each other, they are different became even more popular, and now they are found all
from each other in the exact pattern of their stripes. over the world.

Exercise 26, p. 274. 6. And Julie had a surprised look on her face.
1. When will you be done with your work? 7. When she fell into the fountain, some people
2. I hope it's sunny tomorrow. I'm tired of this rainy laughed at her. It was an upsetting experience.
weather. 8. The next day Julie was a little depressed because she
3. Jason is excited about going to Hollywood. thought she had made a fool of herself.
4. Are you prepared for the driver's license test? 9. Her friend Paul told her not to lose her sense of
5. The students are involved in many school humor. He told her it was just another interesting
activities. experience in life.
6. The kids want some new toys. They're bored with 10. He said that people were probably interested in
their old ones. hearing about how she fell into the fountain.
7. Sam is engaged to his childhood sweetheart.
8. Some animals are terrified of thunderstorms.
1. In winter, the weather gets .. .
Exercise 28, p. 275. 2. In summer, the weather gets ...
1. This fruit is spoiled. I think I'd better throw it out. 3. I think I'll stop working. I'm getting ...
2. When we got to the post office, it was closed. 4. My brother is losing some of his hair. He's getting .. .
3. Oxford University is located in Oxford, England. 5. Could I have a glass of water? I'm getting really ...
4. Haley doesn't like to ride in elevators. She's scared 6. You don't look well. Are you getting ...
of small spaces.
5. What's the matter? Are you hurt?
6. Excuse me. Could you please tell me how to get to Exercise 42, p. 282.
the bus station from here? I am lost. 1. What are you accustomed to doing in the
7. Your name is Tom Hood? Are you related to Mary evenings?
Hood? 2. What time are you used to going to bed?
8. Where's my wallet? It's gone! Did someone 3. What are you accustomed to having for breakfast?
take it? 4. Are you accustomed to living in this area?
9. Oh, no! Look at my sunglasses. I sat on them and 5. Do you live with someone, or do you live alone? Are
now they are broken. you used to that?
10. It's starting to rain. Are all of the windows shut? 6. Are you used to speaking English every day?
7. What are you accustomed to doing on weekends?
Exercise 31, p. 276. 8. What do you think about the weather here? Are you
· l . Jane doesn't like school because of the boring classes used to it?
and assignments.
2. The store manager stole money from the cash
register. His shocked employees couldn't believe it. Exercise 51, p. 286.
3. I bought a new camera. I read the directions twice, 1. Doctors are supposed to take good care of their
but I didn't understand them. They were too patients.
confusing for me. 2. Passengers in a car are not supposed to buckle their
4. I was out to dinner with a friend and spilled a glass seat belts.
of water on his pants. I felt very embarrassed, but 3. Teachers are supposed to help their students.
he was very nice about it. 4. Airline pilots are supposed to sleep during short
5. Every year for their anniversary, I surprise my flights.
parents with dinner at a different restaurant. 5. People who live in apartments are supposed to pay
6. We didn't enjoy the movie. It was too scary for the the rent on time.
kids. 6. A dog is not supposed to obey its master.
7. People in a movie theater are supposed to turn off
their cell phones.
Exercise 33, p. 277. 8. People in libraries are supposed to speak quietly.
Situation: Julie was walking along the edge of the
fountain outside her office building. She was with her
co-worker and friend Paul. Suddenly she lost her Exercise 52, p. 286.
balance and accidentally fell into the water. Zoos
1. Julie was really embarrassed. Zoos are common around the world. The first zoo was
2. Falling into the fountain was really embarrassing. established around 3,500 years ago by an Egyptian queen
3. Her friend Paul was shocked by the sight. for her enjoyment. Five hundred years later, a Chinese
4. It was a shocking sight. emperor established a huge zoo to show his power and
5. The people around the office building were very wealth. Later, zoos were established for the purpose of
surprised when they saw Julie in the fountain. studying animals.

Zoos were supposed to take good care of animals, but (J
some of the early ones were dark holes or dirty cages. At Chapter 12: Adjective Clauses
that time, people became disgusted with the poor care
the animals were given. Later, these early zoos were Exercise 20, p. 329.
replaced by scientific institutions. Animals were studied
My mother's hospital stay
and kept in better conditions there. These research
centers became the first modern zoos. 1. The doctor who my mother saw first spent a lot of
Because zoos want to treat animals well and encourage time with her.
breeding, animals today are put in large, natural settings 2. The doctor I called for a second opinion was very
instead of small cages. They are fed a healthy diet and patient and understanding.
are watched carefully for any signs of disease. Most zoos 3. The room that my mother had was private.
have specially trained veterinarians and a hospital for 4. The medicine which she took worked better than
their animals. Today, animals in these zoos are treated she expected.
well, and zoo breeding programs have saved many 5. The hospital that my mom chose specializes in
different types of animals. women's care.
6. The day my mom came home happened to be her
birthday.
Chapter 11: Count/Noncount Nouns 7. I thanked the people that helped my mom.
and Articles 8. The staff whom I met were all excellent.

1. We have a holiday next week. 1. The plane which I'm taking to Denver leaves at
2. What are you going to do? 7:00A.M.
3. Thomas told an unusual story. 2. The store that has the best vegetables is also the
4. Thomas often tells unusual stories. most expensive.
5. I have an idea! 3. The eggs which my husband made for our breakfast
6. Let's go shopping. were cold.
7. There's a sale on shirts and jeans. 4. The person who sent me an email was trying to get
8. Let's leave in an hour. my bank account number.
9. Here's a message for you. 5. The hotel clerk my wife spoke with on the phone is
10. You need to call your boss. going to give us a room with a view.

1. At our school, teachers don't use chalk anymore. 1. I like the people whose house we went to.
2. Where is the soap? Did you use all of it? 2. The man whose daughter is a doctor is very proud.
3. The manager's suggestions were very helpful. 3. The man who's standing by the window has a
4. Which suggestion sounded best to you? daughter at Oxford University.
5. Is this ring made of real gold? 4. I know a girl whose parents are both airline pilots.
6. We have a lot of storms with thunder and lightning. 5. I know a girl who's lonely because her parents travel
7. During the last storm, I found my daughter under a lot.
her bed. 6. I met a 70-year-old woman who's planning to go to
8. Please put the cap back on the toothpaste. college.
9. What do you want to do with all this stuff in the hall
closet? Exercise 36, p. 339.
10. We have too much soccer and hockey equipment. Friendly advice
Exercise 34, p. 313. A: A magazine that I saw at the doctor's office had an
article you ought to read. It's about the importance
Ice-Cream Headaches of exercise in dealing with stress.
Have you ever eaten something really cold like ice cream B: Why do you think I should read an article which
and suddenly gotten a headache? This is known as an deals with exercise and stress?
"ice-cream headache." About 30 percent of the population A: If you stop and think for a minute, you can answer
gets this type of headache. Here is one theory about why that question yourself. You're under a lot of stress,
ice-cream headaches occur. The roof of your mouth has a and you don't get any exercise.
lot of nerves. When something cold touches these �erves, B: The stress that I have at work doesn't bother me.
they want to warm up your brain. They make your blood It's just a normal part of my job. And I don't have
vessels swell up (get bigger), and this causes a lot of pain. time to exercise.
Ice-cream headaches generally go away after about 30-60 A: Well, you should make time. Anyone whose job is as
seconds. The best way to avoid these headaches is to keep stressful as yours should make physical exercise part
cold food off the roof of your mouth. of their daily routine.

IJ Chapter 13: Gerunds and Infinitives
2. Asking others about themselves and their lives is one
of the secrets of getting along with other people. If
you want to make and keep friends, it is important
Exercise 4, p. 343. to be sincerely interested in other people's lives.
1. A: W hen you finish doing your homework, could 3. Large bee colonies have 80,000 workers. These
you help me in the kitchen? worker bees must visit 50 million flowers to make
B: Sure. one kilogram, or 2.2 pounds, of honey. It's easy to
2. A: Do you have any plans for this weekend? see why "busy as a bee" is a common expression.
B:. Henry and I talked about seeing the dinosaur
exhibit at the museum.
3. A: I didn't understand the answer. Would you mind
explaining it?
B: I'd be happy to.
Chapter 14: Noun Clauses
4. A: I'm thinking about not attending the meeting Exercise 21, p. 381.
tomorrow.
1. WOMAN: My English teacher is really good. I like
B: Really? Why? I hope you go. We need your
her a lot.
input.
MAN: That's great! I'm glad you're enjoying
5. A: I've been working on this math problem for the your class.
last half hour, and I still don't understand it.
B: Well, don't give up. Keep trying. 2. MOM: How do you feel, honey? You might have
the flu.
SON: I'm okay, Mom. Honest. I don't have
Exercise 22, p. 354. the flu.
A: Have you made any vacation plans?
B: Well, I wanted to stay home because I don't like 3. MAN: Did you really fail your chemistry course?
traveling. I hate packing and unpacking suitcases. How is that possible?
But my wife loves to travel and wanted to take a boat WOMAN: I didn't study hard enough. Now I won't
trip somewhere. be able to graduate on time.
A: So, what are you going to do? 4. MAN: Rachel! Hello! It's nice to see you.
B: Well, we couldn't agree, so we decided to stay home woMAN: Hi, it's nice to be here. Thank you for
and be tourists in our own town. inviting me.
A: Interesting. What are you planning to do?
B: Well, we haven't seen the new Museum of Space yet. 5. WOMAN: Carol has left. Look. Her closet is empty.
There's also a new art exhibit downtown. And my Her suitcases are gone. She won't be back.
wife would like to take a boat trip in the harbor. I just know it!
Actually, when we began talking about it, we MAN: She'll be back.
discovered there were lots of things to do.
A: Sounds like a great solution!
B: Yeah, we're both really excited about seeing more of Exercise 39, p. 392.
our own town. Angela called and asked me where Bill was. I told her
he was in the lunchroom. She asked when he would be
Exercise 44, p. 366. back. I said he would be back around 2:00. I asked her
1. My professor goes through the lecture material too if I could do something for her.
quickly. It is difficult for us to follow him. He needs She said that Bill had the information she needed, and
to slow down and give us time to understand the key only he could help her. I told her that I would leave him
points. a message. She thanked me and hung up.
420 LISTENING SCRIPT Chapters 13 and 14

Fundamentals of English Grammar 4th Betty Azar (Student)

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Fundamentals of English Grammar 4th Betty Azar (Student)

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Fundamentals of English Grammar 4th Betty Azar (Student)

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

SIMPLE

awake awoke awoken fall fell fallen

(continued on the inside back cover)

u�1.H.1 u�j !!:?jll u�9,I � b.J:94?D U:!1

Chapter l PRESENT TIME ................................................... l

Chapter 2 PAST TIME ..................................................... 26

Chapter 3 FUTURE TIME ................................................... 55

Chapter 4 PRESENT PERFECT AND PAST PERFECT ........................ , ...... 81

Chapter 5 ASKING QUESTIONS ............................................111

Chapter 6 NOUNS AND PRONOUNS .......................................146

Chapter 7 MODAL AUXILIARIES ............................................ 178

Chapter 8 CONNECTING IDEAS ........................................... 208

Chapter 9 COMPARISONS ............................................... 229

Chapter l O THE PASSIVE ..................................................... 258

Chapter 11 COUNT/NONCOUNT NOUNS AND ARTICLES ........................ 290

Chapter 12 ADJECTIVE CLAUSES ........................................... 321

Chapter 13 GERUNDS AND INFINITIVES ...................................... 342

Chapter 14 NOUN CLAUSES ............................................... 370

Listening Script ....................................................... 405

• WARM-UP EXERCISES FOR THE GRAMMAR CHARTS

• EXPANDED SPEAKING ACTMTIES

• CHECK YOUR KNOWLEDGE

Fundamentals of English Grammar is accompanied by

The Azar-Hagen Grammar Series consists of

SAM: Hi. My name is Sam.

-----------· In her free time, she ---------------

o Exercise 2. Let's talk: interview.

o Exercise 3. Lers write.

.---,. �-.-·, ·1 �� :- -v-..-�- •, �,.. ·-·· ---1 -:.•t.:' ·- , � ---:-.·1�=-,.."'7";-� ...

1� 1 Simplel>re.sent-and-Rresenf Prog�--ress1��-;_ :::� .}';_-�;d1:)/-. �---:"-�/:!''.f�-�};1

Simple Present Present Progressive

NEGATIVE I do not work. I am not working.

QUESTION Do I work? Am I working?

do+ not does + not = doesn't She doesn't work.

be+ not is + not = isn't He isn't working.

D Exercise 5. Listening and· grammar. (Charts 1- 1 and 1-2)

o Exercise 6. Listening. (Charts 1-1 and 1-2)

o Exercise 7. Looking at grammar. (Charts 1-1 and 1-2)

2. Right now I'm in class. I (sit) ___________ at my desk. I usually (sit)

4. A: (it, rain) ___________ a lot in southern Spain?

5. A: Look out the window. (it, rain) ___________ ?

7. A: Oscar usually (walk) ___________ to work.

o Exercise 8. Let's talk. (Charts 1-1 and 1-2)

o Exercise 9. Ustening. (Charts 1-1 and 1-2)

2. _________ have enough ink?

4. _________ know how to fix it?

5. _________ have another printer in the office?

6. Hmmm. Is it my imagination or _________ making a strange noise?

O Exercise 11. Let's talk. (Charts 1- 1 and 1-2)

PARTNER A: In my picture, the airplane is taking off.

*See Trivia Answers, p. 421.

o Exercise 13. Warm-up. (Chart 1-3)

1. I take the bus to school.

4. I eat vegetables at lunch time.

5. I cook my own dinner.

*strands ofhair = pieces of hair

often The adverbs in boldface may l3lso occur at the

0% not ever, never usual position is in the middle of a sentence.

s + FREOArN + v Frequency adverbs usually come between the subject

S + BE + FREQ AIN Frequency adverbs follow be in the simple present

Aerobic exercise a special type of exercise. It __ a